This is a modern-English version of Cosmic symbolism : Being a discussion and exposition of some recondite and obscure points in the art of the Kabalists, the mysteries of sound, form and number, and the basic principles of cosmic symbolism, originally written by Sepharial. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

on

COSMIC SYMBOLISM

COSMIC SYMBOLISM
**DISCUSSION AND EXPLANATION OF SOME**
COMPLEX AND UNCLEAR ASPECTS OF THE ART
ABOUT THE KABALISTS, THE MYSTERIES OF
SOUND, FORM, NUMBER, AND
THE FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF
Cosmic symbolism
BY
SEPHARIAL
AUTHOR OF “A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM,” “THE KABALA OF NUMBERS,”
“KABALISTIC ASTROLOGY,” “A NEW MANUAL OF ASTROLOGY,”
"SECOND SIGHT," AND SO ON.
LONDON
WILLIAM RIDER & SON, LIMITED
8 PATERNOSTER ROW, E.C.
1912

CONTENTS

1

INTRODUCTION

“There is no end to the writing of books,” we are told. Certainly it seems to be the fact that one book leads to another, and the many demands made upon me for explanations of points, problems and paradoxes, contained in some of my recent works, have induced me to a comprehensive effort in the present volume. Whether I shall have succeeded in throwing more light upon the dark problems of Occultism, or only in making confusion worse confounded, it is for the reader to judge. “All truth is paradoxical,” says Laotze, the great philosopher of Quietism. In such case it were hard indeed to offer any argument which may be regarded as final and conclusive, and especially is this the case in reference to the debatable ground of Occultism.

“There’s no end to writing books,” we’re told. It certainly seems that one book leads to another, and the many questions I’ve received about points, problems, and paradoxes in some of my recent works have prompted me to put together this comprehensive effort in the current volume. Whether I’ve succeeded in shedding more light on the complex issues of Occultism, or just made things more confusing, is for you, the reader, to decide. “All truth is paradoxical,” says Laotze, the great philosopher of Quietism. In that case, it’s indeed difficult to present any argument that can be seen as final and conclusive, especially concerning the controversial area of Occultism.

Yet a very wise writer has said that nothing can be accepted as true which does not submit to a mathematical statement. This is a tacit confession of faith in the law of numerical ratios, the geometry of the universe which underlies all revelation. We cannot truly be said to know a thing until we have reduced it to a mathematical concept.

Yet a very wise writer has said that nothing can be accepted as true unless it can be expressed in a mathematical statement. This is an implicit acknowledgment of belief in the law of numerical ratios, the geometry of the universe that forms the basis of all revelation. We cannot truly claim to know something until we have simplified it to a mathematical concept.

We may conveniently regard life as manifesting 2in three stages or degrees, namely, Principles, Causes and Effects. Our conscious relation to these three stages of life gives rise to Ethic, Philosophy and Science.

We can easily think of life as appearing in three stages or levels: Principles, Causes, and Effects. Our awareness of these three stages of life leads to Ethics, Philosophy, and Science.

Science is what we know of the universe; philosophy what we think of it; ethic, how that thought affects our conduct. Thus the final appeal is to utility. The virtue of everything is in its use. Science, philosophy and ethic must eventually submit to the test of utility.

Science is what we understand about the universe; philosophy is what we think about it; ethics is how those thoughts influence our behavior. So, in the end, it all comes down to usefulness. The value of everything lies in its application. Science, philosophy, and ethics must ultimately be judged by their utility.

It is not for the sake of the mathematical statement, nor yet for the pleasure of abstract argument, but chiefly for the sake of utility that I have attempted this popular exposition of Occultism, for I think it deserves more attention than has hitherto been given to it.

It’s not for the sake of the math statement, nor for the enjoyment of abstract reasoning, but mainly for practical use that I’ve tried to present this accessible explanation of Occultism, because I believe it deserves more attention than it has received so far.

The idea that Occultism serves any useful end in life may not at once appeal to the casual reader. The deeper thinker will, however, discern in any coherent system of thought, in any orderly statement of fact, a possible means of self-adjustment to the problems of life, howsoever dimly apprehended. To the categorical imperative of Kant—I must because I ought, but why ought I?—Occultism offers a very definite answer. It gives a cogent reason for all action, and may indeed be finally judged on its ethical value. It will not be found inadequate.

The idea that Occultism has any useful purpose in life might not immediately resonate with the casual reader. However, a deeper thinker will recognize that in any coherent system of thought or organized presentation of facts, there’s a potential means of adapting to life’s challenges, no matter how vaguely understood. To Kant's categorical imperative—I must because I should, but why should I?—Occultism provides a clear answer. It offers a solid reason for all actions and can ultimately be evaluated based on its ethical worth. It will prove to be sufficient.

Purposive action has no value without free will in man. That “free will in man is necessity in play” is true only of those who are not divine conspirators. We are fated to the extent that we are ignorant of 3the cosmical and spiritual laws—the one order is a reflex of the other—by which the universe is upheld. We are culpable to the extent that we neglect those laws we know. Science has succeeded in harnessing many of the forces of Nature to the service of mankind. Philosophy will bring man into conscious relations with the laws governing his existence, and ethic will instruct him concerning their employment for the good of the race.

Purposeful action has no value without free will in humans. The idea that "free will in humans is necessity in play" is only true for those who aren’t divine conspirators. We are fated to the degree that we are unaware of the cosmic and spiritual laws—the one reflects the other—that support the universe. We are responsible to the extent that we ignore the laws we do understand. Science has successfully harnessed many of Nature's forces for the benefit of humanity. Philosophy will help humans develop conscious relationships with the laws that govern their existence, and ethics will guide them in using those laws for the good of the human race.

To the extent that we understand the laws of our being and use them for our personal benefit, and through ourselves for the good of all mankind, we become conspirators with the Divine Will, conscious co-operators towards “that one divine far-off event to which the whole creation moves,” an apotheosis warranted by the trend of the physical and spiritual evolution of humanity, and prophetically indicated by the words: “Thou hast made him a little lower than the angels, to crown him with glory and worship.”

To the degree that we understand the laws of our existence and use them for our own benefit, and through ourselves for the good of everyone, we become partners with the Divine Will, aware collaborators toward “that one divine distant event to which all of creation is heading,” an elevation supported by the direction of both physical and spiritual evolution of humanity, and hinted at by the words: “You have made him a little lower than the angels, to crown him with glory and honor.”

As fragments in the fabric of a spiritual upbuilding, as detached observations of the law of universal harmony, as things of isolated interest, all conspiring to the founding of a single idea, these curiosities of Occultism are offered to those who are able to appreciate them.

As pieces in the tapestry of spiritual growth, as separate insights into the law of universal harmony, as matters of individual interest, all working together to create a single idea, these curiosities of Occultism are presented to those who can truly understand them.

Sepharial.

Sepharial.

4

CHAPTER I
THE MEANING AND PURPOSE OF OCCULTISM

Before one can enter intelligently into an understanding of Cosmic Symbolism, which underlies all occult science, it is necessary that he should have some well-defined conception of the meaning and purpose of Occultism. Otherwise he will occupy the position of one who moves in the dark, a slave to formularies and dogmas, following blindly where others lead and without any definite idea as to his destination.

Before anyone can thoughtfully grasp Cosmic Symbolism, which is the foundation of all occult science, it's important to have a clear understanding of the meaning and purpose of Occultism. Otherwise, they will find themselves in the dark, a follower of rules and doctrines, blindly going where others lead without any clear idea of where they’re headed.

Misconceptions regarding Occultism are very prevalent and are found to affect the thought of many who in their own walks are exceedingly learned. Occultism is a broad and comprehensive system of thought; a synthetic philosophy aiming at self-realization, and as much concerned in the practical development of the psychical and spiritual powers latent in man as in the study of those wider cosmical laws which hitherto have escaped scientific observation, but which are found to afford a ready explanation of man’s embodied existence, and the wide and varied range of his faculties, aptitudes and individual characteristics.

Misconceptions about Occultism are very common and influence the thinking of many highly educated individuals. Occultism is a broad and inclusive system of thought; it's a holistic philosophy focused on self-discovery and is just as interested in the practical development of the innate psychological and spiritual abilities within humans as it is in exploring the larger cosmic laws that have previously gone unnoticed by science, but which provide a clear explanation of human existence and the diverse range of abilities, skills, and personal traits.

If Occultism were merely a speculative system 5of thought regarding the hidden things of Nature, it could never find practical demonstration. If the occult were merely the “hidden,” then Röntgen rays, wireless telegraphy and metabolism would have been facts of Occultism at quite a recent date. In the first case it is confidently affirmed that Occultism, so far from being speculative, is capable of instant demonstration; and in the second case it anticipated the discoveries of Science by analogous psychical processes involved in the exercise of clairvoyance, psychometry, telepathy and hypnotism. Occultism is not indeed mainly concerned in the domain of physics, but rather in those immaterial forces which are at the back of all material forms, of those universal laws which find their reflection in the constitution and development of man and the cosmos to which he is immediately related.

If Occultism were just a way of thinking about the hidden aspects of Nature, it could never be practically proven. If the occult only referred to the "hidden," then X-rays, wireless communication, and metabolism would have been considered facts of Occultism not that long ago. In reality, it is confidently asserted that Occultism, far from being speculative, can be demonstrated instantly; and it also predicted scientific discoveries through similar psychic processes involved in clairvoyance, psychometry, telepathy, and hypnotism. Occultism isn't primarily focused on physical phenomena, but rather on the immaterial forces underlying all material forms, and on the universal laws that reflect the structure and evolution of both humans and the cosmos to which we are closely connected.

Thus while it seeks to demonstrate some unexplored facts in Nature, it also offers a coherent system of thought in which those facts find appropriate places, and so in effect it affords an ethical basis for all action which is more comprehensive than any system which is the outcome of an insular sociology or a national religion. Its peculiar value as a body of teaching lies in its inclusiveness and catholicity, its freedom from dogma, and its wide suggestiveness. While offering a definite system of cosmogenesis and anthropogenesis, it seeks only to throw new light on old truths, being entirely constructive and in no sense controversial. Unlike orthodox Science and Religion, however, Occultism does not ignore the facts of man’s psychic and spiritual experience. 6Rather it makes use of these as links which bring us into relations with that greater world and that higher life which for Science has no interest and for Religion no certain meaning. Thus when Science repudiated the Chaldean account of the Genesis, Religion was left with no ground upon which it could convict Science of error! The Occultist remains wholly unaffected by the incident, not because he is either unscientific or irreligious, but because the Book of Genesis is for him as true to-day as when it was written. It is the work of Occultists, and only Occultists can rightly apprehend it.

Thus, while it aims to reveal some unexplored facts in Nature, it also presents a coherent system of thought where those facts fit appropriately. In effect, it provides an ethical foundation for all actions that is broader than any system born from isolated sociology or national religion. Its unique value as a teaching lies in its inclusiveness and universality, its lack of dogma, and its broad suggestiveness. While it offers a clear system of cosmogenesis and anthropogenesis, it seeks only to illuminate old truths, being completely constructive and not controversial in any way. Unlike traditional Science and Religion, however, Occultism does not ignore the facts of human psychic and spiritual experience. Instead, it utilizes these experiences as connections that link us to that greater world and higher life, which Science finds uninteresting and Religion sees as unclear. So, when Science rejected the Chaldean account of Genesis, Religion had no basis to accuse Science of being wrong! The Occultist remains entirely unaffected by this event, not because they are unscientific or irreligious, but because the Book of Genesis is as true for them today as it was when it was first written. It is the work of Occultists, and only they can fully understand it.

In the biblical cosmogenesis we are not concerned with ordinary divisions of time called “day” and “night,” periods of twelve hours each, more or less, but with vast periods known as pralayas and manvantaras, or periods of manifestation and obscuration, taking place alternately. These great periods answer to the systole and diastole motion of the Great Breath, the out-breathing and in-breathing of the Cosmic Life-force. In each of these great out-breathings the seven stages of evolution are realized: the Igneous, Gaseous, Fluidic, Mineral, Vegetable, Animal and Human. But those monads that have reached any one of these stages do not become involved in the scheme until that stage is reached to which they attained in the last period of cosmic activity; but from that stage they resume their evolution.

In the biblical creation of the universe, we’re not talking about the usual divisions of time called “day” and “night,” which last about twelve hours each, but rather about long periods known as pralayas and manvantaras, or times of manifestation and concealment, that alternate with each other. These significant periods correspond to the systole and diastole motions of the Great Breath, the out-breathing and in-breathing of the Cosmic Life-force. During each of these major out-breaths, the seven stages of evolution occur: the Ignition, Gaseous, Fluidic, Mineral, Plant, Animal, and Human. However, those monads that have reached any of these stages do not participate in the scheme until they attain the stage they reached in the last cycle of cosmic activity; from that point, they continue their evolution.

Now as we have every reason to presume that our present period of activity is not the first of our solar system, we have reason to place a special 7meaning on the words Berâsit brâ Elohim âth hashemâyim veâth heâretz: In the beginning the Elohim compounded the original matter of the heavens and of the earth. Long periods of cosmic evolution elapsed, and at the point where the Great Breath again reached our planet we take up the thread of the Chaldean account veheâretz tohu vebohu: “and the earth was chaotic and barren.” The use of the prefix vau as a copulative conjunction at the beginning of each separate statement, links up the various stages of the evolutional scheme without defining the vast ages, the “days” and “nights” of the cosmos, which intervene. From the great aqueous development we pass to the amphibians, the “creeping things,” the avians or “flying things and fowls of the air,” until by a process of natural evolution and natural selection, determined entirely by the individual power of adaptation to environment, we at length arrive at the evolution of the human-animal. The brief but perfectly scientific statement, “And God (the Elohim) made men out of the dust of the earth,” is a process which involves an indefinitely long period of evolution.

Now, since we have every reason to believe that our current phase of activity isn’t the first for our solar system, we should place special significance on the words 7In the beginning, God created the heavens and the earth: In the beginning, the Elohim formed the original matter of the heavens and the earth. Long periods of cosmic evolution passed, and at the moment when the Great Breath again reached our planet, we pick up the story from the Chaldean account formless and empty: “and the earth was chaotic and barren.” The use of the prefix vau as a connecting conjunction at the start of each statement ties the different stages of the evolutionary process together without marking the vast lengths of time, the “days” and “nights” of the cosmos, that happen in between. From the significant development of water, we move to amphibians, the “creeping things,” the avians or “flying things and birds of the air,” until through a process of natural evolution and natural selection, driven entirely by the individual ability to adapt to their surroundings, we finally reach the evolution of the human-animal. The concise but completely scientific statement, “And God (the Elohim) made men out of the dust of the earth,” represents a process that spans an indefinitely long period of evolution.

But so far we have only the ascending arc of physical evolution, which in effect found its apotheosis in the production of giant human forms, fitted to the great struggle for existence with the saurians and pachyderms and all that mammoth life, both vegetable and animal, by which it was environed. “There were giants in the earth in those days.” Nature had done her utmost in 8the production of colossal forms of animal life, she had expended all her strength.

But up until now, we’ve only seen the rise of physical evolution, which really peaked with the emergence of giant human forms, suited for the intense competition for survival against the saurians, pachyderms, and all that massive life, both plant and animal, that surrounded it. “There were giants on the earth in those days.” Nature had given her all in creating enormous forms of animal life; she had used up all her energy. 8

It was at this point, where Nature unaided would have failed, and in process of time died down to her root, as a tree that has put forth leaf and flower and fruit, that the upward arc of physical evolution was met by a downward arc of spiritual involution. The two processes are well defined: 1. God made man out of the dust of the earth. 2. And breathed into his nostrils the breath of lives.

It was at this point, where nature alone would have struggled and eventually withered back to its roots, like a tree that has produced leaves, flowers, and fruit, that the upward path of physical evolution intersected with the downward path of spiritual involution. The two processes are clearly defined: 1. God created man from the dust of the earth. 2. And breathed into his nostrils the breath of lives.

In effect, from this union of spirit and matter we get the genesis of the psyche or soul: “and man became a living soul.” The process of becoming is one that was neither immediate nor complete. Most of us are still in the process of becoming. But a certain number of advanced monads became living souls, realizing their spiritual consciousness while in the flesh. These were the “sons of the gods” referred to in the text. All else were the sons of men. “And the sons of God looked upon the daughters of men and saw that they were fair.” The self-conscious souls took to wife the daughters of a less-evolved race, a process that would seem to be necessary to the further uplifting and spiritual vitalizing of the inferior grades of human life. During the present manvantara or period of cosmic activity we have traditional occult knowledge of four great races of humanity before our own, each of which attained to a successively higher state of civilization, the Atlantean transcending the Lemurian, as in process of time the Aryan will transcend the Atlantean. And as each period of 9cosmic activity has afforded means of successively higher human development, it is a question as to what has become of those very high forms of spiritualized humanity who were the final product of the material and spiritual evolution of past manvantaras. Earth-born in their origin, and linked to this Earth’s humanity by a thousand compatriot ties, by bonds of blood and heritage, by lives of tireless service, they wait the time when humanity shall have evolved to that stage when personal intercourse is compatible with their own spiritual status and the needs of our further evolution. To them, as pioneers, guardians or masters of the race, we are indebted for the universal tradition which here and there is gathered up by Occultists the world over, and which is realized in its integrity only by those who have fought their way to that place in the scale of spiritual evolution where detachment is possible. To them is attributable the founding of the great world religions, and at the outset these “Sons of God” were the spiritual instructors of the world. Each race produces its own crop of masters, evolved initiates sworn to the service of man for ever. As there is a natural selection, so there is a spiritual selection, and from the moment a human form is invested with a soul (psyche) that soul continues to progress. There is an evolution that has come along the natural line to the production of human lives of great faculty and attainment; and there is an evolution that has followed the spiritual line. Not all evolved humans are invested with the breath of lives. Thus a man may be an 10intellectual giant and yet not be ensouled, for the psyche is one thing and the pneuma is another. The psyche, or nephesh is common to man and the lower animals and is capable of immense development when investing the human form, but unless this nephesh is illuminated by the ruach or pneuma it cannot advance beyond a certain stage in the present cycle of evolution. Hence the saying, “Work while the day is yet with you, for the night cometh when no man shall work.”

From the combination of spirit and matter, we get the origin of the psyche or soul: “and man became a living soul.” The process of becoming was neither immediate nor complete. Most of us are still on our journey of becoming. However, a select number of advanced beings became living souls, realizing their spiritual consciousness while in human form. These were the “sons of the gods” mentioned in the text. Everyone else were the sons of men. “And the sons of God looked upon the daughters of men and saw that they were fair.” The self-aware souls married the daughters of a less-evolved race, a process that seems essential for uplifting and spiritually energizing the lower forms of human life. During the current manvantara or period of cosmic activity, we have traditional occult knowledge of four significant races of humanity that existed before ours, each achieving a progressively higher level of civilization, with the Atlantean surpassing the Lemurian, just as the Aryan will eventually surpass the Atlantean. As each period of cosmic activity has offered opportunities for progressively higher human development, we must ask what happened to those highly developed forms of spiritually advanced humanity that were the ultimate outcome of the material and spiritual evolution of earlier manvantaras. Originating from Earth and connected to humanity here through countless ties of kinship and heritage and lives devoted to service, they await the moment when humanity reaches a stage where personal interactions are compatible with their spiritual status and the needs of our further evolution. We owe our universal traditions to them, which are collected here and there by Occultists worldwide, and which can only be fully understood by those who have ascended to the level of spiritual evolution where detachment is achievable. They are credited with establishing the great world religions, and initially, these “Sons of God” served as the world’s spiritual teachers. Each race produces its own group of masters, evolved initiates committed to serving humanity forever. Just as there is natural selection, there is also spiritual selection, and from the moment a human form receives a soul (psyche), that soul continues to grow. There is an evolution that has followed the natural path leading to the creation of humans with great abilities and achievements, and there is another that has taken the spiritual path. Not all evolved humans possess the breath of lives. Thus, a person may be an intellectual giant and still lack a soul, as the mind and spirit are distinct. The mind or nephesh is common to humans and lower animals and can develop immensely when embodied in a human form, but unless this nephesh is enlightened by the spirit or breath, it cannot progress beyond a certain level in the current cycle of evolution. Hence the saying, “Work while the day is yet with you, for the night cometh when no man shall work.”

Specialized humanity is a composite of spirit, mind, soul and body. The element or principle in man which distinguishes him from the animal (whether human in form or otherwise), is the Mind. Only in this possession is he truly man. The word man comes, indeed, from the root man (Sansk.), to think. The limitations set up by embodiment of this thinking self is the primary cause of self-realization. All forms of life are conscious, but only spiritualized humanity is self-conscious, or individualized.

Specialized humanity is a mix of spirit, mind, soul, and body. The aspect or principle in humans that sets them apart from animals (whether human-like or not) is the Mind. It's only through this possession that someone is truly human. The word "man" actually comes from the root person (Sansk.), meaning to think. The limitations imposed by having this thinking self are the main reason for self-realization. All forms of life are conscious, but only spiritualized humanity is self-conscious or individualized.

The criterion of consciousness is response to stimulus. It is to be seen in chemic action, in vegetation and in animal life. If the Day’s-eye (daisy) were not conscious of the sunrise it would not open its petals. You may call it automatism, a reflex of the chemic action of light. You will be wiser if you call it consciousness of light, and so spare yourself the trouble of pushing the question back indefinitely, for somewhere or other you must admit response to stimulus and there you must posit consciousness.

The measure of consciousness is the response to stimuli. You can observe it in chemical reactions, plant life, and animal behavior. If the daisy weren’t aware of the sunlight, it wouldn’t open its petals. You might refer to it as automatism, a reflex of the chemical action of light. It’d be smarter to call it awareness of light, and that way, you can avoid the endless debate of pushing the question further back. At some point, you have to acknowledge response to stimulus, and that’s where you must acknowledge consciousness.

11Thus while the animal soul in man responds to stimulus of every kind coming to it through the sense-channels, the mind responds also to a higher and immaterial gamut of vibrations, that is to say, to spiritual stimulus. As man he continues to evolve while all other forms of life remain in statu quo. The monads investing them have not been caught up by the Over-soul; they have not reached the stage where their mass-vibration is capable of responding to the spiritual impact; they are not attracted.

11So, while the animal soul in humans reacts to all kinds of stimuli received through the senses, the mind also responds to a higher, non-physical range of vibrations, meaning it reacts to spiritual stimuli. As a person, they continue to evolve while all other forms of life stay the same, in status quo. The monads within them haven't been elevated by the Over-soul; they haven't reached a level where their collective vibration can respond to spiritual influences; they are not drawn in.

As the outcome of human evolution through successive ages, cycles and manvantaras there is evolved the Christ, or perfect man. The mystical interpretation does not suffice. We require a living individual who shall stand to us for the “man made perfect” through that same process of spiritual evolution which is to be our own means of final liberation from samsāra, or cyclic rebirth. The Christ is truly a generic title. The sons of God are legion, and all of them are invested with the Spirit of Truth or Christ principle. They are the Children of Light, the Great White Brotherhood, and at their head is the Lord, the gravitating Centre of this world’s humanity. He is the manifestation in time and space of the inscrutable Deity, the revelation of God to man. The mythological interpretation of the Christ does not suffice any more than the mystical. The Sun and the twelve signs of the zodiac may well stand as symbols of the Master and his twelve disciples, but they will not suffice for the historical fact, for the fact is not 12limited to a drama in which thirteen characters were at one time employed. It is a drama that is playing through all time, in all places and among all peoples. It is the great work of spiritual selection and co-ordination, and the twelve signs are the twelve gates through which the elect of all humanity will enter into the New Jerusalem or Spiritual Kingdom of a perfected humanity. Neither is the kingdom one that is afar off. Its denizens are to be found among embodied humanity at this day. The Fathers and many of the early rulers of the great countries were special representatives of the Spiritual Hierarchy which at later stages in the history of the world sent forth its emissaries to become world-teachers, empire-makers, legislators, warriors and inventors, each speaking the Word that the world then had need of. Beside them are to be found the Occultists of the East and West, followers of their respective Gurus, Sadhus, Yogis and Teachers, aspirants to the heirloom of the ages, the Gupta-Vidya or Hidden Knowledge; with here and there a messenger under sealed orders, passing from one country to another; a host of psychic-researchers and higher-thought lecturers, the aide-de-camps, sappers and enlisting officers of the vast army of recruits, regulars and veterans who are enrolled under this standard.

As a result of human evolution over countless ages, cycles, and manvantaras, the Christ, or the ideal human, has emerged. A mystical interpretation alone isn’t enough. We need a living individual who embodies the “perfect man” through the same process of spiritual evolution that will ultimately lead to our liberation from samsara, or the cycle of rebirth. The term Christ is truly a collective title. The sons of God are many, and each one holds the Spirit of Truth or the Christ principle. They are the Children of Light, part of the Great White Brotherhood, with the Lord at the forefront, acting as the unifying Center of humanity. He is the manifestation of the unknowable Deity, revealing God to humankind. The mythological view of the Christ is just as inadequate as the mystical one. The Sun and the twelve zodiac signs can serve as symbols of the Master and his twelve disciples, but they can’t represent the historical reality, which isn’t limited to a story involving thirteen characters. It’s a narrative that unfolds throughout all time, in all places, and among all people. It’s the grand endeavor of spiritual selection and organization, with the twelve signs symbolizing the twelve gates through which the chosen from all humanity will enter the New Jerusalem, or the Spiritual Kingdom of perfected humanity. The kingdom isn’t a distant realm. Its inhabitants are present among living humans today. The Fathers and many of the early leaders of major nations were special representatives of the Spiritual Hierarchy, which later sent forth its emissaries to become world teachers, empire builders, lawmakers, warriors, and innovators, each delivering the message that the world needed at that time. Alongside them are the Occultists from the East and West, students of their Gurus, Sadhus, Yogis, and Teachers, striving for the inherited wisdom of the ages, the Gupta-Vidya or Hidden Knowledge; and now and then, a messenger with sealed orders moves from one country to another; a group of psychic researchers and thought leaders, the aides, scholars, and recruiters of the vast army of newcomers, regulars, and veterans who are enlisted under this cause.

To the Occultist the universe is a symbol and every part of it is symbolical. Although essentially an Idealist he does not attempt the rôle of those visionaries who would argue the universe out of existence. He may call it elusive but not an 13illusion, for his own existence depends on his consciousness of the world about him and his well-being upon the degree to which he understands and observes the laws of that universe of which he is an integral part. For if it be said that the world has no existence apart from our consciousness, it may with equal truth be said that our consciousness has no existence apart from the world to which it is related. What we understand as the laws of the universe are formulated in terms of our thought, but inasmuch as the laws of thought are imposed on us by existence, it is clear that we do not ourselves impose cosmic laws, but we merely apprehend them. It is not in the Idealistic sense that the universe is a symbol, but in the real sense of it being the embodiment or out-realizing of the Supreme Life and Mind. As symbol the universe is the revelation of all time, of the past and the future; the repository of all history, the source of all prophecy, the synthesis of actuality. That Consciousness which is simultaneously immanent in all the universe is called the Universal Mind. The Platonic definition of God as “That whose centre is everywhere and whose circumference is illimitable” comes as nearly to this conception of the Divine Mind as it is possible for words to compass. Man is a centre of consciousness in the Divine Mind from the time that he realizes his spiritual existence, a soul investing a cell in the Brain of the Grand Man. As such he becomes subject to the higher spiritual laws of Being and enters into the Divine Conspiracy. The evolving monads circulate 14and finally become impounded in one or another of the various organs of the Grand Man, in agreement with their several states of evolution, passing from one to another of them during the successive incarnations of the Deity. In his effort to reach a higher sphere of consciousness and activity, a wider sphere of influence and a greater measure of free will, man comes to realize that obedience to the law of his being is the means of attainment. Thus every man is a law unto himself, and the truly wise are they who are able to say in all consciousness: “Thy will be done.” For human safety and happiness are only assured by devotion to the highest good, and this is the occult view of the dependence of mankind on an all-seeing and beneficent Spirit “in whose service is perfect freedom.”

To the Occultist, the universe is a symbol, and every part of it carries meaning. Although he is fundamentally an Idealist, he doesn’t take on the role of those dreamers who would argue that the universe doesn’t exist. He might call it elusive, but not an illusion, because his own existence relies on his awareness of the world around him, and his well-being depends on how well he understands and follows the laws of that universe of which he is a part. If it’s said that the world has no existence outside of our consciousness, it can equally be said that our consciousness has no existence apart from the world it’s connected to. The laws of the universe we recognize are expressed through our thoughts, but since the laws of thought are shaped by existence, it’s clear that we don’t create cosmic laws; we simply understand them. It’s not in the Idealistic sense that the universe is a symbol, but in the real sense of it being the expression or realization of the Supreme Life and Mind. As a symbol, the universe reveals all of time, encompassing both the past and the future; it holds all history, is the source of all prophecy, and synthesizes reality. The consciousness that is present throughout the universe is known as the Universal Mind. The Platonic definition of God as “That whose center is everywhere and whose circumference is limitless” comes close to this idea of the Divine Mind as words can express. A person is a center of consciousness within the Divine Mind from the moment he recognizes his spiritual existence, acting as a soul inhabiting a cell in the Brain of the Grand Man. In this way, he becomes subject to the higher spiritual laws of Being and enters into the Divine Conspiracy. The evolving monads circulate and eventually become part of various organs of the Grand Man, based on their unique stages of evolution, transitioning between them during the successive incarnations of the Deity. In striving for a higher level of consciousness and activity, a broader sphere of influence, and greater free will, a person realizes that following the law of his being is the path to achievement. Thus, each individual is a law unto themselves, and the truly wise are those who can consciously say: “Thy will be done.” For human safety and happiness can only be guaranteed through dedication to the highest good, which reflects the occult perspective on humanity’s reliance on an all-seeing and benevolent Spirit “in whose service is perfect freedom.”

Occultism, therefore, whether consisting in the development and exercise of one’s individual psychic powers, in systematic and impartial inquiry as to evidence of these powers in others, or in the pursuit of such studies as astrology, kabalism, yoga, hypnotism, etc., reaches out from such vague beginnings into regions of thought and aspiration that transcend the average mind and are seen to culminate, in specialized cases, in the attainment of powers which may be called miraculous and of attributes that are truly godlike.

Occultism, then, whether it involves developing and using one’s psychic abilities, investigating evidence of these abilities in other people, or studying subjects like astrology, Kabbalah, yoga, and hypnotism, extends from these unclear origins into areas of thought and desire that go beyond the average person’s understanding. In some unique cases, it leads to the acquisition of powers that could be described as miraculous and qualities that are genuinely godlike.

15

CHAPTER II
THE PROBLEMS OF SCIENCE

It is quite a popular misconception that credits Science with exact methods and certain knowledge on all matters concerning which it has given an opinion. There is, in fact, a slavish reverence for the dicta of Science which is as inconsistent as formerly was the submission of the public mind to religious dogmatic teaching. And if, as some writers assert, there still exists a conflict between Religion and Science it is at least satisfactory to see that to-day Science appears to be getting its own back to a creditable extent. If Science makes appeal to the popular imagination or proves its claim to public recognition and support on the grounds of utility, Religion has only itself to blame if it fails to come into line with the established facts of scientific discovery and lacks the enterprise which is necessary to give it a modern representation. Instead of mumbling orthodoxies about the saving of souls, Religion could very profitably concern itself with the task of proving that man has a soul to save. It could use the argument afforded by modern experimental psychology. It could observe the scientific method, and could without loss of dignity employ the facts of Science in the upbuilding 16of a scheme of thought which has man’s spiritual welfare as the end in view. When we recognize the fact that it is our conception of God and of our relations with Him that is alone effective in the work of regeneration and reform, and that this altered view-point is largely due to the widening of the mental horizon by scientific discovery and a philosophy adapted thereto, then religiously-disposed people do wrongly to ignore the facts of Science, however much they may appear to conflict with orthodox notions of the relations of God to man. It is little more than three centuries ago that the custodians of religious belief burned Giordano Bruno at the stake for daring to declare that there were more worlds than one. In his Della Causa Principio ed Uno (Of the First and Only Cause) Bruno says: “The divine Omnipotence is more aptly expressed in an infinity of worlds of various dimensions than in the production of a single world of infinite dimensions.... Infinite variability is the eternal juvenescence of God.” That which happened to Bruno in the name of Holy Religion was barely escaped by Copernicus because of his heresy in declaring the Sun to be the centre of the system and the Earth one of its satellites moving about it. It was a pagan doctrine and belonged properly to Pythagoras. The history of Science reveals many such persecutions of its devotees, and yet in modern times it cannot be said that Science is without its prejudices. It nearly killed religious belief in the nineteenth century owing to its recognition of the Materialistic hypothesis.

It’s a common misunderstanding that Science always provides exact methods and certain knowledge on every topic it addresses. In reality, there’s an almost blind reverence for the statements of Science that’s as inconsistent as the old-fashioned submission to religious dogma. And if, as some writers claim, there’s still a conflict between Religion and Science, it’s at least encouraging to see that Science is starting to regain ground. If Science captures the public imagination or proves its value for public recognition and support based on its usefulness, then Religion can only blame itself if it fails to align with established scientific facts and lacks the initiative to present itself in a modern light. Instead of sticking to traditional beliefs about saving souls, Religion would do well to focus on demonstrating that humans have souls worth saving. It could draw on insights from modern experimental psychology, observe the scientific method, and gracefully utilize scientific facts to build a perspective centered on humanity's spiritual well-being. When we acknowledge that our understanding of God and our relationship with Him plays a crucial role in the work of regeneration and reform, and that this new perspective largely arises from the expansion of thought through scientific discoveries and corresponding philosophies, it’s misguided for religious believers to ignore scientific facts, no matter how much they might clash with traditional views of God’s relationship with humanity. Just over three hundred years ago, the guardians of religious belief executed Giordano Bruno for the audacity of claiming there were multiple worlds. In his The Cause, Principle, and One (Of the First and Only Cause), Bruno states: “The divine Omnipotence is more aptly expressed in an infinity of worlds of various dimensions than in the production of a single world of infinite dimensions.... Infinite variability is the eternal juvenescence of God.” Copernicus barely escaped a similar fate for his heresy in stating that the Sun is the center of the solar system and the Earth is one of its satellites. This idea was seen as pagan and rightly belonged to Pythagoras. The history of Science is filled with examples of persecution against its advocates, and yet, in modern times, it cannot be said that Science is free from its own biases. It almost eradicated religious belief in the nineteenth century, largely due to the acceptance of the Materialistic hypothesis.

17Yet when we come to examine the claims of modern Science, or what popularly goes by that name, we find that it is largely hypothetical and that sciences which are usually known as “exact” are by no means so.

17Yet when we look into the claims of modern science, or what is commonly called that, we discover that it's mostly based on hypotheses and that fields typically referred to as "exact" are not as precise as they seem.

Science has no certain knowledge of the origin of life and consciousness. Many distinguished men have sought to define life. Dr. Alfred R. Wallace in his World of Life points out how inadequate are all these definitions, and wisely refrains from adding to them. Consciousness as a by-product of organic matter was quite correct science fifty years ago. To-day, in the presence of many well-attested facts which go to prove the possibility of consciousness apart from organism as we know it, the man of science is not at all sure that consciousness is anything of the sort. Modern psychology is a new leaf in the book of Nature which until quite recently had not been deciphered. We are getting our facts sporadically, a few at a time, and each new discovery changes our ideas concerning things which had passed for correct theory. The facts remain; our views of them are changed. We really have no certain scientific knowledge about the wonderful conversion of inorganic to organic matter. The alchemy of Nature baffles us.

Science doesn’t have a definitive understanding of where life and consciousness come from. Many respected individuals have tried to define life. Dr. Alfred R. Wallace, in his *World of Life*, highlights how inadequate all these definitions are and wisely chooses not to contribute more to them. Fifty years ago, it was widely accepted that consciousness was simply a by-product of organic matter. Today, with numerous well-documented facts suggesting the possibility of consciousness existing independently from the organisms we know, scientists are unsure if consciousness is anything like that. Modern psychology is like a new chapter in the story of Nature that hadn’t been understood until recently. We’re gathering facts slowly, little by little, and each new discovery alters our understanding of theories we once thought were correct. The facts remain; our perspectives on them evolve. We truly lack solid scientific knowledge about the incredible transformation of inorganic matter into organic matter. Nature's alchemy leaves us puzzled.

Even the cosmic theory is incomplete and full of anomalies. In the vortex theory there is nothing to show why some swirls of cosmic matter became suns and others planets. There are two theories regarding the solar system diametrically opposed to one another. There are similarly two theories regarding 18the Moon. The most recent theory is that the Moon acts as a brake upon the Earth by causing the tides, which run contrary to the axial rotation of the earth, thereby slowing down its rotation and causing a longer day than formerly. But the same theory requires that the Moon is gradually enlarging its own orbit and getting farther away from the Earth, which is inconsistent with our records of ancient observations of eclipses, etc., for in order to agree our calculations with the observed positions of the Moon at these ancient epochs, we have to augment the present mean motion of the Moon in its orbit by a quantity equal to about 10´´t₂, which means ten seconds for the first century and the same quantity multiplied by the square of the centuries for times anterior. In other words, the Moon was moving quicker in a smaller orbit in former days. But this supplemental theory is wholly destructive of the first regarding the Moon’s tidal action. For if the Moon is getting farther away from us, its tidal influence is also decreasing, and the “brake” power being lessened, the Earth’s axial rotation must be increasing in velocity and the day must be getting shorter than formerly, which is the exact converse of what was argued in the first place. Hence we see how, in their efforts to explain observed facts, scientific men can put up two mutually destructive theories. Only recently, in the Solar eclipse of 17th April, 1912, we had an illustration of an exact science blundering in practice. The Connaissance des Temps, the official organ of the French astronomers, gave this eclipse as 19total, while the Nautical Almanac gave it correctly as partial, the apparent diameter of the Moon, depending on its anomaly, being some 20´´ less than that of the Sun.

Even the cosmic theory is incomplete and full of anomalies. In the vortex theory, there's no explanation for why some swirls of cosmic matter became suns while others became planets. There are two theories about the solar system that are completely opposed to each other. Similarly, there are two theories about the Moon. The newest theory suggests that the Moon acts as a brake on the Earth by causing tides, which go against the Earth's axial rotation, thus slowing it down and resulting in longer days than before. However, this theory also claims that the Moon is gradually increasing its orbit and moving farther away from the Earth, which contradicts our records of ancient observations of eclipses and such. To align our calculations with the observed positions of the Moon in ancient times, we have to increase the present mean motion of the Moon in its orbit by an amount equal to about 10''t₂, meaning ten seconds for the first century and the same quantity multiplied by the square of the centuries for earlier times. In other words, the Moon was moving faster in a smaller orbit back then. But this additional theory completely undermines the first one regarding the Moon’s tidal action. Because if the Moon is moving farther away from us, its tidal influence is also decreasing, and with the "brake" power being reduced, the Earth’s axial rotation should be speeding up, making days shorter than before, which is the exact opposite of what was initially claimed. Thus, we see how, in their attempts to explain observed facts, scientists can propose two mutually contradictory theories. Just recently, during the solar eclipse on 17th April 1912, we witnessed an example of an exact science making a mistake in practice. The Knowledge of the Times, the official publication of the French astronomers, listed this eclipse as total, while the Nautical Almanac correctly described it as partial, since the apparent diameter of the Moon, depending on its anomaly, was about 20'' less than that of the Sun.

The theory of what is called the attraction of gravitation is one of the scientific facts which have recently been abandoned as unsatisfactory. It is found that the theory of “attraction” does not answer to the facts as experimentally determined. Theories that are inelastic are apt to be negatived by the discovery of new facts or modified beyond recognition by extended observations. The Earth itself is a huge magnet whose radial influence extends some fourteen feet beyond its surface, and this fact has to be taken into account in all local magnetic observations.

The theory known as the attraction of gravitation is one of the scientific concepts that has recently been deemed unsatisfactory. It turns out that the idea of "attraction" does not align with the facts as proven through experiments. Theories that are rigid usually get disproven when new facts emerge or are changed beyond recognition through further observations. The Earth itself is a massive magnet with a magnetic influence that reaches about fourteen feet beyond its surface, and this fact needs to be considered in all local magnetic observations.

The permeability of matter was a fact that had been under scrutiny for a long time before the discovery of the Röntgen rays. Sir David Brewster notes the passage of carbon through solid wood by means of electric fluid, and by an electric current an acid may be separated from its sodium base and passed through dilute syrup of violets without changing the colour of the vegetable solution. The question then arises, in what form was the carbon in the one case and the acid in the other when they passed through the respective media? Obviously their atomic vibrations were temporarily raised in such degree by electrical action as to change them from their normal characters. I suggest to psychologists that something of the same or a similar nature may occur in the case of individuals when acting 20under the influence of hypnotism or spiritual afflatus, ecstasy, etc. The question is whether they can be rendered permanent effects.

The permeability of matter was a fact that had been examined for a long time before the discovery of X-rays. Sir David Brewster observed that carbon can pass through solid wood using electric fluid, and that an acid can be separated from its sodium base and move through a diluted violet syrup without altering the color of the solution. This leads to the question: in what form was the carbon in one instance and the acid in the other when they passed through their respective substances? Clearly, their atomic vibrations were temporarily elevated by electrical energy to change their normal states. I propose to psychologists that a similar phenomenon may happen in individuals when they are under the influence of hypnosis, spiritual inspiration, ecstasy, etc. The question is whether these effects can be made permanent.

But these are not by any means the whole of the problems confronting modern Science, which nevertheless has a tendency to become dogmatic in other matters with which it is not officially concerned, as one may learn from a reading of Häckel’s Riddle of the Universe. In Ernst Häckel we see probably the last of the old school of materialistic philosophers. Another problem is that of atomic arrangement. It has been observed that two chemical bodies composed of exactly the same number of atoms of the same elements assume entirely different characteristics by reason of their respective atomic arrangement. This fact, while wholly unexplained, opens up many interesting psychological issues and serves by analogy to explain why two human beings compounded of exactly similar cosmic elements, manifest different characters and faculties. Science has too long neglected the free use of its own hypothesis of the solidarity of the system, and while astronomy employs interplanetary action in all its calculations, it scouts the idea of astro-meteorology and relegates astrology to the limbo of antiquated superstitions. Yet both these concepts are necessary and logical dependents of the cosmical hypothesis.

But these aren’t the only problems facing modern science, which tends to get dogmatic about other issues it isn’t officially involved with, as shown in Häckel’s Riddle of the Universe. In Ernst Häckel, we see probably the last of the old school of materialistic philosophers. Another issue is atomic arrangement. It's been noted that two chemical substances made up of the exact same number of atoms from the same elements can have completely different characteristics due to their atomic arrangement. This fact, while completely unexplained, raises many intriguing psychological questions and serves as an analogy for why two people made of the same cosmic elements can show different personalities and abilities. Science has long overlooked the unrestricted use of its own hypothesis regarding the solidarity of the system, and while astronomy incorporates interplanetary action in all its calculations, it dismisses the idea of astro-meteorology and pushes astrology into the realm of outdated superstitions. Yet both of these concepts are necessary and logically follow from the cosmic hypothesis.

Up to the present day Science has ignored psychology and opposed the claims of psycho-therapeutics. Medical science other than that depending on surgery will soon find that the process of readjustment in the human organism rendered necessary 21by the rapidly changing conditions of modern civilization and the opening-up of new centres of activity in the mind-sphere of the world, will present a new series of pathological conditions to which the prescriptions of the Pharmacopoeia are altogether inadequate. The psychic origin of disease will have to be admitted and provided against. The x-factor in human pathology which defies the action of drugs and evades the scalpel, call it by what name we may, will increasingly assert itself, and medical men will have perforce to take it into their counsels, make friends with it and get to understand its vagaries. The plurality of worlds and the habitability of the other planets in the solar system, taught by Pythagoras in the sixth century B.C., has received a certain speculative recognition by astronomers, notably Camille Flammarion, Richard Proctor, Schiaparelli and Sir Robert Ball, in recent years. It was affirmed as fact by that remarkable man of science and inspiration, Baron Swedenborg. But in a contemporary issue of the journal of the Royal Astronomical Society of Canada, Prof. Aitken, of the Lick Observatory, states, as the result of his researches, that the Moon is a dead world, with the exception perhaps of low forms of vegetable life sustained by water vapour exuding from the Moon’s interior; Mercury gets seven times as much heat as the Earth and keeps the same face towards the Sun, offering the alternative of an eternal night or an equally unending tropical heat and daylight, from which it is not protected by any atmosphere. Venus, having many characteristics 22similar to the Earth, is admitted to be problematical, since it is not yet decided whether its day and year are equal or not. If they are, then it is uninhabitable. Mars has a rare atmosphere, and there is not enough water on the planet to fill an American lake. It has a low temperature, and there may be vegetable and animal life there, but no beings of intelligence. The “canals” may be natural or artificial canals or merely earthquake markings. Jupiter is a semi-sun, its development is in a state of chaos, and it is probably gaseous throughout with matter distributed as on the Sun, there being no defined surface or crust. Saturn resembles Jupiter, but probably is not so far advanced, and it is even less fitted for human habitation than Jupiter.

Up to now, science has overlooked psychology and dismissed the claims of psychotherapy. Apart from surgery, medical science will soon realize that the need for readjustment in the human body, driven by the rapidly changing conditions of modern life and new areas of mental activity being explored, will introduce a new range of health issues that the standard medical treatments cannot adequately address. The psychological roots of illness will have to be recognized and addressed. The unknown factor in human health that resists medications and evades surgical solutions, no matter what it’s called, will increasingly demand attention, and doctors will have no choice but to engage with it, understand it, and work with its complexities. The idea of multiple worlds and the possibility of other planets in our solar system being habitable, proposed by Pythagoras in the sixth century B.C., has gained some speculative acknowledgment from astronomers like Camille Flammarion, Richard Proctor, Schiaparelli, and Sir Robert Ball in recent years. This concept was affirmed by the insightful scientist Baron Swedenborg. However, in a recent publication of the Royal Astronomical Society of Canada, Professor Aitken from the Lick Observatory concludes from his research that the Moon is a lifeless world, possibly only supporting simple plant life that might rely on water vapor released from beneath its surface. Mercury receives seven times more heat than Earth and always shows the same face to the Sun, resulting in either eternal night or relentless tropical heat and daylight, with no atmosphere to shield it. Venus shares many Earth-like features but remains uncertain, as it isn’t yet determined if its day and year are equal; if they are, it would be unlivable. Mars has a thin atmosphere and lacks sufficient water to fill an American lake. Its temperatures are low, and while there may be plant and animal life there, there are no intelligent beings. The so-called "canals" could be either natural or man-made or just marks left by earthquakes. Jupiter acts like a mini-sun, is chaotic in its development, and is likely made entirely of gas without a solid surface or crust. Saturn is similar to Jupiter but is probably less developed and even less suitable for human habitation than Jupiter.

We see therefore that as between the teaching of Pythagoras and that of Prof. Aitken there is a great gulf fixed. It will probably be bridged by a little freer use of the scientific imagination that Prof. Huxley extolled. The great American astronomer has argued humanity out of existence in a manner so complete as to warrant the instant dismantling of the statue of Bruno by the Vatican. But alas for the shortcomings of dogmatic science, we have not yet been told how or why the Earth alone is favoured by the presence of humanity. We are left to speculate upon the question as to what has become of the Moon’s humanity, supposing this dead orb was once alive and afforded habitable conditions. We are left wondering why conservative Nature evolved the planets Neptune and Uranus—which “are so far away from the Sun that its light and 23heat can hardly be effective in protecting life upon them, even should life in any way originate there”—if they are never to come within the life-belt limit of the solar rays! These vapourings are altogether unworthy of the name of Science, and are, in their way, as fanciful and speculative as any of the superstitions of a primitive religion. Who gave the astronomer to know that man as we see him is the only sort of humanity or intelligent being that can exist? It is open to him to remark that even should there be forms of intelligent life on other planets we should not recognize them as human. That is beside the mark; we do not recognize the human by its form, we do not confound the man with the animal part of him; and we may even speak of discarnate humanity. In every possible way we protest that articulate language, which infers articulate thought and intelligence, is the criterion of the human, and in this category we include for sociological reasons all that are of human generation, whether intelligent and articulate or not. Of the “infinite variability” of God as expressed in Nature, the astronomer takes no count. Here on this globe of ours we find the human persisting in temperatures varying from over + 150° to - 30°, and we have no reason for suggesting that the power of adaptation to environment is at the maximum in this world. Violent ophthalmia and even madness would result in us if “the earth’s green livery” were suddenly and permanently changed to red. But a very little alteration in the chemical constitution of the vitreous fluid in the eye would render us 24immune from these evils, and we have every reason for thinking that were such a colour-change to take place, Nature would not be long in adapting herself to the new conditions. But she would first be sure that they were likely to be permanent, for although very amicable, the old lady is extremely cautious and prudent! What we know as solar light and heat have no existence outside the earth’s atmosphere, and even within it they only have the values that our sensation-consciousness gives to them; so that all we can scientifically assume in regard to those planets that have no atmosphere is that their humanities, if they have any, must be physiologically different from man as we know him. We cannot argue that he does not exist or that he cannot exist on them.

We can see, then, that there’s a huge divide between the teachings of Pythagoras and those of Prof. Aitken. This gap will probably be bridged by a bit more free use of the scientific imagination that Prof. Huxley praised. The great American astronomer has argued humanity out of existence so convincingly that the Vatican might as well take down Bruno's statue right away. But sadly, due to the limitations of dogmatic science, we still haven’t been told how or why Earth is the only planet with human life. We’re left to wonder what happened to any potential humanity on the Moon, assuming this dead rock was once alive and had conditions suitable for life. We also question why conservative Nature came up with the planets Neptune and Uranus—planets that are so far from the Sun that its light and heat can barely protect life, even if any life were to originate there—if they were never meant to fall within the life-supporting reach of solar rays! These claims aren’t truly scientific and are as fanciful and speculative as any primitive superstition. Who decided that the type of humanity we see is the only form of intelligent life that can exist? The astronomer might note that even if there were intelligent life on other planets, we wouldn’t recognize it as human. But that misses the point; we don’t define humanity by physical form, nor do we confuse a person with their animalistic traits; we can even talk about non-physical humanity. We assert that articulate language, which implies articulate thought and intelligence, is what defines humanity, and for sociological reasons, we include everyone born of human lineage, whether they are intelligent and articulate or not. The astronomer seems to ignore the “infinite variability” of God expressed in Nature. Here on Earth, humans manage to thrive in temperatures ranging from over +150° to -30°, and there’s no reason to think our ability to adapt to our surroundings is at its peak. Experiencing violent eye infections or even madness would happen if “the earth’s green livery” suddenly turned red. However, a slight change in the chemical makeup of the fluid in our eyes could make us immune to these issues, and we can reasonably believe that if such a color change did happen, Nature wouldn’t take long to adjust to the new conditions. But she’d first want to be sure those changes would be permanent, because while very kind, the old lady is incredibly cautious and wise! What we know as solar light and heat doesn’t exist outside of Earth’s atmosphere, and even within it, they only have the values that our conscious sensation gives to them. So, scientifically, we can only assume regarding those planets without an atmosphere that their forms of humanity, if they exist, must be physiologically different from our own. We cannot argue that they don’t exist or that they can’t exist there.

The sum of the matter is this, we have need of a Religion that is scientific, and equally of a Science that is religious. What we do not positively know we may logically infer, but we have to guard ourselves against the tendency to take the inference for fact and to dogmatize about things which are wholly unrelated to our personal experience. The many curious observations I shall have occasion to make in the course of these pages are so remote from general experience and so far removed from scientific scrutiny as to belong to the category of things called “occult,” and it was therefore expedient that the reader should have a fairly clear idea that all the statements of orthodox science do not rest upon the immovable rock of observed fact, and for this reason are not so well founded as many of the 25conclusions of occult science. It is advisable also that the reader should discern between the theoretical value of a statement and its experimental value. Many things which appear reasonable will not respond to test, and others that seem unreasonable are found nevertheless to be true.

The point is this: we need a religion that embraces science and a science that's open to spirituality. What we don’t know for certain, we can logically guess, but we have to be careful not to treat those guesses as facts and avoid being dogmatic about things that don't relate to our personal experiences. The various observations I'll make throughout these pages are quite different from common experiences and aren't thoroughly examined by science, so they fall into the category of “occult.” It’s important for the reader to understand that not all established scientific statements are based on solid evidence and aren't necessarily more trustworthy than many conclusions drawn from occult science. It’s also essential for the reader to distinguish between the theoretical value of a statement and its experimental value. Many things that seem logical might not hold up under testing, while others that seem illogical may actually be true.

26

CHAPTER III
THE MODERN MIRACLE

It has been said that the medical practice of the future will have to provide for the interference in ordinary therapeutic methods of an x-factor, which is amenable to hypnotic suggestion and to auto-suggestion, but which on rare occasions assumes a more positive and extraordinary form, and acts spontaneously. Indeed, we may have to admit the possibility of an extraneous healing power acting independently of medical skill and contrary to all recognized therapeutic agents, medicinal or clinical.

It has been said that the medical practice of the future will need to account for the involvement of an x-factor in regular treatment methods, which is responsive to hypnotic suggestion and self-suggestion. However, on rare occasions, it can take on a more direct and extraordinary form and act on its own. In fact, we might have to acknowledge the possibility of an external healing power functioning independently of medical expertise and in opposition to all established therapeutic agents, whether they are medications or clinical treatments.

An instance of this is to be seen in what is called the Modern Miracle. A miracle, it should be understood, is not supernatural. We have no reason for prescribing limits to Nature’s powers. A miracle is simply an abnormal manifestation of those powers, and hence something to be wondered at. The case in point is that of Miss Dorothy Kerin, who on the night of Sunday, the 18th February, 1912, being bedridden with advanced tuberculosis, concomitant disease of the kidneys, and finally suffering from loss of sight and speech, together with some signs of aphasia, was suddenly and miraculously cured entirely of all ailments, and when medically examined was pronounced to be absolutely free from tubercle bacillus, or any other form of morbid disease, and 27to be in complete possession of all her faculties and normal bodily functions. The evidence is unassailable and the facts beyond dispute. We have to arrange our thought and modify our therapy to accommodate these facts.

An example of this is found in what is known as the Modern Miracle. A miracle, it should be noted, is not something supernatural. We have no reason to set limits on Nature’s abilities. A miracle is simply an unusual demonstration of those abilities, and therefore something to marvel at. The specific case involves Miss Dorothy Kerin, who on the night of Sunday, the 18th of February, 1912, was bedridden with severe tuberculosis, along with kidney disease, and also suffered from loss of sight and speech, as well as some signs of aphasia. She was suddenly and miraculously cured of all her ailments, and when examined by doctors, she was found to be completely free from tubercle bacillus or any other kind of disease, and 27was fully restored to all her faculties and normal bodily functions. The evidence is indisputable, and the facts are beyond question. We need to adjust our thinking and update our treatment to reflect these facts.

Dorothy Kerin was born on the 28th November, 1890, in London, her father being Irish. She received an ordinary middle-class education in a private school, and would have gone on the stage, where her sister, Norah Kerin, has achieved considerable success, but for the break in her health.

Dorothy Kerin was born on the 28th November, 1890, in London, and her father was Irish. She received a standard middle-class education at a private school and would have pursued a career in acting, where her sister, Norah Kerin, has found considerable success, if not for her health issues.

At the time of her wonderful recovery she had not stood up for five years, and latterly had suffered from partial loss of memory, sight, hearing and speech. Yet she was always bright and cheerful, and her invariable sweetness of disposition, her patience and gentleness, endeared her to all her friends and relatives, and made her greatly beloved by those who came in contact with her. She was one of those who “suffered all things gladly,” and was by nature of a religious disposition. The following account of her recovery is extracted from the Daily Mirror report of the 19th February—

At the time of her amazing recovery, she hadn’t stood up for five years and had recently experienced partial memory loss, as well as issues with her sight, hearing, and speech. Still, she always remained bright and cheerful, and her constant sweetness, patience, and gentleness endeared her to all her friends and family, making her truly loved by anyone who met her. She was one of those who “suffered all things gladly” and naturally had a religious nature. The following account of her recovery is taken from the Daily Mirror report of the 19th February—

“Dorothy Kerin is convinced that her remarkable recovery of apparent health is literally ‘a miracle.’

“Dorothy Kerin is convinced that her incredible recovery of apparent health is truly ‘a miracle.’

“Her account of the angelic vision, which on Sunday night restored her sight, hearing and strength and left her painless, happy and ‘feeling better than I ever felt in my life before,’ may be ascribed to hysteria by sceptics, but, whatever the cause, the facts of her recovery are beyond dispute.

“Her story about the angelic vision, which on Sunday night gave her back her sight, hearing, and strength, leaving her without pain, happy, and ‘feeling better than I ever have in my life,’ might be dismissed as hysteria by skeptics, but regardless of the reason, the facts of her recovery are undeniable.”

“Dr. Frederick Norman, of Brixton, her 28physician, is, of course, deterred by professional etiquette from public discussion of her case.

“Dr. Frederick Norman, from Brixton, her 28doctor, is, of course, held back by professional etiquette from publicly discussing her case.

“‘But it is no secret that my husband was incredulous,’ said Mrs. Norman to the Daily Mirror yesterday, ‘when he was informed that Dorothy was “quite well.”’

“‘But it’s no secret that my husband was skeptical,’” said Mrs. Norman to the Daily Mirror yesterday, “’when he was told that Dorothy was ‘doing fine.’”

“‘He did not consider on Saturday that she could possibly remain alive more than a day or two. The girl had been in St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, St. Peter’s Home for Incurables at Kilburn, and other institutions, but was sent home finally as a hopeless case two years ago.

“‘He didn't think on Saturday that she could possibly stay alive for more than a day or two. The girl had been at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, St. Peter’s Home for the Incurable at Kilburn, and other places, but was finally sent home two years ago as a hopeless case.

“‘She has not stood up for five years, and latterly was blind and deaf and utterly weak, taking only occasional doses of brandy and other stimulants.’

“‘She hasn't stood up in five years, and recently she was blind, deaf, and completely weak, only taking occasional sips of brandy and other stimulants.’”

“Dr. Norman has been compelled to safeguard his patient. No fewer than sixty people saw her yesterday, but such a reception has now been stopped. A perfectly healthy girl could not stand the constant excitement of receiving visitors eager to interrogate her. Three days ago, it must be remembered, she was in an advanced stage of consumption.

“Dr. Norman has been forced to protect his patient. No fewer than sixty people saw her yesterday, but that kind of reception has now been halted. A perfectly healthy girl couldn’t handle the constant excitement of having visitors eager to question her. Three days ago, it should be noted, she was in an advanced stage of consumption."

“For breakfast yesterday Miss Kerin ate wheat-meal porridge, bacon and tomatoes, and drank two cups of coffee. A beefsteak was cooked for her lunch.

“For breakfast yesterday, Miss Kerin had wheat-meal porridge, bacon and tomatoes, and drank two cups of coffee. A beefsteak was prepared for her lunch."

“‘I slept last night more soundly than I ever remember doing,’ Miss Kerin told the Daily Mirror yesterday. She read the Ten Commandments printed on the base of a minute toy magnifying glass with perfect ease. Another doctor who was present said he could not read such tiny print.

“‘I slept soundly last night like I never remember before,’ Miss Kerin told the Daily Mirror yesterday. She read the Ten Commandments printed on the base of a tiny toy magnifying glass with perfect ease. Another doctor who was there said he couldn’t read such small print.

29“‘A fortnight ago,’ said her mother, ‘Dolly could not call things by their proper names, and often did not know us. Bread was “soft, white stuff,” fish was “white stuff with needles in it,” nut-milk chocolate she asked for as “lumpy sweet.”

29“‘Two weeks ago,’ said her mother, ‘Dolly couldn’t call things by their right names, and often didn’t recognize us. Bread was “soft, white stuff,” fish was “white stuff with needles in it,” and she asked for nut-milk chocolate as “lumpy sweet.”

“‘Now she can bath herself and is not an invalid at all. Often during her long illness her temperature went up to 105.’

“‘Now she can bathe herself and isn’t an invalid at all. Often during her long illness her temperature went up to 105.’”

“Miss Kerin shakes hands firmly, and her palm has a touch that is quite normal. Scores of doctors have already sought permission to see her. The history of her case is well known to the profession.

“Miss Kerin shakes hands firmly, and her palm has a touch that feels completely normal. Many doctors have already asked for permission to see her. The details of her case are well known in the medical field.

“The Rev. A. J. Waldron, vicar of the adjoining parish of St. Matthew’s, Brixton, visited her yesterday and is making arrangements to have her moved at once to a nursing home, where she can have privacy and quiet, with country air.

The Rev. A. J. Waldron, the vicar of the neighboring parish of St. Matthew’s, Brixton, visited her yesterday and is making plans to move her immediately to a nursing home, where she can have privacy and peace, along with fresh country air.

“Miss Kerin has no hectic flush, and declared yesterday that she did not feel a bit tired. But there is little doubt she requires careful supervision to prevent any relapse.”

“Miss Kerin isn't flushed and said yesterday that she didn't feel tired at all. But there's no doubt she needs careful monitoring to avoid any setbacks.”

I am informed by her brother, Mr. G. Kerin, that during her illness, and especially during the later stages, when her normal faculties showed signs of decline, that Miss Kerin developed some super-normal powers. She was able, for instance, to give an accurate account of incidents happening in connection with her brother while at a distance from home. The greatest care had to be observed by those in the house when speaking of her, as she could always hear what was said in another room, although she appeared deaf to those who spoke 30aloud in her presence. There is, in fact, evidence that she developed the telesthesic sense during the later stages of her illness, but also that she lost this faculty just before her recovery.

I’ve been told by her brother, Mr. G. Kerin, that during her illness, especially in the later stages when her normal abilities started to decline, Miss Kerin developed some extraordinary powers. For example, she was able to accurately describe events related to her brother even when he was far away. Everyone in the house had to be very careful when talking about her because she could always hear what was said in another room, even though she seemed deaf to those speaking out loud in her presence. In fact, there’s evidence that she developed a heightened sense during the later stages of her illness, but she lost this ability just before she recovered.

Dr. Forbes Winslow was of opinion that the cure was due to auto-suggestion. It appears to me a singular conclusion. One can understand neurasthenia, paralysis and other nervous disorders being amenable to auto-suggestion, and in fact these are the cases which most readily respond to such action. But that a young girl whose mind is perfectly resigned to what she believes to be a mortal disease, and even suffering gladly the inscrutable ordinances of a beneficent Providence, should after five years of such suffering suddenly auto-suggest that there is no organic disease in her body and that she was never better in her life, seems to me to invest the term “auto-suggestion” with a meaning and significance it has never yet held. We have to remember that here there is the certified presence of a virulent organic disease with concomitant functional disorders. Can Dr. Winslow advance other instances of voluntary auto-suggestion which have instantly cured morbid diseases? Yet we are asked to believe that the girl auto-suggested an angelic presence, a voice that spoke to her, hands that touched her, and the surpassing miracle of instant destruction in her body of all disease germs, the restoration of all functional powers and the entire clearing of the system of effete tissues. Then why did she not do so five years earlier, before her forces had been undermined by a wasting disease, and 31when the will-to-be was stronger in her than it can possibly have been at the last hour? We shall soon be asked to believe that Miss Kerin auto-suggested the disease itself. Another instance of your scientific mind, which lacks the humility necessary to say: “I do not know,” and plunges into the most absurd speculations to explain what it does not understand. The mental attitude of that atheist who bowed his head and wept in the presence of the Unknown commands our instant respect and approval, but this foolish theorizing by reputable men of science is only pitiable. And theories in regard to this particular case are not lacking, for we have in turn hypnotic suggestion (the hypnotizer being unnamed because non-existent), collective mental therapeutic action, answer to prayer, and spirit-healing.

Dr. Forbes Winslow believed that the cure was due to auto-suggestion. This seems like a strange conclusion to me. One can understand how conditions like neurasthenia, paralysis, and other nervous disorders can be influenced by auto-suggestion, as these are the cases that often respond best to it. However, the idea that a young girl, whose mind has fully accepted what she believes is a terminal illness, and who endures the mysterious plans of a benevolent Providence with acceptance, could suddenly convince herself after five years of suffering that there is no serious illness in her body and that she has never felt better, seems to give “auto-suggestion” a meaning and significance it has never had before. We must remember that there was a confirmed presence of a severe organic disease and related functional disorders. Can Dr. Winslow provide other examples of voluntary auto-suggestion that have cured serious diseases instantly? Yet, we are expected to believe that the girl auto-suggested an angelic presence, a voice that spoke to her, hands that touched her, and the incredible miracle of the immediate elimination of all disease germs from her body, the restoration of all functional abilities, and the complete removal of all wasted tissues. So why didn’t she do this five years earlier, before her strength was eroded by a debilitating disease, when her desire to be well was stronger than it could possibly have been in her final moments? Soon, we will be asked to believe that Miss Kerin auto-suggested the disease itself. This is another example of a scientific mindset that lacks the humility to say, “I don’t know,” and instead dives into the most ridiculous speculations to explain what it cannot grasp. The mental stance of that atheist who bowed his head and cried in the presence of the Unknown deserves our immediate respect and approval, but this nonsensical theorizing by reputable scientists is simply pitiful. And there is no shortage of theories regarding this specific case, which include hypnotic suggestion (the hypnotist left unnamed because they don’t exist), collective mental therapy, prayer responses, and spiritual healing.

As to collective mental therapy, the same objection is raised as in the case of auto-suggestion. If operative at all in a case of organic disease, it would be more readily efficacious in the early stages, when supported by a reasonable expectancy, than at the last, when all hope had been abandoned. It is true that for some five years prayer had been consistently made on behalf of the patient, and we have certainly no means of proving that this sustained effort was not instrumental in the recovery. But we do know that no mention was made of it by the angelic visitor. The Presence did not say: “We have heard the prayers of the people,” or that it came in answer to prayer. The theory of spirit-healing is by far the most reasonable explanation. It accounts for the 32facts without, however, explaining the means by which the cure was effected.

Regarding group mental therapy, the same objection is raised as with auto-suggestion. If it has any impact at all in cases of physical illness, it would likely be more effective in the early stages, when there’s some reasonable hope, than in the later stages, when all hope is gone. It’s true that for five years, people had been consistently praying for the patient, and we certainly can't prove that this ongoing effort didn’t help in the recovery. However, we do know that the angelic visitor never mentioned it. The Presence didn’t say, “We have heard the people’s prayers,” or that it arrived in response to prayer. The theory of spirit healing is a much more logical explanation. It explains the facts, although it doesn’t clarify how the healing happened. 32

That it is a perfect instance of organic metabolism everybody must admit. Exactly similar cases are difficult to find, and in effect Dr. Ash, who undertook the study of the case after the cure had been performed, is thereby able to give us a most interesting account of what he regards as a unique medical experience. The Lourdes miracles are, as far as I know, all of a nervous character. They pertain to cases where functional disorders arise from nervous corrosion without lesion. Even where there is lesion there may come a time when nervous contact is complete and an instantaneous cure is possible. But in the present case we have deep-seated organic disease of a chronic nature, the existence of morbid tissue and whole tracts of the lungs ruined by the action of noxious germs. So far as our experience goes it would seem that the term “miraculous intervention” fits this case as well as any other that can be offered, and certainly better than many that have been applied to it. It is an old and well-worn term, of a sort to vex the scoffer, but when it comes to a matter of sticking on labels to cover our ignorance of methods, we can at least count upon the willing aid of modern science.

That it's a perfect example of organic metabolism is something everyone should agree on. It's hard to find cases that are exactly the same, and Dr. Ash, who studied the case after the cure was done, can provide us with a really interesting account of what he considers a unique medical experience. As far as I know, all the Lourdes miracles are related to nervous issues. They involve cases where functional disorders come from nervous breakdowns without actual damage. Even when there is damage, there can be a moment when the nervous system is fully connected, making instant healing possible. But in this case, we have serious chronic organic disease, with unhealthy tissue and large areas of the lungs destroyed by harmful germs. Based on our experience, the term “miraculous intervention” seems to describe this case as well as any other, and definitely better than many that have been used. It's an old and overused term that tends to annoy skeptics, but when it comes to labeling things to cover our lack of understanding of the methods involved, we can at least rely on the support of modern science.

For a categorical statement of this case by an independent medical observer I refer the reader to Faith and Suggestion, by Dr. E. L. Ash, and to the précis of that book by the editor of the Occult Review, July 1912.

For a clear statement of this case by an independent medical observer, I direct the reader to Faith and Suggestion by Dr. E. L. Ash, as well as to the summary of that book by the editor of the Occult Review, July 1912.

33

CHAPTER IV
THERAPY—ANCIENT AND MODERN

In old times, when the teachings of Hippocrates were more in vogue than at this date, when Aristotle and Galen and Ibn Sina and Paracelsus made their contributions to contemporary medical science, it was the custom to regard man in terms of the cosmos. They classified all disorders in a comprehensive manner as accidental or incidental, as acute or chronic, as functional or organic. The functional powers were governed by the Moon, the organic constitution by the Sun. Accidental and acute ailments were ascribed to the action of Mars, incidental and chronic disorders to Saturn. Mars was responsible for all inflammatory action and fevers, while Saturn was the cause of all morbid diseases and loss of vitality. It was only a question of the distribution of the vital principle in man, and this, originating in the Sun and regulated by the Moon, induced fevers when in excess and morbid disease when deficient in any organ of the body. Jupiter was the great healer and arbiter of destiny, and it was his aid that the physician invoked when at the head of his prescription he wrote the symbol ℞—Help, O Jupiter!

In ancient times, when Hippocrates' teachings were more popular than they are now, and when Aristotle, Galen, Ibn Sina, and Paracelsus contributed to the medical science of their time, people viewed humans in relation to the cosmos. They categorized all illnesses as accidental or incidental, acute or chronic, functional or organic. The functional aspects were believed to be influenced by the Moon, while the organic constitution was thought to be governed by the Sun. Accidental and acute illnesses were linked to the influence of Mars, while incidental and chronic conditions were attributed to Saturn. Mars was seen as the cause of inflammatory responses and fevers, whereas Saturn was thought to be responsible for serious diseases and diminished vitality. It was mainly about how the vital principle was distributed within a person, originating from the Sun and regulated by the Moon, leading to fevers when excessive and diseases when lacking in any part of the body. Jupiter was considered the great healer and determiner of fate, and physicians called upon him when they marked their prescriptions with the symbol ℞—Help, O Jupiter!

This ancient custom, together with many of the 34terms of ancient usage, is retained by modern physicians, many of whom see no more in it than the letter R, the initial of the word Recipe. But we still speak of chronic diseases, while tracing nothing to the action of Kronos (Saturn). We own to a solar plexus and a semilunar ganglion, and there are many other terms which have survived the practice of putting new names to old facts when some new function or structural peculiarity comes under modern observation. Had the ancients known of the existence of Uranus they would have had a potent cause for paralysis, nervous lesion and similar disturbances of the organism, while in Neptune they would have found the cause of anæmia, consumption and wasting decline, and possibly of neurasthenia and the various effects of nervous depletion.

This old tradition, along with many terms from the past, is carried on by today's doctors, many of whom only see it as the letter R, which stands for the word Recipe. Yet we still talk about chronic diseases, while not linking them to the actions of Kronos (Saturn). We acknowledge a solar plexus and a semilunar ganglion, and there are many other terms that have survived despite the trend of renaming old concepts when new functions or structural features are discovered in modern times. If the ancients had known about Uranus, they would have identified a strong cause for paralysis, nerve damage, and similar issues with the body, while they would have found Neptune as the source of anemia, tuberculosis, and gradual decline, and possibly even neurasthenia and the various effects of nervous exhaustion.

But who shall say, without making trial of the matter, that the ancients were at fault in regarding man as embodied cosmos, a compound of the free elements in the universe about him, or wrong in interpreting his various disorders in terms of the stellar ambient? It is, at all events, just worth notice that at the birth of Miss Dorothy Kerin, on the 28th November, 1890, the Sun, Venus and Mercury were in quadrature to Saturn and in opposition to Neptune, while on the 18th February, 1912, Jupiter was in the 13th degree of Sagittarius, the very degree of the zodiac that was rising at her birth. The odds against this coincidence are 4,319 to 1. If it were a solitary example of what is said to be the beneficent influence of Jupiter in the saving of 35life it would not be so significant, but from the array of evidence accumulated by modern observations and retrogressive calculation, it is quite clear that the ancients were justified in their ascriptions in the case of Jupiter. Possibly it is not to the planetary orb itself but to the cosmic synthesis represented by it in our physical and mental constitution that appeal is made. Be that as it may, and while asserting the fact of planetary influence in human life without fear of contradiction I am not in a position to dogmatize as to the modus operandi, it is yet evident that there is a concert of action between the various cosmic centres and their corresponding principles in ourselves, such as to uphold the theosophic concept of man as Microcosmos.

But who can say, without testing the idea, that the ancients were wrong in seeing man as a representation of the cosmos, a combination of the free elements in the universe around him, or in interpreting his various problems in relation to the stars? It’s worth noting that at the birth of Miss Dorothy Kerin, on the 28th of November, 1890, the Sun, Venus, and Mercury were in quadrature to Saturn and in opposition to Neptune. Then, on the 18th of February, 1912, Jupiter was in the 13th degree of Sagittarius, which was precisely the degree of the zodiac rising at her birth. The odds against this coincidence are 4,319 to 1. If it were the only instance of what is said to be Jupiter's beneficial influence in matters of life, it wouldn’t hold as much significance, but the evidence collected through modern observations and retrospective calculations clearly shows that the ancients were justified in their views regarding Jupiter. Perhaps it’s not just about the planet itself but the cosmic synthesis it represents in our physical and mental makeup that matters. Be that as it may, while I can confidently state that planetary influence exists in human life, I cannot assert how it works. However, it's evident that there is a coordinated response between various cosmic centers and their associated principles within ourselves, which supports the theosophical idea of man as a Microcosmos.

I have just been speaking of cancer as a morbid disease. It was known to the ancients and by them named after that sign of the zodiac which responds to the zone most frequently affected by the disease, namely, the breast and stomach. It has already been shown that Saturn was accounted the chief cause of disease. Napoleon Buonaparte died of cancer, and at his birth we find Saturn in the sign Cancer in opposition to the Moon. On the principle that one swallow does not make a summer, I leave the observation for what it may be worth, but it is satisfactory if we can recognize a swallow when we see it. We are on the way to distinguish between martins and swifts, and between house and sand martins, and thus forefended from building our house upon the sand. For although Occultism deals with an order of facts outside the normal 36range of orthodox science its methods are equally scientific, both analytical and constructive. If we take the horoscopes of a number of persons whose fatal illness was of the same nature and compare them, we shall find a factor that is common to them all. The existence of this factor in the horoscope of a living person is a presumptive argument for “tendency” to the same disease. If in event that person develops the particular malady indicated by the horoscope, we have at once a scientific basis for a system of astro-therapy and a valid means of prognosis.

I have just been talking about cancer as a serious illness. It was known to the ancients and named after the zodiac sign that corresponds to the areas most commonly affected by the disease, specifically the breast and stomach. It has already been shown that Saturn was considered the main cause of illness. Napoleon Bonaparte died from cancer, and at his birth, we see Saturn in the sign Cancer opposing the Moon. Following the idea that one swallow doesn’t make a summer, I’ll leave this observation for whatever it’s worth, but it’s reassuring if we can recognize a swallow when we see one. We are getting better at distinguishing between martins and swifts, and between house and sand martins, thus protecting ourselves from building our house on sand. Although Occultism deals with facts outside the normal range of traditional science, its methods are equally scientific, both analytical and constructive. If we look at the horoscopes of several people whose terminal illness was the same and compare them, we will find a common factor among them all. The presence of this factor in the horoscope of a living person suggests a "tendency" toward the same disease. If that person later develops the specific illness indicated by the horoscope, we instantly have a scientific foundation for a system of astro-therapy and a valid way to predict outcomes.

Assuming that the astrologers have been as busy in their special department of research as have the representatives of other branches of learning in theirs, it may reasonably be expected that with an equal body of tradition behind them and an equal field of experimental research before them, they have arrived at conclusions of which they are as sure as any scientific man can be in regard to any matter. To ignore their statements or to disparage them without test appears to me to be wholly prejudicial to the interests of truth and most likely to reflect upon the scientific integrity of those who pursue either course, for as the old philosopher says: “Where confidence is lacking it is not met by trust.”

Assuming that astrologers have been as dedicated to their research as other scholars have been to theirs, it’s reasonable to expect that with the same amount of tradition supporting them and similar opportunities for experimental research ahead, they have reached conclusions they are as confident in as any scientist would be about any topic. To ignore their findings or to belittle them without any testing seems completely damaging to the pursuit of truth and likely undermines the scientific integrity of those who take either stance. As the old philosopher said: “Where confidence is lacking, it is not met by trust.”

In regard to the faculty of auto-suggestion in connection with psychotherapy; it has been suggested that this faculty depends on the activity of the subconscious sphere of the mind. It is seen that all action is either purposive or automatic. All 37purposive action tends to become habitual, and to the extent that it becomes so, it passes from the region of mind-control into the subconscious region where it is capable of itself controlling the mind. We then recognize what is called the “force of habit.” But it is further suggested that the activity of the subconscious part of the mind-sphere is at its maximum when we are asleep, whether natural or hypnotic. Certainly it is a fact that at a particular stage in hypnosis the subject passes out of the power of the hypnotist to control and assumes an activity of mental function which is remarkable both as to range and precision. But the facts seem to suggest something more than mere automatism, for while the patient remains subject to suggestion there is evidence of something more than the discharge of accumulated impressions. The subject is not found to be blundering about in the lumber-room of the mind, searching for odd bits of stuff that will answer the purpose in view, but is seen to exhibit direct perception of things as they are, the power to traverse space and to annihilate time, and to come into voluntary and conscious relations with the past and the future as if they coexisted and had a present reality. Many cases are on record. A single well-attested case would have sufficed.

In terms of the ability of auto-suggestion in relation to psychotherapy, it has been proposed that this ability relies on the activity of the subconscious mind. It's clear that all actions are either intentional or automatic. All intentional actions tend to become habits, and as they do, they shift from being controlled by the conscious mind to being governed by the subconscious, which then can control the mind on its own. This is what we refer to as the "force of habit." It's also suggested that the activity of the subconscious mind is at its peak when we are asleep, whether naturally or through hypnosis. Indeed, at a certain stage of hypnosis, the subject moves beyond the hypnotist's control and demonstrates a level of mental activity that is impressive in both scope and accuracy. However, the evidence indicates that there's more going on than just automatic behavior, as the person remains responsive to suggestions, showing signs of more than just retrieving past experiences. The subject doesn’t seem to be fumbling around in the mind’s clutter for random bits of information that fit the current need; instead, they display direct awareness of reality, the ability to navigate space and transcend time, and can engage with both the past and future as if they coexist in the present. There are many documented cases of this phenomenon. Just one well-documented case would have been sufficient.

These facts have given us grounds for establishing a theory of psychism very closely akin to the teaching of the Occultists. It is that the mind-sphere or soul is divided into two hemispheres, one of which is on the level of normal consciousness and the other below it. The nous or mind is then seen to be 38energized from above by the pneuma through inspiration, and from below by the psyche through instinct. Intuition and instinct, or inspiration and passion, are thus at opposite poles of the mind-sphere, and appeal can be made to either by suggestion through the sphere of the mind. We trace these opposite aspects of the mind in the Oversoul and the animal soul of the mystical schools, the augoeides and antinous of the earlier teaching. In the Yoga system they are the Buddhic and Kamic principles, the centres of spiritual knowledge and of animal desires respectively, the process of Yoga being to bring these opposite poles of our nature into active accord.

These facts have led us to develop a theory of psychism that closely aligns with the teachings of the Occultists. It suggests that the mind or soul is divided into two parts: one that operates at the level of normal consciousness and another that exists below it. The us or mind is then energized from above by the spirit through inspiration, and from below by the mind through instinct. Intuition and instinct, or inspiration and passion, are therefore at opposite ends of the mind, and we can access either through suggestion in the mind's realm. We can observe these opposing aspects of the mind in the Oversoul and the animal soul as described in mystical schools, referred to as the augoeides and Antinous in earlier teachings. In the Yoga system, they correspond to the Buddhic and Kamic principles, which represent centers of spiritual knowledge and animal desires, respectively. The practice of Yoga aims to harmonize these opposing aspects of our nature.

There are on record a fairly large number of instances in which it appears that either one’s subliminal consciousness or an extraneous intelligence affords prescience of things in which one is not particularly interested and for which there is no special call. Persons have thus been given the winning numbers in lotteries without, at the same time, being given the means of participating in the benefits attaching thereto. An instance quite pertinent to the general accusation of futility lodged against this class of intelligence came to my notice on the 2nd of April, 1912. A lady, on awaking that morning, exclaimed, “Number twenty-nine will win!” Asked as to whether it was a number in a lottery she at once replied: “No, it’s a horse.” Some cudgelling of brains failed to suggest any means by which the information could be applied. The problem was, however, successfully solved by 39a twelve-year-old girl who took the morning paper in hand, counted from the first name of the opening event in the programme for the day, exhausted the names in that event and continued into the second event until she arrived at number 29, against which was the name “Primrose Morn.” Obviously it had no connection with the 2nd of April, but on reflection it was remembered that the lady was born, on the 29th of the month and was engaged to be married on Primrose Morn. Immediately below this name in the list of competitors was “Marie’s Choice,” and the lady’s name is Marie. The coincidence was completed by the winning of the Bestwood Park Plate by “Primrose Morn.” Reference to the morning papers of the 2nd of April last will enable the reader to check this statement. The rising and bursting of these bubbles of subconscious activity appear to be quite automatic and in most instances without purpose or utility. They serve, however, to demonstrate the fact that there is such a source of inspiration, a submerged selfhood in touch with the anima mundi or world-soul, upon which we can at all times call for information and aid. The purpose of Occultism is to put us in the way of doing this when and as we please. From the point of view of the world-soul, the future and the past are coexistent. Every race is already run, every event is historical. This gives a new and a higher meaning to the old saying: The future is only the past unfolded. As the old Philosopher says: Tsae yin jo fang—all truth is paradoxical.

There’s a pretty significant number of recorded cases where it seems that either our subconscious mind or an outside intelligence gives us insight into things we don’t particularly care about and that we have no special reason to know. People have been told the winning lottery numbers without having any means to benefit from it. A relevant example that illustrates this idea came to my attention on April 2, 1912. A woman woke up that morning and exclaimed, “Number twenty-nine will win!” When asked if it was a lottery number, she immediately said, “No, it’s a horse.” After some thought, we couldn’t figure out how to use that information. However, a twelve-year-old girl successfully solved the mystery. She took the morning paper, started counting from the first name of the opening event in the day’s program, went through all the names in that event, and continued into the second event until she reached number 29, which was the horse named “Primrose Morn.” While it didn’t seem related to April 2, we later realized that the woman’s birthday was on the 29th, and she was engaged to be married on Primrose Morn. Right below that horse on the competitors’ list was “Marie’s Choice,” which was quite fitting since the lady's name is Marie. The coincidence was further solidified when “Primrose Morn” won the Bestwood Park Plate. A look at the morning papers from April 2 will confirm this. The rise and fall of these subconscious insights appear to be rather automatic and typically lack purpose or utility. However, they do demonstrate that there is a source of inspiration—an unconscious self connected to the world-soul, which we can call upon for information and assistance at any time. The goal of Occultism is to teach us how to access this whenever we choose. From the perspective of the world-soul, the future and past exist simultaneously. Every race is already run, and every event is historical. This gives a fresh and deeper understanding of the old saying: The future is just the past revealed. As the old philosopher said: Tsae yin jo fang—all truth is paradoxical.

Another interesting feature of the psychic principle 40in us is that of the projection of the ethereal double or wraith. It is recorded of Goethe that he had a vision of himself, or rather of his double, on more than one occasion. It is well known that he had the faculty of exteriorization of thought, the projecting of visible thought-forms, in a remarkable degree. This faculty of Kriyas’akti is cultivated by the yogis of India, and forms an important feature in all occult training. The poet Shelley frequently effected “exteriorization” and was seen by Byron and Trelawney and by his wife on more than one occasion to be visibly present when it was certain that he was some distance away from the scene. Many such cases are on record and will be found included in Real Ghost Stories, and More Ghost Stories, published by the late William T. Stead. I know a yogi in India who has been certified to be visibly present in four places at the same time. Even allowing for slight errors of observation in regard to time, the fact is remarkable, especially as there had been no suggestion of pre-arrangement. The theory of “expectancy” would not therefore cover the ground.

Another interesting thing about the psychic principle in us is the projection of the ethereal double or wraith. It's noted that Goethe experienced a vision of himself, or rather his double, on more than one occasion. He was known to have the ability to exteriorize thoughts, projecting visible thought-forms to an extraordinary degree. This ability of Kriyas'akti is practiced by yogis in India and is an essential aspect of occult training. The poet Shelley often managed “exteriorization” and was seen by Byron, Trelawney, and his wife on several occasions when he was clearly far away from the scene. Many such instances are recorded in Real Ghost Stories and More Ghost Stories, published by the late William T. Stead. I know a yogi in India who has been confirmed to be visibly present in four different places at the same time. Even considering slight errors in timing, this fact is remarkable, especially since there was no suggestion of pre-arrangement. The theory of “expectancy” wouldn’t account for this.

A correspondent sends me the following certified experiences of psychic self-projection—

A correspondent shares with me the following verified experiences of psychic self-projection—

“I intended visiting a great friend (who is psychic when I am with her), twenty-five miles away, from Saturday to Monday. On the previous Tuesday night I could not sleep at all; still wide awake at 3 a.m. I suddenly thought of Miss H——, and instantly was in her dining-room, in thought, saw vividly furniture, etc., and felt beside me her dear 41dead mother (my friend). I thought we both went upstairs together to the ‘spare room’ I usually occupy when visiting. We went into the room, and I walked straight to the window, held the curtains back with my hands and looked out, then, turned and looked at the bed, surprised to find Miss H—— in it, instead of her own room; turned to the door and came out of my ‘brown study’ to find myself in my own bed at home.

“I planned to visit a close friend (who is psychic when I’m with her), twenty-five miles away, from Saturday to Monday. The previous Tuesday night, I couldn’t sleep at all; still wide awake at 3 a.m., I suddenly thought of Miss H——, and instantly I was in her dining room, mentally seeing the furniture and everything, and felt her dear deceased mother (my friend) beside me. I imagined we both went upstairs to the spare room I usually stay in when I visit. We entered the room, and I walked straight to the window, pulled the curtains back with my hands, and looked out. Then I turned and looked at the bed, surprised to find Miss H—— in it, instead of her own room; I turned to the door and came out of my 'brown study' to find myself in my own bed at home.”

“When I visited her on Saturday she said: ‘About 3 a.m. last Tuesday I wished you in your own home; I slept in the spare room that night for a change, and could not sleep; I felt you and my mother were downstairs, and distinctly saw you both come into the room. You went straight to the window, parted the curtains with your hands, and looked out, then turned your head and looked surprised to see me in the bed and walked out of the room.’”

“When I visited her on Saturday, she said, ‘Around 3 a.m. last Tuesday, I wished you were at your own home. I slept in the spare room that night to switch things up, but I couldn’t sleep. I felt you and my mom were downstairs, and I clearly saw you both come into the room. You went straight to the window, pulled back the curtains with your hands, and looked outside. Then you turned your head, seemed surprised to see me in the bed, and walked out of the room.’”

Now, I had said nothing about my “psychic visit.” Yet in every detail it was authenticated at the other end!

Now, I hadn't mentioned anything about my "psychic visit." But every detail was verified on the other side!

One night I dreamed I felt nervous (it was a brilliant moonlit night), and that I would go into the next room and see if M—— was awake for company. I went in my nightdress, barefooted, and distinctly shivered with cold. I found M—— sound asleep, so did not awaken her. Wondering what time it might be, I walked to the mantelpiece, where she keeps her little clock; it was not there, but on a chair near the bed. I made out fifteen minutes past something, but the moon was not now so brilliant I thought. 42Then feeling very chilly, I dreamed I returned to my bed. I awoke with a shock (the shock of returning to my body?) feeling sure I had been there. My watch pointed to 4.15. My body was perfectly warm, so it could not have been sleep-walking; it was very frosty. Next morning at breakfast I said: “Where do you keep your little clock?”

One night I dreamt I felt anxious (it was a beautiful moonlit night), and I decided to go to the next room to see if M—— was awake and up for some company. I went in my nightgown, barefoot, and I definitely shivered from the cold. I found M—— sound asleep, so I didn’t wake her. Curious about the time, I walked over to the mantel, where she keeps her little clock; it wasn't there, but on a chair near the bed. I could make out that it was fifteen minutes past something, but the moonlight wasn’t as bright as before, I thought. 42Feeling really cold, I dreamt I went back to my bed. I woke up with a start (the surprise of coming back to my body?) feeling certain I had been there. My watch showed 4:15. My body felt perfectly warm, so I couldn’t have been sleepwalking; it was really frosty outside. The next morning at breakfast, I asked, “Where do you keep your little clock?”

M—— said: “Usually on the mantelpiece, but it is a good way from the bed these frosty mornings, so last night I put it on a chair near my bed-head.”

M—— said: “Usually it’s on the mantelpiece, but it’s quite a distance from the bed on these chilly mornings, so last night I set it on a chair close to my headboard.”

She also said: “I had a curious feeling when I awoke this morning that your presence had been in my room during the night.”

She also said, “I had a strange feeling when I woke up this morning that you had been in my room during the night.”

These experiences undoubtedly show the power of the human mind to take form and to effect visible self-presentation at a distance. It is presumptive evidence for the existence of a mind-form or karana-sharira, which if temporarily separable from the physical centres of consciousness, may be so separated permanently at the moment of death, and thus assume independent and conscious existence in a world inhering in its consciousness. While affording a priori argument in favour of a reasonable belief in post-mortem existence, it does not prove immortality. The two cases stand upon entirely different grounds and require distinctive evidence. I know that after the butterfly has emerged from the chrysalis it has independent existence and that it is neither grub nor chrysalis, but a potentiality that has become realized in a new order of being. But I also know that the butterfly comes to an end. Our 43problem is concerned with the soul of the butterfly and what becomes of it thereafter. The case is not identical but merely analogous. The human evolution is presumably a good many stages beyond that of the lepidoptera.

These experiences clearly demonstrate the power of the human mind to shape and create visible self-presentation from a distance. They provide suggestive evidence for the existence of a mind-form or subtle body, which, if it can be temporarily separated from the physical centers of consciousness, might also be permanently separated at the moment of death, thereby achieving independent and conscious existence in a realm tied to its awareness. While this offers before experience support for a reasonable belief in life after death, it does not confirm immortality. The two situations are based on completely different foundations and need separate evidence. I know that after a butterfly emerges from its chrysalis, it exists independently and is no longer a caterpillar or a chrysalis, but rather a potential that has transformed into a new form of existence. However, I also understand that the butterfly eventually comes to an end. Our 43 inquiry is about the soul of the butterfly and what happens to it afterward. The situation is not identical but merely similar. Human evolution is likely many stages ahead of that of the butterflies.

Yet I find it quite the usual thing, especially among Spiritualists, to regard evidence of post-mortem existence as equivalent to evidence for immortality. Occultism, in common with all the great Religions, teaches that post-mortem existence is natural and imperative, while immortality is spiritual and conditional. If the shell of a nut be broken the kernel will continue to exist as nut for a considerable time. It is thus with the psychoplasm after separation from the physical body or shell. It is said of those who have attained: These are they over whom the second death hath no power. The tendency to regard all that is not physical as being spiritual in its nature and constitution, is one of the greatest fallacies to which modern interpreters of psychic phenomena have contributed. A change in the sphere of activity does not involve change of character, nor does it determine the degree of spiritual consciousness of the individual. That is a matter of evolution, of knowledge and devotion. The confessed ignorance of discarnate intelligences upon matters mundane and spiritual is sufficient evidence of this fact.

Yet I find it quite common, especially among Spiritualists, to see evidence of life after death as the same as evidence for immortality. Occultism, like all the major religions, teaches that life after death is natural and necessary, while immortality is spiritual and conditional. If the shell of a nut is broken, the kernel will continue to exist as a nut for quite a while. It's similar with the psychoplasm after separating from the physical body or shell. It is said of those who have attained: These are they over whom the second death has no power. The tendency to view everything that is not physical as being spiritual in nature is one of the biggest misconceptions that modern interpreters of psychic phenomena have contributed to. A change in the area of activity doesn't change character, nor does it determine the level of spiritual awareness of the individual. That is a matter of evolution, knowledge, and devotion. The acknowledged ignorance of disembodied intelligences about both mundane and spiritual matters is enough evidence of this fact.

44

CHAPTER V
THE STAR OF BETHLEHEM

There is one star above all others which periodically sheds its light upon the world, but about which very little is known, and on the occult significance of which little or no light has been hitherto shed. I refer to what is popularly, and as I shall show, correctly known as the Star of Bethlehem.

There is one star that stands out from all the others, shining its light on the world at certain times, yet not much is known about it, and very little has been revealed about its hidden significance. I'm talking about what is commonly, and as I will demonstrate, accurately called the Star of Bethlehem.

I propose to bring the facts into review with the intention of finally establishing the place of this star in cosmical symbology, and also of showing its connection with the central fact of the Christian religion—the Nativity.

I want to take a look at the facts to finally establish the significance of this star in cosmic symbolism, and also to demonstrate its connection to the central tenet of the Christian religion—the Nativity.

The Star is due to make its appearance during the present century, but at what precise date cannot be determined, owing to lack of data. It was seen in the year 945, again in 1264, and by Tycho in 1572, and after becoming visible in the daytime, so great was its lustre, it gradually faded away and disappeared. Sir J. Herschel thought from these facts, that it would reappear in 1872, but such was not the case. The appearance of a large luminous star in Perseus at the beginning of this century led to the belief that it was the long-expected visitant. The body, which was named Nova Persei, was eventually considered by astronomers 45to be a centre of disruption, on account of its sudden flaring up and disappearance. It may have been this or a collision of two telescopic stars. Tycho tells us that the Star gradually grew in luminosity until it outshone Sirius and even Venus, and as gradually disappeared. This seems to suggest a star of great eccentricity and vast orbit, whose major axis is at right angles to the sphere of visibility, so that it appears to us “end on.” It would thus grow and gradually disappear, without any sensible alteration of its position in the heavens, as here depicted—

The Star is expected to show up sometime in this century, but we can't pinpoint when exactly because we don't have enough information. It was spotted in 945, again in 1264, and by Tycho in 1572. After becoming visible during the day due to its brightness, it eventually faded and vanished. Sir J. Herschel believed that based on these events, it would reappear in 1872, but that didn't happen. The appearance of a bright star in Perseus at the start of this century led to the idea that it could be the long-awaited visitor. This star, which was named Nova Persei, was later thought by astronomers to be a center of disruption because of its sudden brightness and disappearance. It might have been this or the result of a collision between two telescopic stars. Tycho noted that the Star gradually became brighter until it outshone Sirius and even Venus, and then it slowly faded away. This suggests that it's a star with a highly eccentric and vast orbit, whose major axis is perpendicular to our line of sight, making it appear to us "end on." Thus, it would brighten and then slowly disappear without any noticeable change in its position in the sky, as depicted here—

Figure 1.

Figure 1.

Figure 1.

It is of interest to note that mythology connects the Star with Cassiopeia, Andromeda her daughter, and Perseus the husband of Andromeda. These three constellations are in close proximity to one 46another in the heavens; together with Cepheus, the husband of Cassiopeia and father of Andromeda.

It’s interesting to point out that mythology links the Star to Cassiopeia, her daughter Andromeda, and Andromeda’s husband Perseus. These three constellations are located close to each other in the sky, along with Cepheus, who is Cassiopeia’s husband and Andromeda’s father. 46

The Star appeared above “the head of Andromeda,” according to Tycho, which would give it about 32° of N. declination, and thus make its appearance vertical to the latitude of Bethlehem in Judea. The sign of the zodiac coinciding with its longitude would thus be Aries, which according to Ptolemy rules over Judea. It is the Oriental sign and stands in relation to the cardinal points thus—

The Star appeared above “the head of Andromeda,” according to Tycho, which would give it about 32° of N. declination, making its appearance straight up from the latitude of Bethlehem in Judea. The zodiac sign matching its longitude would be Aries, which, according to Ptolemy, rules over Judea. It is the Eastern sign and relates to the cardinal points like this—

Figure 2.

Figure 2.

Figure 2.

This observation satisfies the requirements of that passage where the Magi are reported to have said: “We have seen his Star in the East, and have come to worship Him.” Then if a geographical quarter was referred to by “the East,” why should they travel westward from Persia to Judea? Obviously they referred to the quarter of the Heavens, and, being Astrologers, would well know that Judea was signified by Aries, in which sign the Star made its appearance. Its “standing over the house where 47the child lay,” indicates its position in the zenith of Bethlehem at the time of its southing, the latitude of Bethlehem being 31° 43´ N. in agreement with the observed position of the Star in Tycho’s day.

This observation meets the criteria of that passage where the Magi reportedly said: “We have seen his Star in the East, and have come to worship Him.” So, if they were referring to a geographical location by “the East,” why would they travel west from Persia to Judea? Clearly, they were talking about a direction in the sky, and as Astrologers, they would know that Judea was represented by Aries, the sign in which the Star appeared. Its “standing over the house where 47the child lay” shows its position at the zenith of Bethlehem when it reached its highest point, with Bethlehem’s latitude being 31° 43´ N, consistent with the observed position of the Star in Tycho’s time.

Now regarding the year of the Nativity, we know that it was in the same year as the death of Herod. This event can be fixed. Josephus, in his Antiquities, lib. xvii, mentions an eclipse that took place on the night preceding one of the fasts, and which was immediately followed by the last illness of Herod. We know from the same source that Herod reigned thirty-four years after the death of Antipater, and thirty-seven from the beginning of his reign. The date is further fixed by the statement that this latter event took place in the 184th Olympiad, and we hence get the year of Rome 714 or 39 B.C., and the year of the eclipse would therefore be 3 B.C. The same author says that after mourning Herod for seven days, the feast of the Passover was approaching, and as this was always held on the 14th of Abib or Nisan, which is the first full Moon after the Equinox, we are able to confirm the date as the 13th March. At this date it is found that there is a considerable eclipse of the Moon as shown by the following calculation (see p. 48).

Now about the year of Jesus's birth, we know it coincided with the death of Herod. This event can be pinpointed. Josephus, in his Antiquities, lib. xvii, mentions an eclipse that occurred on the night before one of the fasts, which was immediately followed by Herod's final illness. From the same source, we learn that Herod ruled for thirty-four years after Antipater's death and thirty-seven years from the start of his reign. The timeline is further narrowed down by noting that this latter event took place in the 184th Olympiad, leading us to the year 714 of Rome or 39 BCE, which places the eclipse in 3 BCE. The same author indicates that after mourning Herod for seven days, the Passover festival was approaching, and since this was always celebrated on the 14th of Abib or Nisan, the first full Moon after the Equinox, we can confirm the date as the 13th of March. On that date, there was a significant eclipse of the Moon, as detailed in the following calculation (see p. 48).

The Sun being 7° 34´ from the Node, the extent of the eclipse would be nearly five digits, and the Moon would be about two-thirds down the western sky and in the south-west quarter of the heavens. It is of interest also to note that the Moon was 48eclipsed in the sign Virgo, which the ancients say rules Jerusalem, where Herod the Tetrarch died.

The Sun is 7° 34´ from the Node, so the length of the eclipse would be almost five digits, and the Moon would be about two-thirds of the way down in the western sky, located in the south-west. It's also worth mentioning that the Moon was eclipsed in the sign of Virgo, which the ancients believed governs Jerusalem, the place where Herod the Tetrarch died. 48

In the R.C. Festes we are told that the death of Herod took place before the Passover and after the eclipse of 13th March, so that the date appears to be very well established.

In the R.C. Festes, it is stated that Herod died before Passover and after the eclipse of the 13th of March, which makes the date seem quite well established.

Eclipse of the Moon, March 13, 3 B.C. (astron.)

Eclipse of the Moon, March 13, 3 B.C. (astron.)

From Epoch New Moon March 1797

From Epoch New Moon March 1797

March Sun-Node Moon’s Anom. Sun’s Anom.
D. H. M. s. °. . s. °. ’. s. °. ’.
1797 16  9 12 9  9 10 2 12 39 8 26 26
½ lun. 14 18 22 0 15 20 6 12 54 0 14 33
  ———————— ——————— ——————— ———————
  31  3 34 9 24 30 8 25 33 9 10 59
  ———————— ——————— ——————— ———————
1800—) 19  0 32 9 18 59 7 17 19 0  1 31
  ———————— ——————— ——————— ———————
Equats. 12  3  2 0  5 31 1  8 14 9  9 28
a +4  6 +2  3 1 34  
    ——————— ———————  
A+a -1 0  7 34 1  9 48  
A-a +2      
+6 37      
  ————————      
  12 13 46      
i.e., March 13, at 4.46 a.m. G.M.T.
E. long. 2.22 Jerusalem.
————
4. 8 a.m.

Luke also gives confirmatory evidence, and the account is very circumstantial. The Evangelist mentions Tiberius Cæsar by name, and also the Governors of the Provinces, as well as many dates. From him we learn that the Mother had good reason to be in or near Bethlehem at that time, because there was a registration or census under 49Augustus which was fixed for the First of Tishri, when the Jewish civil year commenced. In the same month was the feast of Tabernacles, an additional reason for the journey. Bethlehem was their objective, “because they were of the house and lineage of David,” who was born at Bethlehem. Now the 1st Tishri would fall in that year on 19th September. At this time there would be “shepherds abiding in the fields by night,” that being the hot season. The 25th December is, of course, an impossible date.

Luke also provides supporting evidence, and the details are very specific. The Evangelist names Tiberius Caesar as well as the Governors of the Provinces, along with several dates. From him, we learn that the Mother had a good reason to be in or near Bethlehem at that time because there was a registration or census set for the First of Tishri, when the Jewish civil year began. In the same month was the Feast of Tabernacles, which added another reason for the journey. Bethlehem was their destination, “because they were from the house and lineage of David,” who was born in Bethlehem. The 1st Tishri would fall on the 19th of September that year. During this time, there would be “shepherds living in the fields at night,” as it was the hot season. The 25th of December is, of course, an impossible date.

I now take my cue from the Apocalypse: “A woman clothed with the Sun and the Moon under her feet. And she brought forth the Man-child who should rule the nations with a rod of iron.”

I now take my cue from the Apocalypse: “A woman clothed with the Sun and the Moon under her feet. And she gave birth to the Man-child who would rule the nations with a rod of iron.”

The Sun in the middle of the sign Virgo is the woman clothed with the Sun. To be “clothed” with the solar rays the luminary must be in the middle of the sign and neither just entering it nor just leaving it. The “Moon under its feet” signifies a full Moon, when the lunar orb was in the opposite point of the zodiac, namely, the middle of Pisces. “A rod of iron” indicates that the Man-child was born under the planet Mars, i. e. under the rising of the sign ascribed to the government of that planet. We have to construct a horoscope which, while in actual accord with astronomical facts, exhibits these features.

The Sun in the center of the sign Virgo represents the woman dressed in solar rays. To be “dressed” with the sunlight, the luminary needs to be in the center of the sign and not just entering or exiting it. The “Moon under her feet” indicates a full Moon, which occurs when the Moon is in the opposite part of the zodiac, specifically, the center of Pisces. “A rod of iron” signifies that the Man-child was born under the planet Mars, meaning under the influence of the sign associated with its governance. We need to create a horoscope that aligns with astronomical facts while showcasing these characteristics.

We have already seen that the full Moon of March fell on the 13th, and if to this we add the values for six lunations, we shall have the full Moon of September in the year 4 B.C., thus—

We have already seen that the full Moon of March was on the 13th, and if we add the values for six lunar cycles, we will arrive at the full Moon of September in 4 BCE, like this—

50
D. H. M. s. °. . s. °. ’. s. °. ’.
March 12 3  2 0  5 31 1  8 14 9  9 28
6 luns. 177 4 24 6  4  1 5  4 54 5 24 38
  ———————— ——————— —————— ———————
  189 7 26 6  9 32 6 13  8 3  4  6
    2  4 -1 35 Sun’s
        Anomaly.
    ——————— ———————  
A+a -1 6 11 36 6 11 33  
A-A +2 Sun from Moon’s  
A’ -1 50 Node. Anomaly.  
  ————————      
  189 5 37      

or Sept. 5, at 5.37 p.m. G.M.T.

or Sept. 5, at 5:37 p.m. GMT

This is equal to 7.58 p.m. at Jerusalem, and the position of the Sun informs us that there was an eclipse of the Moon of about 4½ digits. The Sun would be in the middle of Virgo, and hence the woman would be literally “clothed with the Sun.”

This is equal to 7.58 p.m. in Jerusalem, and the position of the Sun indicates that there was a lunar eclipse of about 4½ digits. The Sun would be positioned in the middle of Virgo, so the woman would literally be “clothed with the Sun.”

Virgo, being the birth-sign, or that which the Sun occupied, it comes to be associated symbolically with Bethlehem, or Beit-lachm, i. e. the House of Bread, for Virgo is none other than Ceres, the goddess of the harvest of cereals, and is associated with Isis by the Egyptians, as Leo with Osiris and Aries with Horus.

Virgo, as the sign of birth, or the sign that the Sun was in, is symbolically linked to Bethlehem, or Beit Lachm, i. e. the House of Bread. This is because Virgo is essentially Ceres, the goddess of cereal harvests, and is associated with Isis by the Egyptians, just as Leo is associated with Osiris and Aries with Horus.

This Horus is the Man-child, ruled by Mars or Vulcan, the Roman god of fire and iron, the husband of Venus or Aphrodite.

This Horus is the Man-child, ruled by Mars or Vulcan, the Roman god of fire and iron, the husband of Venus or Aphrodite.

Astrologically Mars is associated with the sign Aries, and under the rising of this sign the Nativity would take place, and with Aries rising the Sun would be below the western horizon and in opposition to the eclipsed Moon, the latter being conjoined with Uranus in Pisces, and the sign Aries with the constellation Andromeda, and the Star of Bethlehem in the orient. Saturn and Jupiter were then in 51close conjunction in the beginning of the sign Taurus, Mars just entered, into Leo, Mercury towards the end of that sign, Venus setting as an “evening star” in Libra 22°, and Neptune in the sign Scorpio.

Astrologically, Mars is linked to the sign Aries, and under this sign's influence, the birth chart would be formed. With Aries rising, the Sun would be below the western horizon and opposite the eclipsed Moon, which is aligned with Uranus in Pisces. Aries is also connected to the constellation Andromeda and the Star of Bethlehem in the east. At that time, Saturn and Jupiter were in close conjunction at the beginning of Taurus, Mars had just moved into Leo, Mercury was near the end of that sign, Venus was setting as the “evening star” in Libra at 22°, and Neptune was in Scorpio.

Here we find Mars, the ruling planet in the sign Leo, ruling Judah, hence Jesus is referred to as the Lion of the Tribe of Judah. The prophecy of Jacob was that Judah should be as a lion crouching down. “A sceptre shall not depart from Judah nor a law-giver (Cepheus) from between his feet, until Shuleh come.” This Shuleh is the name of the star Cor Scorpio on whose rising Leo declines from the position of meridian power. It is in accord with the universal symbology that here in the sign Scorpio we find the planet Neptune in the 8th division of the heavens, signifying “betrayal unto death.” The Moon, ruler of the 4th House, conjoined with Uranus in the 12th House, in opposition to the Sun is an additional indication of an untimely end, and that on account of secret enmity. The sign Scorpio is associated with the principle of evil and is called the accursed sign. The tribe of Dan, to whose lot this division fell, substituted the symbol of its antiscion, Aquila, the eagle, on that account. Among the disciples it was connected with Judas Iscariot.

Here we find Mars, the ruling planet in the sign Leo, which governs Judah, making Jesus known as the Lion of the Tribe of Judah. Jacob prophesied that Judah would be like a lion crouching down. “A sceptre shall not depart from Judah, nor a lawgiver (Cepheus) from between his feet, until Shuleh comes.” Shuleh is the name of the star Cor Scorpio, which indicates when Leo shifts away from its peak power. According to universal symbolism, in the sign Scorpio, we see the planet Neptune in the 8th division of the heavens, meaning “betrayal unto death.” The Moon, which rules the 4th House, is aligned with Uranus in the 12th House, opposite the Sun, indicating an untimely end due to hidden hostility. The sign Scorpio is linked with the concept of evil and is referred to as the accursed sign. The tribe of Dan, assigned to this division, replaced the symbol of its antiscion, Aquila, the eagle, for that reason. Among the disciples, it was associated with Judas Iscariot.

The Pascal full Moon of A.D. 33 fell on 3rd April at 2° 55´ G.M.T., the Sun being about 6½° from the Node. The time at Jerusalem was 5.16 p.m.—“about the sixth hour.” The Sun was then close to the Star in Aries, known as Alnatha, i.e. “the slain lamb.”

The Pascal full Moon of A.D. 33 occurred on April 3rd at 2° 55' GMT, with the Sun being about 6½° from the Node. The time in Jerusalem was 5:16 p.m.—"around the sixth hour." The Sun was then near the star in Aries, called Alnatha, meaning "the slain lamb."

52The universality of this incarnation has been frequently commented upon. The cosmical Man has employed the symbolism of the whole of the solar system as known to the ancients. Thus we have him referred to as—

52The universality of this incarnation has been frequently discussed. The cosmic Man has used the symbolism of the entire solar system as understood by the ancients. Therefore, he is referred to as—

Saturn—“A man of sorrows.”

Saturn—“A man of sadness.”

Jupiter—“The Sun of Righteousness,” and a “priest after the order of Melchizedek,” i. e. the King of Righteousness.

Jupiter—“The Sun of Righteousness," and a “priest after the order of Melchizedek,” i. e. the King of Righteousness.

Mars—The sword bearer, “I came not to bring peace but a sword.”

Mars—The warrior, “I didn’t come to bring peace but a sword.”

Sun—“The Day-star from on high.”

Sun—“The Daystar from above.”

Venus—“The Prince of Peace.”

Venus—“The Peace Prince.”

Mercury—“The Word,” “The Messenger.”

Mercury—“The Word,” “The Messenger.”

Earth—“Son of Man,” i. e. Adam—Earth.

Earth—“Son of Man,” i.e. Adam—Earth.

Jesus the Prophet and Master of Wisdom is of the order of those “whose goings forth are from of old.” Some have seen in Him the reincarnation of the Buddha, whose ethical doctrine is strongly akin to the teachings of the holy Nazarene.

Jesus the Prophet and Master of Wisdom belongs to the group of those “whose goings forth are from of old.” Some have viewed Him as the reincarnation of the Buddha, whose ethical teachings closely resemble those of the holy Nazarene.

But there are strong reasons in the astrological scheme here presented, to warrant all Occultists in accepting the Incarnation in a sense other than symbolical or mythological. The prophecies and the record agree with the astronomical facts. Jesus is called especially “the Lamb of God,” and is born under the rising of the sign Aries. He is called also the “Lion of the Tribe of Judah,” and Mars, the ruler of the horoscope, is found in Leo. He is called “the Virgin-born,” and we find the Sun at the Nativity in the sign of the Virgin. These positions are not accidental, but are in agreement with 53the particular state of the visible heavens at the epoch to which we are impelled by reference to the facts of the case in conformity with the historical record.

But there are strong reasons in the astrological framework being presented here that encourage all Occultists to accept the Incarnation in a way that goes beyond just symbolic or mythological interpretations. The prophecies and the records align with the astronomical facts. Jesus is particularly referred to as “the Lamb of God” and is born under the rising sign of Aries. He is also known as “the Lion of the Tribe of Judah,” with Mars, the ruler of the horoscope, located in Leo. He is described as “the Virgin-born,” and we see the Sun at the Nativity in the sign of Virgo. These placements are not coincidental; they correspond with the specific state of the visible heavens at the time that we are led to by the facts and the historical records. 53

We have, I think, specific evidence of the Incarnation—of what? Of the Christ, the Logos, the Word. Jesus the man, whose horoscope we have been tracing, is not to be confounded with the Christ principle investing that Personality, nor yet with the Spirit of God animating the Christ. The relationship of these are apparently as Spirit, Soul and Body to one another, that is—

We have, I think, specific evidence of the Incarnation—of what? Of Christ, the Logos, the Word. Jesus the man, whose horoscope we have been tracking, shouldn't be confused with the Christ principle that embodies that Personality, nor with the Spirit of God that animates the Christ. The relationship among these seems to be like Spirit, Soul, and Body to one another, that is—

Spirit = God.
Soul = Christ.
Body = Jesus.

This order seems to be supported by the earliest statements of the Christian faith. The Master-Soul speaking through the person of Jesus said: “These things I do not of myself but of the Spirit of God which dwelleth in me,” and again, “Know ye not that ye are the temple of God and the Spirit of God dwelleth in you?” Further, the Master in bidding farewell to His disciples said, “I go unto my Father and your Father, unto my God and your God.” It is clear, therefore, in what relations the incarnate Christ stood to humanity and to God. Other masters have appeared at various times as manifestations of the Spirit of Truth, Bodhisattvas as they are called in India, and are seen to be the founders of schools of religious thought in all parts of the 54world. They all answer to the universal paradigm, and consequently we find the same myths and legends centring in them. Occasionally we get specific record of the birth of these Great Souls. Thus we know that Confucius (Kong-fu-tze) was born 550 B.C. on the 27th day of the 10th month, and died on the 18th day of the 2nd month in the year 477 B.C., at the age of seventy-three years. The birth of Gautama Sakyamuni is vaguely indicated as having taken place at the full Moon of Jyestha. So far no records have been discovered to throw light upon the year of birth, so that we cannot determine the cosmic relations of this great luminary. The birth of Sri S’ankarāchārya, however, is specifically indicated in a stanza of Yidyāranya, where it is said that the Sun, Saturn, Jupiter and Mars were all in their exaltation signs, that is to say, in Aries, Libra, Cancer and Capricorn respectively; and in Kendra, i. e. in signs that were upon the angles of the horoscope. This is the ideal horoscope of the successful reformer, and this Confucius of India, who began his crusade at twenty years of age, has left his mark for all time upon Indian thought and literature.

This order appears to be backed by the earliest statements of the Christian faith. The Master-Soul, speaking through Jesus, said, “I do these things not by myself but by the Spirit of God that is within me,” and again, “Don’t you know that you are the temple of God, and the Spirit of God lives in you?” Furthermore, when the Master said goodbye to His disciples, He stated, “I go to my Father and your Father, to my God and your God.” It is clear what relationship the incarnate Christ had with humanity and God. Other masters have emerged at different times as manifestations of the Spirit of Truth, known as Bodhisattvas in India, and have been the founders of various schools of religious thought around the 54world. They all fit the universal pattern, so we see the same myths and legends centered around them. Occasionally, we find specific accounts of the births of these Great Souls. For example, we know that Confucius (Kong-fu-tze) was born in 550 B.C. on the 27th day of the 10th month and died on the 18th day of the 2nd month in 477 BCE, at the age of seventy-three. The birth of Gautama Sakyamuni is vaguely recorded as occurring on the full Moon of Jyestha. So far, no records have been found to clarify the year of his birth, so we cannot determine the cosmic significance of this great figure. However, the birth of Sri S’ankarāchārya is specifically noted in a stanza of Yidyāranya, which mentions that the Sun, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars were all in their exalted signs—Aries, Libra, Cancer, and Capricorn respectively; and in Kendra, i. e. in signs positioned on the angles of the horoscope. This represents the ideal horoscope of a successful reformer, and this Indian Confucius, who began his mission at the age of twenty, has left a lasting impact on Indian thought and literature.

Wherever we can obtain the time of the incarnation of these Great Souls, it is seen that either there are some special celestial portents attending them or the planetary positions are such as to stamp the horoscope at once as that of an epoch-making birth. The portents attending the birth of Romulus, as recited by Dionysius, are no less striking than those which signalized his death. Something of this sort 55was obviously the belief in Shakespeare’s time concerning the death of great men—

Wherever we can find out when these Great Souls were born, it’s clear that there are usually special celestial signs accompanying them, or the positions of the planets make it obvious that the horoscope marks a significant birth. The signs surrounding Romulus’s birth, as described by Dionysius, are just as remarkable as those that marked his death. This kind of belief about the deaths of great men was certainly prevalent in Shakespeare’s time—55

When beggars die there are no comets seen,
The heavens themselves blaze forth the death of Princes.

From this we may conclude that the gods are not democratic, but favour individualism of the most pronounced type; and if, as would seem to be the case, the whole trend of evolution is the specialization of faculty, the elaboration of the unit from the mass, we can readily understand why specially selected cosmical conditions attend the incarnation of highly-evolved souls.

From this, we can conclude that the gods are not democratic but favor individualism in its strongest form; and if, as it appears, the overall direction of evolution is the specialization of abilities and the development of the individual from the collective, we can easily see why specific cosmic conditions accompany the incarnation of highly evolved souls.

56

CHAPTER VI
COSMIC SYMBOLOGY

A consideration of great astronomical epochs naturally leads to the more comprehensive subject of Periodicity and the Law of Cycles. Some notes in my former works have raised special points of inquiry which may very well be dealt with in the present chapter.

A look at major astronomical periods naturally brings us to the broader topic of Periodicity and the Law of Cycles. Some notes in my earlier works have highlighted specific questions that can be effectively addressed in this chapter.

What is known as the Great Year of Plato is one of those occult statements which seem to point to the existence among Initiates of some degree of special knowledge in cosmical facts. The observation of the Precession of the Equinoxes is usually ascribed to Hipparchus, who lived in the Second Century B.C. By comparison of the star positions in his day with those of Timocharis a century earlier, it was found that while maintaining their relative distances from one another and from the ecliptic, the stars had altered their positions in regard to the equinox, and a rough calculation showed that they were moving at the rate of about 50´´ per year. Observations of particular stars, while confirming the fact of their change of longitude, did not yield uniform results, and this no doubt was due to the imperfection of the instruments employed. Thus in regard to the star Spica Virginis we have the 57following observations of its longitude at various dates by independent authorities—

What’s known as Plato’s Great Year is one of those mysterious ideas that suggest some level of special knowledge about cosmic facts among Initiates. The observation of the Precession of the Equinoxes is typically credited to Hipparchus, who lived in the 2nd Century B.C. By comparing the positions of stars in his time with those of Timocharis a century before, it was found that while the relative distances between them and from the ecliptic remained unchanged, the stars had shifted their positions concerning the equinox. A rough calculation indicated they were moving at about 50 arcseconds per year. Observations of specific stars, while confirming this change in longitude, did not produce consistent results, likely due to the limitations of the instruments used. For example, regarding the star Spica Virginis, we have the 57 following observations of its longitude from different authorities—

Timocharis, BCE 293, Spica observed in Virgo, 22° 20´
Hipparchus, ” 145, ” ” ” 24° 20´
Menelaus, CE 99, ” ” ” 26° 15´
Ptolemy, ” 139, ” ” ” 26° 30´
Copernicus, ” 1515, ” ” Libra, 17° 14´
” ” 1525, ” ” ” 17° 21´
Naut. Al., ” 1820, ” ” ” 21° 20´

Thus while the fact of Precession is very clearly defined by these observations, the amount of it is not accurately determined. Later observations with more perfect means of measurement have enabled the official astronomers to give a true value to the Precession of the Equinoxes, which is 50·2453´´ plus O·0002225´´ t where t is the number of years from 1850. Thus while Hipparchus and Ptolemy found it to be 1° in 100 years, Albatani found it to be only 1° in 66 years, and modern observations seem to point the fact that it has been accelerated up to our own time. By taking a mean of all observations during the last eighteen centuries, the amount appears to be 50·062´´ and by extending the observations we can work it down to 50´´ nearly. Now if we divide the circle of the zodiac, or 360° by 50´´ we shall arrive at the figures 25,920 comprised in the Great Year. There are two theories in existence as to the cause of this Precession. At the point of time when the Sun crosses the Equator and comes to the first point of Aries, let the Sun be in line with a star in the heavens. When the Sun returns to the same position on the Equator it is found not to be in line with that star but 50´´ in 58advance of it. The first theory is that this is due to the change in the obliquity of the ecliptic, or, what is the same thing, in the inclination of the earth’s axis to the plane of the ecliptic, a change caused by the action of the Moon and Sun on the equatorial bulge. The whole effect is taken to be about 50´´ as said, and of this 35´´ is due to the Moon and 15´´ to the Sun. Various observations have shown this change of axial inclination to be about 50´´ per century, or one one-hundredth part of the Precession of the Equinoxes. Of this I shall have something to say later. For the moment we may consider it as part of the theory of Precession. The other theory is that Precession is caused by the proper motion of the Sun through space, whereby it completes an arc of 50´´ of its vast orbit every year. Then the gradual increase of the Precession already noted would in terms of this theory be due to the fact that the earth is getting nearer to the Sun and consequently the angle of parallax would be greater. Here we may leave the theorists with their own material and turn to the significance of this Great Year.

So, while the fact of Precession is clearly defined by these observations, the exact amount is not precisely determined. Later observations with better measurement tools have allowed official astronomers to provide a true value for the Precession of the Equinoxes, which is 50.2453 seconds plus 0.0002225 seconds t, where t is the number of years since 1850. Hipparchus and Ptolemy estimated it to be 1° every 100 years, while Albatani calculated it to be only 1° every 66 years, and modern observations suggest it has accelerated up to our time. By averaging all observations over the last eighteen centuries, the amount appears to be 50.062 seconds, and by extending the observations, we can refine it to nearly 50 seconds. If we divide the circle of the zodiac, or 360°, by 50 seconds, we get the number 25,920, representing the Great Year. There are two theories regarding the cause of this Precession. At the moment when the Sun crosses the Equator and reaches the first point of Aries, let’s say the Sun aligns with a star in the sky. When the Sun returns to the same position on the Equator, it is found to be 50 seconds ahead of that star. The first theory states that this is due to changes in the obliquity of the ecliptic, or, in simpler terms, the tilt of the Earth’s axis relative to the plane of the ecliptic, influenced by the gravitational pull of the Moon and Sun on the Earth’s equatorial bulge. The overall effect is considered to be about 50 seconds, with 35 seconds attributed to the Moon and 15 seconds to the Sun. Various observations indicate this change in axial tilt is roughly 50 seconds per century, which is one one-hundredth of the Precession of the Equinoxes. I will discuss this later. For now, we can think of it as part of the theory of Precession. The other theory suggests that Precession results from the Sun’s own motion through space, making an arc of 50 seconds of its vast orbit each year. The gradual increase in Precession noted before would, according to this theory, be because the Earth is getting closer to the Sun, thereby increasing the angle of parallax. With that, we can leave the theorists to their discussions and shift our focus to the significance of this Great Year.

As the whole Year consists of 25,920, during which the Equinoxes precess an entire circle, there will be a period of 2160 occupied in traversing one sign, that is to say, a twelfth part of the circle. Now this period is 72 periods of the planet Saturn, otherwise known as Kronos, the god of Time. From this again we derive the foundation of the great Yugas or Ages known to the Indians and referred to in the Vishnu Purana as the Four Ages, Satya-yuga, 59Treta-yuga, Dvapara-yuga, and Kali-yuga. They correspond with the four ages known as the Gold, Silver, Copper and Iron ages. Thus—

As the entire year consists of 25,920 years, during which the Equinoxes complete a full cycle, there will be a period of 2,160 years spent moving through one sign, which is one-twelfth of the circle. This period is 72 cycles of the planet Saturn, also known as Kronos, the god of Time. From this, we also get the basis for the great Yugas or Ages recognized by the Indians and mentioned in the Vishnu Purana as the Four Ages: Satya-yuga, Treta-yuga, Dvapara-yuga, and Kali-yuga. They align with the four ages known as the Gold, Silver, Copper, and Iron ages. Thus—

72 × 6 equals 432 multiplied by 1000 = 432,000 years.
72 × 12 ” 864 ” ” = 864,000 ”
72 × 18 ” 1296 ” ” = 1,296,000 ”
72 × 24 ” 1780 ” ” = 1,728,000 ”
————-
Total number of years in the Maha-yuga, 4,320,000 years.

At present the Vernal Equinox is at the very end of the constellation Aquarius, and there was a time when the equinox fell in the middle of Taurus, and the solstices in the middle of Leo and Aquarius respectively. Thus we find Varaha Mihira, an Indian astronomer of the fifth century, stating that in his day the solstices fell in Katakam (Cancer), and Makaram (Capricornus), but that according to former shastras they were once in the middle of Aslesha (Leo) and Kumbha (Aquarius) respectively. This tells us that some two thousand years before Mihira’s time there were Indian observations which determined the positions of the solstices among the asterisms, and it cannot have failed to strike Mihira that there was such a fact as Precession, even supposing that he had no knowledge of it from the Greek and Egyptian astronomers. It was about this time, namely 2000 B.C., that the Babylonian empire was at its height, and accordingly we find the astronomical facts written in all their records and built into their architecture. We find it in the Assyrian Bull and in the Egyptian Sphinx, wherein the four constellations which then held the cardinal points 60are found to be compounded. They comprise Taurus the Bull, Leo the Lion, Aquarius the Man, and Scorpio (Aquila) the Eagle.

Currently, the Vernal Equinox is at the very end of the constellation Aquarius, but there was a time when the equinox was in the middle of Taurus, with the solstices in the middle of Leo and Aquarius, respectively. Varaha Mihira, an Indian astronomer from the fifth century, noted that in his time, the solstices were in Cancer (Katakam) and Capricorn (Makaram), but according to earlier scriptures, they were once in the middle of Leo (Aslesha) and Aquarius (Kumbha), respectively. This indicates that about two thousand years before Mihira’s time, there were Indian observations that determined the positions of the solstices among the constellations. Mihira must have recognized the phenomenon of Precession, even if he wasn’t aware of it from the Greek and Egyptian astronomers. Around 2000 B.C., the Babylonian empire was at its peak, which is why we find astronomical facts documented in their records and incorporated into their architecture. This is evident in the Assyrian Bull and the Egyptian Sphinx, where the four constellations that were aligned with the cardinal points—Taurus the Bull, Leo the Lion, Aquarius the Man, and Scorpio (Aquila) the Eagle—are combined.

In connection with the position of the Vernal Equinox in the constellations, there are a number of very interesting myths and symbols which form an essential part of Occultism. We find, for instance, that at the time when the equinox was in the constellation Taurus the worship of the Bull as a symbol was closely associated with the Spring festivals. The Egyptians at this time decked a white Bull with garlands of flowers and set a golden discus between his horns to represent the entry of the Sun into the constellation of the Bull. Later, when the signs of the zodiac became confused with the constellations by the fact of their coincidence, the same myths and ceremonies were transferred to the signs, and remained associated with them in the popular use. Hence the May Day festival, which had its origin with the Sun in the constellation Taurus at the Vernal Equinox, came to be associated with the entry of the Sun into the sign Taurus in the month of May.

In relation to the position of the Vernal Equinox in the constellations, there are several fascinating myths and symbols that are essential to Occultism. For example, when the equinox was in the constellation Taurus, the worship of the Bull as a symbol was closely linked to the Spring festivals. During this time, the Egyptians adorned a white Bull with flower garlands and placed a golden disc between its horns to symbolize the Sun's entry into the constellation of the Bull. Later, as the signs of the zodiac were confused with the constellations due to their overlap, the same myths and ceremonies were transferred to the signs and became popular. Consequently, the May Day festival, which originated when the Sun was in the constellation Taurus at the Vernal Equinox, became associated with the Sun's entry into the sign Taurus in May.

History brings to us a curious confirmation of the astronomical basis of the Bull ceremonials. The Exodus of the Israelites from Egypt is stated to have taken place in 1491 B.C. Now we have already seen that Mihira, the Indian astronomer, noted the Vernal Equinox at his time to have been coincident with the first point of the constellation Mesham (Aries), and, as his date is fixed by calculation to have been A.D. 536, the interval would consequently 61be 1491 plus 536, or 2027 years. And if we multiply this by 50·1´´, the mean precession per year, we shall have as result 28° 12´ 35´´, which, added to the first point of Aries, takes us to the end of that constellation on to the verge of the constellation Taurus. Hence we conclude that about the time of the Exodus the Equinox was passing out of Taurus into Aries, and consequently we find the institution of the Jewish Passover (Pasach), to have been inaugurated by Moses who was “learned in all the lore and language of the Egyptians” and who, as the adopted son of the Egyptian Princess, would be initiated by the Priests of Isis into all the mysteries of the cosmos to which at that time they had access. When, therefore, the Israelites were found to be perpetuating the worship of the Golden Calf which they had witnessed in Egypt, the great Lawgiver admonished them, reduced their idol into an aurum potabile by his alchemical skill and gave it them to drink. Thereafter the symbol of the Ram became paramount in Israelitish worship. The Pasach or transit was none other than that of the Vernal Equinox from the constellation Taurus into Aries. Occultists have identified the sign Taurus with the age of the Patriarchs, the age of husbandry and the ascendancy in Egypt of the Hyksoi or Shepherd Kings. The age of Aries marks the cycle of militarism, extending to Assyria, Persia, Egypt and Greece, and culminating in the Roman Empire. Pisces marks the age of Combination, culminating in the federation of the Anglo-Saxon peoples. The present-day transit into the constellation Aquarius is held to inaugurate 62the dawn of the age of Baptism, the pouring out of the Spirit of Truth upon all flesh, and the age will therefore be one of spiritual regeneration.

History provides an interesting confirmation of the astronomical foundation of the Bull rituals. The Exodus of the Israelites from Egypt is said to have occurred in 1491 BCE. We have already established that Mihira, the Indian astronomer, noted the Vernal Equinox during his time to line up with the first point of the constellation Mesham (Aries). His date is calculated to be CE 536, making the interval 1491 plus 536, or 2027 years. If we multiply this by 50·1´´, the average precession per year, we get 28° 12´ 35´´. Adding this to the first point of Aries leads us to the end of that constellation, approaching the edge of Taurus. Thus, we conclude that around the time of the Exodus, the Equinox was shifting from Taurus into Aries. Consequently, we find that the Jewish Passover (Pasach) was established by Moses, who was “versed in all the knowledge and language of the Egyptians” and, as the adopted son of the Egyptian Princess, was initiated by the Priests of Isis into all the cosmic mysteries they had access to at that time. When the Israelites were found continuing the worship of the Golden Calf they had seen in Egypt, the great Lawgiver admonished them, transformed their idol into an drinkable gold using his alchemical skills, and made them drink it. After that, the symbol of the Ram became central in Israelite worship. The Pasach or transit represented none other than the Vernal Equinox moving from Taurus into Aries. Occultists have linked the sign Taurus with the era of the Patriarchs, the age of agriculture, and the rise of the Hyksoi or Shepherd Kings in Egypt. The age of Aries signifies a cycle of militarism that expanded to Assyria, Persia, Egypt, and Greece, culminating in the Roman Empire. Pisces represents the age of Combination, culminating in the federation of the Anglo-Saxon peoples. The current transition into the constellation Aquarius is thought to mark the beginning of the age of Baptism, the outpouring of the Spirit of Truth on all people, making this an era of spiritual renewal.

What are called the Four Fixed Signs of the zodiac, those which enter into the composition of the Sphinx, are found to be in the forefront of national symbolism among the ancient Chinese. The four cardinal constellations are associated with the four colours, black, red, white and blue. The constellation of the Lion was called by them “the Black Warrior,” Taurus was called “the Azure Dragon,” Scorpio the “White Tiger” and Aquarius “the Red Bird.” In the time of Wan Wang there was built a palace whose four walls were of these colours, and we find them represented in the heraldry of the Yellow Empire.

The Four Fixed Signs of the zodiac, which make up the Sphinx, are prominent in ancient Chinese national symbolism. The four cardinal constellations are linked to the four colors: black, red, white, and blue. The constellation of the Lion was referred to as “the Black Warrior,” Taurus was known as “the Azure Dragon,” Scorpio was called “the White Tiger,” and Aquarius was named “the Red Bird.” During the time of Wan Wang, a palace was built with walls in these colors, and we see these represented in the heraldry of the Yellow Empire.

In both Egypt and Assyria we find the Bull used as a sacred symbol, even as it is to this day in India. There is a connection of a subtle nature between the Bull and the Bee—Apis. In the most ancient Mithraic monument of Assyria there is shown in bas-relief the figure of a lion out of whose mouth a bee is coming forth. This at once brings to mind the riddle of Samson, himself associated with the Solar myth. He is made to say: “Out of the eater came forth meat, out of the strong came forth sweetness.” And when they gave him the answer: “What is stronger than a lion, what is sweeter than honey?” the key to the symbology is supplied in his answering words: “If you had not ploughed with my oxen (Taurus), you had not found out my riddle.” Here there is an obvious association of the symbol 63of the Bull with that of the Bee, and it is here that we get the affiliation of the two signs Taurus and Leo. A lion trampling on a snake and a bull in the folds of a snake are to be found among the symbolical monuments of the past. The lion-headed man, Abraxas, is a symbol which links the sign Aquarius to that of Leo, and is of great antiquity: among the Persians we find this word Abraxas or Abracax engraved on magical stones. It stands for the 365 days of the year and the virtues corresponding to them.

In both Egypt and Assyria, the Bull is used as a sacred symbol, just like it is today in India. There's a subtle connection between the Bull and the Bee—Apis. In the oldest Mithraic monument from Assyria, there's a bas-relief depicting a lion with a bee coming out of its mouth. This immediately recalls the riddle of Samson, who is linked to the Solar myth. He says, “Out of the eater came forth meat, out of the strong came forth sweetness.” When they ask him, “What is stronger than a lion, what is sweeter than honey?” his response provides the key to the symbolism: “If you had not ploughed with my oxen (Taurus), you would not have solved my riddle.” Here, we clearly see the connection between the symbol of the Bull and that of the Bee, which links the signs Taurus and Leo. A lion stepping on a snake and a bull entangled with a snake appear among the symbolic monuments of the past. The lion-headed figure, Abraxas, connects the sign Aquarius to Leo and is very ancient: among the Persians, the word Abraxas or Abracax can be found engraved on magical stones. It represents the 365 days of the year and the corresponding virtues.

But this Taurean key to the riddle of Samson is not merely a cosmical symbolism. It is also a spiritual one. For the four Fixed Signs of the zodiac stand for the basic elements or what are known as the Four States, and these in their turn have analogy with human principles. Thus—

But this Taurean key to the riddle of Samson is not just a cosmic symbol. It's also a spiritual one. The four Fixed Signs of the zodiac represent the basic elements, or what are referred to as the Four States, and these also relate to human principles. So—

Leo represents Fire, which stands for Vibe.
Aquarius ” Air ” ” Mindset.
Scorpio ” Water ” ” Spirit.
Taurus ” Earth ” ” Body.

In this paradigm we have Spirit above and Matter beneath, linked together by the Human Soul or Mind in relations with Spirit, and the Animal Soul in relations with Matter. The riddle of Samson therefore may be read kabalistically thus: Out of Spirit proceeded Matter, as from Fire the element of Earth was evolved. To which we may add the rider in corresponding terms: Save by incarnation you could not attain to spiritual liberation, which is equivalent to the saying: If you had not ploughed 64with my oxen, you had not found out my riddle. Here we have the process of differentiation covertly referred to by the propounder of the riddle, showing that Matter is the ultimate expression of Spirit, its negative pole. It stands for the female principle in Nature, and hence the tradition involves the woman who betrayed Samson’s secret. Thus in cosmical symbology some of the great secrets of cosmogenesis and anthropogenesis lie concealed. The ancient wisdom conceived the two schemes as involved in the complete arc of life, which holds good for any planet, and for the system to which it belongs.

In this framework, we have Spirit above and Matter below, connected by the Human Soul or Mind in relation to Spirit, and the Animal Soul in relation to Matter. The puzzle of Samson can therefore be interpreted in a mystical way: Matter emerged from Spirit, just as Earth developed from Fire. We can also add this point: Without incarnation, you couldn’t achieve spiritual freedom, which is similar to saying: If you hadn’t worked with my oxen, you wouldn’t have figured out my riddle. Here we see the process of differentiation subtly hinted at by the one who posed the riddle, indicating that Matter is the ultimate manifestation of Spirit, acting as its negative counterpart. It represents the female principle in Nature, which is why the story includes the woman who revealed Samson’s secret. Thus, in cosmic symbolism, some of the major secrets of the origin of the universe and humanity are hidden. Ancient wisdom viewed these two concepts as part of the complete cycle of life, applicable to any planet and its corresponding system.

The Four states of matter and their corresponding evolutes may be thus figured—

The four states of matter and their corresponding evolutions can be represented as follows—

Figure 3.

Figure 3.

Figure 3.

In a subsequent section we may profitably consider the analogy existing between the cosmical and anthropological evolutions, and the consequent relations of the human soul with the planet to which it is related in the scheme of things.

In a later section, we can usefully explore the similarity between cosmic and human evolution, as well as the resulting connections between the human soul and the planet it’s linked to in the greater scheme of things.

65

CHAPTER VII
READING THE SYMBOLS

The possibility of a scientific foreknowledge of events has long engaged the minds of speculative thinkers. In properly informed minds it has assumed an actuality. The learned writer of The Story of the Heavens has given us a most interesting account of the manner in which the law of the Tides gradually came to be connected with the Moon, and how at length some astute observer formulated a scheme based on the Moon’s age, by which the time of high or low tide could be predicted. That was a case of scientific foreknowledge. When to the laws of Kepler, which gave a mathematical construction to the whole system of astronomy, Sir Isaac Newton contributed his great law of Gravitation, the coherence of the whole cosmical scheme was manifest. Kepler showed that planetary motions answered to the functions of the ellipse. Newton demonstrated the necessity of this cosmical fact. Herschel discovered the proper motion of the Sun in space and upset the whole scheme. Although answering to the functions of an ellipse, of which the stationary Sun occupied one of the foci, the necessary fact immediately assumed the less rigid form of relative fact, and the ellipse gave place 66to the cycloidal curve. A cycloidal curve is that described by any point on the tyre of a revolving wheel whose axle is progressing at the same time in a straight line. Let the Sun occupy the position of the axle, and let a planet be situate at the end of one of the spokes of the wheel upon the tyre. If the wheel be now moved forward it will be found that the Sun-point is moving in a straight line parallel to the ground on which the wheel rests, while the planet-point describes a series of arches. It never gets farther away from the centre to which it is united. The planet point, in fact, describes a segment of a circle the chord of which is equal to the circumference of the wheel. We are under no necessity of supposing that the Sun’s path in space is rectilinear. On the contrary, we have presumptive evidence that it is itself answering to the gravitational pull of some body in the remote confines of space and pursuing an orbital path.

The idea of predicting events through science has fascinated thinkers for a long time. For those with a good understanding, it has become a reality. The knowledgeable author of The Story of the Heavens provides a fascinating account of how the law of tides became linked to the Moon, and how an insightful observer eventually developed a method to predict high and low tide based on the Moon’s age. That was a case of scientific foresight. When Sir Isaac Newton added his groundbreaking law of Gravitation to Kepler's laws, which already provided a mathematical framework for astronomy, the entire cosmos suddenly made sense. Kepler revealed that planetary movements followed elliptical functions. Newton proved that this cosmic reality was necessary. Herschel identified the Sun's movement through space, which changed the entire understanding. Although the planetary movements still corresponded to elliptical functions, with the stationary Sun at one of the foci, the concept quickly shifted to a more flexible idea of relative facts, and the ellipse was replaced by the cycloidal curve. A cycloidal curve is the path traced by a point on the edge of a spinning wheel as its axle moves forward in a straight line. If we position the Sun at the axle and place a planet at the end of one of the wheel's spokes, as the wheel rolls forward, we find that the Sun-point moves straight along the ground, while the planet-point traces out arcs. It never drifts far from the center it is connected to. Essentially, the planet-point describes part of a circle whose straight line (chord) equals the wheel's circumference. We don't need to assume that the Sun moves in a straight line through space. On the contrary, there’s compelling evidence suggesting it is responding to the gravitational influence of some distant body in space and is following an orbital path.

Figure 4. Diagram showing the Cycloidal curve of a planet on a vector S´-C, where A, C, B are the tropics. Then the straight line S-S´´ is equal to 2(S´C) × 3·14159.

Figure 4. Diagram showing the Cycloidal curve of a planet on a vector S´-C, where A, C, B are the tropics. Then the straight line S-S´´ is equal to 2(S´C) × 3·14159.

Figure 4. Diagram showing the Cycloidal curve of a planet on a vector S'-C, where A, C, B are the tropics. Then the straight line S-SS'' is equal to 2(S'C) × 3.14159.

We are here dealing with a rigid vector, which is not the case as regards the planetary bodies. There 67is a difference in nature between the spoke of a wheel that holds the tyre to the hub and the force of gravity that holds a planet to the Sun.

We are talking about a rigid vector, which is different from what we see with planetary bodies. There is a difference in nature between the spoke of a wheel that keeps the tire attached to the hub and the force of gravity that keeps a planet orbiting the Sun. 67

Then our cycloidal curve falls of itself into the region of relativity. It would only be true if the Sun’s path in space were rectilinear, not otherwise.

Then our cycloidal curve naturally falls into the realm of relativity. It would only be accurate if the Sun’s path in space were straight, not otherwise.

Now we have got to our point where the elements of our system assume coherence only by their relativity. This fact is so well established that scientific prediction is a thing assured. Every year there is issued a volume of astronomical facts which antedate our calendar by some three or four years. I refer to the Nautical Almanac. In this volume we shall eventually find not only that the tides have been correctly predicted, but that every phase of the Moon is accurately stated, its orbit among the stars clearly defined; the times of its occulting or hiding the various stars that happen to lie in its course; the time, place and magnitudes of the various eclipses, and a host of other phenomena, are seen to have been foretold. This knowledge could not be otherwise derived than from an intelligent study of an intelligible cosmos, and a clear definition of the laws governing cosmical relations. Keep that in mind. We live in a world of relativity. What we call cosmic laws have only a relative value. The Ptolemaic system of epicycles was relatively true to the view of the universe which regarded the Earth as the centre of the system. It answered to all the phenomena. It had an integrity of its own. When the view-point was shifted so that the Sun came to be regarded as the centre of the system, then the 68epicycle no longer held good. But the elliptical theory of Kepler was only a relative truth. The planets do not really move in elliptical orbits. They only appear to do so from the point of view of a fixed central Sun. The theory, like that of Ptolemy, answers to the phenomena. The same can be shown in regard to the cycloidal system. In the astronomical text books it will be found that the Precession of the Equinoxes is ascribed to the change in the inclination of the earth’s axis caused by the attraction of the Moon and Sun, but principally of the Moon, on the equatorial bulge of the earth. The same text books will tell you that the Precession is found to be increasing, that the Moon is receding from the earth, and that the attraction of gravitation decreases as the square of the distance! All of which is a contradiction in terms.

Now we've reached the point where the elements of our system only make sense through their relativity. This is so well recognized that scientific prediction is a certainty. Every year, a volume of astronomical facts is published that dates back three or four years before our current calendar. I'm referring to the Nautical Almanac. In this volume, we will eventually see not only that the tides have been accurately predicted, but also that every phase of the Moon is precisely described, its orbit among the stars clearly defined; the timing of its occultations or when it hides various stars in its path; the details of different eclipses, along with many other phenomena, have all been forecasted. This knowledge could only come from a thoughtful study of a comprehensible universe and a clear understanding of the laws that govern cosmic relationships. Remember that. We live in a world of relativity. What we call cosmic laws have only relative significance. The Ptolemaic system of epicycles was relatively true from the viewpoint of a universe that saw Earth as the center of everything. It accounted for all observed phenomena and had its own integrity. When the perspective shifted to view the Sun as the center of the system, the epicycle no longer applied. However, Kepler's elliptical theory is also only a relative truth. The planets do not actually move in elliptical orbits; they only seem to do so from the perspective of a fixed central Sun. This theory, like Ptolemy's, aligns with observed phenomena. The same can be shown for the cycloidal system. In astronomy textbooks, you will find that the Precession of the Equinoxes is attributed to changes in the tilt of the Earth's axis due to the gravitational pull of the Moon and the Sun, but primarily the Moon, on the Earth's equatorial bulge. Those same textbooks will tell you that the Precession is increasing, that the Moon is moving away from the Earth, and that gravitational attraction decreases with the square of the distance! All of this is a contradiction in terms.

But since we have arrived at the fact of relativity in regard to what we are used to calling astronomical “facts,” we may as well face the situation and accept the universe as symbol. Then all facts concerning it come to be regarded as merely symbolical, and it is our business to relate this universal symbology to the things of our consciousness and the facts of daily life.

But now that we've acknowledged the idea of relativity when it comes to what we usually call astronomical "facts," we might as well confront the reality and accept the universe as a symbol. This way, all the facts about it can be seen as just symbolic, and it's our job to connect this universal symbolism to our consciousness and the facts of everyday life.

Such a system was evolved ages ago by the philosophers of the East, in China, in India and in Chaldea. They called this system by the name of Astrology, that is, what we reason or discourse concerning the stars. They regarded the stars, not as bodies having a fixed quantitative relationship to the cosmos, but as symbols having a significance in our 69consciousness and a value in terms of experience. These values were doubtless assigned from observation. Human nature remaining very much the same throughout long ages, the symbolism thus instituted would have a more or less constant value. That is how we find it. What Saturn signified two thousand years ago it signifies to-day. It is an open question whether the planets have a causative relationship in regard to the affairs of human life. Before we can decide this point we have to prove our theory of gravitation, making of it an absolute instead of merely a relative fact. Then, if the planets interact one upon another, as what is called the “solidarity” of the system seems to require, we cannot very well escape from the logical consequences of our reasoning, and planetary action in human life must be a fact beyond controversy. But the planets may very well have a symbolical value as being part of the universal inscription, a feature in the great physiognomy. We may argue from this point of view with perfect safety. It is our business to study this physiognomy of Nature, to read the symbolism of the heavens in the same intelligent manner as we read the symbolism of the Earth. It may be said that the whole art of living consists in what the ancients called the “end-viewing perception,” seeing the end from the beginning, which is our modern “intelligent anticipation.” The Genesis account gives a symbolical value to the Sun, Moon and planets, when it says: Let them be for signs (Othoth), and this othic value was early discovered by the ancients and has held to this day.

Such a system was developed long ago by the philosophers of the East, in China, India, and Chaldea. They referred to this system as Astrology, which means our reasoning or discussions about the stars. They saw the stars not as fixed entities with a strict quantitative relationship to the cosmos, but as symbols that hold significance in our consciousness and have value based on experience. These values were undoubtedly assigned through observation. Since human nature has remained fairly consistent over long periods, the symbolism created would have a relatively stable value. This is how we find it. What Saturn represented two thousand years ago, it still represents today. Whether the planets have a direct influence on human affairs is still open to debate. Before we can settle this issue, we need to establish our theory of gravitation as an absolute rather than just a relative fact. Then, if the planets do interact with one another—as the so-called “solidarity” of the system suggests—we can't ignore the logical implications of our reasoning, and planetary action in human life must be regarded as an undeniable fact. However, the planets may also have a symbolic value as part of the universal inscription, an element in the grand facial expression of the universe. We can safely argue from this viewpoint. It’s our task to study this facial expression of Nature, to interpret the symbolism of the heavens just as intelligently as we interpret the symbolism of the Earth. One might say that the art of living is encapsulated in what the ancients called the “end-viewing perception,” seeing the end from the beginning, which parallels our modern concept of “intelligent anticipation.” The Genesis account assigns symbolic value to the Sun, Moon, and planets when it states: Let them be for signs (Othoth), and this symbolic value was recognized by the ancients and has persisted to this day.

70There are various means of foreknowledge, but all cannot be called scientific, although they may be the subject of scientific scrutiny. Inspiration or revelation escape our apprehension. What we know as the gift of the Spirit does not lend itself to scientific empiricism. Direct perception, as in clairvoyance or seership, is allied to certain temperamental peculiarities which can be noted but barely accounted for. Mediumism and obsession may sometimes be the source of foreknowledge of events, and these are the legitimate subjects of study by psychologists. To these we may add the various forms of Automatism when applied to divination, and Numerology or Kabalism. The latter, while depending on an universal symbolism and the geometrical relations of thought, is somewhat distinct in that it lends itself to empirical test. Indeed, it may be said that all the foregoing methods of foreknowledge, except direct revelation, may be rendered scientific. That they are not yet so is due to our defect of knowledge concerning the nature and constitution of man.

70 There are various ways to gain foreknowledge, but not all of them can be considered scientific, even though they might be examined scientifically. Inspiration or revelation are beyond our understanding. What we refer to as the gift of the Spirit doesn't lend itself to scientific methods. Direct perception, like clairvoyance or seeing visions, is linked to certain personality traits that can be observed but not easily explained. Mediumship and obsession may sometimes provide foreknowledge of future events, and these are legitimate subjects for psychological study. We can also include different forms of Automatism when it comes to divination, as well as Numerology or Kabalism. The latter relies on universal symbolism and the geometric connections of thought, which makes it somewhat different because it can be empirically tested. In fact, we could say that all the methods of foreknowledge mentioned above, except for direct revelation, could be made scientific. Their current lack of scientific status is due to our limited understanding of human nature and constitution.

In effect we make final reference to Astrology as the only means of scientific foreknowledge known to man, and in this we must include the physical phenomena which have direct relation to astronomical facts as well as anything we may argue concerning the action of the planets upon the minds of men and the disposition of human affairs. Astrology lends itself readily to experimental test. It does not necessarily assume a causative relationship between man and the various bodies of the solar 71system, but it is open to show that there is an actual relationship between the state of the heavens at the moment of a person’s birth into the world and the character and experience of that person through life. There is no need in this place to elaborate the argument. The facts are sufficiently well attested in the experience of all who have taken the trouble to apply the ordinary tests. As to character, Ptolemy affirms that Mercury is the indicator of the rational powers, the Moon of the natural powers. By the rational he means those that are peculiar to man, by the natural, those that are common to man and the lower animals. The distribution of the faculties and powers are thus symbolically located—

In essence, we conclude that Astrology is the only known way for humans to gain scientific foresight. This includes physical phenomena that relate directly to astronomical facts, as well as any arguments we can make about how the planets affect people's minds and the course of human affairs. Astrology can easily be tested through experiments. It doesn't necessarily claim a direct cause-and-effect relationship between people and the various bodies in the solar system, but it does show that there is a real connection between the state of the heavens at the time of a person's birth and that person's character and life experiences. We won't go into detail about this argument here. The facts are well-supported by those who have taken the time to apply standard tests. Regarding character, Ptolemy states that Mercury indicates rational abilities, while the Moon indicates natural abilities. By rational, he refers to qualities specific to humans, and by natural, he means those shared with lower animals. The distribution of faculties and powers is symbolically located—

Figure 5.

Figure 5.

Figure 5.

There is an obvious consent here to the principles of modern Phrenology as enunciated by Dr. Bernard Hollander. It is seen that all the intellectual faculties, the perceptives, memories, the comparative 72and rational faculty, are under the sway of the planet Mercury. Jupiter governs the sympathetic faculties, intuitive perception, mirthfulness, wit, benevolence; Saturn the devotional faculties, wonder, sublimity, veneration; the Sun has rule over the governing group of faculties—firmness, conscientiousness, love of approbation, stability; Venus over the social group—friendship, inhabitiveness, constancy, etc.; the Moon over the natural faculties—vitativeness, amativeness, love of offspring, etc.; Mars over the faculties of defence and destruction; Uranus over the psychic faculties, and Neptune over the spiritual.

There’s a clear agreement here with the principles of modern Phrenology as outlined by Dr. Bernard Hollander. It’s evident that all intellectual abilities—perception, memory, comparative reasoning, and rational thought—are influenced by the planet Mercury. Jupiter governs the faculties of sympathy, intuition, humor, and kindness; Saturn oversees devotion, wonder, awe, and reverence; the Sun rules over the governing faculties—determination, integrity, desire for approval, and stability; Venus takes charge of social faculties—friendship, home-loving, loyalty, etc.; the Moon influences natural faculties—vitality, romantic love, and parental love; Mars relates to the faculties of defense and aggression; Uranus pertains to psychic abilities, and Neptune addresses spiritual aspects.

In Astrology the Sun is considered as the radiating centre of vital energy, and has relations with the heart and the solar plexus. The Moon is the distributor of this energy, and represents the element of variability, being allied to the sympathetic ganglion, and having relations with the fluidic body; it also is related to the spleen. The Sun and Moon acting together, as in the production of the tides, may be regarded as the generator and distributor of all astral influences. According to the positions of the planets at the moment of birth in regard to the luminaries, astrologers draw their conclusions regarding the constitution and functional powers of the individual. But there is also another most important local factor which plays a very significant part in the determination of personal powers.

In astrology, the Sun is seen as the main source of vital energy and is linked to the heart and solar plexus. The Moon distributes this energy and symbolizes variability, being connected to the sympathetic ganglion and associated with the fluidic body; it is also related to the spleen. The Sun and Moon together, like in the creation of tides, can be viewed as the generator and distributor of all astral influences. Astrologers analyze the positions of the planets at the time of birth in relation to the luminaries to draw conclusions about an individual's constitution and functional abilities. However, there is another crucial local factor that plays a significant role in determining personal powers.

If we take the vertical circle in the centre of which a birth takes place, we shall find that this prime vertical is divided into two parts by the meridian which cuts it at right angles, and again by the horizon 73at right angles to the meridian circle. These two great circles represent sensitive planes which are capable of responding to the astral vibrations in force at any time, the intensity of such vibrations being in direct proportion to the nearness of the planets to such planes. Hence it is found that planets which are exactly rising or setting, culminating or passing the lower meridian, have a very marked effect upon the character and destiny of the person so born. These are empirical observations. They can be tested, but, if tested, they must be so in strict accord with the canons of Astrology, which ascribe certain influences to each of the planets.

If we consider the vertical circle where a birth occurs, we see that this prime vertical is split into two sections by the meridian, which intersects it at a right angle, and also by the horizon, 73 which is at a right angle to the meridian circle. These two major circles represent sensitive planes that can respond to astral vibrations present at any time, with the strength of these vibrations being directly related to how close the planets are to these planes. As a result, it’s observed that planets that are either rising or setting, reaching their peak, or crossing the lower meridian significantly influence the character and fate of the individual born at that time. These are empirical observations. They can be verified, but if verified, they must be done strictly according to the principles of Astrology, which attribute specific influences to each planet.

These great circles again constitute planes of direct and transverse polarity, and they are found to follow the principle of the segmentation of the cell. They serve a most important part in the determination of sex. But this is a long and intricate matter, and cannot be fully discussed in these pages.

These major circles also create planes of direct and transverse polarity, and they align with the principle of cell segmentation. They play a crucial role in determining sex. However, this is a complex and lengthy topic that can't be fully covered in this section.

Now, by tracing the effects upon health, character and fortunes produced (or indicated) by the transits of the planets over these sensitive planes, astrologers have been able to determine exactly what effects are due to each, that is to say, what they signify in the course of events. Ptolemy, Tycho and Kepler, Newton, and others among the great astronomers, have confirmed the ascriptions of the astrologers from personal observation, but without in any way contributing to the solution of the problem of their modus operandi, presuming them to have a causative relationship in human affairs, or of their status in a scheme of universal symbolism. They have just 74left the problem where they found it, while confirming the general claim of astrologers that there is a possible means of a scientific method of prediction. Astrologers make no claim to any degree of special inspiration. They merely argue from like causes to like effects, finding illustration of the law of periodicity in lunations, transits, eclipses and revolutional ingresses, which, being connected in experience with a certain succession of events, are found to produce events of a similar nature whenever they recur. Astronomy gives us the periodic values of these several factors, while Astrology supplies an interpretation from experience. Nothing could be more scientific or more satisfactory. I may now pass to the citation of some remarkable instances of scientific prediction.

Now, by examining the effects on health, character, and fortunes created (or indicated) by the movements of the planets over these sensitive areas, astrologers have been able to pinpoint exactly what effects each one produces, meaning what they represent in the unfolding of events. Ptolemy, Tycho, Kepler, Newton, and other significant astronomers have supported the claims of astrologers based on personal observation, but they haven’t contributed to solving the issue of their operating procedure, assuming they have a causal relationship with human affairs, or their role in a universal symbolic framework. They have essentially left the problem unchanged while confirming the general assertion of astrologers that there is the potential for a scientific method of prediction. Astrologers don’t claim any special inspiration. They simply draw connections from similar causes to similar effects, finding examples of the law of periodicity in lunar phases, transits, eclipses, and significant astrological shifts, which, when linked to a certain series of events, are shown to generate similar occurrences when they happen again. Astronomy provides the periodic values of these various factors, while Astrology offers insights based on experience. Nothing could be more scientific or satisfying. I can now proceed to cite some remarkable examples of scientific prediction.

75

CHAPTER VIII
ANCIENT AND MODERN EXAMPLES

Among the earliest of the great readers of the Symbolism of the universe was Thales of Miletus, who during the sixth century B.C. formulated a true theory of the cause of eclipses, and proved his theory by predicting the eclipse of May 28, 585 B.C. He founded the Ionic sect of philosophers, which was distinguished for the profundity of its speculations, to which his successors and pupils, Anaxagoras, Anaximander, Anaximenes and Archelaus so largely contributed. Archelaus became the master of Socrates. Anaxagoras proved himself as skilful as his Master in the use of the sphere and in astronomical studies, for he predicted the eclipse of the Sun which was seen at Athens in the first year of the Peloponnesian War. From Thucydides we learn that it happened after noon in the summer, and that the Sun assumed a crescent shape and that some of the stars shone out.

Among the earliest great interpreters of the universe's symbolism was Thales of Miletus, who in the sixth century B.C. developed an accurate theory explaining the cause of eclipses and proved it by predicting the eclipse of May 28, 585 B.C. He founded the Ionic school of philosophers, known for the depth of its ideas, to which his successors and students—Anaxagoras, Anaximander, Anaximenes, and Archelaus—made significant contributions. Archelaus became Socrates' teacher. Anaxagoras showed he was as skilled as his mentor in using the sphere and in astronomical studies, as he predicted the solar eclipse that was visible in Athens during the first year of the Peloponnesian War. According to Thucydides, this eclipse occurred after noon in the summer, causing the Sun to take on a crescent shape and allowing some stars to shine through.

Sir J. Herschel has spoken of this eclipse as total, but this cannot be, as the Moon’s apparent diameter was less than that of the Sun, so that even where it was central it would be but annular.

Sir J. Herschel has referred to this eclipse as total, but that can't be right, since the Moon’s apparent diameter was smaller than that of the Sun, meaning that even at its best alignment, it would only be annular.

Now of Thales it is recorded that he foresaw by his reading of the symbols that there would be a 76great dearth of olives in a certain year, and he accordingly bought up all the stock of olives that was on the market and chartered all the stalls, so that when the dearth occurred he was able to sell at his own price, and thereby made a great sum of money. This was at Alexandria. He then went to Athens and found the plague raging there. He at once took the matter in hand and was speedily successful in purging the city, so that the people erected a statue in his honour to commemorate the event. Seeing his end approaching and knowing that it would be due to the fall of some heavy body, if indeed he himself did not receive a fall, he thought to circumvent the evil by taking necessary precautions. To this end he retired to a field where he established himself. Being thus far removed from any buildings and himself in no danger of falling from a height, he thought himself to be secure, and looked forward to the time when the evil indications should have passed by. But it happened that an eagle, having secured a particularly fine tortoise as prey, carried it aloft and sought for somewhat whereon to break its shell. Seeing the bald head of the philosopher and mistaking it for a stone, the eagle promptly let the tortoise fall. Exit Thales!

Now it’s recorded about Thales that he predicted, through his interpretation of signs, that there would be a major shortage of olives in a certain year. So, he bought up all the olives available in the market and rented all the stalls, which allowed him to sell at his own price when the shortage happened, making a significant amount of money. This took place in Alexandria. He then went to Athens, where he found the plague rampant. He immediately took action and quickly succeeded in cleansing the city, prompting the people to build a statue in his honor to celebrate the achievement. As he sensed his end approaching and knew it would come from a heavy object falling, unless he himself was the one to fall, he planned to avoid the danger by taking necessary precautions. To do this, he went to a field where he set himself up. Being so far from any buildings and in no risk of something falling from above, he thought he was safe and looked forward to when the ominous signs would pass. However, it happened that an eagle, having caught a particularly nice tortoise as its prey, flew high and looked for something to drop it on to break the shell. Mistaking the philosopher's bald head for a rock, the eagle dropped the tortoise. Exit Thales!

The general truth of the Hebrew records has been abundantly established by archaeologists both in regard to the Babylonian and Egyptian captivities and the sojourn in the wilderness. Their prophets were men skilled in the reading of the universal symbolism, and they described events centuries before they happened. Daniel so correctly portrays 77the career of Alexander that the early opponents of the Bible sought to prove, but without success, that the prophet was describing what was past instead of predicting what was in the future. However this may be, we cannot get away from the fact that the ruin and desolation of many cities which were in a high state of prosperity in Daniel’s time and for some centuries after, such as Moab, Edom, Amalek, Tyre and Sidon, and Ammon, were undoubtedly predicted. These cities were to be blotted out. They were in existence in the first centuries of our era, but now they no longer exist. The subjugation of Egypt was clearly foretold and has accordingly happened. Nineveh and Babylon were condemned to desolation and utter ruin when in the height of their prosperity. They were to be places of eternal solitude, the haunt of wild beasts, and the palaces a hiding-place for jackals. Daniel’s famous prophecy of the coming of the Messiah after Seventy Weeks, i. e. 490 years from the time of the going forth of the order to restore and rebuild Jerusalem. The prophet clearly indicates the source whence he was able to obtain initial light upon the basis of prophecy, for he informs us that in the first year of the reign of Darius (521 B.C.) he “understood by books the numbers of the years,” etc. Thereafter by prayer and fasting he attained great illumination, but in all his prophecies, where he makes use of the symbolism of Nature, he uses the day for a year that is still pursued by the student of Astrology.

The overall accuracy of the Hebrew records has been thoroughly confirmed by archaeologists, especially regarding the Babylonian and Egyptian captivities, as well as the time spent in the wilderness. Their prophets were skilled in interpreting universal symbols and foretold events centuries in advance. Daniel accurately depicts the life of Alexander to the extent that early critics of the Bible attempted, without success, to argue that the prophet was recounting past events rather than predicting the future. Regardless of this debate, we cannot ignore the fact that the destruction and ruin of many cities that were thriving during Daniel’s time—and for some centuries afterward, including Moab, Edom, Amalek, Tyre, Sidon, and Ammon—were undoubtedly foretold. These cities were destined to disappear. They existed in the early centuries A.D., but now they are gone. The subjugation of Egypt was explicitly predicted and has indeed taken place. Nineveh and Babylon were prophesied to fall into desolation and complete ruin while they were at the peak of their prosperity. They were to become places of eternal solitude, inhabited only by wild animals, and their palaces would become dens for jackals. Daniel’s well-known prophecy about the arrival of the Messiah after Seventy Weeks, i.e., 490 years from the announcement to restore and rebuild Jerusalem, is also significant. The prophet indicates where he drew his initial insight into prophecy, stating that in the first year of Darius's reign (521 B.C.), he "understood by books the numbers of the years," etc. Following this, through prayer and fasting, he gained great clarity, but in all his prophecies that incorporate natural symbolism, he equates a day with a year, a concept still explored by astrology students.

Coming to more modern times of which we have closer record, we find in Michael Nostradamus, 78Physician to Henry II of France and Catherine de Medici, something of the same flame that animated the ancient prophets. He carried his Astrology to a fine art, and among his predictions are many that deserve notice. The death of the King in a duel is well pourtrayed by him in a stanza—

Coming to more recent times that we have better records of, we find in Michael Nostradamus, 78 physician to Henry II of France and Catherine de Medici, something of the same passion that inspired the ancient prophets. He perfected his astrology into a fine art, and among his predictions are many that are worth noting. He vividly describes the death of the King in a duel in one of his stanzas—

The young lion will overcome the old one.
In the battlefield, through a single duel,
Golden cage frappé
Two wounds from one, and then a cruel death.

Henry II was killed by Montmorency on the 10th July, 1547, while engaged in a tourney at the nuptials of his sister with the Duke of Savoy. The lance of the Comte de Montmorency struck the gilded vizor of the King and penetrated to the eye. A tumour subsequently developed and the King died of it. This is in agreement with the prophecy of Morin, who in his horoscope of the King gave his death from a hurt to the head.

Henry II was killed by Montmorency on the 10th of July, 1547, while taking part in a tournament during his sister's wedding to the Duke of Savoy. The lance of Comte de Montmorency hit the King's gilded visor and went through to his eye. A tumor later formed, and the King died from it. This aligns with the prophecy of Morin, who predicted in his horoscope that the King would die from an injury to the head.

Nostradamus is also believed to have foreshadowed the Fire of London in 1666 in the following lines—

Nostradamus is also thought to have predicted the Fire of London in 1666 in these lines—

The blood of the righteous in London will fail.
Brusler by twenty-three past six.

The blood of the just (spilled) in London requires that it be burned by fire in Sixty-six.

The blood of the innocent spilled in London must be burned by fire in Sixty-six.

This prophecy is in line with that of the famous astrologer, William Lilly, who was patronized by King Charles I, and whose works were collected by Sir Elias Ashmole. Lilly so clearly predicted the Plague and Fire in two hieroglyphics that he was 79subsequently arraigned before Parliament concerning his more intimate knowledge of the source whence he drew his inspiration. His statement contained in Christian Astrology is that he founded his prediction on the ingress of the aphelion of Mars into the sign Virgo, which he affirmed was the ruler of the Monarchy then reigning.

This prophecy aligns with that of the renowned astrologer, William Lilly, who was supported by King Charles I and whose works were compiled by Sir Elias Ashmole. Lilly accurately predicted the Plague and the Fire with two symbols, which led to him being questioned by Parliament about his understanding of the source of his insights. In his book, Christian Astrology, he stated that he based his prediction on the entry of Mars into the sign of Virgo, which he claimed was the ruling sign of the monarchy at that time.

The Aphelion of Mars was on Jan. 1, 1800 5s 2° 23´ 19´´
From this take for 200 years motion 3° 39´ 40´´
  _______________
Position for Jan. 1, CE 1600 4s 28° 43´ 39´´
Add motion for 66 years 1° 12´ 29´´
  ______________
Position for Jan. 1, A.D. 1666 4s 29° 56´ 8´´

Therefore in about four years from the time of the Fire the aphelion of Mars would enter the sign Virgo. Kepler’s Tables, which were current in Lilly’s time, show the date of entry to be 1654, and a mean of these shows the year 1662. Therefore, as the hieroglyphic was published some years before the events to which it refers, I think there can be no doubt that Lilly has given us a true explanation of his reasons for the prediction.

Therefore, about four years after the Fire, Mars will be at its farthest point from the Sun in the sign of Virgo. Kepler’s Tables, which were in use during Lilly’s time, indicate this entry will happen in 1654, while an average of these tables points to the year 1662. Since the hieroglyphic was published a few years before the events it refers to, I believe it’s clear that Lilly has correctly explained his reasons for the prediction.

Kepler, the great Astronomer, not only affirmed his belief in the principles of Astrology, but gave illustration of them by his prediction of the rise and fall of Wallenstein.

Kepler, the great astronomer, not only expressed his belief in the principles of astrology but also demonstrated them through his prediction of Wallenstein's rise and fall.

Of Jerome Cardan, the astrologer and mathematician, who compiled the Centiloquia of Ptolemy, and made important contributions to the study of Algebra, there is a remarkable story on record concerning his prescience of his own death and the manner of it.

Of Jerome Cardan, the astrologer and mathematician, who compiled the Centiloquia of Ptolemy and made important contributions to the study of Algebra, there is a remarkable story on record about his foresight regarding his own death and how it would happen.

80It appears that from a study of his own horoscope he came to the conclusion that at a certain time he would be in danger of death by human violence. He therefore took precautions, and, having stored his larder with sufficient material to see him through the evil period, he securely bolted and barred all the doors and windows of the house, and thus thought himself to be in great security. But it happened that a band of robbers passing that way saw the house closed up, and, finding it to be very securely protected, they fancied that some great treasure might lay hidden away in it. They were not long in breaking into the place, and, meeting Jerome at the foot of the stairway, brutally murdered him.

80It seems that after looking at his horoscope, he concluded that at a certain time, he would be at risk of dying from violence. So, he took precautions and stocked his pantry with enough supplies to last through that dangerous period. He securely locked all the doors and windows of the house, believing he was safe. However, a group of robbers passing by noticed the house was shut tight and figured that there might be a hidden treasure inside. They quickly broke in and, encountering Jerome at the bottom of the stairs, brutally killed him.

John Dryden, the poet, studied Astrology very carefully, and the excellence of his faculty may be judged from the precision with which he predicted the career of his own son Charles. Congreve gives us the account very circumstantially. It is said that when his lady was about to give birth to this child, Dryden left his watch upon the table, instructing the attendants to be very careful in noting the time of the child’s birth. The event having been carefully timed, Dryden computed the horoscope and made the usual calculations. He was thus able shortly to inform his lady that at eight years of age the boy would be in danger of death by a fall. If he survived this he would be again in danger from a similar accident at twenty-three years of age, but that should he yet survive then at thirty-three or thirty-four he would certainly succumb to 81the malefic influences which then had indication in the horoscope.

John Dryden, the poet, studied astrology very carefully, and the quality of his skill can be judged by the accuracy with which he predicted the future of his own son Charles. Congreve recounts this in detail. It's said that when his wife was about to give birth to this child, Dryden left his watch on the table, telling the attendants to be very precise in noting the time of the child's birth. The event was carefully timed, and Dryden calculated the horoscope and made the necessary computations. He was then able to promptly inform his wife that when the boy turned eight, he would be at risk of dying from a fall. If he survived that, he would again face danger from a similar accident at the age of twenty-three, but if he lived through that, by thirty-three or thirty-four, he would likely succumb to the harmful influences indicated in the horoscope. 81

In effect it was seen that when the boy arrived at the age of eight years he nearly met his death. His father, being intent on going to a hunt, left the lad at home with a Latin exercise, enjoining him strictly not to leave the house until his return. As fate would have it, however, the stag in breaking away from the hounds jumped the wall of Dryden’s garden, and the boy running out to see what the noise was all about, came by the wall just as the hounds were scaling it. The wall gave way under the pressure of the pack, and Charles was buried beneath it. After a long illness he was restored to comparative health. At twenty-three years of age, when descending the steps of the Vatican, he fell and received such a severe blow upon the head as to render him unconscious. From this, however, he recovered, and might have lived to defeat the sinister predictions of his father, but that at the age of thirty-three he was tempted one day to indulge in a swimming feat in the Thames. Having crossed the river twice in succession he essayed to perform the feat a third time, but being caught with cramp or heart failure he was soon seen to be in difficulties; and before assistance could be rendered he sank and was drowned.

When he turned eight, the boy nearly died. His father, focused on going hunting, left him at home with a Latin assignment, telling him strictly not to leave the house until he got back. However, fate had other plans; a stag, trying to escape the hounds, jumped over the wall of Dryden's garden. The boy ran out to see what the commotion was about just as the hounds jumped the wall too. The wall collapsed under the weight of the pack, and Charles was buried under the rubble. After a lengthy illness, he regained his health. At twenty-three, while descending the steps of the Vatican, he fell and hit his head so hard that he lost consciousness. He recovered from that, and might have lived to prove his father's dark prophecies wrong, but at thirty-three, he was tempted to show off by swimming in the Thames. After crossing the river twice, he attempted it a third time, but got a cramp or experienced heart failure. He quickly got into trouble; before help could arrive, he sank and drowned.

Thus we see that among the readers of the Symbols some were able to admonish others and to give timely warning of the evils which beset them, while themselves unable to provide against those troubles of which they had equal prescience. One is indeed 82tempted to say with Philip Bailey, “Free will in man is necessity in play.” But we know that the reading of the symbols is not the same as the understanding of the law, and it is quite reasonable to affirm that the ability to foresee and predict a danger does not carry with it the ability to avert it. That such power lies to the hand of man we may assume from the fact that successive rulers of ancient China were able to continue in vigorous life long past the age at which astrological indications extend. Thus Fuh Hi reigned 115 years, Shin Nung 140 years, while Hwang Ti lived 110 years and reigned 100. Show Hao lived 100 and reigned for 84, and several others lived over 100 years each, and according to astrological principles all the “arcs of direction” would be completed in 112 years. Thus Fuh Hi began the Patriarchal Dynasty in 2943 B.C., and the obliquity of the Ecliptic was then 24° 7´, and taking the capital of the Yellow Empire as in latitude 39° 54´ the product of their tangents will amount to about 22°, which added to 90° will give 112° or about the same number of years.

So we see that among the readers of the Symbols, some were able to advise others and give timely warnings about the dangers they faced, while they themselves were unable to protect against those same troubles they foresaw. One might be tempted to say with Philip Bailey, “Free will in man is necessity in play.” But we know that reading the symbols doesn’t mean understanding the law, and it’s quite reasonable to believe that being able to foresee and predict a danger doesn’t mean one can avoid it. We may assume that such power lies in the hands of humans, as successive rulers of ancient China managed to live long past the age indicated by astrology. For example, Fuh Hi ruled for 115 years, Shin Nung for 140 years, while Hwang Ti lived for 110 years and reigned for 100. Show Hao lived for 100 years and ruled for 84, and several others also lived over 100 years. According to astrological principles, all the “arcs of direction” would be completed in 112 years. Fuh Hi started the Patriarchal Dynasty in 2943 B.C., and at that time the tilt of the Ecliptic was 24° 7´. Taking the capital of the Yellow Empire as located at latitude 39° 54´, the product of their tangents will amount to about 22°, which combined with 90° gives 112°, or about the same number of years.

But we are also told that these men understood the Tao-tien, or universal laws, and were in possession of the efficacious Word, so that by their knowledge, allied to their great virtues and simplicity of life, they were enabled to withstand the assaults of cosmical forces and extend their years beyond the low average to which modern civilization has brought us. It has been suggested by some controversialists that the age of Methuselah, which is 83given as 969 years, should be reckoned as lunar years, that is to say, as nine hundred and sixty-nine lunations. But this would yield a period of about 78 years and 120 days merely, and by the same computation he would be just over 15 years of age when he begat Lamech, for it is said that he was then 187 years of age, and 187 lunations equal 15 years and 47 days. But this would falsify the whole of the chronology, which, although not established, is found to be consistent in itself. Thus both the Chinese and the Hebrews agree as to the date of the Flood, 2348 B.C. At that time Noah was the Patriarchal ruler in Chaldea and Yaou and Shun were joint riders in the Yellow Empire. The curious agreement of the Hebrew and Chinese records is presumptive evidence of something in the nature of a vast and probably universal cataclysm. The following is the computation from Genesis—

But we're also told that these men understood the Tao-tien, or universal laws, and possessed the powerful Word, so that through their knowledge, combined with their great virtues and simplicity of life, they were able to withstand the challenges of cosmic forces and extend their lifespan beyond the low average that modern civilization has reduced us to. Some debaters have suggested that the age of Methuselah, which is given as 969 years, should be viewed as lunar years, meaning nine hundred and sixty-nine lunar cycles. However, this would only amount to around 78 years and 120 days, and by the same calculation, he would have been just over 15 years old when he fathered Lamech, since it’s stated he was 187 years old then, and 187 lunar cycles equal 15 years and 47 days. This would distort the entire chronology, which, although not fully established, is internally consistent. Thus both the Chinese and the Hebrews agree on the date of the Flood, 2348 B.C. At that time, Noah was the patriarchal ruler in Chaldea, and Yaou and Shun were co-rulers of the Yellow Empire. The interesting alignment of the Hebrew and Chinese records suggests evidence of a significant and likely worldwide cataclysm. The following is the calculation from Genesis—

Age of Adam at the birth of Seth, 130 years.
” Seth ” ” Enos, 105 ”
” Enos ” ” Cainan, 90 ”
” Cainan ” ” Mahalaleel, 70 ”
” Mahalaleel ” ” Jared, 65 ”
” Jared ” ” Enoch, 162 ”
” Enoch ” ” Methuselah, 65 ”
” Methuselah ” ” Lamech, 187 ”
” Lamech ” ” Noah, 182 ”
” Noah at the time of Flood, 600 ”
——
Total of years from Epoch 1656 ”
Beginning of the record, BCE 4004 ”
——
Date of the Flood, BCE 2348 ”

It is quite clear, therefore, that if we reduce the natural years of Methuselah to lunar years the result 84would be to vitiate the whole of the chronology, and, moreover, if we did so in regard to the years of Methuselah we must also do so in regard to others of the Patriarchs. This would mean that Mahalaleel was born to Cainan when the latter was just over seven year of age; or that Methuselah was born to Enoch in the sixth year of his age! If there is any improbability in the record at all, it is rather in the idea of these patriarchal infants than in that of the extreme longevity of Methuselah. If a mere tortoise can live for 500 years, why not a human? What the simple life is capable of, we of this age have no knowledge from experience, but I see no reason why certain souls, fitted by spiritual selection for the performance of some great work or the up-holding of a holy tradition, should not incarnate under cosmical conditions which are also so select as to withstand the concatenation of natural forces which make for dissolution. At all events we have here a rather interesting problem for the Eugenists, who, basing their principles on purely physiological grounds, are confronted and disarmed on every side by these occult forces in Nature which they have failed to take into account. While they base all their calculations on physical heredity, the occultist points silently but impressively to the fact of psychic tradition, and in support of the occult position we are able to point to a hundred cases of insanity which can be specifically predicted from the moment of birth and years before the symptoms of mental disorder begin to manifest. A theory to have a working value must include all the facts, and so far 85as human genetics are concerned not the least among these facts is that of the cyclic rebirth of souls and the continual importation of new psychic forces into the line of physical heredity. The study of Eugenics should begin in the study of psychology. We know, for instance, that progeny generated during intoxication will probably turn out epileptic, but that does not answer the question as to why one soul rather than another should animate that body. Yet out of a dozen horoscopes an astrologer will unhesitatingly pick out any one that may happen to belong to a body thus afflicted. This fact should give us pause to re-examine the foundations of our system of genetics. The secret of health and longevity is not to be found on this side of the spiritual equator.

It’s clear, then, that if we convert Methuselah’s natural years to lunar years, it would throw off the entire timeline. Moreover, if we do this for Methuselah, we would have to do it for the other Patriarchs as well. This would imply that Mahalaleel was born to Cainan when he was just over seven years old, or that Methuselah was born to Enoch when Enoch was only six! If there’s any implausibility in the record, it’s in imagining these patriarchal infants, not in Methuselah's extreme longevity. If a simple tortoise can live for 500 years, why not a human? We have no real experience of what a simple life can achieve, but I see no reason why certain souls, chosen spiritually for significant tasks or to uphold a sacred tradition, shouldn’t be born under conditions that are also specifically favorable to resist the natural forces leading to decay. In any case, this raises an intriguing issue for Eugenics, which relies solely on physiological principles but is outmatched by the hidden forces in Nature they’ve ignored. While they base all their calculations on physical inheritance, the occultist quietly but powerfully points out the importance of psychic tradition. We can point to numerous cases of insanity that can be predicted from birth long before any symptoms appear. A useful theory must account for all the facts, and in the realm of human genetics, one crucial fact is the cyclical rebirth of souls and the ongoing introduction of new psychic energies into physical heredity. The study of Eugenics should start with psychology. For instance, we know that children conceived during intoxication are likely to be epileptic, but that doesn’t answer why one soul rather than another inhabits that body. Yet an astrologer can effortlessly identify a horoscope belonging to someone with such a condition from a selection of a dozen. This should prompt us to reconsider the foundations of our genetics system. The key to health and longevity lies beyond the spiritual equator.

86

CHAPTER IX
A TYPICAL CASE

The ancient secret records embody a tradition of the going down of Atlantis into the depths of the sea after the perversion of a race of humanity whose physical culture, civilization and scientific attainments eclipsed anything of which we have modern example.

The ancient secret records hold a tradition about the sinking of Atlantis into the ocean after the corruption of a human race whose physical culture, civilization, and scientific achievements surpassed anything we have today.

The Hebrew records give us the familiar case of Babel, that achievement of human arrogance which reached to the gates of the Sun. The great civilizations of Assyria, Babylon, Egypt, Greece and Rome have gone the way of all things temporal. In the modern endeavour to “beat the record” there is an element of danger which is too lightly regarded by those who have no knowledge whatsoever of the forces with which they are playing. These are not of the air and wave alone but of the whole universe, as well spiritual as physical. Let us look at the matter in the light of a modern example.

The Hebrew records tell us about the well-known story of Babel, a symbol of human arrogance that reached for the very heavens. The great civilizations of Assyria, Babylon, Egypt, Greece, and Rome have all faded away like everything else that is temporary. In today's race to "set new records," there’s a risk that many underestimate, especially those who are completely unaware of the powerful forces at play. These forces aren't just limited to air and waves; they're part of the entire universe, both spiritual and physical. Let's consider this issue through a contemporary example.

I have no record as to when the Titanic was keeled, but there is certain knowledge that it was launched on the 31st of May, 1911 at Belfast, the time being Greenwich Mean Time, 12.42 p.m. The ship was well-named, not only because it was the 87greatest embodiment of human engineering and ship-building skill, a veritable monster of a modern Frankenstein, but also because it was the embodiment of human pride and daring. The Titans, it will be remembered, were a race of giants, sons of Heaven and Earth, who were hurled into the abyss for daring to make war against Zeus. It is the Greek story of the submersion of Atlantis.

I don’t have a record of when the Titanic was built, but it’s definitely known that it was launched on the 31st of May, 1911 in Belfast, at 12:42 p.m. GMT. The ship got a fitting name, not just because it was the greatest example of human engineering and shipbuilding talent—a real modern-day Frankenstein—but also because it represented human pride and bravery. The Titans, as we remember, were a race of giants, offspring of Heaven and Earth, who were cast into the abyss for having the audacity to fight against Zeus. It echoes the Greek legend of the sinking of Atlantis.

Ambitious in design, colossal in form, and inclusive of the very latest of modern luxury, this floating city took the water for the first time at a moment when the whole amphitheatre of heaven was witness of indications of impending disaster. I do not pretend to know what particular Master of Wisdom it was who set Argo Navis in the heavens as a symbol of all that maritime prowess with which the world has grown wonderful. I only know that in whatsoever horoscope a malefic planet occupies that particular part of the heavens it stands for a symbol of disaster by navigation. It is associated with Cancer. Neither do I know who it was gave to Neptune the traditional rule of the ocean, but yet I find it a prominent and malefic factor in all significations of shipwreck.

Ambitious in design, massive in size, and featuring all the latest in modern luxury, this floating city took to the water for the first time at a moment when the entire sky was filled with signs of impending disaster. I don’t claim to know which particular Master of Wisdom placed Argo Navis in the sky as a symbol of the incredible maritime skills that have made the world so remarkable. I only know that in any horoscope where a malefic planet occupies that specific area of the heavens, it represents a symbol of disaster related to navigation. It is linked to Cancer. I also don’t know who assigned Neptune the traditional rule over the ocean, but I still find it a significant and harmful influence in all things related to shipwrecks.

Now we have said that the time of the launching of the Titanic was effected under portents of disaster. Let us go more closely into the particulars. At the moment of launching the 19th degree of the sign Virgo was rising at Belfast with the planet Mars just below the eastern horizon. The ruler of the horoscope was Mercury, and we find it in the 9th division of the heavens, that part which has significance of 88voyages, and in conjunction with Saturn, the significator of delays, obstacles, obstructions and collapse. Both Saturn and Mercury were opposed by Jupiter. The Moon was in the “ocean” sign, Cancer going to the opposition of Uranus, the symbol of sudden catastrophe.

Now we’ve noted that the launch of the Titanic occurred amidst signs of disaster. Let’s examine the details more closely. At the time of the launch, the 19th degree of Virgo was rising in Belfast, with Mars just below the eastern horizon. The ruler of the horoscope was Mercury, positioned in the 9th division of the heavens, which is significant for voyages, and it was aligned with Saturn, which represents delays, obstacles, and failure. Both Saturn and Mercury were opposed by Jupiter. The Moon was in the “ocean” sign, Cancer, moving towards an opposition with Uranus, a symbol of sudden catastrophe.

The most striking point is the ruler of the horoscope, Mercury, in the House of Voyages conjoined with the malefic planet Saturn.

The most striking point is the ruler of the horoscope, Mercury, in the House of Travels, joined with the harmful planet Saturn.

The Titanic set out for Southampton to take up its first commission on the 2nd of April, 1912, at 9.20 a.m.

The Titanic departed for Southampton to start its first assignment on the 2nd of April, 1912, at 9:20 a.m.

At this time Cancer was rising, and the Moon was therefore ruler of the horoscope. It is found in opposition to the Sun and in square aspect to Neptune in Cancer just below the horizon. Here again we have the ruler of the horoscope just separating from eclipse and applying to an evil aspect with Neptune, the traditional ruler of the ocean.

At this moment, Cancer was on the rise, making the Moon the ruler of the horoscope. It was in opposition to the Sun and at a square aspect to Neptune in Cancer, just below the horizon. Once again, we see the ruler of the horoscope just coming out of an eclipse and moving toward a challenging aspect with Neptune, the traditional ruler of the ocean.

The leviathan left Southampton on its maiden voyage at noon of the 10th of April, 1912. At this time we find the sign Leo rising, and the Sun, ruler of the horoscope, in quadrature to Neptune in the 12th House, an indication of hidden dangers.

The leviathan departed from Southampton on its first voyage at noon on April 10, 1912. At this moment, we see the sign Leo ascending, and the Sun, which rules the horoscope, forming a square with Neptune in the 12th House, suggesting hidden dangers.

Thus in every case we find the ruler of the horoscope to be significantly and severely afflicted. But that which was specifically indicated as regards the Titanic was generally indicated by the position of Neptune in the 8th House (death) of the Vernal Ingress preceding the event, whereat the Sun was in quadrature to Neptune, and this indication was repeated in the horoscope for the sailing from Southampton on the 10th of April.

Thus, in every case, we see that the ruler of the horoscope is noticeably and seriously troubled. What was particularly signified about the Titanic was generally shown by Neptune's position in the 8th House (death) of the Spring Equinox before the event, where the Sun was in a square aspect to Neptune, and this indication was reaffirmed in the horoscope for the departure from Southampton on the 10th of April.

89 Figure 6.

Figure 6.

Figure 6.

Among many notable passengers on board the fated vessel, none was better known or more generally respected than Mr. W. T. Stead. He was born, according to his own statement, on the 5th of July, 1849, “before breakfast.” The horoscope which fits the events of his life is one set for that date at 7 a.m., and the above is the figure of the heavens at that time.

Among many notable passengers on board the doomed ship, none was more famous or widely respected than Mr. W. T. Stead. He claimed to have been born on the 5th of July, 1849, “before breakfast.” The horoscope that aligns with the events of his life is one created for that date at 7 a.m., and the figure above shows the state of the heavens at that time.

Here again we find the Sun, ruler of the horoscope, in the significant sign Cancer afflicted by the opposition of the Moon and the quadrature of Saturn, the 90latter malefic being in the 9th House, which has already been defined as that of “voyages.” The fateful planet Neptune holds the 8th House in the watery sign Pisces.

Here we see the Sun, the ruler of the horoscope, in the important sign of Cancer, affected by the opposition from the Moon and the square from Saturn, which is a negative influence located in the 9th House, defined as the house of "journeys." The impactful planet Neptune occupies the 8th House in the water sign of Pisces. 90

The indications of a violent and unnatural death are clearly defined by Ptolemy, who informs us that when both the luminaries are afflicted by the same malefic, or when each luminary is separately afflicted, there being no assistance from the benefic planets (Venus and Jupiter) the native will die an unnatural death. Here we find both the Sun and Moon in quadrature to Saturn in the 9th House, showing as clearly as anything can be, that there would be danger of death in a foreign land or while on a voyage, and that by violence. I have no doubt at all that Mr. Stead met his death through a blow upon the head, as there are evident signs of collision, but none of suffocation.

The signs of a violent and unnatural death are clearly outlined by Ptolemy, who tells us that when both the Sun and Moon are negatively influenced by the same malefic planet, or when each one is affected separately without any help from the benefic planets (Venus and Jupiter), the individual will experience an unnatural death. Here we see both the Sun and Moon in a challenging position to Saturn in the 9th House, indicating that there is a real risk of dying in a foreign place or while traveling, and that it would be due to violence. I have no doubt that Mr. Stead died from a blow to the head, as there are clear signs of impact, but none of suffocation.

The horoscope is in other ways significant of the main facts of the life of the great journalist. Five planets in cardinal signs with Mars in the Mid-heaven testify to the tireless energy, executive ability, courage and daring for which he was remarkable. This elevated position of the planet Mars always denotes impulse and impetuosity, and it is similarly placed in the horoscope of Kaiser Wilhelm, in whom Mr. Stead would doubtless have found a congenial spirit. It gives that “scorn of consequence” which attaches to the enthusiast in every phase of life, and tends greatly to produce the pioneer spirit. With Gladstone, Mr. Stead shared the view that “psychical research is by far the most important 91work that is being done in the world,” but no astrologer would have recommended him to undertake it, for with Saturn in the 9th division of the heavens afflicting the luminaries he could hardly hope for success in that direction, and there is little doubt that he was very grossly deceived by some in whom he placed great reliance in this matter. The trine of Neptune to Mercury would, however, impel him to such subjects. Borderland was not a financial success, nor was it much more than a ragbag of fragmentary and ill-assorted evidence. Julia’s Bureau was not a success either from a financial or evidential point of view. No message of warning came through from “Julia” to save him from his death voyage. Let us accept the suggestion that has been offered, namely, that he was wanted elsewhere. It was still open to those who were aware of the fact to say so, and thus contribute one of the most striking pieces of evidence for the operation in mundane life of extraneous intelligences, which would have gone further to uphold the claims of those who believe in spirit-guidance than all the literature Mr. Stead lavished on the subject.

The horoscope also reveals key aspects of the great journalist's life. With five planets in cardinal signs and Mars at the Mid-heaven, it reflects the tireless energy, executive skill, courage, and boldness he was known for. Mars' high position indicates impulsiveness and passion, similar to Kaiser Wilhelm’s chart, someone Mr. Stead would likely resonate with. This placement fosters a "scorn of consequence" typical of enthusiasts in all walks of life, greatly encouraging a pioneering spirit. Mr. Stead shared with Gladstone the belief that "psychical research is by far the most important work being done in the world,” but no astrologer would have advised him to pursue it. With Saturn in the 9th division of the heavens affecting the luminaries, he could hardly expect to succeed there, and it’s clear he was seriously misled by people he trusted on this issue. However, the trine of Neptune to Mercury would have driven him towards such topics. Borderland wasn't financially successful, nor was it much more than a collection of random and poorly matched evidence. Julia’s Bureau also failed both financially and in its evidential strength. No warning came from "Julia" to prevent him from his fatal voyage. Let’s consider the suggestion that he was needed elsewhere. Those aware of this fact could speak up, offering one of the most compelling pieces of evidence for the influence of outside intelligences in everyday life, which would have supported the claims of spirit guidance more than all the literature Mr. Stead produced on the subject.

At the time of the disaster we find the following arcs of direction measured in the prime vertical to be in operation—

At the time of the disaster, we find the following arcs of direction measured in the prime vertical to be in operation—

Moon opposition Uranus,
Sun conjunction Uranus,
Moon parallel Mars,

while the Moon by secondary direction, that is, 92accounting one day after birth for each year of life and two hours for every month, was in 26° of Aries, exactly the longitude of the catastrophic planet Uranus at the time of birth!

while the Moon, according to the secondary direction, which is one day after birth for each year of life and two hours for every month, was in 26° of Aries, exactly aligned with the catastrophic planet Uranus at the time of birth!

Compare this horoscope with that of the ill-fated Captain of the Titanic. According to the local record Captain Smith was born at Handley, Staffs., on the 27th of January, 1850. Here again we find the luminaries in opposition to one another as in the horoscope of Mr. Stead, and both are afflicted by the aspect of Mars. The time of birth was probably at about five o’clock in the afternoon, when the planet Neptune would be in the 8th House and Saturn and Uranus in the 9th division of the heavens. Sixty-two days after birth the planet Uranus had reached the Mid-heaven of the horoscope, and on the day of the disaster Mercury was in transit over the same point, while the great symbol of death and destruction, an eclipse of the Sun, fell in 27° of Aries on the 17th of April, close to the Mid-heaven of this horoscope and on that of Mr. Stead’s horoscope. Further, the Moon at the birth of Captain Smith was in the 4th degree of Leo and on the day of the disaster Uranus was transiting the exact opposition in Aquarius 4. Moreover, at the time of the sailing of the Titanic from Belfast to undertake her ill-fated maiden voyage, the 5th degree of Cancer was rising, and on the day of the disaster Mars had reached this exact degree of the zodiac, being in 4° 56´ of Cancer at Noon.

Compare this horoscope with that of the doomed Captain of the Titanic. According to local records, Captain Smith was born in Handley, Staffs., on the 27th of January, 1850. Once again, we see the planets in opposition to each other as in Mr. Stead's horoscope, and both are influenced negatively by Mars. He was likely born around five o’clock in the afternoon when Neptune was in the 8th House and Saturn and Uranus were in the 9th House. Sixty-two days after his birth, Uranus reached the Mid-heaven of his horoscope, and on the day of the disaster, Mercury was transiting the same point, while the ominous symbol of death and destruction, a solar eclipse, occurred at 27° of Aries on the 17th of April, near the Mid-heaven of his horoscope and Mr. Stead’s horoscope. Additionally, the Moon at Captain Smith’s birth was at the 4th degree of Leo, and on the disaster day, Uranus was transiting the exact opposition at 4° of Aquarius. Furthermore, at the time the Titanic left Belfast for her ill-fated maiden voyage, the 5th degree of Cancer was rising, and on the day of the disaster, Mars had reached this exact degree of the zodiac, positioned at 4° 56' of Cancer at Noon.

No case that could be submitted more fully and completely illustrates the folly of disregarding the 93symbolism of the heavens, or more forcibly accentuates the need of human conspiracy in regard to cosmical agencies. Man has harnessed some of the most potent forces of Nature and has constrained them to his service, but for some as yet undiscovered reason he prefers to remain in ignorance of the laws which relate him to his greater cosmical environment. We have imagined that by controlling these natural forces we have asserted our mastery over destiny. The heavens from out the immeasurable depths of space are the silent witnesses of our folly and arrogance. The same stars that fought against Sisera fight ever against the man who is ignorant of the laws of the universe which condition him. We are fated to the extent that we are ignorant of those laws, and culpable to the degree that we disregard those that we know. The sea, the vessels that are afloat upon it and all their human freight, are as nearly touched and as surely disposed by interplanetary action and cosmical forces as are the molecules of air and water that constitute the winds and waves. Never a ship was keeled or launched but into it were compounded the elements that respond to the great heart-beat of Nature. That man should use all his faculties to the greatest possible advantage to himself and through himself to the race at large, that he should put forth all his powers in the effort to master the forces which appear to be in conflict with him, would appear to be his supreme duty and his highest guerdon. But there is a more convenient and less dangerous way. Instead of defying the forces of Nature he can make 94use of them, instead, of ignoring the laws of Nature he can adapt himself to them. This is called the covert agreement. It is the ancient wisdom, the simple way, and those who anciently observed it found it to be effectual for good. Those ancient Britains who thought Canute to be so great that he could set back the ocean tides were of that order of Titans who would measure their strength with the Almighty. We, who have understood the laws governing the tides, have gained a mastery over them by the simple means of adaptation. In this instance we have adapted ourselves to Nature. It is possible to extend the process to include the election of times and seasons for any purpose whatsoever. Solomon, who is regarded by the average man as an inconsequent babbler of effete doctrine, affirmed that there is a time for every purpose under the heavens. A closer study of this doctrine of elections—as the proper choice of time for specific purposes is called in Astrology—would lead men to take a conscious part in the conspiracy of well-doing, by the adjustment of action to purpose and of both to astral and cosmical conditions. This would be infinitely better than “taking one’s chance,” and certainly more in conformity with the spirit of true religion. But before we can do this we shall have to instruct ourselves more generally in the symbolism of the universe and the reading of those symbols which from the beginning were set and appointed to us for “signs and for seasons, for days and for years.”

No situation that has been presented more fully illustrates the foolishness of ignoring the symbolism of the heavens, or emphasizes more strongly the necessity for human collaboration regarding cosmic forces. Humanity has harnessed some of the most powerful forces of Nature and has made them serve us, but for some unknown reason, we choose to stay ignorant of the laws that connect us to our larger cosmic environment. We thought that by controlling these natural forces, we claimed mastery over our fate. The heavens, from the vast expanses of space, silently witness our folly and arrogance. The same stars that fought against Sisera now work against those who ignore the universal laws that influence them. We are destined to the extent that we are unaware of those laws and responsible to the degree that we disregard the ones we do know. The sea, the ships sailing on it, and all their human cargo are as affected and determined by interplanetary actions and cosmic forces as are the molecules of air and water that make up the winds and waves. No ship was ever built or launched without incorporating elements that respond to the great rhythm of Nature. It would seem to be man's supreme duty and greatest reward to use all his abilities to benefit himself and, by extension, humanity, putting forth all his efforts to master the forces that seem to oppose him. However, there is a more convenient and less risky way. Instead of defying Nature's forces, he can utilize them; instead of ignoring Nature's laws, he can adjust himself to them. This is known as the covert agreement. It is ancient wisdom, the straightforward path, and those who followed it in the past found it effective for good. Those ancient Britons who believed Canute was powerful enough to hold back the ocean tides belonged to the kind of Titans who would challenge the Almighty. We, who have grasped the laws governing the tides, have gained mastery over them simply by adapting. In this case, we adapted ourselves to Nature. It’s possible to extend this process to choose the right times and seasons for any purpose. Solomon, seen by many as a meaningless talker of outdated ideas, stated that there is a time for everything under the heavens. A closer examination of this idea of timing—known in Astrology as the appropriate selection of time for specific purposes—would encourage people to consciously engage in the effort to do good, by aligning actions with purposes, and both with astral and cosmic conditions. This would be far better than “taking one’s chance” and certainly more in line with the spirit of true religion. But before we can achieve this, we need to educate ourselves more broadly on the symbolism of the universe and learn to interpret those symbols that were set before us from the beginning as “signs and for seasons, for days and for years.”

A knowledge of cosmical symbolism and of the facts of planetary interaction is that to which 95science will inevitably be compelled, and which sooner or later it will recognize as essential to a true concept of the relations of man to his greater environment. And when this system of Anthrocosmology shall have been established, as assuredly it will be, then will humanity perceive in all humility that God, and not Britannia, rules the waves, and that the planets are his agents.

A grasp of cosmic symbolism and the realities of planetary interactions is what science will eventually have to embrace, and it will sooner or later acknowledge as crucial for a proper understanding of the connections between humanity and the larger universe. And when this system of Anthrocosmology is finally established, which it certainly will be, humanity will humbly recognize that God, not Britannia, rules the waves, and that the planets are His agents.

96

CHAPTER X
THE LAW OF CYCLES

It has already been shown that from most ancient times the Law of Periodicity was known and expounded. We find reference to it in the Vishnu Puràna which deals with the great periods of cosmic manifestation and activity, called Manvantaras, and the corresponding periods of obscuration and quiescence known as Pralayas. These are shown to have an astronomical basis and to have been directly related (a) to the period of Precession known as the Great Year of Plato, and (b) to the inclination of the Earth’s axis to the plane of the Ecliptic. For whereas the Precession, from whatever source arising, is found to be approximately 50´´ per year, the diminution of the Earth’s axial inclination is found to be 50´´ per century. Thus the Precessional Year is 25,920 years, and the other 2,592,000 years in extent.

It has already been shown that the Law of Periodicity has been known and discussed since ancient times. We find references to it in the Vishnu Puràna, which describes the major periods of cosmic existence and activity, called Manvantaras, and the corresponding periods of darkness and stillness known as Pralayas. These are demonstrated to have an astronomical basis and are directly related (a) to the period of Precession referred to as the Great Year by Plato, and (b) to the tilt of the Earth’s axis relative to the plane of the Ecliptic. While the Precession, regardless of its source, is approximately 50 arc seconds per year, the decrease in the Earth’s axial tilt is found to be 50 arc seconds per century. Thus, the Precessional Year lasts 25,920 years, while the other period spans 2,592,000 years.

Now if we multiply this latter period by ten and divide the product by six, we shall have the dividend 4,320,000, which we have already identified as the value in years of the Maha-yuga or Great Age. This means that the entire revolution of the Earth’s axis occupies a period which is ten-sixths of the whole period of cosmic activity known as the 97Manvantara. Hence we have the series 1, 2, 3, 4 equals 10, and the series 6, 12, 18, 24 equals 60, which we have already shown to be the basis of the Yugas composing the Maha-yuga. This value of 60 has therefore a cosmical significance.[1] It is geometrically derived from the interlacing of two equilateral triangles, commonly known as the Seal of Solomon, and esoterically invested with the symbolical value of the universe in manifestation of Spirit (male, positive) and Matter (female, negative), and also the Out-breathing and In-breathing of the Great Breath of Life. Water crystallizes at an angle of 60°, and the ancient teaching of Pythagoras, Plato, Thales and other Initiates, was that Water was the basic element of Nature. By the elements they did not understand the chemical elements known to modern Chemistry, but the Four states of Matter, the Igneous, Gaseous, Fluidic and Mineral, which have their correspondences in the Four Principles of the human constitution, Spirit, Mind, Soul and Body, of which the first two are formless or immaterial, and the last two formative or material. Thus we have the higher trial of Intelligence, Life and Substance, with their multiplex manifestations in the lower triad of Consciousness, Force and Matter.

Now, if we multiply this latter period by ten and divide the result by six, we get the total of 4,320,000, which we’ve already identified as the years in the Maha-yuga or Great Age. This indicates that the full rotation of the Earth’s axis takes a time that is ten-sixths of the complete period of cosmic activity known as the 97Manvantara. Therefore, we have the series 1, 2, 3, 4 totaling 10, and the series 6, 12, 18, 24 totaling 60, which we've already shown to be the foundation of the Yugas that make up the Maha-yuga. This value of 60 has a cosmic significance.[1] It is geometrically derived from the interlacing of two equilateral triangles, often referred to as the Seal of Solomon, and symbolically represents the universe manifesting Spirit (male, positive) and Matter (female, negative), as well as the Out-breathing and In-breathing of the Great Breath of Life. Water crystallizes at a 60° angle, and the ancient teachings of Pythagoras, Plato, Thales, and other Initiates held that Water was the fundamental element of Nature. When they mentioned elements, they were not referring to the chemical elements of modern Chemistry, but to the Four states of Matter: Igneous, Gaseous, Fluidic, and Mineral, which correspond to the Four Principles of the human constitution: Spirit, Mind, Soul, and Body, where the first two are formless or immaterial, and the last two are formative or material. Thus, we have the higher aspects of Intelligence, Life, and Substance, along with their diverse manifestations in the lower triad of Consciousness, Force, and Matter.

For there is only One Intelligence, One Life and One Substance, and it is with the manifestations of these in the lower world that Science is concerned. Wisdom has no other concern than to discern the 98Unity in Diversity and to cognize all in terms of the One Being.

For there is only one intelligence, one life, and one substance, and it's the manifestations of these in the lower world that science focuses on. Wisdom has no other purpose than to recognize the unity in diversity and to understand everything in terms of the one being. 98

Figure 7.

Figure 7.

Figure 7.

Another very interesting cosmical cycle is that of the Eclipse Period. The initial value of this is 18 years 11 days 7 hours 42 mins. 35 secs., being the mean interval between an eclipse and its recurrence. In three cycles the eclipse will have moved through one sign of the zodiac, and in twelve times three or thirty-six cycles it will have moved through the entire zodiac and come again to the place of the first occurrence. Then 18 × 3 × 12 or 648 years, to which add one for the precessional increment and obtain 649 years as the Eclipse Cycle, after which the phenomena recur in the same part of the zodiac.

Another fascinating cosmic cycle is the Eclipse Period. Its initial value is 18 years, 11 days, 7 hours, 42 minutes, and 35 seconds, which is the average time between an eclipse and when it happens again. In three cycles, the eclipse will move through one sign of the zodiac, and in twelve times three, or thirty-six cycles, it will have moved through the entire zodiac and return to the spot of the first occurrence. So, that’s 18 × 3 × 12, which equals 648 years. We then add one for the precessional increment, resulting in 649 years as the Eclipse Cycle, after which the events repeat in the same section of the zodiac.

Thus I find an eclipse of the Sun in June, A.D. 1277, and the same eclipse in June, A.D. 1926, another in June 1295, which recurs in June 1944.

Thus, I find a solar eclipse in June, CE 1277, and the same eclipse in June, CE 1926, another in June 1295, which happens again in June 1944.

99We can hardly escape the inevitable harmony of celestial motions when we note that the eclipse which recurs every eighteen years, makes seventy-two appearances during the entire period that it takes to work across the Earth’s disc from its first appearance in the Arctic Circle to its disappearance in the Antarctic. Here we have four times 18 equals 72, and 72 times 18 are 1296 years. Thus, again, we have the cyclic period of 1296 years, which we have already noted in connection with cosmical symbolism. It is twice the eclipse cycle of 648 years, after which the eclipses return to the same part of the zodiac. It has not yet been shown that there is any necessary connection between these two periods, and it is therefore the more remarkable. The average of Precession being 1° in seventy-two years, it is, of course, quite easy to link the eclipse period with the Great Year.

99We can hardly ignore the inevitable harmony of celestial movements when we observe that the eclipse that happens every eighteen years makes seventy-two appearances during the entire journey it takes to cross the Earth’s surface, from its first sighting in the Arctic Circle to its vanishing in the Antarctic. Here we have four times 18 equals 72, and 72 times 18 equals 1296 years. So, we again see the cyclic period of 1296 years, which we've already noted in relation to cosmological symbolism. It is twice the eclipse cycle of 648 years, after which the eclipses return to the same part of the zodiac. There hasn't yet been sufficient evidence to show any necessary connection between these two periods, making it even more remarkable. The average of Precession being 1° in seventy-two years makes it easy to link the eclipse period with the Great Year.

Here, then, we have a veritable Phœnix which renews itself after incineration in Heliopolis (the City of the Sun), and although Eclipses may have no cosmical significance, they may very well have a terrestrial one, both causative and symbolical. Take, for instance, the abscission of the Sun’s rays which takes place at the time of a solar eclipse. This affects only a small area of the Earth’s surface, but quite sufficient to produce very remarkable results when, to the known tidal influence of the luminaries we add the violent and sudden change in the electrostatic condition of the atmosphere. Thus at the solar eclipse of 17th April, 1912, I registered a fall of 27° of temperature in the space 100of one hour in London. Here the eclipse was not at its maximum, and in no place was it total but merely annular. If the effects are due to the combined action of the Sun and Moon, the ratio of influence being in regard to the Sun 30 per cent., and to the Moon 70 per cent. roughly, then it may reasonably be supposed that when the Moon is simultaneously in perigee, that is, nearest to the Earth in its orbit, at the time of an eclipse, the effects should be proportionately greater, and also that they should be experienced in that locality which coincides with the zenith position of the luminaries at conjunction.

Here, we have a true Phoenix that renews itself after being burned up in Heliopolis (the City of the Sun). While eclipses might not have a cosmic significance, they can definitely have a meaningful impact on Earth, both causing changes and symbolically. Take, for example, the blocking of the Sun’s rays that happens during a solar eclipse. This affects only a small area of the Earth's surface, but it's enough to create some notable results when we consider the known tidal influences of celestial bodies, combined with a sudden and drastic shift in the electrical state of the atmosphere. For instance, during the solar eclipse on April 17, 1912, I recorded a drop of 27°F in just one hour in London. Here, the eclipse wasn't at its peak, and it was never total, only annular. If the effects stem from the combined forces of the Sun and Moon, with the Sun's influence at about 30% and the Moon's around 70%, it’s reasonable to think that when the Moon is also at perigee—meaning it's closest to Earth in its orbit—during an eclipse, the effects should be even greater. Additionally, these effects would likely be felt most strongly in the area that is directly beneath the celestial bodies during their conjunction.

Such effects can be traced in the occurrence of great earthquake disturbances, due, no doubt, to an effort of nature to restore the balance of magnetic action, the local fall of temperature being met by an uprush of electrical energy from the interior of the globe. Similar effects are registered in the human body by the local application of ice, the blood being finally determined to the affected part. And if the whole Earth can thus be disturbed by eclipse influence, so also must men be, since they are compounded of elements which are drawn from the Earth. Not only the waters, but also all plant- and animal-life, as well as the solid mass of the Earth itself, respond to this influence of the luminaries acting in combination, and there is little doubt that there is a tidal effect in the atmosphere which proceeds from the same cause, and which affects the course of the weather.

Such effects can be seen in major earthquake disturbances, likely caused by nature's effort to restore the balance of magnetic activity, with the local drop in temperature being countered by a surge of electrical energy from the Earth's interior. Similar effects are observed in the human body when ice is applied locally, as blood is ultimately directed to the affected area. If the entire Earth can be influenced by eclipses, then so must people be, since they are made up of elements sourced from the Earth. Not only the waters, but also all plant and animal life, as well as the solid mass of the Earth itself, respond to the influence of celestial bodies acting together, and there's little doubt that there is a tidal effect in the atmosphere that comes from the same cause and affects weather patterns.

The fact that volcanic eruptions and earthquakes 101do not follow all eclipses, merely informs us that they do not always coincide with a volcanic area, but whenever they do so there are marked disturbances directly attributable to the action of the luminaries, and similarly the effects upon the weather will vary in accordance with local conditions, such as latitude, elevation, mean saturation point of the air, etc. Those who have failed to trace the connection between lunations and the weather, have left out of consideration the effects due to (a) the time of the conjunction, and (b) the Moon’s position in its orbit at the time. The Metonic Cycle of 6940 days or nineteen years, is another cycle of considerable value, which informs us what effects are due to the combined influence of the Sun and Moon irrespective of their ecliptic conjunction. The lunations occur in the same degree of the zodiac every nineteen years. Any effects that may be due to their influence can best be traced by observing how they fall in regard to the positions of the planets at an epoch such as the moment of a person’s birth. For if it is found that the New Moon falling on the place of Saturn in a horoscope of birth is followed by certain privations in agreement with the nature of the planet Saturn, and that similar effects are found to occur nineteen years afterwards, then the influence of the lunation as a factor in human life is presumably established. And if to Saturn we add the other planets, and also if we add the other aspects, such as the opposition, trine, quadrature and sextile, we shall be able to institute a series of observations which depend for their significance 102on the assumed value (causative or symbolic) of the luminaries. Such effects are easily traceable, and serve to establish the significance of this cycle.

The fact that volcanic eruptions and earthquakes 101do not happen after every eclipse just shows that they don't always occur in volcanic areas. However, when they do, there are noticeable disturbances that can be directly linked to the actions of celestial bodies. Similarly, the weather effects will change based on local factors like latitude, elevation, and average humidity in the air. Those who haven't been able to connect moon phases with weather patterns have overlooked factors like (a) the timing of the conjunction and (b) the Moon’s location in its orbit at that time. The Metonic Cycle of 6940 days, or nineteen years, is another important cycle that shows us the effects of the Sun and Moon's combined influence aside from their ecliptic conjunction. The lunations happen in the same zodiac degree every nineteen years. The effects related to their influence can be best tracked by observing how they align with the positions of planets at significant times, like a person's birth. For example, if the New Moon aligns with Saturn in a natal chart and leads to certain hardships that reflect Saturn’s nature, and similar effects occur nineteen years later, then the influence of the lunation on human life is likely confirmed. If we also consider Saturn along with other planets and various aspects like opposition, trine, quadrature, and sextile, we can set up a series of observations that hinge on the presumed significance (whether causal or symbolic) of these celestial bodies. These effects are easy to track and help establish the meaning of this cycle. 102

The cycle of Jupiter which is taken at sixty years, assumes a significance only when we have proved the fact of interplanetary action. This fact has been established both astronomically and astrologically. The planet Jupiter takes twelve years to perform a revolution in the zodiac, and five times twelve is sixty years. But Saturn has a period of thirty years, and twice this is also sixty years. Consequently, if the planets Saturn and Jupiter are acting together from the same part of the heavens at a given date, they will be together again in the same part of the heavens at the end of sixty years, with a small variation due to the actual difference of their periods. This fact has proved of astronomical value, inasmuch as it has enabled us to estimate the disturbance due to their mutual action in the orbits of both planets. The period at which these perturbations would recur has been estimated at 920 years by Laplace, who discovered it. These perturbations form what are called the Great Equations of the planets Saturn and Jupiter, when calculation is made of their longitudes in orbit. It may be useful to note that at the maximum the disturbance of Saturn due to Jupiter’s action is 49´, and that of Jupiter due to Saturn’s action is 21´. As the discovery was not made until 1786, it will naturally follow that all calculations made from Saturn’s position prior to the eighteenth century, when it was incorporated 103as a factor in the Nautical Almanac, must be to some extent at fault. As cosmic symbols these planets, Saturn and Jupiter, have great significance, and they were highly esteemed in the astrological thought of the ancients.

The cycle of Jupiter, which lasts sixty years, becomes important only once we've confirmed the reality of interplanetary interactions. This reality has been established through both astronomical and astrological observations. Jupiter takes twelve years to complete a revolution in the zodiac, so five times twelve equals sixty years. Saturn has a cycle of thirty years, and double that is also sixty years. Therefore, if Saturn and Jupiter are aligned in the sky at a specific moment, they will align again in the same part of the sky after sixty years, with a slight variation due to the actual difference in their cycles. This fact has been valuable in astronomy because it helps us understand the disturbances caused by their mutual influence on each other's orbits. Laplace estimated that these disturbances would recur every 920 years, a discovery he made. These disturbances are referred to as the Great Equations of the planets Saturn and Jupiter when calculating their longitudes in orbit. It's interesting to note that the maximum disturbance for Saturn caused by Jupiter's influence is 49', while Jupiter's disturbance due to Saturn is 21'. Since this discovery was made in 1786, it follows that any calculations made based on Saturn's position before the eighteenth century, when it was included as a factor in the Nautical Almanac, must be somewhat inaccurate. As cosmic symbols, these planets—Saturn and Jupiter—hold significant meaning and were highly valued in the astrological beliefs of ancient cultures.

Jupiter, as the most bulky of all the planets in the system, early claimed attention and took a foremost place in the pantheon. We find him as Jupiter-Ammon, as the Deva-pitar, Deo-pitar, and Jupiter of the Indian and Roman theogonies. He is found in the Sanskrit writings as Guru, the spiritual father or God-father, as the name Deo-pitar signifies, and also as Brihaspati, i. e. the Lord of Increase or Expansion. Similarly, Saturn was S’iva, the Destroyer, whose reputation for devouring his own offspring is referred to in the classical mythology of the Greeks. Thus Jupiter is Brahma, the Creator, and Saturn is S’iva, the Destroyer. Such a significance they are found to hold in the concept of modern astrologers. When, therefore, Jupiter is found in that part of the heavens which is empirically determined to have rule over the destinies of a country or people, there is found to be a period of expansion and prosperity; but when Saturn is thus placed the country suffers privations and losses. Let us look at some of these instances, as they have a direct bearing on the practical side of our occult studies, and give to the Law of Cycles an economic value.

Jupiter, being the largest planet in the solar system, quickly drew attention and took a prominent role in mythology. We see him represented as Jupiter-Ammon, as Deva-pitar, Deo-pitar, and Jupiter in Indian and Roman religious traditions. In Sanskrit texts, he appears as Guru, the spiritual father or God-father, as indicated by the name Deo-pitar, and also as Brihaspati, which means the Lord of Increase or Expansion. Similarly, Saturn is known as S’iva, the Destroyer, who is infamous for consuming his own children, as mentioned in Greek mythology. Thus, Jupiter represents Brahma, the Creator, and Saturn symbolizes S’iva, the Destroyer. This is the significance they hold in the views of modern astrologers. So, when Jupiter is positioned in a specific area of the sky that is linked to the fortunes of a country or its people, it often signals a time of growth and prosperity; however, when Saturn is in that position, the country faces hardships and losses. Let’s examine some of these cases, as they are directly relevant to the practical aspects of our occult studies and provide an economic perspective on the Law of Cycles.

I have before me an Investment Handbook, giving the dates of the highest and lowest records of the various prices of Stocks during the last 104fifteen years. The figures that I shall quote are taken directly from this book, and I need hardly assure the reader that the editors have no associations with Astrology.

I have in front of me an Investment Handbook, listing the dates of the highest and lowest stock prices over the last 104fifteen years. The numbers I will reference come straight from this book, and I hardly need to remind the reader that the editors are not connected to Astrology.

From any astrological book dealing with the influence of the zodiac published prior to the year at which our observations commence, the reader may extract the following information: Scorpio rules Brazil, Sagittarius rules Spain, Capricornus rules India, Aquarius rules Russia, Pisces rules Portugal, Aries rules England, Taurus rules Ireland, etc. In 1895-6-7 the planet Saturn was in the sign Scorpio, and in 1898 Brazilian Stocks were at the lowest price between 1895 and 1910. In 1898 Saturn was in Sagittarius, and Spanish Fours were then at the lowest between 1895 and 1910, a period of fifteen years. In 1901 Saturn was in the sign Capricornus, but Jupiter also was there, and in effect, we do not find any depreciation of Stocks, but the reverse so far as India was concerned. In 1903-4-5 Saturn was in Aquarius, and in 1906 Russian 4% and 5% Stocks were at their lowest during the period under consideration. During 1906-7-8 Saturn was in Pisces, and in the following year Portuguese Stocks touched the lowest during a period of fifteen years.

From any astrology book that discusses the influence of the zodiac published before the year our observations start, the reader can find the following information: Scorpio governs Brazil, Sagittarius governs Spain, Capricorn governs India, Aquarius governs Russia, Pisces governs Portugal, Aries governs England, Taurus governs Ireland, etc. In 1895-7, Saturn was in Scorpio, and Brazilian stocks hit their lowest price between 1895 and 1910 in 1898. In 1898, Saturn moved into Sagittarius, and Spanish Fours were then at their lowest from 1895 to 1910, over a fifteen-year span. In 1901, Saturn was in Capricorn, and Jupiter was also there, resulting in no depreciation of stocks for India; in fact, it was the opposite. Between 1903 and 1905, Saturn was in Aquarius, and in 1906, Russian 4% and 5% stocks reached their lowest point during the period we’re analyzing. From 1906 to 1908, Saturn was in Pisces, and in the following year, Portuguese stocks hit their lowest point during a fifteen-year period.

During 1909-10 Saturn was in the sign Aries, and in 1910 Consols as well as Annuities were at their lowest for a period of fifteen years. During 1911-12 Saturn was in the sign Taurus, and Irish Land Stock is now (1912) lower than it has been for the past seventeen years.

During 1909-10, Saturn was in Aries, and in 1910, Consols and Annuities hit their lowest point in fifteen years. During 1911-12, Saturn was in Taurus, and Irish Land Stock is now (1912) lower than it has been in the past seventeen years.

105These facts speak for themselves, and they show that Saturn is the cause of depression, destruction of credit and national prosperity, and loss.

105These facts are clear, and they indicate that Saturn is responsible for depression, the collapse of credit and national prosperity, and loss.

The cyclic law and that of periodicity are practically identical. For what we trace as the periodicity of phenomena, can be shown to bear a direct relation to planetary cycles. Take, for instance, the periodicity of Sun-spots. The years of maximum frequency noted have led to the discovery of a period of 11 years and 40 days. Many years ago I published a statement to the effect that the rents in the luminous envelope or photosphere of the Sun would be found to coincide with the occursions of the planets Mars and Jupiter. Since then I have made further research, and I find that the mean of the two periods of these planets is 11 years and 203 days, which is in excess of the observed period of maximum solar activity by 163 days; but by taking the periods of Mars, Venus and the Earth into account, we have a period of 11 years 40½ days, which is exactly what we want. The Sun-spot period of 11·11 years is, therefore, attributable to the combined action of the planets Venus, the Earth and Mars, the mean of whose cycles yields a period so exactly in conformity with it. Probably the introduction of Jupiter and Saturn to the equation would yield a climacteric every fifth period. It is, however, of extreme interest to note that the years of the maximum Sun-spot appearance, 1871, 1882, 1904, 1916, 1927, are found to be associated with important configurations of the major planets: 1871, Saturn opposition Jupiter; 1061882, Saturn conjunct Neptune; 1904, Jupiter opposition Uranus; 1916, Saturn conjunct Neptune; 1927, Jupiter conjunct Uranus. From this we might conclude that the luminous envelope of the Sun is acted upon by the planetary bodies when they are on the same solar meridian. An ingenious student of planetary influence, Prof. Corrigan, has suggested that by regarding the solar disc as a plane, and setting off the orbits of the planets from the centre, the parallels of solar latitude tangent to the orbits of Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, are those along which the greatest Sun-spot activity is shown. Thus he shows that at the latitude of 5° North and South of the Sun’s equator, spots are produced by the action of the planet Mercury on the Sun: at latitude 6° those produced by Venus’s action are seen; at 7° those due to the action of the Earth and its satellite; at 13° those frequent spots due to Mars; and at 48° those due to Saturn; while the band corresponding to the orbit of Jupiter is attended by the largest and most frequent display of Sunspots. Hence the Professor is quite in agreement with my original statement that Sun-spots are principally caused by Mars and Jupiter. This certainly upholds the original observation that Sunspots are connected with the occursions of the planets Jupiter and Mars, but it would extend the period to 11 years and 203 days. The whole subject is, however, in its infancy.

The laws of cycles and periodicity are essentially the same. The periodicity we observe in phenomena directly relates to planetary cycles. For example, consider the periodicity of Sunspots. The years when they are most frequent have led to the identification of an 11-year and 40-day cycle. Many years ago, I stated that the openings in the Sun's photosphere would align with the orbits of the planets Mars and Jupiter. Since then, I've conducted more research and found that the average of the two cycles of these planets is 11 years and 203 days, which is 163 days longer than the observed peak in solar activity. However, if we factor in the cycles of Mars, Venus, and Earth, we arrive at a period of 11 years and 40½ days, which is precisely what we're looking for. Thus, the 11.11-year Sunspot cycle can be attributed to the combined effects of Venus, Earth, and Mars, whose average cycles align perfectly with it. Including Jupiter and Saturn in the equation might create a significant event every fifth cycle. It's extremely interesting to note that the peak years for Sunspot activity—1871, 1882, 1904, 1916, and 1927—are associated with significant alignments of the major planets: 1871 saw Saturn oppose Jupiter; in 1882, Saturn was aligned with Neptune; in 1904, Jupiter opposed Uranus; in 1916, Saturn was again aligned with Neptune; and in 1927, Jupiter aligned with Uranus. From this, we can infer that the Sun's outer layer is influenced by the planets when they align on the same solar meridian. An insightful researcher in planetary influence, Prof. Corrigan, proposed that by viewing the solar disc as a flat plane and mapping the orbits of the planets from the center, we find that the lines of solar latitude tangential to the orbits of Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn correspond with the greatest Sunspot activity. He indicates that at a latitude of 5° North and South of the Sun’s equator, Sunspots are created by Mercury's influence; at 6°, those from Venus; at 7°, those from Earth and its moon; at 13°, spots from Mars; and at 48°, those from Saturn; while the zone aligning with Jupiter's orbit experiences the largest and most frequent Sunspot activity. Therefore, the Professor's findings align with my original assertion that Sunspots are primarily caused by Mars and Jupiter. This certainly supports the initial observation linking Sunspots to the orbits of these planets, but it expands the cycle to 11 years and 203 days. Overall, this entire field remains in its early stages.

The cycle of 265 years arising out of the periodic conjunctions of Saturn and Mars, and marking epochs of great political disturbance in those areas 107of the world associated with the signs of the zodiac wherein the conjunctions occur, has already received treatment in my former works, so that nothing need be added in this place. For the benefit of those who have not hitherto touched the subject, however, I may give a single instance. Saturn and Mars form their conjunction every two years, during which period they move forward one sign, the whole circle embracing about 29½ years, so that they complete nine cycles and come to a conjunction in the same part of the zodiac about the same time of the year after a period of 265 years. The last conjunction of Saturn in Aries was in 1910, and 265 years before this date takes us back to the year 1645, when the insurrection under Cromwell took place, and 265 years earlier, in 1380, we have the insurrection under Wat Tyler. Similar effects can be traced in the history of other countries from the same cause.

The 265-year cycle that comes from the periodic conjunctions of Saturn and Mars marks significant political upheavals in regions of the world linked to the zodiac signs where these conjunctions happen. I've already discussed this in my previous works, so there's no need to elaborate here. However, for those who haven’t explored this topic yet, I’ll provide one example. Saturn and Mars align every two years, during which they advance one zodiac sign, completing a full cycle in about 29½ years. This means they finish nine cycles and align in the same spot of the zodiac around the same time of year after 265 years. The last conjunction of Saturn in Aries occurred in 1910, and going back 265 years takes us to 1645, the year of the insurrection under Cromwell. Going back another 265 years to 1380, we find the insurrection led by Wat Tyler. Similar impacts can also be seen in the histories of other countries for the same reason.

The old astrologers gave certain periods as the Least Years of the planets, the Sun and Moon. In the scheme of Ptolemy, which differs in some respects from this enumeration, most of these periods are represented and evidently have reference to the orbital periods of the bodies referred to. Thus the Moon has a period of 4 years, Mercury 10 years, Venus 8 years, Mars 15 years, Sun 19 years, Jupiter 12 years, Saturn 30 years, following upon which modern astrologers have added Uranus 84 years, and Neptune 164 years. But by taking the periods of the ancient planets only it is found that they are all contained in a period of 120 years, 108and that the periods of those planets which rule opposite signs, as Moon and Saturn, Mars and Venus, Jupiter and Mercury, when multiplied together produce 120, which is one-third of the degrees in a circle, and is the basis of the Vims’ottaradasa periods of the Hindu system, about which something may be said in a subsequent section of this work.

The old astrologers assigned specific durations as the Least Years for the planets, the Sun, and the Moon. In Ptolemy's system, which varies in some ways from this list, most of these durations are included and clearly relate to the orbital periods of the referenced bodies. For instance, the Moon has a period of 4 years, Mercury 10 years, Venus 8 years, Mars 15 years, the Sun 19 years, Jupiter 12 years, and Saturn 30 years. Following this, modern astrologers have added Uranus with a period of 84 years and Neptune with 164 years. However, if we only consider the periods of the ancient planets, we find that they all fit within a span of 120 years, and that the periods of those planets which govern opposite signs, such as the Moon and Saturn, Mars and Venus, and Jupiter and Mercury, when multiplied together, yield 120. This number is one-third of the degrees in a circle and forms the basis of the Vims’ottaradasa periods in the Hindu system, which will be discussed further in a later section of this work. 108

109

CHAPTER XI
THE TIME FACTOR IN KABALISM

Every system of Kabalism employs numbers in a symbolical sense, and attributes to them a significance as if they were causative factors. This is legitimate from the point of view of a philosophy that regards the Universe as Symbol. In such a scheme every cosmical factor assumes a symbolical value, according to its ratio in the sum of things, and each of the planets may thus be symbolized either as deities invested with attributes and virtues of a distinctly human nature, or yet may be expressed in terms of numerical values, quantities, colours, forms, and sounds.

Every system of Kabalism uses numbers symbolically and assigns them meanings as if they were influential factors. This makes sense within a philosophy that views the Universe as a Symbol. In this framework, every cosmic element takes on a symbolic value based on its proportion in the greater whole, and each planet can be represented either as deities with distinctly human traits and qualities or in terms of numerical values, quantities, colors, shapes, and sounds.

But in all such systems the symbolism employed must finally submit to a mathematical expression, which, indeed, is the test of its truth, for as has been very wisely said, we have reason to suspect all statements of fact which are not capable of a mathematical expression. In this connection the Time factor becomes of the highest importance in Kabalism, and since the matter lies in the region of debate, something may be said in this place that may prove of value.

But in all these systems, the symbols used must ultimately be represented with a mathematical formula, which is, in fact, the measure of their accuracy. As has been wisely stated, we should be skeptical of any factual statements that cannot be expressed mathematically. In this context, the Time factor is extremely important in Kabalism, and since this topic is open to discussion, we can add something here that might be useful.

In my Kabala of Numbers and elsewhere I have repeatedly pointed out the fallacy of those systems 110which ignore the cosmic factors, which alone give symbolism its coherence. Nobody can reasonably ascribe any specific sound or numerical value to a planet, or any influence to any part of the heavens or to any period of time without having regard to some cosmical factor as the basis of the system to which these planetary or time significations belong.

In my Kabala of Numbers and elsewhere, I've repeatedly highlighted the mistake of those systems that overlook cosmic factors, which are essential for giving symbolism its meaning. No one can logically assign a specific sound or numerical value to a planet, or any influence to any part of the sky or to any time period, without considering some cosmic factor as the foundation of the system that relates to these planetary or time meanings.

Yet I find that such systems are all too prevalent, and that in some glaring instances they assume a factor as the basis of the system, and straightway set about to argue it out of existence. Thus it is stated in one small manual intended for the use of those studying the mysteries of sound and number, that it is “essential to have an accurate knowledge of the time of the rising of the sun at places on particular days,” and the “simple method” of doing this, according to its author, is to “take the sunrise from any reliable almanac ... and add to it for western longitude at the rate of four minutes per degree, and subtract for eastern longitude at the same rate, and you have the mean local time of sunrise.”

Yet I find that such systems are all too common, and in some obvious cases, they take a specific factor as the foundation of the system and immediately start arguing it out of relevance. For example, one small manual meant for those studying the principles of sound and number states that it is “essential to have an accurate knowledge of the time of the rising of the sun at locations on specific days,” and the “simple method” to achieve this, according to its author, is to “take the sunrise from any reliable almanac ... and add to it for western longitude at the rate of four minutes per degree, and subtract for eastern longitude at the same rate, and you have the mean local time of sunrise.”

How far this is from the truth any tyro in astronomy will readily perceive. Yet when the error was pointed out to this would-be exponent of the “Mysteries,” instead of being gratefully accepted as a piece of good information which could be utilized in future publications, the unlucky critic was most thoroughly abused, and the matter being finally referred to the authorities at the Greenwich Observatory, it was clearly shown that the critic 111was right and the author of the “simple method” wrong in every case. The repetition of these errors in subsequent publications leaves one with no alternative but to conclude that either the intricacies of apparent local sunrise are beyond him, or that their introduction into his simple method of expounding the mysteries would undermine his market by rendering the truth too difficult for popular consumption.

How far this is from the truth any beginner in astronomy will easily notice. Yet when the mistake was pointed out to this self-proclaimed expert on the “Mysteries,” instead of gratefully accepting it as useful feedback for future publications, the unfortunate critic was severely attacked. The issue was eventually taken to the authorities at the Greenwich Observatory, where it was clearly established that the critic was right and the author of the “simple method” was wrong in every instance. The continued repetition of these mistakes in later publications leads one to conclude that either the complexities of local sunrise are beyond his grasp, or that including them in his simple method of explaining the mysteries would jeopardize his appeal by making the truth too hard for the general public to understand.

Having already given the correct method of finding the local sunrise by reference to ascensional differences, a process which involves nothing more complex than adding two logarithms together, (tang. of Sun’s declination, × tang. of the latitude of place), from which we derive the ascensional difference (sine log.), and comparing the result with that due to the latitude of Greenwich. I need not waste space on the matter in these pages. But it may be pointed out for the benefit of those who wish to base their calculations of the planetary periods and sub-periods on the correct value of apparent sunrise, that the equation of time at the rate of four minutes for every degree applies only to meridian transit in Right Ascension, and has no connection with the equation by ascensional difference due to the latitude of the place. In fact, to find local sunrise it is absolutely necessary to take notice of “seasons and latitudes of places,” and so long as these are ignored so long will the mysteries of sound and number which depend on calculations made from time of sunrise remain “hidden mysteries” in fact as well as name.

Having already provided the correct method for determining the local sunrise based on ascensional differences, a process that only requires adding two logarithms together (the tangent of the Sun’s declination multiplied by the tangent of the latitude of the location), from which we obtain the ascensional difference (sine log), and then comparing the result with the one based on the latitude of Greenwich. I won't take up space discussing this here. However, it's worth mentioning for those who want to base their calculations of planetary periods and sub-periods on the accurate value of apparent sunrise that the equation of time, which is four minutes for every degree, only applies to meridian transit in Right Ascension and has no relation to the equation from ascensional difference based on the location's latitude. In fact, to accurately find local sunrise, it's essential to consider the "seasons and latitudes of places," and as long as these are overlooked, the mysteries of sound and number that rely on calculations from the time of sunrise will remain "hidden mysteries" in both fact and name.

112By way of illustrating the inaccuracy and futility of the “simple method” of finding sunrise, I may take an illustration that is actually given by its inventor.

112To show the inaccuracies and pointless nature of the “simple method” for determining sunrise, I can use an example provided by its creator.

“For instance, the sun rises at Greenwich at 4.50 on the 23rd April, 1912, and we want to know the local sunrise at Epsom. All we have to do is to add the equivalent of 0° 17´ (which is nearly one fourth of a degree), 1 minute to that amount. The local sunrise at Epsom is, therefore, 4.51,” which for all practical purposes it is, since Epsom is on the same, or approximate, latitude as Greenwich. But when it is further said that the local time of sunrise is 4.48 at Newmarket on the same day, in the name of holy Science we must demur.

“For example, the sun rises in Greenwich at 4:50 AM on April 23, 1912, and we want to find out the local sunrise time in Epsom. All we need to do is add the equivalent of 0° 17' (which is almost a quarter of a degree), plus 1 minute to that. So, the local sunrise in Epsom is 4:51 AM, which is practically accurate since Epsom is at the same or a similar latitude as Greenwich. However, when it's stated that the local sunrise time is 4:48 AM in Newmarket on the same day, we must respectfully disagree in the name of true Science.”

The sun’s declination at 4.50 on April 23rd is 12° 24´, which, referred to the latitude of Greenwich, gives an ascensional difference of 1 hr. 4 min. 12 sec., and to the latitude of Newmarket 1 hr. 6 min. 0 sec., the difference of these being 1 min. 48 sec., so that if the two places were on the same meridian the sun would rise on Newmarket at this time of the year nearly two minutes before it rises on Greenwich. But Newmarket is 0° 24´ east of Greenwich, and therefore it would further advance the time by 1 min. 36 sec., and taking the two factors into account we have for latitude and longitude combined 3 min. 24 sec. by which the sun rises on April 23rd sooner than at Greenwich, the mean time being some seconds before 4.47 a.m. Had a more northerly place been taken it could be shown that the discrepancy is proportionately greater, and in fact at the summer solstice the 113sun rises on Liverpool only 1 minute after it rises on Greenwich, although the former place is 11 min. 52 sec. west longitude, or 2° 58´, while at York it actually rises before it does at Greenwich.

The sun’s position at 4:50 on April 23rd is 12° 24', which, when compared to the latitude of Greenwich, results in an ascensional difference of 1 hr. 4 min. 12 sec., and for Newmarket, it’s 1 hr. 6 min. 0 sec. The difference between these two is 1 min. 48 sec., meaning if both locations were on the same meridian, the sun would rise in Newmarket nearly two minutes earlier than in Greenwich at this time of year. However, Newmarket is 0° 24' east of Greenwich, which further advances the time by 1 min. 36 sec. Considering both factors, the total difference is 3 min. 24 sec., so the sun rises on April 23rd in Newmarket before it does in Greenwich, with the mean time a few seconds before 4:47 a.m. If a more northerly place were chosen, the discrepancy would be proportionately greater; in fact, at the summer solstice, the sun rises in Liverpool only 1 minute after it does in Greenwich, even though Liverpool is located 11 min. 52 sec. west longitude, or 2° 58', while at York, it actually rises before it does in Greenwich.

Therefore I would urge that a kabalism that has reference to the cosmic factor of the sun’s rising would be more effectually serviceable than it is known to be if regard were had to the truth. A system that is based on error cannot be true in its structure, and this fact will account for the constant falling of bricks upon the hapless heads of those who enter the portals of this pseudo-scientific structure, where everything is at sixes and sevens, making unlucky thirteens, and where you have difficulty in distinguishing Hermes from Aphrodite, on account of their exchange of clothes.

Therefore, I would argue that a belief system related to the cosmic aspect of the sun rising would be much more beneficial than it is currently recognized to be, if we consider the truth. A system built on falsehood cannot have a solid foundation, and this explains why people keep facing problems when they step into this pseudo-scientific establishment, where everything is chaotic, resulting in bad luck, and where it’s hard to tell Hermes from Aphrodite because they’ve swapped outfits.

Similarly, it is no use instituting a system of Kabalism that depends on the position of the sun at the birth of a person, and forthwith giving illustration of the system by means of births that are recorded in Old Style, which involves a difference of ten degrees in the sun’s longitude. Yet I have seen this done by sober-minded Kabalists, and illustrations of it exist in current works on the subject of Numerology. A system, of whatever nature, must be consistent in itself and must depend for its integrity upon a cosmical factor, otherwise it can only be described as a conglomerate of detached observations, which, being brought together cannot by any chance lay claim to the title of a system. In another section of this work I shall be able to show what was the origin of the 114various sounds attributed to the planets, and how the Mantravidya of the Brahmins of India has passed into the hands of Mohammedans and others, who have exploited it for their own purposes without reference to its origin. I shall also be able to show the astronomical basis of the various periods and sub-periods of the planets, including the famous trims’amsha, or “four minute period” which has played such an egregious part in the furtherance of a popular delusion.

Similarly, it’s pointless to create a Kabalism system that relies on the position of the sun at a person's birth and then illustrate it using birth records in the Old Style, which involves a ten-degree difference in the sun's longitude. I've seen sober-minded Kabalists do this, and examples of it can be found in current works on Numerology. A system, no matter what, must be self-consistent and rely on a cosmic factor for its integrity; otherwise, it can only be seen as a mix of disconnected observations, which, when combined, can’t realistically claim to be a system. In another section of this work, I’ll explain the origin of the sounds attributed to the planets, and how the Mantravidya of the Brahmins of India has been taken up by Muslims and others who have used it for their own ends without acknowledging its origins. I’ll also clarify the astronomical basis for the different periods and sub-periods of the planets, including the well-known trims’amsha, or "four-minute period," which has played a significant role in promoting a widespread misconception.

Let me here say that a Kabalism is not a mere play upon figures, nor is it a system which arises by necessity from our system of enumeration as some have sought to prove. It is fundamentally an expression of some cosmical law, whether it be that of planetary periods, or other divisions of time instituted by us from observation of certain cosmic factors, or yet the laws of crystallization, which involve the fact of form in relation to sound vibrations. Thus we may have a lunar kabalism depending on the numbers 4, 7 and 28, another of the same nature depending on the numbers 3, 9, and 27: another solar kabala which arises from the numbers 18, 54, and 72. If those who seek to show that the decimal system was originated by the use of the ten fingers, called “digits,” would only have the patience to examine their theory, they would find that the facts are entirely against them. For if counting on the fingers reduced men to the decimal system, this system should be prevalent among the aboriginal peoples. It is, however, an ugly fact for the theorists that the very first system of 115enumeration that we come across is the duodecimal system of the Chinese and the Hebrews.

Let me emphasize that Kabbalism isn't just about playing with numbers, nor is it a system that necessarily stems from our way of counting, as some have attempted to demonstrate. At its core, it reflects some cosmic law, whether that be related to planetary cycles or other time divisions created by observing certain cosmic elements, or even the laws of crystallization, which connect form to sound vibrations. For instance, we might find a lunar Kabbalism tied to the numbers 4, 7, and 28, another associated with 3, 9, and 27, and a solar Kabbalism linked to the numbers 18, 54, and 72. Those who argue that the decimal system came about from using our ten fingers, or "digits," would benefit from taking a closer look at their theory, as the evidence contradicts their claims. If counting on fingers led to the decimal system, we would expect that system to be common among indigenous peoples. However, it's a troubling fact for the theorists that the earliest counting system we find is the duodecimal system used by the Chinese and the Hebrews.

In the first place we find that the Chinese had twelve signs or months, each of thirty days, which was the antediluvian value of the year, afterwards rectified (2355 B.C.) by the intercalation of seven months in the course of nineteen years. The cycle of years was twice 60, or 120, arising out of the employment of ten roots and twelve branches. They appointed four chiefs to command the four gates or cardinal points and elected Twelve Patriarchs to govern local affairs. The duodecimal standard was instituted very early in the civilization of the Yellow Empire, as is evident from the Canon of Shun, wherein weights and measures were regulated by the Yellow Tube standard. This yellow tube was nine-tenths of a Chinese inch in bore circumference, and nine inches in length. It contained twelve hundred grains of millet which weighed twelve pennyweights, two pennyweights going to the ounce, sixteen ounces to the pound, thirty pounds to the quarter, and four quarters to the hundredweight. Thus the basis of the whole system of weights was regulated by sound, for there were twelve tubes, each of the same circumference but of different lengths, and these being struck gave the twelve notes of the Chinese musical gamut. The measures of length and capacity were also regulated by these tubes, and thus sound was at the root of all the Chinese mensuration. The fact that there were twelve sounds in the scale shows that the whole system was duodecimal.

Initially, we see that the Chinese had twelve signs or months, each consisting of thirty days, which represented the ancient value of the year. This was later corrected (2355 B.C.) by adding seven months over a span of nineteen years. The cycle of years was twice 60, or 120, derived from using ten roots and twelve branches. They appointed four leaders to oversee the four gates or cardinal points and selected Twelve Patriarchs to manage local affairs. The base-12 system was established early in the civilization of the Yellow Empire, as shown in the Canon of Shun, where weights and measures were defined by the Yellow Tube standard. This yellow tube had a circumference of nine-tenths of a Chinese inch and was nine inches long. It held twelve hundred grains of millet, which weighed twelve pennyweights—two pennyweights per ounce, sixteen ounces per pound, thirty pounds per quarter, and four quarters per hundredweight. Thus, the entire weight system was based on sound, with twelve tubes, each having the same circumference but different lengths. When struck, these produced the twelve notes of the Chinese musical scale. Length and capacity measures were also determined by these tubes, making sound fundamental to all Chinese measurement. The presence of twelve sounds in the scale indicates that the whole system was base-12.

116The Hebrew system was also duodecimal, for we find that they had twelve months in the year answering to the twelve Gates of the Sun, such as those of Gaza (Capricorn) and Hebron (Cancer), which are mentioned in connection with the feats of Samson, the original of the Greek Hercules and obviously a Sun-god. The twelve tribes were formed upon the basis of the zodiacal circle, and are so referred to in Jacob’s last prophetic blessing, where the sons of the Patriarch are distinctly associated with the astrological portents of the twelve Signs.

116The Hebrew system was also based on twelve, as they had twelve months in a year, corresponding to the twelve Gates of the Sun, like those in Gaza (Capricorn) and Hebron (Cancer). These are mentioned in relation to the exploits of Samson, who is the original of the Greek Hercules and clearly a Sun-god. The twelve tribes were established according to the zodiacal circle and are referenced as such in Jacob’s final prophetic blessing, where the sons of the Patriarch are clearly linked to the astrological signs of the twelve Zodiac.

Reuben—Taurus, the first sign of the Hebrew zodiac, connected with the constellation Orion and the letter Aleph (Bull). This tribe has often been associated with Aquarius, despite the fact that astrologically speaking it is not a watery sign, but belongs to the airy trigon. “Unstable as water,” is a figure of speech that has no reference to the astrological functions of the sign Aquarius.

Reuben—Taurus, the first sign of the Hebrew zodiac, linked to the constellation Orion and the letter Aleph (Bull). This tribe is often connected with Aquarius, even though, astrologically, it isn’t a water sign but belongs to the air element. “Unstable as water” is a saying that doesn’t pertain to the astrological traits of the sign Aquarius.

Simeon and Levi—Gemini and Cancer. The Levitical sign Cancer.

Simeon and Levi—Gemini and Cancer. The Levitical sign is Cancer.

Judah—Leo, “the old lion,” couchant. The regal sign Leo.

Judah—Leo, “the old lion,” resting. The royal sign Leo.

Zebulon—Virgo associated with Argos, the ship.

Zebulon—Virgo linked to Argos, the ship.

Issachar—Libra, “servant of tribute.”

Issachar—Libra, "tax servant."

Dan—Scorpio, associated with Serpentarius, “an adder in the path.”

Dan—Scorpio, connected to Serpentarius, “a snake in the way.”

Gad—Sagittarius, the trooper. The sign of Jupiter or “Gad.”

Gad—Sagittarius, the adventurer. The sign of Jupiter or "Gad."

Asher—Capricornus.

Asher—Capricorn.

Napthali—Aquarius, associated with the Tree, 117“who yieldeth goodly branches.” Here the “hind let loose” should be “the spreading oak.”

Napthali—Aquarius, linked to the Tree, 117“which produces good branches.” Here, “hind let loose” should be “the spreading oak.”

Joseph—Pisces, “the fruitful vine by the well.”

Joseph—Pisces, “the productive vine by the well.”

Benjamin—Aries, “the wolf,” connected with Anubis of the Egyptian symbology.

Benjamin—Aries, “the wolf,” linked to Anubis in Egyptian symbolism.

Thus the Hebraic system is found to be duodecimal also, and we follow suit in keeping our standards on this basis, counting twelve inches to the foot, and twelve pence to the shilling. Indeed, there can be little doubt that the ancients modelled their conceptions and established their standards “after the pattern of things in the heavens.” By common consent they instituted the Four Quarters arising out of the apparent motion of the Sun, in its daily rising, culminating, setting and decumbiture, and its apparent transit of the equinoxes and solstices. By common consent also they had regard to the twelve signs of the zodiac, and their corresponding months, the lunar asterisms or stations arising out of the mean diurnal motion of the moon, and other points and divisions of time, such as the syzyges and quadratures of the moon. All these became standards from which all calculations were made, and hence all kabalism, as derived from these cosmic phenomena, has a basis in fact which can only be appreciated when the cosmical factors employed are fully understood and appreciated. Hence I say that the time factor, in Kabalism is of the utmost importance.

Thus, the Hebrew system is also based on twelve, and we do the same by keeping our standards on this basis, counting twelve inches in a foot and twelve pence in a shilling. Indeed, there is little doubt that the ancients shaped their ideas and established their standards “after the pattern of things in the heavens.” By general agreement, they created the Four Quarters based on the apparent movement of the Sun—its daily rising, highest point, setting, and decline—as well as its apparent journey through the equinoxes and solstices. They also collectively recognized the twelve zodiac signs and their corresponding months, the lunar constellations formed from the moon's average daily motion, and other time points and divisions, such as the syzygies and quadratures of the moon. All of these became standards for calculations, and thus all Kabalism, derived from these cosmic phenomena, is grounded in fact that can only be truly understood when the cosmic factors involved are fully recognized and appreciated. Therefore, I emphasize that the time factor in Kabalism is extremely important.

118

CHAPTER XII
INVOLUTION AND EVOLUTION

The symbolism of astronomy lends itself in a most interesting manner to the great problem of human evolution. In my opening chapter it was shown that evolution is the natural reaction to the process of involution. Logically we cannot speak of evolution without taking into consideration the fact of a preceding involution. Ex nihilo nihil fit. The potential of matter is measured by its latent energy, and this latency is static Spirit Force. Matter is the ultimate expression of Spirit, as form is that of force. The material forms of the visible universe are therefore nothing but concrete spiritual forces.

The symbolism of astronomy connects intriguingly with the major issue of human evolution. In my first chapter, I showed that evolution is a natural response to the process of involution. Logically, we can't discuss evolution without considering the fact that there was a preceding involution. Nothing comes from nothing. The potential of matter is gauged by its hidden energy, and this hidden energy is static Spirit Force. Matter is the ultimate expression of Spirit, just as form is that of force. The material forms of the visible universe are fundamentally just concrete spiritual forces.

But it would appear that there are two processes going on simultaneously in any cycle of cosmic life, and these are a downward spiritual involution and an upward physical evolution. The two processes are complementary, and possibly may be regarded as taking place simultaneously, although in the Chaldean account they are spoken of as distinct in point of time. Jacob’s vision of the Ladder of Life depicted angels ascending and descending simultaneously, and these are the spiritual forces that are in continual play between pure spirit and gross matter. The great tidal influx of spirit towards the plane of 119materiality admits of a constant ebb and flow of the life-wave, so that, although at the present stage of the Great Cycle the tide has set back and is at its ebb, carrying its burden of detached souls along with it towards the region of spirituality, may yet mark periodic incursions of the spirit towards the material plane, such incursions being in the nature of abnormal phenomena.

But it seems that two processes are happening at the same time in any cycle of cosmic life: a downward spiritual involution and an upward physical evolution. These processes are complementary and can be seen as occurring simultaneously, although in the Chaldean account they are described as separate in time. Jacob’s vision of the Ladder of Life showed angels ascending and descending at the same time, representing the spiritual forces constantly at work between pure spirit and dense matter. The significant influx of spirit toward the material plane allows for a constant ebb and flow of the life-wave. So, even though at this stage of the Great Cycle the tide has receded and is at its low point, carrying its load of disconnected souls toward the realm of spirituality, it may still indicate periodic movements of spirit toward the material plane, with these movements being abnormal phenomena.

Thus we have from the beginning of the Great Cycle a double influx involving an interplay of Spirit and Matter. In the process of manifestation by means of differentiation, Spirit (the positive or male potency) may be regarded as taking a downward plunge on the left-hand side, while Substance (the negative or female potency) will in the same scheme take the right-hand side in its progress towards manifestation on the material plane. The Paramatma or Universal Spirit first appears as Purusha, while Mulaprakriti or Root Substance manifests as Prakriti. The ultimate expression of Purusha is Prana (Life force) while that of Prakriti is Prithivi (Matter). We thus have the Father Spirit on the one hand, and the Mother Substance on the other, manifesting eventually in the multitude of forms of Living Matter. Spirit Substance thus invests and is at the root of all physical life, Force and Matter standing always in the same undivided relations as do Spirit and Substance in the Archetypal World.

Thus, from the start of the Great Cycle, there’s a dual influx involving the interaction of Spirit and Matter. During the process of manifestation through differentiation, Spirit (the positive or male energy) can be seen as taking a downward path on the left side, while Substance (the negative or female energy) progresses towards manifestation on the material plane on the right side. The Paramatma or Universal Spirit first appears as Purusha, while Mulaprakriti or Root Substance manifests as Prakriti. The ultimate expression of Purusha is Prana (Life force), while that of Prakriti is Prithivi (Matter). We have, therefore, the Father Spirit on one side and the Mother Substance on the other, eventually manifesting in the many forms of Living Matter. Spirit Substance thus underpins and is essential to all physical life, with Force and Matter always existing in the same unified relationship as Spirit and Substance do in the Archetypal World.

Such mysteries concerning the origin of things can be read in the astronomical disposition of the signs of the zodiac, where Leo is the symbol of the 120Father Spirit and Cancer that of the Mother Substance. These descend along their own arcs of involution through the planes of Buddhi and Manas, which are the higher and lower aspects of Mind, and in combination represent the potential and evolved Hermaphrodites, denoted by the planets Mercury and Venus, which are set over these signs in the astrological scheme, and have relation to the signs Virgo and Libra on the one hand and Gemini and Taurus on the other. Thence the Great Breath descends to the Kamic plane, manifesting in the Body of Desire. This is represented on either hand by the signs Scorpio and Aries. Next the Spirit-Substance manifests on the Astral or Psycho-Physical plane, which is symbolized by the planet Jupiter with its signs Sagittarius and Pisces, and finally precipitates in the material world denoted by the planet Saturn and its corresponding signs Capricornus and Aquarius, the symbols of matter in the concrete and in a state of flux.

Such mysteries about the origin of things can be found in the astronomical arrangement of the zodiac signs, where Leo represents the Father Spirit and Cancer symbolizes the Mother Substance. These descend along their own paths of evolution through the realms of Buddhi and Manas, which are the higher and lower aspects of Mind, and together they represent the potential and developed Hermaphrodites, indicated by the planets Mercury and Venus, which oversee these signs in the astrological framework and relate to Virgo and Libra on one side and Gemini and Taurus on the other. From there, the Great Breath descends to the Kamic plane, manifesting in the Body of Desire. This is represented by the signs Scorpio and Aries. Next, the Spirit-Substance manifests on the Astral or Psycho-Physical plane, symbolized by the planet Jupiter with its signs Sagittarius and Pisces, and finally materializes in the physical world represented by the planet Saturn and its corresponding signs Capricorn and Aquarius, the symbols of matter in both solid form and in a state of change.

The scheme may be reduced to a diagram as on page 121.

The plan can be simplified into a diagram like the one on page 121.

In view of this statement of the occult doctrine of the origin of the phenomenal world, we are led to expect in the course of physical evolution, which is another name for the process of spiritual unfoldment, that matter will yield continually new characteristics, which now lie in obscuro or latency. For spirit is now shaking itself free of the trammels of matter, organisms are becoming more and more subject and responsive to the impulses of the mind, and matter is everywhere giving way to the effort 121of a spiritual expression. The world has passed the zero point of greatest materiality and darkness, and though the mass of mankind are as yet only on the plane of Kama, actuated solely by the force of their desires and material appetites, yet quite a large section of the world’s population is coming under the direct influence of the Manasic forces, and the demand for knowledge is being met upon every side. Some few of the more advanced pioneers of the race are functioning in the light of the Buddhic plane and are overshadowed by the spirit. At the head of all this Earth’s humanity is the supreme Arhat, the Adam Kadmon of the Kabalists, the 122Iswara of the Hindus, the Jehovah of the Hebrews.

In light of this statement about the occult beliefs regarding the origin of the observable world, we can expect that, as physical evolution unfolds—which is just another way of saying spiritual growth—matter will consistently reveal new traits that are currently hidden or dormant. Spirit is starting to break free from the constraints of matter, living beings are becoming increasingly influenced and responsive to mental impulses, and matter is everywhere yielding to the push for spiritual expression. The world has moved past the stage of deepest materiality and darkness, and while most people are still driven primarily by their desires and physical needs, a significant portion of the population is beginning to feel the direct impact of mental forces, and the demand for knowledge is being met all around. A few of the more advanced pioneers of humanity are operating within the light of the Buddhic plane and are inspired by spirit. Leading all of humanity on Earth is the supreme Arhat, the Adam Kadmon of the Kabbalists, the Iswara of the Hindus, and the Jehovah of the Hebrews.

Figure 8.

Figure 8.

Figure 8.

What is going on in this world is happening also in others of the solar system, and over all is the Supreme Logos, Brahma-Vach, the Ancient of Days, whom we call the Lord. These are co-ordinating Centres of Intelligence and Power functioning in their respective spheres and on their several planes as the various nervous ganglia in the body of man, all being finally linked up to one Centre in whom resides the consciousness of the I AM, as planets are united to their central Sun.

What’s happening in this world is also happening in others in the solar system, and above all is the Supreme Logos, Brahma-Vach, the Ancient of Days, whom we refer to as the Lord. These are coordinating Centers of Intelligence and Power operating in their respective areas and at their different levels, like the various nervous centers in the human body, all ultimately connected to one Center in whom the consciousness of the I AM resides, just as planets are linked to their central Sun.

And what we argue in regard to the constitution of the Universe we also affirm to be true regarding man, the Microcosm and epitome of the Universe. He is one of those angels “ascending and descending” on the Ladder of Life. For the purposes of illustration we may borrow a symbol from the astronomer, that of the elliptical orbit of the Earth. Let the Earth represent the spiritual monad which in process of involution has become associated with material conditions of life, and is now an imprisoned soul.

And what we say about the structure of the Universe we also believe applies to humanity, the Microcosm and reflection of the Universe. He is one of those angels "ascending and descending" on the Ladder of Life. To illustrate this, we can use a symbol from astronomy, specifically the elliptical orbit of the Earth. Let the Earth symbolize the spiritual essence that, through the process of evolution, has become linked to the material aspects of life and is now a trapped soul.

It answers to the gravitational pull of the material sun and revolves around it, chained by its material desires, yet enlarging its orbit as it advances in its evolution. The point where the planet passes its quadrature, corresponds to the event of incarnation, its lower apsis being the point of greatest physical vitality. It passes out of the physical at the next quadrature and for the remainder of its orbit continues in the psychic or intermediate state between 123the higher and lower worlds. At its higher apsis the soul is in its supreme state of elevation, mingling freely with other discarnate souls and those radiant denizens of the higher spiritual world who are there to minister to their spiritual needs. But when the reaction follows and the desire for earth-life again asserts itself, the soul responds to the gravitational pull of the material sun and falls again into incarnation.

It responds to the gravitational pull of the material sun and orbits around it, bound by its material desires, yet expanding its path as it progresses in its evolution. The moment when the planet reaches its quadrature aligns with the event of incarnation, with its lower apsis being the point of greatest physical vitality. It transitions out of the physical realm at the next quadrature and for the rest of its orbit exists in the psychic or intermediate state between the higher and lower worlds. At its higher apsis, the soul is in its highest state of elevation, freely mingling with other disembodied souls and those radiant beings of the higher spiritual world who are there to meet their spiritual needs. However, when the reaction occurs and the desire for earthly life reasserts itself, the soul responds to the gravitational pull of the material sun and falls back into incarnation.

There comes a time, however, when by its peregrinations in the sphere of the lower world, the soul gains knowledge of real values, and the awakening spirit, shaking free from the bonds of the flesh, answers to the gravitational pull of a higher or more interior Spiritual Sun which occupies the kenofocus of the great ellipse. Such a soul passes directly through the intermediate world into the World of Spirit, and thereafter revolves around the Spiritual Sun, descending only at the lowest point of its orbit into the intermediate world for the purpose of spiritual ministration, its only intercourse with the material world being normally through the world of discarnate souls who are subject to incarnation. The diagram presented on page 124, may assist the reader in following out the scheme.

There comes a time when, through its journeys in the lower world, the soul learns about true values, and the awakened spirit, breaking free from the limitations of the physical body, responds to the pull of a higher or deeper Spiritual Sun at the center of the vast ellipse. This soul moves directly through the intermediate world into the World of Spirit, and then orbits around the Spiritual Sun, descending only at the lowest point of its path into the intermediate world for spiritual service. Its usual connection to the material world is through the realm of disembodied souls that are subject to rebirth. The diagram provided on page 124 may help the reader understand the concept.

I am not here laying down any final teaching or creed regarding the peregrinations of the Soul, though during a life of inward experience one gets some definite idea of the general plan of these things, but I am taking the position of a symbologist who employs cosmical facts to convey spiritual ideas, as one may use a figure of speech to suggest 124an analogy or convey an idea pertinent to the theme of conversation. Everything is symbolical, and things have no other meaning than that which we confer upon them, as letters or figures which are used to signal a meaning from one mind to another as by a code agreed upon beforehand, although in themselves these symbols bear no such significance.

I’m not here to present any final teachings or beliefs about the journey of the Soul. However, over a lifetime of personal experience, you gain a clearer understanding of the general framework of these concepts. Instead, I’m approaching this as a symbologist, using cosmic facts to express spiritual ideas, much like how one might use a metaphor to suggest an analogy or convey a relevant thought in a conversation. Everything is symbolic, and things hold no meaning beyond what we assign to them, just like letters or numbers that are used to communicate a meaning from one person to another as per an agreed code—even though these symbols themselves have no intrinsic significance. 124

So in the Dhammapada it is said: “Mind it is which gives to things their quality, their foundation and their being,” to which Epictetus subscribes when he says: “Men are disturbed by their view of things and not by the things themselves,” and these two views are at the base of Idealism and Quietism, as we may learn from Plato and Laotze.

So in the Dhammapada, it says: “The mind is what gives things their quality, their foundation, and their existence,” which aligns with what Epictetus says: “People are troubled by their perception of things, not by the things themselves,” and these two ideas form the foundation of Idealism and Quietism, as we can learn from Plato and Laozi.

Figure 9.

Figure 9.

Figure 9.

It would therefore have been equally true in a symbolical sense had the Higher, Middle and Lower 125Worlds been called the Sun, Moon and Earth Worlds, for these answer to the Spirit, Soul and Body of man, and therefore to the worlds or states of being in which they function. Also by the same symbolism they may be called the worlds of Light, Twilight and Darkness, answering to the three Gunas or qualities of the Soul in the Hindu philosophy, namely, Sattva, Rajasa, and Tamas. But the employment of a purely cosmical symbolism gains point from the fact that whatever may be our views regarding these ultimate problems of life, they must necessarily take form from the things of our experience and find expression in terms of natural phenomena, or so much of the Great Handwriting as we may have mastered and can employ as symbols.

It would also be true in a symbolic sense if the Higher, Middle, and Lower 125 Worlds were referred to as the Sun, Moon, and Earth Worlds, since these correspond to the Spirit, Soul, and Body of humanity, and therefore to the worlds or states of being in which they exist. Similarly, they can also be called the worlds of Light, Twilight, and Darkness, which reflect the three Gunas or qualities of the Soul in Hindu philosophy: Sattva, Rajasa, and Tamas. However, using a purely cosmic symbolism emphasizes that whatever our views may be regarding these ultimate life questions, they must inevitably be shaped by our experiences and expressed in terms of natural phenomena, or whatever part of the Great Handwriting we have understood and can use as symbols.

The argument from analogy is indeed strongly in favour of the view that all spiritual truths have their counterpart and illustration in the phenomenal world, that there is a natural law in the spiritual world, and that this law can only be interpreted in terms of natural phenomena. But it is also permissible to take the opposite view and to affirm that there is a spiritual law in the natural world and that this can only be understood and interpreted in the light of the Spirit. Indeed philosophy tends ultimately to the view that the mind of man is but a centre of consciousness in the Universal Mind, that it reflects the Ideas of that Mind, and that things have no real existence except as products of mind. We all recognize the fact that the idea precedes and outlasts the form that embodies it, and that there 126is no constant relation between the thing and the thought of which it is an expression.

The argument from analogy strongly supports the idea that all spiritual truths have a counterpart and illustration in the physical world, suggesting that there's a natural law governing the spiritual realm, and that this law can only be understood through natural phenomena. However, it's also valid to argue the opposite perspective, claiming that there is a spiritual law within the natural world, which can only be grasped and interpreted through the lens of the Spirit. In fact, philosophy often leads to the belief that the human mind is merely a center of consciousness within the Universal Mind, reflecting the Ideas of that Mind, and that things only truly exist as products of thought. We all recognize that the idea comes before and outlives the form it takes, and that there isn't a consistent relationship between the thing and the thought that represents it. 126

This idea, applied to the subject of Involution and Evolution, gives rise to the momentous thought that the Archetypal Mind that holds the idea of this universe and is its Creator, is under no contract to complete the scheme of things. God is under no necessity to finish His work. The Great Artificer may at any time destroy his moulds! But long-suffering Nature comforts us with the idea of an infinite patience, and the human mind suggests something indefinitely more steadfast than its own caprice.

This idea, when applied to Involution and Evolution, leads to the significant thought that the Archetypal Mind, which holds the concept of this universe and created it, is not obligated to complete everything. God doesn't have to finish His work. The Great Creator can destroy His designs at any moment! But enduring Nature reassures us with the notion of infinite patience, and the human mind proposes something far more reliable than its own whims.

Meanwhile by the dim light of our minds we grope our way among the scattered symbols, seeking in them for some intelligible answer to our questionings, hoping to find in them, when all are understood, a solution of the problem of the human soul. Science, philosophy and religion all assure us that we have reasonable hope, if not indeed the definite promise of eventual success.

Meanwhile, by the faint light of our thoughts, we search our way through the scattered symbols, looking for some clear answers to our questions, hoping that, once everything is understood, we will find a solution to the mystery of the human soul. Science, philosophy, and religion all assure us that we have a reasonable hope, if not a definite promise, of eventually succeeding.

127

CHAPTER XIII
PLANETARY NUMBERS

In a section of my work on the Kabala of Numbers I gave the planetary numbers as they have been handed down to us, and my authority in that case was John Heydon, who in his Holy Guide has delivered the traditional values of the planets, showing their correspondence with certain numbers.

In a section of my work on the Kabala of Numbers, I provided the planetary numbers as they have been passed down to us. My source for this was John Heydon, who in his Holy Guide presented the traditional values of the planets, demonstrating their connection to specific numbers.

I am now able to cite another authority in the person of Godfridus, who in the year 1650 published a book called Things Unknown. Those who read the book, should they be fortunate enough to obtain a copy of this scarce old volume, will probably agree with me that most of the information he has collected is really not worth knowing, being in many instances fanciful and misleading.

I can now refer to another source, Godfridus, who published a book called Things Unknown in 1650. Readers of this rare old book, if they're lucky enough to find a copy, will likely agree with me that much of the information he gathered isn't really useful, often being fanciful and misleading.

But among other things he quotes the Numbers of the planets and the signs of the zodiac. The numbers as given by him are the same as those given by Heydon, and for convenience may be repeated here—

But among other things, he mentions the numbers of the planets and the zodiac signs. The numbers he provides are the same as those given by Heydon, and for convenience, they may be repeated here—

Sun, 1 or 4; Moon, 7 or 2; Saturn, 8; Jupiter, 3; Mars, 9; Venus, 6; Mercury, 5.

Sun, 1 or 4; Moon, 7 or 2; Saturn, 8; Jupiter, 3; Mars, 9; Venus, 6; Mercury, 5.

Godfridus does not distinguish between the 128numbers 1 and 4 attributed to the Sun, or those of the Moon 7 and 2. It is important to know that 1 is the positive number of the Sun, and 7 that of the Moon, while 4 is the negative number of the Sun as 2 is that of the Moon. That is to say, if the Sun is in an even sign at any epoch, or enumeration is made concerning a male entity, whether man or animal, the number 1 must be used, while if the Sun be in a female sign, or enumeration has respect to a female, then the number 4 is used. Similarly in regard to the numbers of the Moon.

Godfridus does not differentiate between the numbers 1 and 4 associated with the Sun, or those of the Moon, 7 and 2. It's important to note that 1 represents the positive number of the Sun, and 7 represents that of the Moon, while 4 is the negative number for the Sun, just as 2 is for the Moon. This means that if the Sun is in an even sign at any time, or if counting pertains to a male being, whether human or animal, the number 1 should be used. Conversely, if the Sun is in a female sign, or if the count relates to a female, the number 4 is used. The same applies to the numbers associated with the Moon.

These numbers have been exploited in several books recently as if original with the author, who indeed has gone so far as to claim for them the authority of a Guru from whom he professes to have received them. It is a fact, however, that they have no representation in the East, neither among the Shemitic people nor the Aryans, and they are, as I have plainly stated elsewhere, traditional among the Kabalists. The fact that Heydon printed them and Godfridus also, and that these books are to be found in the British Museum Library, clearly indicates the source of inspiration, and locates the Guru in this case as residing solely in the fertile imagination of the author of The Mysteries.

These numbers have been used in several recent books as if they were created by the author, who even claims that a Guru gave them to him. However, the truth is that they have no basis in the East, neither among the Shemitic people nor the Aryans, and as I have clearly stated elsewhere, they are traditional among Kabalists. The fact that Heydon and Godfridus published them, and that these books can be found in the British Museum Library, clearly shows the source of inspiration and identifies the Guru in this case as solely existing in the author's fertile imagination in The Mysteries.

Godfridus gives also the numbers attaching to the signs of the zodiac as follows—

Godfridus also provides the numbers associated with the zodiac signs as follows—

Aries, 7; Taurus, 6; Gemini, 12; Cancer, 5; Leo, 1; Virgo, 10; Libra, 8; Scorpio, 9; Sagittarius, 4; Capricornus, 3; Aquarius, 2; Pisces, 11.

Aries, 7; Taurus, 6; Gemini, 12; Cancer, 5; Leo, 1; Virgo, 10; Libra, 8; Scorpio, 9; Sagittarius, 4; Capricorn, 3; Aquarius, 2; Pisces, 11.

There is a special significance attaching to the 129order in which, these numbers are given, and it will repay the astute reader to give the matter a little study. I may here say that they were originally attached to the Twelve Houses, and became associated with the signs of the zodiac corresponding with these Houses at a later date. They should be studied in their prime significance.

There’s a special importance to the order in which these numbers are presented, and it would benefit the insightful reader to take some time to think about it. I should mention that they were initially linked to the Twelve Houses and were later connected to the zodiac signs that correspond to these Houses. They should be examined in their fundamental meaning.

Leaving this point for the time being, I would point out here that these numbers have been used in connection with the Signs by the author of Natural Law Versus Chance, who shows considerable faculty for painstaking research. Without referring to the source of his information, he clearly shows that the names of competitors may be enumerated by means of this zodiacal gamut, and brought under the unit value of one or other of the planets, which, if ruling at the time, is capable of conferring success.

Leaving this point for now, I want to note that these numbers have been used in relation to the Signs by the author of Natural Law Versus Chance, who demonstrates a strong ability for thorough research. Without citing the source of his information, he clearly indicates that the names of competitors can be listed using this zodiac range and aligned with the value of one or more of the planets, which, if in power at the time, can provide success.

That which appears to vitiate the scheme presented by him is the fact of his using the artificial instead of the natural Hours, for if it be allowed that the planets are associated with the days of the week and that the quadrants mark the natural divisions of the day, as from sunrise to noon, noon to sunset, sunset to midnight, and midnight to sunrise, then the Planetary Hours must be in terms of these natural divisions, and, irrespective of the season of the year and the consequent variation of the diurnal and nocturnal arcs, there will be six such “hours” from sunrise to noon, six from noon to sunset, and six in each of the other quarters of the circle. In fact, if “natural law” is to rule 130in the matter at all, it must be consistently carried out, and artificial divisions of the day will continue to befog the student of these arcana and prevent him from getting at the truth of the matter so long as they are employed. This putting of “new wine into old bottles” has effectually vitiated both the Natural Law system and that propounded in The Mysteries. If any student cares to work out the percentages of results derived from a strict following of the rules as given in either of those works, there will remain no shadow of doubt that a good thing has just been missed, for lack of a little regard to traditional usage.

What seems to undermine the plan he presented is his use of artificial Hours instead of natural ones. If we accept that planets are linked to the days of the week and that the quadrants represent the natural divisions of the day—like from sunrise to noon, noon to sunset, sunset to midnight, and midnight to sunrise—then the Planetary Hours must align with these natural divisions. Regardless of the season and the resulting changes in daylight and night hours, there will be six “hours” from sunrise to noon, six from noon to sunset, and six in each of the other sections of the day. In fact, if “natural law” is to hold any weight in this discussion, it must be applied consistently; using artificial divisions of the day will only confuse those studying these deep concepts and prevent them from grasping the truth, as long as they are in use. This attempt to fit “new wine into old bottles” has effectively corrupted both the Natural Law system and the one suggested in The Mysteries. If any student wants to calculate the percentages of results obtained by strictly following the guidelines outlined in either of those texts, there will be no doubt that a valuable insight has been missed due to a lack of attention to traditional practices.

But the climax of inconsistency is reached in the suggestion contained in The Mysteries, where it is said that the planets Mercury and Venus are misnamed, that Mercury is the antithesis of Mars and Venus that of Jupiter, and that their numbers are interchangeable! It is, in fact, calmly suggested that at some remote period of history not named by the author, the name-plates of Venus and Mercury became detached, and as a result the one planet was thereafter mistaken for the other! I can imagine sober astrologers directing the planet Mercury to a conjunction with the Sun for the event of marriage, or predicting travels from the conjunction of the Ascendant with Venus. In effect we are asked to regard the signs Libra and Taurus as the signs of Mercury, while Venus in exchange takes Gemini and Virgo. This may not appear so terribly inconsistent to such as are ignorant of the disposition of the signs and planets as to 131others, but I think that any one would jib at the idea of Venus as the significatrix of travel and trade. And when I speak of Venus in this connection I mean Venus and not Mercury in disguise. Yet one would have supposed that the very order of the days of the week and the planetary sequence from which it is derived would have given the author pause to think. So far from that, however, it seems to be set up as an unique discovery of the utmost importance. It is time, therefore, that the matter should be set straight, and the need for this seems the more urgent since I have actually known persons, intelligent and conservative of the truth in these matters, but keen to follow up any new clue, actually transposing the planets Mercury and Venus in their horoscopes and willing to believe, on the authority of an Occultist of some distinction who in a weak moment was induced to write a preface to the book, that the astronomers have all been wrong for many ages, and that in following the course of the planet Venus they were unwittingly pursuing that of Mercury! The position would be incredible were it not a fact in cold print.

But the height of inconsistency is reached in the suggestion found in The Mysteries, where it claims that the planets Mercury and Venus are misnamed, that Mercury is the opposite of Mars and Venus is the opposite of Jupiter, and that their identities are interchangeable! It is, in fact, casually suggested that at some unspecified point in history, the name plates of Venus and Mercury got mixed up, leading to one planet being confused for the other! I can picture serious astrologers directing the planet Mercury to align with the Sun for a marriage event, or forecasting travels based on the alignment of the Ascendant with Venus. Essentially, we are asked to view Libra and Taurus as signs of Mercury, while Venus takes on Gemini and Virgo in exchange. This might not seem too inconsistent to those who are unaware of the relationships between signs and planets, but I think anyone would balk at the idea of Venus representing travel and trade. And when I refer to Venus in this context, I mean Venus, not Mercury in disguise. One would think that the order of the days of the week and the planetary sequence it comes from would have made the author reconsider. Instead, it seems to be presented as a unique discovery of great importance. Thus, it is time to set the record straight, especially since I have known people—intelligent and committed to truth in these matters, yet eager to explore any new lead—who have actually swapped Mercury and Venus in their horoscopes and are willing to believe, based on the authority of an Occultist of some reputation who was persuaded to write a preface to the book, that astronomers have been wrong for ages, and that by tracking Venus, they were unknowingly following Mercury! The situation would be unbelievable if it weren't a fact in cold print.

Let us proceed with the justification of the old tradition. I have elsewhere shown that the planetary periods bear a direct relationship to their sign rulerships as determined by the ancients. It is seen that six bodies, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus, Mercury and the Moon, embrace between them the circle of 360, each pair being divisors of one-third, or 120° or years.

Let’s move on to explaining the old tradition. I have previously demonstrated that the planetary periods are directly linked to the signs they rule, as the ancients determined. It’s clear that six bodies—Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus, Mercury, and the Moon—together cover the full circle of 360, with each pair being divisors of one-third, or 120° or years.

132The pairs are as follows—

The pairs are as follows—

Moon rules for 4 years, which divided into 120 equals 30. Saturn rules for 30 years, which divided into 120 equals 4. These two are opposites, Saturn ruling Capricorn and the Moon ruling Cancer.

Moon rules for 4 years, which divided into 120 equals 30. Saturn rules for 30 years, which divided into 120 equals 4. These two are opposites, Saturn ruling Capricorn and the Moon ruling Cancer.

Jupiter rules for 12 years, which divided into 120 gives 10. Mercury rules for 10 years, which divided into 120 gives 12. These two are opposites, for whereas Jupiter rules Sagittarius and Pisces, Mercury rules Gemini and Virgo, which are the opposite signs.

Jupiter rules for 12 years, which divided into 120 gives 10. Mercury rules for 10 years, which divided into 120 gives 12. These two are opposites, because while Jupiter rules Sagittarius and Pisces, Mercury rules Gemini and Virgo, which are the opposite signs.

Venus rules for 8 years, which divided into 120 gives 15. Mars rules for 15 years, which divided into 120 gives 8. Venus rules the signs Taurus and Libra, whereas Mars rules the opposite signs Scorpio and Aries.

Venus rules for 8 years, which divided into 120 gives 15. Mars rules for 15 years, which divided into 120 gives 8. Venus rules the signs Taurus and Libra, while Mars rules the opposite signs Scorpio and Aries.

This may be allowed as a basis for what follows. The values and dominions are those traditionally received through Ptolemy. The periodic values of all the bodies of the ancient system are twice the square of seven. The square of seven is 49, and twice this is the value of the periods, namely 98 years. Students of numerology may pursue the subject to its legitimate conclusion. I may now proceed to establish this scheme by a series of numerical tests which have been communicated to me from India, and which I have remodelled for the purpose of this demonstration.

This can serve as a foundation for what comes next. The values and realms are those traditionally accepted from Ptolemy. The periodic values of all the bodies in the ancient system are twice the square of seven. The square of seven is 49, and twice that is the value of the periods, which is 98 years. Those interested in numerology can explore the topic to its rightful conclusion. I will now proceed to establish this framework through a series of numerical tests that have been shared with me from India, which I have adapted for this demonstration.

The harmony of the allotment of the numbers to the planets and signs is shown in the following scale, which, as will be seen, bear the numbers already ascribed to them by Godfridus and others.

The balance of the numbers assigned to the planets and signs is demonstrated in the following scale, which, as you will see, carries the numbers that were already attributed to them by Godfridus and others.

133 Figure 10.

Figure 10.

Figure 10.

This arrangement is traditional among astrologers, and in very old works on the subject of planetary dominions we find the following suggestive glyph, which indicates that the mystery of the Pyramid may be solved by reference to the elements of the solar system.

This setup is common among astrologers, and in very old texts about planetary influences, we see the following significant symbol, which suggests that the mystery of the Pyramid might be understood by looking at the elements of the solar system.

Figure 11.

Figure 11.

Figure 11.

134It is stated that the perpendicular of the Pyramid is the radius of a circle whose area exactly equals the area of the square base. If this be the fact, then we may conclude that the ancients successfully negotiated the problem of “squaring the circle.”

134It is said that the height of the Pyramid is the radius of a circle whose area matches exactly the area of the square base. If this is true, then we can conclude that the ancients successfully solved the problem of “squaring the circle.”

The cyclic order of the planets according to the ancients was thus: Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Sun, Venus, Mercury, Moon. This order is not haphazard, as one might suppose who only knew the order of the days of the week bearing the Planets’ names, or the apparent order of the planetary orbits as seen from the Earth. There is nevertheless a very good reason for this order, and it consists in the orbital periods of the several bodies, that is, the times in which they appear to traverse the zodiac. Thus Saturn’s apparent period is about 30 years, Jupiter 12, Mars 2 years save forty-three days, the Sun one year, Venus about 7½ months, Mercury about 3 months, and the Moon one month. Applying the numerical test to this order, and retaining as before the same numbers for each of the planets, we have—

The cyclic order of the planets according to the ancients was as follows: Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Sun, Venus, Mercury, Moon. This order isn't random, as someone might think if they only knew the sequence of the days of the week named after the planets or the visible order of the planetary orbits from Earth. There’s actually a very good reason for this sequence, which is based on the orbital periods of the different celestial bodies, meaning the time it takes for them to move through the zodiac. For example, Saturn’s apparent period is about 30 years, Jupiter 12 years, Mars 2 years minus 43 days, the Sun one year, Venus about 7.5 months, Mercury about 3 months, and the Moon one month. When we apply the numerical test to this order, keeping the same numbers for each of the planets, we have—

Figure 12.

Figure 12.

Figure 12.

If we begin the cycle with the Sun and follow with Venus, Mercury, etc., we shall have a resolution in terms of the Moon, thus—

If we start the cycle with the Sun and then go to Venus, Mercury, and so on, we will arrive at a conclusion regarding the Moon, like this—

135 Figure 13.

Figure 13.

Figure 13.

Again, if we take the positive Sun number and the negative Moon number, we have Sun, Moon, Mars, Mercury, 1295, equals 17 or 8, Jupiter, Venus, Saturn 368, equals 17 or 8, and 8 plus 8 equals 16, which is of unit value 7.

Again, if we take the positive Sun number and the negative Moon number, we have Sun, Moon, Mars, Mercury, 1295, equals 17 or 8, Jupiter, Venus, Saturn 368, equals 17 or 8, and 8 plus 8 equals 16, which is of unit value 7.

But the Kabalism of the numbers attaching to signs of the zodiac clearly shows that the planets Mars and Venus are natural opposites, and not Mercury and Mars, as erroneously stated. The following scheme will show that this is so.

But the Kabalism of the numbers linked to signs of the zodiac clearly demonstrates that the planets Mars and Venus are natural opposites, not Mercury and Mars, as mistakenly claimed. The following scheme will illustrate this.

Scorpio 9 opposed to Taurus 6
Libra 8 ” Aries 7
Virgo 10 1 ” Pisces 11 2
Leo 1 ” Aquarius 2
Cancer 5 ” Capricorn 3
Gemini 12 3 ” Sagittary 4
— —
27 24
Equals 9 Mars Equals 6 Venus.

The series begins with the signs of Mars and Venus and concludes under those of Mercury and Jupiter, the numbers attached to the various signs being reduced to their unit values and added together, thus yielding the sum of 27 for Mars and 24 for Venus, which again are reduced to the unit values of 9 and 6, the numbers of the planets under consideration.

The series starts with the signs of Mars and Venus and ends with those of Mercury and Jupiter. The numbers linked to the different signs are simplified to their basic values and summed up, resulting in a total of 27 for Mars and 24 for Venus. These totals are then further reduced to their basic values of 9 and 6, which correspond to the numbers of the planets in question.

136Exactly the same result is produced if we begin the series with the other signs of Mars and Venus, namely, Aries and Libra.

136 The same outcome occurs if we start the series with the other signs of Mars and Venus, specifically Aries and Libra.

Libra 8 opposed to Aries 7
Virgo 1 ” Pisces 2
Leo 1 ” Aquarius 2
Cancer 5 ” Capricorn 3
Gemini 3 ” Sagittary 4
Taurus 6 ” Scorpio 9
— —
24 27
Equals 6 Venus Equals 9 Mars.

By making a sum of the values of the signs according to their mutual oppositions, we have for—

By adding up the values of the signs based on their mutual oppositions, we get for—

Aries and Scorpio, the signs of Mars, values 7 and 9 equals 16
Sagittarius and Pisces, signs of Jupiter, 4 and 11 ” 15
Capricornus and Aquarius, signs of Saturn, 3 and 2 ” 5
Total 36

These are opposed to the signs—

These are opposed to the signs—

Libra and Taurus, signs of Venus, values 6 and 8 equal 14
Gemini and Virgo, signs of Mercury ” 12 and 10 ” 22
Cancer and Leo, signs of Moon and Sun values 5 and 1 ” 6
Total 42

Thus we have again 36, unit value 9, for Mars; and 42, unit value 6, for Venus. This scheme may be reduced to a diagram, as on the following page.

Thus we have again 36, unit value 9, for Mars; and 42, unit value 6, for Venus. This scheme can be simplified into a diagram, as shown on the following page.

Thus we see that 9, the number of Mars, is opposed to 6, the number of Venus, in whatever direction we look, and the old legends of Venus and Adonis, of Vulcan and Aphrodite, of Vishnu and Lakshmi, most clearly point to this association of the planets Venus and Mars in the minds of the writers of the 137mythology. As myths or veils they were intended doubtless to hide something from the popular mind, and initiation into the Mysteries consisted in the interpretation of these myths in terms of cosmical laws.

Thus we see that 9, the number of Mars, is opposed to 6, the number of Venus, in every direction we look, and the old stories of Venus and Adonis, of Vulcan and Aphrodite, of Vishnu and Lakshmi, clearly highlight this connection between the planets Venus and Mars in the minds of the writers of the 137 mythology. As myths or disguises, they were likely meant to conceal something from the general public, and understanding the Mysteries was about interpreting these myths in light of cosmic laws.

Figure 14.

Figure 14.

Figure 14.

138

CHAPTER XIV
SOME FURTHER KABALAS

Although it will be evident from the foregoing illustrations that a very definite design lies at the root of the allotment of numbers to the planets and the signs of the zodiac, yet the study of the subject would hardly be complete without some reference to some other methods that I have evolved or that are to be found hinted at but not expounded in the writings of others. If, for instance, I were required to demonstrate the fact that a certain method underlies the planetary numbers, I could do so by reference to the Kabala of the number 9, and although in the process I might have to concede the point that Jupiter and Venus are interchangeable, I should still be warranted by my Kabala in affirming that Mercury is not interchangeable with Mars, but that it is polarized by the Sun, and that Mars is the alternative or opposite of the Moon.

Although it's clear from the previous examples that there's a specific design behind the assignment of numbers to the planets and zodiac signs, the exploration of the topic wouldn't be complete without mentioning some other methods I've developed or that are suggested but not fully explained in others' writings. For instance, if I needed to show that a certain method supports the planetary numbers, I could reference the Kabbalah of the number 9. While I might have to acknowledge that Jupiter and Venus can be seen as interchangeable, my Kabbalah would still allow me to assert that Mercury isn't interchangeable with Mars; instead, it is influenced by the Sun, and Mars is the counterpart to the Moon.

Now this little Kabala, while itself very suggestive and capable of many applications, has no cosmical basis, and therefore may be the occasion of much disturbance, if carried beyond its legitimate domain.

Now this little Kabala, while very thought-provoking and open to many interpretations, doesn’t have a cosmic foundation and might cause a lot of confusion if taken outside of its proper context.

It is only necessary to take the numerical sequence 1391, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and centralize that number which answers to the planet whose opposite you require.

It’s only necessary to use the numerical sequence 1391, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and focus on the number that corresponds to the planet you need the opposite of.

Thus for Saturn, whose number is 8, we have the sequence—

Thus for Saturn, which has the number 8, we have the sequence—

Saturn
4567   8   9123
22      15
4   10    6
or 1
Sun (+)

For Jupiter the resolution is as follows—

For Jupiter, the resolution is as follows—

Jupiter
8912   3   4567
20      22
2      4
6
Venus

For the Sun, whose positive number is 1, we have—

For the Sun, which has a positive value of 1, we have—

Sun
6789   1   2345
30      14
3      5
8
Saturn

140For Venus, whose number is 6, the resolution is—

140For Venus, which is associated with the number 6, the conclusion is—

Venus
2345   6   7891
14      25
5      7
12
or 3
Jupiter

For the Moon, whose number is 7 positive, we get—

For the Moon, which has a positive number of 7, we get—

Moon
3456   7   8912
18      20
9      2
11
or 2
Moon

So that having found the alternate of Saturn 8 to be Sun 1, and that of Venus 6 to be Jupiter 3, of the Moon 7 to be 2, it is quite easy to jump to the conclusion that the alternate of Mars 9 must be Mercury 5, and yet to get side-tracked on the very first trip. For observe what happens in the resolution of Mars, number 9,

So, having discovered that the alternative for Saturn 8 is Sun 1, that for Venus 6 is Jupiter 3, and that for the Moon 7 is 2, it’s pretty easy to conclude that the alternative for Mars 9 must be Mercury 5, yet it’s easy to get sidetracked on the very first attempt. For notice what occurs in the breakdown of Mars, number 9,

Mars
5678   9   1234
26      10
8   1
9
Mars

141which, seems to inform us that, whereas all things may be reduced and converted by Fire or the Will, neither consents to be converted. Herein is the spirit of freedom that characterizes the fiery planet and those that are born under its sway. We may now try Mercury, the universal resolvent.

141which seems to tell us that, while everything can be transformed and changed by Fire or Will, it refuses to be changed. This embodies the spirit of freedom associated with the fiery planet and those born under its influence. Now, we can explore Mercury, the universal solvent.

Mercury
1234   5   6789
10      30
1      3
4
Sun (-)

In antithesis we may set the number of the Sun negative 4.

In contrast, we can assign the number of the Sun as negative 4.

Sun
9123   4   5678
15      26
6      8
14
or 5
Mercury

Here, by a curious refractoriness of disposition, Mercury is seen to be resolvable only in terms of a negative Sun, the number 5 being set in apposition to 4. The obvious suggestion to those who are engaged in the hermetic art, should they happen upon this little kabalism, is that Mercury is the one thing that we are able to convert into gold.

Here, due to a strange stubbornness in nature, Mercury can only be understood in relation to a negative Sun, with the number 5 placed alongside 4. The clear implication for those involved in the mystical arts, if they come across this little piece of wisdom, is that Mercury is the one substance we can turn into gold.

Now if we collect these resolutions we shall find 142that they are all in terms of Mars or the number 9, whose position at the head of the scheme indicates, as clearly as figures can tell us, that the Will is the dominant factor in all human affairs.

Now if we gather these resolutions, we'll see that they're all framed in terms of Mars or the number 9. Its position at the top of the scheme clearly shows, as much as numbers can convey, that the Will is the main factor in all human matters. 142

Mars
9
Sun 4    5 Mercury
Jupiter 3    6 Venus
Saturn 8    1 Sun
2
Moon
7

Here we have Mars 9, Sun and Mercury 9, Jupiter and Venus 9, Saturn and Sun 9, Moon (positive and negative) 9. Moreover, it is seen that the sum of Sun, Jupiter and Saturn, 4 plus 3 plus 8, is 15, and that of Mercury, Venus and Sun, 5 plus 6 plus 1, is 12. Then 15 plus 12 are 27, and the unit value of this is again 9. It is further of interest to observe that the only planets that are not convertible are Mars and the Moon, and that at the head and foot of the scheme represent Fire and Water, symbols of Spirit and Matter, the Will and the element of Variability, one fixed and the other mutable. The numbers of the Moon are 2 and 7, and these are equal in sum to 9.

Here we have Mars 9, Sun and Mercury 9, Jupiter and Venus 9, Saturn and Sun 9, Moon (positive and negative) 9. Additionally, it's observed that the total of Sun, Jupiter, and Saturn, which is 4 plus 3 plus 8, equals 15, and the total of Mercury, Venus, and Sun, which is 5 plus 6 plus 1, equals 12. So, 15 plus 12 equals 27, and the unit value of this is again 9. It's also interesting to note that the only planets that can't be converted are Mars and the Moon, and at the top and bottom of the scheme, they represent Fire and Water, symbols of Spirit and Matter, the Will and the element of Variability, one being fixed and the other mutable. The numbers of the Moon are 2 and 7, and these add up to 9.

To argue thence that we are justified in transposing Mercury with Mars or Jupiter with Venus in any 143system that has a cosmical factor for its basis is to argue from cosmos into chaos. The planetary numbers and those of the zodiac were affixed by those who instituted the scheme, not from any considerations of a fanciful nature, but on certain cosmical principles which those who have thoroughly mastered the subject of Numerology will find working out in all astrological practice. It is, of course, allowable to use numbers in a symbolical manner after any order that may suit our purpose, but to proceed from the time of sunrise by progression through the planetary hours, and to violate the established order of those hours by the introduction of a fictitious interchange of factors, is an affront to the intelligence of every astrological student and a violation of the principles of cosmic symbology that can only find its karmic effects in a condition of mental chaos.

To claim that we can swap Mercury with Mars or Jupiter with Venus in any system based on a cosmic factor is to move from order into chaos. The planetary numbers and those of the zodiac were set by those who created the system, not based on whimsical ideas, but on certain cosmic principles that anyone who has truly studied Numerology will see in all astrological practice. Of course, it's fine to use numbers symbolically in any way that suits our needs, but to start from sunrise and progress through the planetary hours, then disrupt the established order of those hours by introducing a fake interchange of factors, is an insult to the intelligence of every astrology student and a breach of the principles of cosmic symbolism that can only result in mental chaos.

Another kabalism which employs the planetary factors has been in use for some time by certain well-known students of interpretation, and is principally applied to the predictive art. In this system the planets hold the same numbers as those traditionally allotted to them.

Another form of mysticism that uses planetary factors has been practiced for some time by certain well-known interpreters, primarily in the field of prediction. In this system, the planets correspond with the same numbers that have traditionally been assigned to them.

The signs of the zodiac, however, do not follow the same rule, but take the values that belong to their planetary rulers, as follows—

The zodiac signs don’t follow the same rule; instead, they take the values that correspond to their planetary rulers, as follows—

Aries 9, Taurus 6, Gemini 5, Cancer 7 or 2, Leo 1 or 4, Virgo 5, Libra 6, Scorpio 9, Sagittarius 3, Capricornus 8, Aquarius 8, Pisces 3.

Aries 9, Taurus 6, Gemini 5, Cancer 7 or 2, Leo 1 or 4, Virgo 5, Libra 6, Scorpio 9, Sagittarius 3, Capricorn 8, Aquarius 8, Pisces 3.

These numbers are combined with those of the 144days of the week ruled by the planets. Thus in the case of a person born on a Tuesday in the month of November, the numbers are both 9, for Tuesday is ruled by Mars, whose number is 9, and in November the Sun is in Scorpio, which again gives the number 9. Hence those years in which the number 9 figures are regarded as important in the production of great events.

These numbers are combined with those of the 144days of the week ruled by the planets. So, for someone born on a Tuesday in November, both numbers are 9, because Tuesday is ruled by Mars, whose number is 9, and in November, the Sun is in Scorpio, which also gives the number 9. Therefore, the years where the number 9 appears are considered significant for major events.

The months and signs corresponding are thus valued:—January 8, February 8, March 3, April 9, May 6, June 5, July 7 and 2, August 1 and 4, September 5, October 6, November 9 and December 3. But it should be observed that, in order to keep in touch with the cosmical order, these numbers are only to attach to the first 21 days of each month, the number for the succeeding month being used for the last 10 or 11 days. Similarly, the day counts from sunrise to sunrise according to some authors, but cosmically it counts from noon to noon, that period from noon to midnight being “the evening” and from midnight to noon “the morning,” as it is said in Genesis, Veyahi oreb veyahi beqer yom echad—“And the evening and the morning were the first day.”

The months and their corresponding signs are valued as follows:—January 8, February 8, March 3, April 9, May 6, June 5, July 7 and 2, August 1 and 4, September 5, October 6, November 9, and December 3. However, it's important to note that to stay aligned with the cosmic order, these numbers should only be used for the first 21 days of each month, with the number for the next month used for the last 10 or 11 days. Likewise, some authors count the day from sunrise to sunrise, but cosmically it counts from noon to noon, with the period from noon to midnight referred to as “the evening” and midnight to noon as “the morning,” as stated in Genesis, Fly high and fly low for one day—“And the evening and the morning were the first day.”

Perhaps one of the most interesting Kabalas is that which has reference to the values of the signs and planets when taken in combination. Each of the months in the annual circle has a number attaching to it according to the planet ruling the sign in which the Sun is, as already shown above. This is multiplied into the number allotted to the sign itself apart from its ruler. Thus—

Perhaps one of the most interesting Kabalas is that which relates to the values of the signs and planets when taken together. Each month in the yearly cycle is assigned a number based on the planet that rules the sign the Sun is in, as mentioned earlier. This number is then multiplied by the number assigned to the sign itself, independent of its ruler. So—

145
Month Sign No. Ruler No. Product Unit
             
January Capricorn 3 Saturn 8 24 6
February Aquarius 2 Saturn 8 16 7
March Pisces 11 Jupiter 3 33 6
April Aries 7 Mars 9 63 9
May Taurus 6 Venus 6 36 9
June Gemini 12 Mercury 5 60 6
July Cancer 3 Moon 2 10 1
August Leo 1 Sun 1 1 1
September Virgo 10 Mercury 5 50 5
October Libra 8 Venus 6 48 3
November Scorpio 9 Mars 9 81 9
December Sagittary 4 Jupiter 3 12 3

It is then seen that the total value of the planets’ numbers is 65, while the total of the unit values of the products is also 65. It is satisfactory to find that wherever we are consistent and hold to the traditional values and positions of the several factors, we obtain results that are wonderfully harmonious and suggestive.

It shows that the total of the planets' numbers is 65, and the total of the unit values of the products is also 65. It's satisfying to see that when we stay consistent and adhere to the traditional values and positions of the different factors, we get results that are incredibly harmonious and meaningful.

There is an ancient symbol known as the “Golden Candlestick” which is in the nature of a candelabrum with seven arms. Each of the seven lights answers to one of the seven celestial bodies known to the ancients, and the order of them is that known as the Chaldean, in use among astrologers. Here is the symbol—

There is an ancient symbol called the “Golden Candlestick,” which resembles a candelabrum with seven arms. Each of the seven lights corresponds to one of the seven celestial bodies recognized by the ancients, and their arrangement follows the Chaldean order used by astrologers. Here is the symbol—

Figure 15.

Figure 15.

Figure 15.

146It will be seen at once that the interchange of the planets is confirmatory of the astrological method derived from the sign rulerships. Saturn interchanges with the Moon, Jupiter with Mercury, Mars with Venus, while the Sun stands in the centre of the system giving light to all. These lights answer to the seven Rays, the seven Spirits before the Throne, the seven Archangels, Cassiel, the keeper of secrets—Saturn; Zadkiel, the spirit of Justice—Jupiter; Madimial, the spirit of those who make Red—Mars; Michael, who is “like unto God”—Sun; Haniel, the spirit of Splendour—Venus; Raphael, the spirit of Healing—Mercury; and Gabriel, the spirit of Strength—Moon.

146It’s clear that the exchange of the planets supports the astrological method based on the rulerships of signs. Saturn interacts with the Moon, Jupiter with Mercury, Mars with Venus, while the Sun remains at the center of the system, providing light to everyone. These luminaries correspond to the seven Rays, the seven Spirits before the Throne, the seven Archangels: Cassiel, the keeper of secrets—Saturn; Zadkiel, the spirit of Justice—Jupiter; Madimial, the spirit of those who make Red—Mars; Michael, who is “like unto God”—Sun; Haniel, the spirit of Splendor—Venus; Raphael, the spirit of Healing—Mercury; and Gabriel, the spirit of Strength—Moon.

In connection with this symbol there is another which affords several glyphs in combination. It is called the Seven-pointed Star and Star of the Universe. A star of seven points being drawn, the planetary bodies, the Sun and Moon, are placed round it in the Chaldean order, the Sun being at the highest point, thus—

In relation to this symbol, there's another one that combines several glyphs. It's called the Seven-pointed Star and Star of the Universe. When a seven-pointed star is drawn, the planetary bodies, the Sun and Moon, are arranged around it in the Chaldean order, with the Sun at the highest point, like this—

Figure 16.

Figure 16.

Figure 16.

147It is then found that the Sun holds the unique position of supreme elevation, while the “pairs of opposites,” Venus and Mars, Mercury and Jupiter, Moon and Saturn, are functioning on successively lower planes.

147It turns out that the Sun occupies the highest position, while the "pairs of opposites," Venus and Mars, Mercury and Jupiter, and the Moon and Saturn, operate on progressively lower levels.

By starting with the first day of the week, Sunday, at the point of the Sun and following the lines of the Star, we shall derive the days of the week in their order, namely, Sun, Moon, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus and Saturn. By reading from Mars and taking every alternate planet, we get the order of the atomic weights of the metals to which the ancients ascribed these planets; namely, Iron, Copper, Silver, Tin, Gold, Mercury and Lead. This fact seems strongly to support the view that there is a very real connection between the planets and the metals referred to them by the ancients, for while it is fairly certain that they did not know anything about atomic weights, they very clearly associated the celestial bodies with the primary metals, and the fact that they are brought into line through the apparent velocities of the several bodies of the solar system seems to afford a suggestive basis for further inquiry. We all are used to speaking of the “golden” sun and the “silver” moon, and we also speak in terms of cosmic symbolism when we refer to an “iron” will, or of “steeling” oneself against a danger, for Mars is the astrological index of the Will, and the uses of steel and iron are for defence and offence. In the name of Mercury we have actually retained the ancient name associated with the metal, although the root of it is merx, 148trade, and has no direct associations with quicksilver. But we pick up the link of connection through the known association of Mercury with trade and shipping, and when we see the winged messengers or trading vessels carrying their burden of foreign goods from one country to another, we understand why Mercury was called the Interpreter, for in astrology the planet Mercury is the symbol of commerce, and it “confers the gift of tongues.” Pliny says that copper was first discovered in Cyprus, from which it gets its name, and, according to astrologers from the time of Ptolemy until now, the sign Taurus, one of the signs of Venus, rules Cyprus. This sidelight is of interest, displaying as it does the universality of planetary dominions. Copper, of course, was in use before Cyprus had been named or exploited, but it is of interest to observe that a copper-bearing territory, which has given the metal a name in the West, should be found both traditionally and experimentally to be under the dominion of the planet Venus, which the ancients associated with that metal. Lead, which is named in connection with Saturn, the Lunar alternative, has been spoken of by some of the old Hermetists as a disease of the Moon, and it is suggested that the “sick Lady” took a bad turn at a certain point in her career, and instead of appearing in shining silver robes, put on those of leaden grey. It is worthy of note that silver ore is frequently found in lead, and silver has been successfully extracted from lead since 1829, when Pattinson developed his useful process.

By starting with Sunday, the first day of the week, at the position of the Sun and following the pattern of the Stars, we can derive the order of the days: Sun, Moon, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, and Saturn. By taking Mars and selecting every other planet, we get the sequence of the atomic weights of the metals that the ancients linked to these planets: Iron, Copper, Silver, Tin, Gold, Mercury, and Lead. This strongly suggests that there is a real connection between the planets and the metals assigned to them by the ancients. While they likely didn't know about atomic weights, they clearly associated celestial bodies with primary metals, and the fact that these are aligned with the apparent speeds of the solar system's bodies suggests a basis for further exploration. We all use terms like the "golden" sun and the "silver" moon, and we refer to cosmic symbolism when mentioning an "iron" will or "steeling" oneself against danger, as Mars represents the Will, and steel and iron are used for both defense and offense. We actually still use the ancient name linked to mercury when we say "Mercury," although its root is merx, meaning trade, and doesn't directly relate to quicksilver. We grasp the connection through Mercury's association with trade and shipping; when we see winged messengers or trading ships carrying goods across countries, it makes sense why Mercury was called the Interpreter, since in astrology, Mercury symbolizes commerce and it “gives the gift of tongues.” Pliny notes that copper was first discovered in Cyprus, which is where it gets its name, and according to astrologers from Ptolemy's time to the present, the sign Taurus, one of Venus's signs, rules Cyprus. This is interesting, highlighting the universality of planetary influences. Copper was in use long before Cyprus was named or exploited, but it's noteworthy that a region rich in copper, which gave the metal a name in the West, is traditionally and experimentally under Venus's influence, which the ancients linked to that metal. Lead, associated with Saturn, the alternative to the Moon, has been referred to by some old Hermetists as the Moon's disease, suggesting that the “sick Lady” took a turn at some point in her history and instead of appearing in bright silver, donned drab leaden garments. It's important to note that silver ore is often found in lead, and since 1829, silver has been successfully extracted from lead after Pattinson developed a useful process.

Before leaving this subject of Kabalas connected 149with planetary numbers, it may be well to point out that the Kabala displayed in the beginning of this chapter may also be applied to the Chaldean order of the planets and their numbers, yielding the same results.

Before moving on from this topic of Kabalas related to planetary numbers, it’s worth noting that the Kabala shown at the start of this chapter can also be applied to the Chaldean system of planets and their numbers, leading to the same outcomes. 149

Chaldean Order of Planets and their Numbers

Saturn 8, Jupiter 3, Mars 9, Sun 1-4, Venus 6, Mercury 5, Moon 7-2. From these we get the following resolutions—

Saturn 8, Jupiter 3, Mars 9, Sun 1-4, Venus 6, Mercury 5, Moon 7-2. From these, we get the following resolutions—

  Sun    
839 1 6572  
20   20
2   2  
  4    
  Sun    
  Saturn    
6572 8 3914  
20   17
2   8  
  10    
  1    
  Sun    
  Jupiter    
5728 3 9146  
22   20
4   2  
  8    
  Venus    
150
  Mars    
7283 9 1465  
20   16
2   7  
  9    
  Mars    
  Venus    
3914 6 5728  
17   22
8   4  
  12    
  3    
  Jupiter    
  Mercury    
9146 5 7283  
20   20
2   2  
  4    
  Sun    
  Moon    
1465 7-2 839  
16   20
7   2  
  9    
  Mars    

In the above resolutions we have, as before, Mercury in apposition to the Sun (negative), and the Moon 151in apposition to Mars. Now, to find a cosmical basis for this order of things, we shall have to refer to the “exaltations” of the planets as defined by astrology. Thus, beside the particular Signs ruled by the planets, there are others in which the planets are said to be exalted.

In the above resolutions, we have, as before, Mercury in opposition to the Sun (negative), and the Moon in opposition to Mars. Now, to find a cosmic basis for this situation, we need to look at the “exaltations” of the planets as defined by astrology. So, in addition to the specific Signs ruled by the planets, there are other Signs where the planets are considered to be exalted.

The exaltation of the Sun is in Aries, while that of Saturn is in Libra. These two bodies are seen to be interchangeable. The exaltation of Venus is in Pisces, which is the Sign of Jupiter. But Jupiter’s exaltation is in Cancer, which is the Sign of the Moon, and the Moon has its exaltation in Taurus, which is the Sign of Venus. Thus Jupiter and Venus are rendered interchangeable through, and in the period of, the Moon. The three planets, Moon, Jupiter and Venus, have their exaltations in Taurus, Cancer and Pisces, and these are ruled by Venus, Jupiter and the Moon respectively. Mercury, whose exaltation is Aquarius, a Sign of Saturn, is thereby linked up with the Sun through the opposite Sign Leo, which the Sun rules. A short study of the following Table of Exaltations will make these interchanges plain.

The Sun is exalted in Aries, while Saturn is exalted in Libra. These two planets can be seen as interchangeable. Venus is exalted in Pisces, which is ruled by Jupiter. However, Jupiter’s exaltation is in Cancer, which is ruled by the Moon, and the Moon is exalted in Taurus, which is ruled by Venus. This means that Jupiter and Venus can be viewed as interchangeable during the period of the Moon. The three planets—Moon, Jupiter, and Venus—are exalted in Taurus, Cancer, and Pisces, and they are ruled by Venus, Jupiter, and the Moon, respectively. Mercury, whose exaltation is in Aquarius (a sign of Saturn), is therefore connected to the Sun through the opposite sign, Leo, which the Sun rules. A brief review of the following Table of Exaltations will clarify these interchanges.

Planetary Exaltations

Saturn exalted in Aries, a sign ruled by Mars.
Jupiter exalted in Cancer, ruled by the Moon.
Mars exalted in Capricorn, ruled by Saturn.
Sun, exalted in Aries, ruled by Mars.
Venus exalted in Pisces, ruled by Jupiter.
Mercury, exalted in Aquarius, ruled by Saturn.

152The planet Mars, therefore, is linked up with the Moon through Saturn, which rules the sign in which Mars is exalted. Much else might be said regarding planetary numbers and Kabalas depending thereon, but it is, perhaps, advisable that some margin should be left for the exercise of the reader’s ingenuity, should he wish to pursue the subject further. I will therefore turn to the consideration of another aspect of the same subject.

152So, the planet Mars is connected to the Moon through Saturn, which governs the sign where Mars is exalted. There's a lot more that could be said about planetary numbers and the related Kabalas, but it might be better to leave some space for the reader's creativity if they want to explore this topic further. I'll now shift focus to another aspect of the same subject.

153

CHAPTER XV
PLANETARY SOUNDS

Having dealt with the subject of planetary numbers we may now consider that of Planetary Sounds, these being an obvious connection between Number, Form, Sound and Colour. Number underlies all forms, all sounds and all colours, for modes of vibration in the same universal medium give rise to all of these. Thus it is said that the Logos or Word gave existence to all living forms. Those who have constructed Sound-forms by means of the Eidophone will readily understand how all forms may be derived from simple or complex sounds. Sound is also related to colour, and there are those who are sensitive enough to see sounds and to hear colours.

Having discussed planetary numbers, we can now look at Planetary Sounds, which clearly connect Number, Form, Sound, and Colour. Numbers are the foundation of all forms, sounds, and colours, as different vibrations in the same universal medium create all of these. It is often said that the Logos or Word brought all living forms into being. Those who have created Sound-forms using the Eidophone will easily grasp how all forms can emerge from simple or complex sounds. Sound is also linked to colour, and some people are sensitive enough to see sounds and hear colours.

The seven notes of the gamut are related to the seven celestial bodies, thus—

The seven notes of the scale are connected to the seven celestial bodies, so—

C D E F G A B
Sun Saturn Mercury Moon Mars Venus Jupiter

The colours answering to these are—

The colors that correspond to these are—

Orange Indigo Blue Green Red Yellow Violet

The numbers following the order of the gamut bring us once more into touch with the inevitable apposition of the fire and water elements, represented 154by Mars and the Moon, to which reference has already been made in the preceding chapter. The numbers thus arranged are—

The numbers listed after the order of the gamut connect us again with the unavoidable pairing of the fire and water elements, represented by Mars and the Moon, which was mentioned in the previous chapter. The numbers arranged this way are— 154

Sun Saturn Mercury Moon Mars Venus Jupiter
1-4 8 5 7-2 9 6 3
  18     18  
  9   9   9  
      Mars      

If we multiply this number 9 into the number of the signs of the zodiac we shall obtain 108, which gives us the key to the Ashtottaravàk or 108 sounds of the Mantrasara. Let us look at the origin of these, 108 sounds, since they have been much exploited without any specific explanation of their origin.

If we multiply this number 9 by the number of zodiac signs, we get 108, which gives us the key to the Ashtottaravàk or 108 sounds of the Mantrasara. Let's explore the origin of these 108 sounds, as they have been widely used without a clear explanation of where they come from.

In Indian Astrology there are 27 lunar asterisms or Moon-stations which are each of 13° 20´ in extent. It has already been said that the whole period of man’s life is taken at 120 years, or an arc of 120°, which is one-third of the circle, and by dividing this by 9 we obtain an arc of 13° 20´, which is the extent of a lunar asterism or Moon-station. These Moon-stations were in great repute among the Arabian astrologers, who attached specific influences to them, but in the West they have been entirely neglected. They still continue to form the basis of all Indian calculations, and, as will be shown, are at the root of the planetary sounds.

In Indian astrology, there are 27 lunar asterisms, or Moon-stations, each covering an area of 13° 20'. It has already been mentioned that the total span of a person's life is considered to be 120 years, which represents an arc of 120°, or one-third of a circle. When we divide this by 9, we get an arc of 13° 20', the size of a lunar asterism or Moon-station. These Moon-stations were highly regarded by Arabian astrologers, who attributed specific influences to them, but they have been completely overlooked in the West. They continue to serve as the foundation for all Indian calculations and, as will be discussed, are fundamental to the planetary sounds.

Each asterism of 13° 20´ is again divided into four padams or quarters each of 3° 20´, which is the value of the Navamsha or one-ninth part of a sign of 30°. Now since there are four amshas in each asterism 155and 27 asterisms in the circle, there are 108 amshas, and these correspond with the 108 sounds.

Each asterism of 13° 20´ is divided into four padams or quarters, each measuring 3° 20´, which is the value of the Navamsha or one-ninth of a 30° sign. Since there are four amshas in each asterism and 27 asterisms in the circle, there are a total of 108 amshas, which correspond to the 108 sounds. 155

There are five primary vowel sounds, and each of these lasts for 24 minutes, or one Indian hour, which is equal to 6° of the zodiac or one-fifth of a Sign. Therefore the 5 vowels are distributed through the 5 parts of the Sign. The vowels are—

There are five main vowel sounds, and each one lasts for 24 minutes, or one Indian hour, which equals 6° of the zodiac or one-fifth of a Sign. So, the 5 vowels are spread across the 5 parts of the Sign. The vowels are—

ah ee oo ae oh
â î û é ô

They are all long and pure vowel sounds. The compounds such as oi in “oil,” ow as in “now,” etc., are produced from a combination of these.

They are all long and pure vowel sounds. The compounds like oi in “oil,” ow as in “now,” etc., are made from a combination of these.

These five primary vowels range through the several Signs and are taken up by successive consonants attached to each of the Signs. These consonants extend throughout the Signs to which they are attached, as L through Aries, V through Taurus, etc., so that the five Indian hours or 120 minutes during which Aries is in evidence, are related to the five vowels in connection with the consonant L, as Lah, Lee, Loo, Lae, Loh, and these are succeeded by Taurus with the sounds Vah, Vee, Voo, Vae, Voh.

These five main vowels are distributed across the different Signs and are combined with the consonants that follow each Sign. These consonants influence the Signs they’re paired with, like L with Aries, V with Taurus, and so on. This means that the five Indian hours, or 120 minutes, when Aries is prominent, are linked to the five vowels associated with the consonant L: Lah, Lee, Loo, Lae, Loh, and this is followed by Taurus, which corresponds to the sounds Vah, Vee, Voo, Vae, Voh.

By taking into account the five vowel sounds, the consonants attaching to the various Signs, and the relative positions of the planets at any given time, a mantram may be formed which is in exact harmony with the astral vibrations obtaining at that particular time. Mantrams are also formed from the positions of the planets at the time of a person’s birth. Some of these mantrams are traditional with Hindu families and others have been adopted. At one time 156they were delivered with the horoscope immediately after a birth had taken place, but many of these ancient practices have fallen into disuse among the moderns.

By considering the five vowel sounds, the consonants linked to the different Signs, and the positions of the planets at any moment, a mantram can be created that perfectly aligns with the astral vibrations present at that time. Mantrams are also based on the positions of the planets at a person's birth. Some of these mantrams are traditional in Hindu families, while others have been adopted. In the past, 156 they were given along with the horoscope right after a birth, but many of these ancient practices have fallen out of use among modern people.

Here follows a complete table of the sounds showing the Signs and parts of Signs to which they are attached.

Here is a complete table of the sounds that shows the signs and parts of signs to which they are linked.

Table of Planetary Sounds.

0-6 ah 6-12 ee 12-18 oo 18-24 ae 24-30 oh
Aries Lah Lee Loo Lae Loh
Taur. Vah Vee Voo Vae Voh
Gemini Kah Kee Koo Kae Koh
Cancer Hah Hee Hoo Hae Hoh
Ḍah Ḍee Ḍoo Ḍae Ḍoh (hard Dh)
Leo Mah Mee Moo Mae Moh
Ṭah Ṭee Ṭoo Ṭae Ṭoh (Hard T)
Virgo Pah Pee Poo Pae Poh
Libra Rah Ree Roo Rae Roh
Tah Tee Too Tae Toh (soft)
Scorpio Nah Nee Noo Nae Noh
Sagit. Yah Yee Yoo Yae Yoh
Bah Bee Boo Bae Boh
Capri. Jah Jee Joo Jae Joh
Gah Gee Goo Gae Goh
Aquar. Sah See Soo Sae Soh
Dah Dee Doo Dae Doh (soft)
Pisces Chah Chee Choo Chae D Choh

From this table we are able to extract the Planetary Sounds, and for this reason I have called it a Table of Planetary Sounds, for in the thought of all astrologers a Sign infers a planet and a planet infers a Sign. Hence as Mars rules the signs Aries and Scorpio, we have the consonants L and N and the five vowels, when sounded in conjunction with the initial consonant.

From this table, we can extract the Planetary Sounds, which is why I've named it the Table of Planetary Sounds. In the minds of all astrologers, a Sign implies a planet, and a planet implies a Sign. So, since Mars rules the signs Aries and Scorpio, we have the consonants L and N, along with the five vowels, when they are sounded together with the initial consonant.

But it should here be remarked that the five vowels 157are not all attributable to Mars, although they are set at the head of the Table under the sign Aries. They merely characterize the five divisions of the Signs, and are seen to range through the whole zodiac from Aries to Pisces. They are associated with the five disposers, or moderators as they are called, namely, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus and Saturn.

But it's important to note that the five vowels 157aren't all linked to Mars, even though they're listed at the top of the Table under the sign Aries. They simply represent the five divisions of the Signs and can be found throughout the entire zodiac from Aries to Pisces. They're associated with the five disposers, or moderators as they're called, which are Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, and Saturn.

We are now able to construct a Table employing all the Consonants, which we may call the

We can now create a table using all the consonants, which we can call the

Table of Initial Sounds.

Saturn Jupiter Mars Sun Venus Mercury Moon
J Y L M V W K Q H
        U O O  
G B N Th R P Dh
S Z X Ch A   T    
D Sh I          

It will be observed that I have eliminated some sounds contained in the Sanskrit alphabet which have no English equivalents, and also that in the Table of Initial Sounds I have added some that are allied to those found in the original, as for instance Q and C (hard) under K, Z and X under S, etc.

It’s noticeable that I’ve removed some sounds from the Sanskrit alphabet that don’t have English equivalents. Additionally, in the Table of Initial Sounds, I’ve included some that are related to those in the original, such as Q and hard C under K, and Z and X under S, etc.

An attempt has been made to fix the vowels under the planets, but they are not found to be consistent, and indeed it is not to be expected that they should be, since the swara, which is constantly changing, determines the vowel sound in force.

An effort has been made to establish the vowels associated with the planets, but they aren't consistent, and honestly, we shouldn't expect them to be, since the swara, which is always changing, dictates the strength of the vowel sound.

As initial sounds the vowels U and O, having affinity with the consonant W, may be classed under Venus, A under Mars, since both are initial factors in the scheme, and long I or Ee under Jupiter as related 158to Y. But as I have said, when in combination with the consonants, that is to say, when not initial, they are in a constant state of flux owing to the change of swara. Subject to this consideration they may be added to the Table of Initial Sounds, where they will be seen in the above scheme.

As initial sounds, the vowels U and O, which are connected to the consonant W, can be categorized under Venus, while A can be categorized under Mars since both are primary elements in the framework, and long I or Ee can be categorized under Jupiter as related to Y. But as I mentioned, when combined with consonants, meaning when they are not at the beginning, they are constantly changing due to the variation in swara. Keeping this in mind, they can be included in the Table of Initial Sounds, where they will appear in the scheme above. 158

The application of this scheme of Planetary Sounds would appear originally to have been in the direction of determining what sounds should be employed at specific times in the construction of mantras appropriate to the nature of the planet then ruling. They were not originally associated with the signs of the zodiac, nor yet with the planets ruling those signs, but solely and specifically with the navamshas, of which there are 108 in the entire circle, and as these are connected with the asterisms through the Moon’s motion, there can be no doubt that they had originally a lunar basis.

The use of this Planetary Sounds system seems to have initially focused on figuring out which sounds should be used at certain times for crafting mantras that fit the characteristics of the ruling planet. They weren't originally linked to the zodiac signs or to the planets that rule those signs, but were specifically tied to the navamshas, of which there are 108 in total. Since these are connected to the asterisms through the Moon's movement, it's clear that they originally had a lunar foundation.

Each of the signs is divided into 9 parts of 3° 20´ each, the order being as follows—

Each sign is divided into 9 sections of 3° 20´ each, in the following order—

Aries 0°-3° 20´ is under the influence of Aries navamsha, 3° 20´-6° 40´ under the influence of Taurus navamsha, 6° 40´-10° under Gemini navamsha, and so on, the last 3° 20’ of this sign Aries being under Sagittarius navamsha. The sign Taurus then commences with Capricorn navamsha, and continues on to Virgo navamsha, when Gemini sign commences with Libra and ends with Gemini navamsha, and is followed by Cancer sign which begins with Cancer navamsha and ends with Pisces navamsha. Leo then commences again with Aries navamsha and follows the same course as the sign Aries. Thus nine 159successive signs are used to designate the navamshas of each 30 degrees of the zodiac, and so we obtain the 108 navamshas, thus—

Aries 0°-3° 20' is influenced by Aries navamsha, 3° 20'-6° 40' is influenced by Taurus navamsha, 6° 40'-10° is under Gemini navamsha, and so on, with the last 3° 20' of Aries being influenced by Sagittarius navamsha. The sign Taurus then begins with Capricorn navamsha and continues to Virgo navamsha, while the Gemini sign starts with Libra and ends with Gemini navamsha, followed by the Cancer sign, which begins with Cancer navamsha and ends with Pisces navamsha. Leo then starts again with Aries navamsha and follows the same pattern as Aries. Thus, nine successive signs are used to identify the navamshas for each 30 degrees of the zodiac, giving us the 108 navamshas.

Figure 17.

Figure 17.

Figure 17.

But we have already seen that the lunar asterisms, each of 13° 20´, are divided into four padams or quarters each of 3° 20´, and as there are 27 asterisms we have again the 108 amshas or subdivisions of the ecliptic, which undoubtedly were originally associated with the 108 sounds. The fact that these sounds have come to be connected with the signs of the zodiac is due to the affinity which exists between the asterisms and the signs through their respective planetary rulers. For it will be shown that the Ashtottaradasha system of Planetary Periods (which see) recognizes the procession of planetary influence through the 108 padams in the course of 108 years, so that each year comes under the influence of one of these sections of the ecliptic, and the count in each case is made from the position held by the Moon at the time of birth.

But we've already seen that the lunar asterisms, each spanning 13° 20', are divided into four padams or quarters, each 3° 20'. Since there are 27 asterisms, we again get the 108 amshas or subdivisions of the ecliptic, which were undoubtedly originally linked to the 108 sounds. The connection between these sounds and the zodiac signs is due to the relationship that exists between the asterisms and the signs through their corresponding planetary rulers. It will be shown that the Ashtottaradasha system of Planetary Periods (see that section) acknowledges the flow of planetary influence through the 108 padams over the course of 108 years, meaning each year falls under the influence of one of these sections of the ecliptic, and the count in each case is based on the Moon's position at the time of birth.

This subject of Planetary Sounds is of immense interest, but inasmuch as it has been developed solely along Oriental lines and has its basis in a system which did not recognize the Vernal Equinox as a starting-point, but found its yogatara in the 160first point of As’wini (Zeta Piscium), I advise my readers to accept with extreme caution the statement that specific sounds are identified with particular planets or signs of the zodiac, and more particularly would I caution the reader not to rely upon the application of these Initial Sounds to the problems of speculation. I have merely shown in this place how they are derived, and thus have no doubt satisfied the curiosity of those who have seen them in other books where they are given without explanation, authority or warning, and stated as if they had been experimentally proved.

This topic of Planetary Sounds is very intriguing, but since it has been developed solely along Eastern lines and is based on a system that doesn't recognize the Vernal Equinox as a starting point, instead using the yogatara at the 160 first point of As كثيرا (Zeta Piscium), I urge my readers to approach the claim that specific sounds are linked to particular planets or zodiac signs with great caution. I especially advise against relying on these Initial Sounds for speculative matters. I've simply shown here how they are derived, which I hope satisfies the curiosity of those who have seen them presented in other books without explanation, authority, or warning, as if they had been experimentally validated.

161

CHAPTER XVI
PLANETARY HOURS

No records that are available to us serve to determine at what period in the course of social evolution the need for a week of seven days first made itself felt, nor can we discover who it was first invented it.

No records available to us indicate when in the course of social evolution the need for a seven-day week first arose, nor can we find out who first invented it.

Newton believed that Chiron was the first to define the constellations of the heavens, and this also was the opinion of the Greeks. But that is to give to the mythical centaur a personal reality. It is true that we may find him, along with his contemporary Hercules, by whose arrow he met his death, among the constellations, and if it be the fact that the Greeks exalted their heroes to the stars and shaped the constellations so as to record their fame for ever, then we can only conclude that Chiron did not define the constellations of either Sagittarius or Hercules, whatever may have been his part in the matter so far as the rest are concerned.

Newton thought that Chiron was the first to outline the constellations in the sky, and the Greeks shared this belief. However, this implies giving the mythical centaur a real existence. It’s true that we can find him, along with his contemporary Hercules, who caused his death with an arrow, among the constellations. If the Greeks elevated their heroes to the stars and organized the constellations to honor their legacy forever, then we must conclude that Chiron didn’t define the constellations of Sagittarius or Hercules, regardless of his involvement in the rest.

It is further to be observed that long before the period ascribed to the famous centaur we have mention of the constellations in the Book of Job, where Arcturus, the Pleiades, Orion and the Mazzaroth are mentioned. Both Homer and Hesiod mention some of the constellations, 162but it is known that Hipparchus, about 150 B.C., defined the limits of forty-eight of the asterisms, while Ptolemy gave us a complete catalogue. Some constellations have since been added by Tycho, Helvetius and others. But from what has already been said on this subject it will be evident that the mythology and astronomy of the Greeks was closely connected, but this does not of necessity prove a Greek origin, for we have yet to determine the origin of the myths. That many of these are shared by the Assyfians, Aryans, Persians and Egyptians, seems to show that they had a Chaldean origin. The Chinese have an astronomy which appears to be unique and without parallel among other nations.

It should also be noted that long before the time attributed to the famous centaur, the constellations are mentioned in the Book of Job, where Arcturus, the Pleiades, Orion, and the Mazzaroth are referenced. Both Homer and Hesiod refer to some constellations, 162 but it is known that Hipparchus, around 150 BCE, defined the boundaries of forty-eight constellations, while Ptolemy provided a complete catalogue. Since then, Tycho, Helvetius, and others have added more constellations. From what has been discussed on this topic, it's clear that Greek mythology and astronomy were closely linked, but this doesn't necessarily prove a Greek origin, as we still need to determine where the myths originated. The fact that many of these myths are shared by the Assyrians, Aryans, Persians, and Egyptians suggests they may have Chaldean origins. The Chinese have an astronomical system that seems unique and unparalleled among other cultures.

If we go back to the earliest record, the Chinese, we shall find that they had no week of days, but a cycle of sixty days, and also one of sixty years. But the days of the month were reckoned from the Moon’s age, the day of the New Moon being called the first day. Thus we find in the earliest record such expressions as “the first day of the first moon he brought things to a conclusion in the temple of his ancestors,” and “on the first day of the twelfth moon,” etc. Even the great Confucius gives no hint of any week of seven days. In his Chun-Tsiu he makes such entries as the following: “In the fifty-eighth year of the cycle and the third year of the reign of Prince Yiu Kung, in the Spring, on the first day of the Second Moon, the day being the sixth of the cycle (of sixty days), the sun was eclipsed.” All his entries are of the 163same careful and explicit nature, and expressed in the same terms, that is to say, in reference to the Cyclic year, the number of the month, the year of the reigning Prince of Lu, and the day of the cycle of sixty days.

If we look back at the earliest records from the Chinese, we’ll see that they didn’t have a week of days but rather a cycle of sixty days, along with one of sixty years. The days of the month were counted based on the Moon’s phases, with the day of the New Moon being called the first day. This is evident in the earliest records with phrases like “the first day of the first moon he wrapped things up in the temple of his ancestors,” and “on the first day of the twelfth moon,” etc. Even the great Confucius doesn’t mention a week of seven days. In his Chun-Tsiu, he makes entries like the following: “In the fifty-eighth year of the cycle and the third year of the reign of Prince Yiu Kung, in Spring, on the first day of the Second Moon, the day being the sixth of the cycle (of sixty days), the sun was eclipsed.” All his entries maintain the same careful and explicit nature, expressed consistently—referring to the Cyclic year, the month number, the year of the reigning Prince of Lu, and the day of the sixty-day cycle.

The earliest divisions of time among the Aryans also follow the Sixty-year period, and the use of the Tithi or Moon day is also to be found in the earliest astronomical records. Nothing more, indeed, is needed for an accurate record of time than an Epoch, a cycle of years counted from that epoch, the number of the last lunation, and the day of the month counted from that lunation. The introduction of a week of days is an adjunct that has no special value in a time sense, and could only have been the invention of a state of civilization in which ceremonies and institutions of a weekly recurrence were required to be indicated and fixed. We find mention of the week, however, in Sanskrit writings, as Somavar (Monday), Kujavar (Tuesday), Buddhavar (Wednesday), Brihaspativar (Thursday), Sukravar (Friday), Sanivar (Saturday) and Suryavar (Sunday), but there do not appear to be sufficient grounds for fixing an epoch at which they came into use.

The earliest ways of measuring time among the Aryans also followed a sixty-year cycle, and the use of Tithi or Moon days is present in the earliest astronomical records. To keep an accurate record of time, all that's really needed is an epoch, a cycle of years counted from that epoch, the number of the most recent lunar month, and the day of the month based on that lunar cycle. The addition of a week is a supplement that doesn’t hold much significance in terms of time itself and could only have emerged in a civilization where regular ceremonies and institutions needed to be marked and organized. However, we do find references to the week in Sanskrit writings, such as Somavar (Monday), Kujavar (Tuesday), Buddha's teaching (Wednesday), Brihaspativar (Thursday), Saturday (Friday), Sanivar (Saturday), and Suryavar (Sunday), but there doesn't seem to be enough evidence to determine when they were first used.

The days of the week as we have them appear to be of Hebrew origin, and probably were derived from the Chaldeans, for in the first place the appointment of specific duties for the several days of the week, culminating in the day of divine worship on the seventh or Sabbath day, requires such a division of time, and in the second place it can be 164shown that the order of the days of the week can only be accounted for by reference to the Chaldean order of the planets, which, as has been shown, has reference to their apparent velocities.

The days of the week we have now seem to come from Hebrew origins and likely trace back to the Chaldeans. First, assigning specific tasks to each day, culminating in a day of worship on the seventh or Sabbath day, necessitates this division of time. Second, it can be 164demonstrated that the arrangement of the days of the week can only be explained by the Chaldean sequence of the planets, which relates to their perceived speeds.

The Septenary division of days, etc., is distinctly Shemitic in its origin, and we find accordingly that the system was extended by the Hebrews to a period of seven years, and to a further period of seven times seven years which was celebrated as the Jubilee. The cycle of seven is not elsewhere found. Western nations have done what they can to break down this old institution by associating the Sabbath with Sunday instead of Saturday, and by celebrating the Jubilee at the end of fifty years instead of at the end of forty-nine. But the teachings of the astrologers and tenacity of the Jewish faith have served to keep the astronomical and religious aspects of this institution intact.

The seven-day week has its roots in Shemitic culture, and as a result, the Hebrews expanded it to include a period of seven years and then to a further period of seven times seven years, which was observed as the Jubilee. The seven-year cycle is unique and not found in other cultures. Western nations have tried to undermine this ancient tradition by linking the Sabbath with Sunday instead of Saturday, and by marking the Jubilee every fifty years instead of fifty years after the last one, which is forty-nine. However, the insights of astrologers and the strong beliefs of the Jewish faith have helped preserve both the astronomical and religious elements of this tradition.

But whereas we find difficulty in tracing the origin of the week-days through any authentic records, we have still more difficulty in ascertaining the principles by which the first day was allotted to the Sun, the second to the Moon, and so forth. One cannot tell the day of the week by looking at the sky or by taking into account any known astronomical factor. But whatever may have been the reason for fixing on a particular day as the Sun-day and beginning the week with it, it has been adhered to ever since, and, so far as we astrologers and Kabalists are concerned, it is satisfactory to know that it works out on empirical test.

But while we have a hard time tracing the origins of the weekdays through any reliable records, we find it even more challenging to understand why the first day was assigned to the Sun, the second to the Moon, and so on. You can’t figure out the day of the week just by looking at the sky or considering any known astronomical factors. However, whatever the reason was for choosing a specific day as Sun-day to start the week, it has stuck ever since, and for us astrologers and Kabalists, it’s comforting to know that it holds up under practical testing.

What are known as the Planetary Hours are 165derived from the succession of the days of the week, commencing with the planet ruling and giving its name to the day, and following the Chaldean cyclic order. Thus on a Sunday the first hour is governed by the Sun, to which follow in succession, Venus, Mercury, Moon, Saturn, Jupiter and Mars. On a Saturday the first hour is ruled by Saturn, to which succeed in order, Jupiter, Mars, Sun, Venus, Mercury, Moon. Then as there are twenty-four hours in the day and seven hours in the planetary cycle, the latter will be contained three times, making twenty-one hours, and there will be three hours still to run. So if we begin with Sun on Sunday and follow with the cycle through the day, we shall complete the third cycle with Mars, and the twenty-second hour will be the beginning of the next cycle under the rule of the Sun, to which succeeds twenty-third Venus, twenty-fourth Mercury, and the first hour of the next day will be under the rule of the Moon, which will accordingly be Monday, as shown in the following tabular form, which may be extended at pleasure. The planetary hours differ from the statute hours inasmuch as they are divisions of the natural day and night. The day is counted from sunrise to sunset, and the night from sunset to the next sunrise. From sunrise to noon is the space of six planetary hours, and from noon to sunset six. Hence if the day is fourteen hours long, each planetary hour will be equal to one statute hour of sixty minutes and twenty minutes beside, making 1 hr. 20 min. of civil time.

What are referred to as Planetary Hours come from the order of the days of the week, starting with the planet that rules and names the day, following the Chaldean cycle. So, on a Sunday, the first hour is governed by the Sun, then in order follows Venus, Mercury, the Moon, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars. On a Saturday, the first hour is ruled by Saturn, followed by Jupiter, Mars, the Sun, Venus, Mercury, and the Moon. Since there are twenty-four hours in a day and seven hours in the planetary cycle, the cycle will repeat three times, making twenty-one hours, leaving three hours remaining. If we start with the Sun on Sunday and continue through the cycle during the day, we end the third cycle with Mars, and the twenty-second hour will start the next cycle ruled by the Sun, followed by Venus in the twenty-third hour, Mercury in the twenty-fourth, and the first hour of the next day, which will be ruled by the Moon, making it Monday. This is illustrated in the table below, which can be expanded as needed. The planetary hours are different from standard hours in that they divide the natural day and night. The day is measured from sunrise to sunset, and the night from sunset to the next sunrise. From sunrise to noon is six planetary hours, and from noon to sunset is another six. Therefore, if the day is fourteen hours long, each planetary hour equals one standard hour of sixty minutes plus an additional twenty minutes, totaling 1 hr. 20 min. of civil time.

The seventh hour will commence at noon and will 166last for eighty minutes, and the eighth hour will begin at 1.20 and will also last for eighty minutes. The foregoing table shows the afternoon or second quadrant of six planetary hours on the 5th of July, when the day is found to be 16 hrs. 28 min. in duration, one-half of which is 8 hrs. 14 min. One-sixth of this is 1 hr. 22 min. 20 sec., which is successively added to Noon to find the beginnings of the eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth hours. The last hour thus begins at 6.52 and ends at 8.14. The subdivisions of the hour are one-seventh of 1 hr. 22 min. 20 sec., which amounts to about 11 min. 46 sec., say 12 min. This being continually added, from noon onwards, gives the beginnings of the subdivisions of the Hour, as shown in the table. In my Kabala I have shown the practical working of these hours and Periods of the day so that there is no need to repeat the process in this place.

The seventh hour will start at noon and last for eighty minutes, and the eighth hour will begin at 1:20 and also last for eighty minutes. The table above shows the afternoon or second quadrant of six planetary hours on the 5th of July, when the day lasts for 16 hrs. 28 min.. Half of this is 8 hrs. 14 min.. One-sixth of this is 1 hr. 22 min. 20 sec., which is then added to noon to determine the start times of the eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth hours. The last hour starts at 6:52 and ends at 8:14. The subdivisions of the hour are one-seventh of 1 hr. 22 min. 20 sec., which is about 11 min. 46 sec., or roughly 12 min.. Continuously adding this from noon provides the start times for the subdivisions of the hour, as shown in the table. In my Kabala, I have detailed the practical application of these hours and periods of the day, so there's no need to repeat the process here.

Figure 18.

Figure 18.

Figure 18.

167The Kabalists and Thaumaturgists have always had recourse to the Planetary Hours for the purpose of performing their operations under specific influences, and anybody who will take the trouble to note the time of an event happening and compare it with the nature of the planet ruling in that hour will find ample reason for confirming the scheme as we have it from the ancient Hebrews. But this, perhaps, involves a more intimate knowledge of astrology than is professed by the average man.

167Kabalists and thaumaturgists have always relied on the Planetary Hours to carry out their work under certain influences. Anyone who takes the time to note when an event occurs and compares it with the characteristics of the planet that governs that hour will find plenty of reasons to support the system we inherited from the ancient Hebrews. However, this probably requires a deeper understanding of astrology than what most people have.

Figure 19.

Figure 19.

Figure 19.

It may, therefore, be of use to the student if the general significations of the planets are here given.

It might be helpful for the student to have the general meanings of the planets provided here.

The Sun signifies the father, ruler, or person in 168authority, gold, health, life, matters relating to government, preferment, honours, inaugurations and constitutions, male life generally, the daytime.

The Sun represents the father, leader, or person in 168power, wealth, health, life, issues related to government, promotions, honors, ceremonies, and laws, generally male life, and daytime.

The Moon relates to the mother, public bodies, silver, white fabrics such as linen; changes, matters relating to public affairs, women, the night, and female life generally.

The Moon is connected to motherhood, public organizations, silver, white materials like linen; transformations, issues pertaining to public matters, women, nighttime, and femininity as a whole.

Mars refers to all youths and marriageable men, fire, iron and steel, anger, strife, muscular force, cuts, burns and wounds, blood, death, things that are scarlet or red, fevers, enterprises, operations, incisions, soldiers and pioneers.

Mars represents all young people and those eligible for marriage, fire, iron and steel, anger, conflict, physical strength, cuts, burns and injuries, blood, death, things that are scarlet or red, fevers, ventures, actions, incisions, soldiers and explorers.

Mercury has reference to boys and scholars, writings, papers, short journeys, buying and selling, deeds of writing, food, clothing, furniture and personal equipment, trade, profession, speech, quotations.

Mercury refers to boys and students, writing, documents, short trips, buying and selling, writing tasks, food, clothing, furniture, and personal items, as well as trade, careers, speech, and quotes.

Jupiter has relation to affairs of justice, gain, increase, expansion; to lawyers, insurance, religion, philosophy; affairs of grandeur and display; hopes and fears, wishes, expectations, money and success.

Jupiter is connected to matters of justice, profit, growth, and expansion; to lawyers, insurance, religion, and philosophy; to matters of grandeur and show; to hopes and fears, desires, expectations, money, and success.

Venus refers to young women of a marriageable age, to engagements, births, weddings, social functions, pleasures, theatres, music, art, peace, rest and happiness.

Venus refers to young women of a marriageable age, engagements, births, weddings, social events, enjoyment, theaters, music, art, peace, relaxation, and happiness.

Saturn is related to privation, darkness, solitude, coldness, hatred, jealousy, heavy weights, gravity, soberness, gloom, doubts, difficulties, falling, loss, sickness, aged people, old associations, memories, black and sombre colours, mourning, death.

Saturn is associated with deprivation, darkness, loneliness, coldness, hatred, jealousy, burdens, gravity, seriousness, gloom, uncertainty, challenges, downfall, loss, illness, older individuals, past connections, memories, dark colors, mourning, and death.

In a word, the characteristics of a letter or event will be: In the hour of the Sun—Honours; that of 169the Moon—Changes; that of Mars—Strife; that of Mercury—Business; that of Jupiter—Gain; that of Venus—Pleasure; that of Saturn—Loss.

In short, the qualities of a letter or event will be: At the hour of the Sun—Honors; at the hour of the Moon—Changes; at the hour of Mars—Conflict; at the hour of Mercury—Business; at the hour of Jupiter—Profit; at the hour of Venus—Enjoyment; at the hour of Saturn—Loss.

It is to be observed that the use of the statute hour in connection with planetary action has arisen from the consideration of their universality, and an equatorial scheme in which the Sun rises at six o’clock approximately would thus yield a day of twelve hours, and each quadrant would embrace six hours of little more or less than sixty minutes each in duration. But the application of the statute hour to sunrise in high northern latitudes would appear to be without adequate foundation, and in effect we find that the results depending thereon are not consistent. It is these inconsistencies, arising from the introduction of new elements into the ancient scheme, and the general neglect into which the whole subject has fallen, that has given the impression that the ascriptions are fanciful and the matter not worth investigation. I know enough of the matter, however, to warrant my calling attention to these Planetary Hours as most worthy of close study by students of celestial influence.

It’s worth noting that the use of the standard hour in relation to planetary movements comes from their universal nature, and an equatorial system where the Sun rises at around six o’clock would create a twelve-hour day, with each quadrant covering about six hours, each lasting slightly more or less than sixty minutes. However, applying the standard hour to sunrise in high northern latitudes seems baseless, and we find that the results derived from this are inconsistent. These inconsistencies, resulting from new factors introduced into the ancient system and the overall neglect of the topic, have led to the impression that the attributions are whimsical and not worthy of examination. Nevertheless, I know enough about this subject to highlight that these Planetary Hours are definitely deserving of close study by those interested in celestial influence.

A considerable field of research lies open to the diligent student. It has to be finally determined, for instance, whether apparent sunrise is to be taken as the basis of the calculations or the true Sun’s centre rising. The latter is not subject to corrections for parallax, nutation, and aberration, but depends on the rising of the Sun’s longitude on the celestial horizon, the false horizon being ignored. The celestial horizon, it should be observed, is always 17090° from the Zenith. The formula for this calculation is: Log. tang. latitude of place + log. tang. Sun’s declination = log. sine of Sun’s ascensional difference. For North declination add to 90° and for South declination subtract from 90°. The result is the semiarc diurnal of the Sun, and twice this is the diurnal arc or the time the Sun remains above the horizon. Convert to time at the rate of four minutes for every degree and four seconds for every minute of arc.

A significant area of research is available for the dedicated student. It needs to be clearly established, for example, whether the apparent sunrise should be the basis for calculations or the actual center of the Sun rising. The latter does not require adjustments for parallax, nutation, and aberration, but relies on the rising of the Sun’s longitude on the celestial horizon, ignoring the false horizon. It's important to note that the celestial horizon is always 90° from the zenith. The formula for this calculation is: Log. tan. latitude of the location + log. tan. Sun’s declination = log. sine of the Sun’s ascensional difference. For northern declination, add to 90°, and for southern declination, subtract from 90°. The result gives the semiarc diurnal of the Sun, and doubling this gives the diurnal arc or the time the Sun stays above the horizon. Convert to time at the rate of four minutes for every degree and four seconds for every minute of arc.

We have then to determine whether sunrise is the correct starting point, or whether it should not be noon, as in agreement with the original Chaldean conception of the division of the circle into “evening” and “morning.”

We need to figure out if sunrise is the right starting point, or if it should actually be noon, which aligns with the original Chaldean idea of dividing the circle into “evening” and “morning.”

I may say that in my experience the count should be made from sunrise, that the true Sun’s centre rising should be taken, and that the Chaldean order of the Hours should be preserved. I have also found that the subdivisions play quite a minor part in the determination of results, and that all events falling within the limits of the Planetary Hour should be found subject to the ruler of that Hour, and only in a subsidiary degree to the ruler of the subdivision of the Hour. I may now pass to a consideration of another aspect of this interesting subject.

I can say that in my experience, the count should start at sunrise, taking the true center of the Sun rising, and that we should stick to the Chaldean order of the Hours. I've also noticed that the subdivisions play a lesser role in determining outcomes, and that all events occurring within the boundaries of the Planetary Hour are primarily influenced by the ruler of that Hour, with only a secondary influence from the ruler of the Hour's subdivision. Now, I can move on to discuss another aspect of this fascinating topic.

171

CHAPTER XVII
CELESTIAL MAGNETIC POLARITIES

It has already been shown by one of our Kabalas that there is a certain polarity existing between the planets of the system by which they become natural antitheses and thus stand in certain relations of polarity. Hence it is that the numbers attaching to them are interchangeable. Thus it was shown that Mars and the Moon, the one having its exaltation sign in Capricorn and the other its rulership in Cancer, the opposite sign, were numerical resolvants. Also that Mercury, having its exaltation sign in Aquarius, was resolved into terms of the Sun, whose rulership is vested in the opposite sign Leo. Further, that the Moon, having its exaltation in the sign Taurus, was interchangeable with Mars, whose sign is Scorpio, in opposition to Taurus.

It has already been demonstrated by one of our Kabalas that there is a certain polarity among the planets in the system, making them natural opposites and determining their specific relationships of polarity. As a result, the numbers associated with them can be interchanged. It was shown that Mars and the Moon, one having its exaltation sign in Capricorn and the other having its rulership in Cancer, the opposite sign, were numerical equivalents. Additionally, Mercury, having its exaltation sign in Aquarius, can be expressed in terms of the Sun, whose rulership is in the opposite sign Leo. Furthermore, the Moon, which is exalted in the sign Taurus, can be interchanged with Mars, whose sign is Scorpio, which is opposite Taurus.

The scheme of Planetary Hours involved the whole of this question of Planetary Numbers, and it was shown that the matter was open to considerable controversy, necessitating prolonged observation and research.

The concept of Planetary Hours encompassed the entire issue of Planetary Numbers, and it was demonstrated that this topic was subject to significant debate, requiring extensive observation and study.

There is another point in connection with the interchange of Planetary Numbers which requires consideration. It is that of polarity. Astrologers 172everywhere recognize the fact that the signs of the zodiac are alternately active and passive, or positive and negative, male and female, and the Houses or twelve divisions of the visible heavens are said to have the same polarity as the signs with which they are associated, as Aries with the 1st House, Taurus with the 2nd House, and so on.

There’s another aspect regarding the exchange of Planetary Numbers that needs to be considered. It’s about polarity. Astrologers 172 universally acknowledge that the zodiac signs are alternately active and passive, or positive and negative, male and female. The Houses, or the twelve divisions of the visible sky, are said to share the same polarity as the signs they correspond with, like Aries with the 1st House, Taurus with the 2nd House, and so on.

Now, at a mean rate of motion, which is attained at the equinoxes, the apparent transit of the Sun through the Houses or divisions of the Prime Vertical is at the rate of 30°, or the space of one House in two hours. Therefore, if the Houses are to be regarded as having the same polarity as the signs they are associated with, then the first 30° of the Sun’s diurnal arc will be negative in action and the next positive, and so on alternately. But it has already been empirically proved that the quadrant from sunrise to noon is positive, that from noon to sunset negative, from sunset to midnight positive, and from midnight to sunrise negative.

Now, at an average speed, which is reached during the equinoxes, the Sun appears to move through the Houses or sections of the Prime Vertical at a rate of 30°, or one House every two hours. Therefore, if we consider the Houses to have the same polarity as the signs they correspond with, the first 30° of the Sun’s daily path will have a negative influence, the next will be positive, and this pattern will continue alternately. However, it has already been observed that the time from sunrise to noon is positive, from noon to sunset is negative, from sunset to midnight is positive, and from midnight to sunrise is negative.

For a demonstration of this principle I refer my readers to “The Law of Sex” developed in my Manual of Astrology. This law requires that the majority of influence exerted from the S.E. quarter of the heavens, which extends from the Sun’s rising to its culmination, shall be positive and tending to male generation, while that from the S.W. quarter shall be negative and tending to female generation.

For a demonstration of this principle, I direct my readers to “The Law of Sex” discussed in my Manual of Astrology. This law states that most of the influence coming from the S.E. part of the sky, which stretches from the sunrise to the highest point of the Sun, should be positive and promote male generation, while that from the S.W. section should be negative and promote female generation.

But it can also be shown that the Planetary Hours, each of which occupies the time of the Sun’s passage through one-half of a House, or 15°, are 173alternately positive and negative. We then derive the following useful diagram of the

But it can also be demonstrated that the Planetary Hours, each of which represents the time it takes for the Sun to move through half a House, or 15°, are 173alternately positive and negative. We then derive the following useful diagram of the

Figure 20. Polarity of the Houses.

Figure 20. Polarity of the Houses.

Figure 20. Polarity of the Houses.

In this diagram the inner circle shows the polarity of the Houses, whether positive or negative, the next circle outward shows the polarity of the Hours, and the outside circle shows that of the Quadrants, which is summative of the Houses and Hours.

In this diagram, the inner circle indicates the polarity of the Houses, whether positive or negative. The next circle outward represents the polarity of the Hours, and the outer circle displays that of the Quadrants, which summarizes the Houses and Hours.

Applying this to the subject of planetary action, it will be seen that a planet occupying the S.E. quadrant of the heavens will exert a positive influence, but that its influence will be largely negatived when it occupies the second half of the 11th House in the course of its rising, and similarly, that a planet in the S.W. quadrant will exercise a negative influence, which will be rendered more positive when the planet comes to the first half of the 8th House in the course of its setting. The fact that male horoscopes are generated from the S.E. and N.W. 174quadrants and female from the S.W. and N.E., goes to show that these ascriptions are valid, and when we further consider that human vitality is lowest at the two points that are occupied by the negative influence, and highest at those that are here shown to be positive, should, in my opinion, go a long way towards establishing this order in our astrological scheme of things.

Applying this to the topic of planetary action, you can see that a planet in the S.E. quadrant of the sky will have a positive influence, but its effect will mostly be weakened when it occupies the second half of the 11th House while rising. Similarly, a planet in the S.W. quadrant will have a negative influence, which will become more positive as it moves to the first half of the 8th House during its setting. The fact that male horoscopes are created from the S.E. and N.W. quadrants while female horoscopes come from the S.W. and N.E. quadrants indicates that these associations are valid. Additionally, considering that human vitality is lowest when in the two positions dominated by negative influence and highest in the ones associated with positive influence, should, in my opinion, significantly support this order in our astrological framework.

Now, if we consider the whole earth to be surrounded with etheric vibrations and interpenetrated by them, we may also legitimately refer these vibrations to colours and sounds since all the forces of Nature are interchangeable and convertible. Such a conception lends itself at once to experimental proof, and, as the result of researches carried on during successive years by Carl von Reichenbach, we have a definite scheme of colour attributable to the different sections of the heavens. It is shown that there is a form of electricity visible to persons of a highly sensitive nature when placed in the dark. In The Sensitive Man Reichenbach has given a mass of experiments which show that the Od fluid undergoes a variety of changes according to the magnetic relations of the subject or object from which they proceed. In the second volume there is a description of the Earth-Aura. This is not, as one might suppose, a composite of the various auras of its geological constituents, but a thing apart and independent of human, animal, vegetable and other emanations. Every body has its own aura, and these blend upon contact or within auric distance, producing changes in the magnetic relations of the 175bodies concerned. The human aura is like that of the crystal and has an obvious polarity. Thus the auric colour at the head is blue while that at the feet is dark red; the right side is grey-blue and the left side yellow. Now this answers exactly to the polarity of the visible heavens, for it is observed that Blue, the most magnetic colour, is associated with the North or midnight point; Red, the most electric, with the South and mid-day; the neutral to the East and the dawn; and the Yellow to the West and sunset.

Now, if we think about the whole Earth being surrounded by etheric vibrations that also penetrate it, we can reasonably connect these vibrations to colors and sounds, since all natural forces can be interchanged and transformed. This idea is easily testable, and as a result of years of research by Carl von Reichenbach, we have a clear color scheme linked to different parts of the sky. It's shown that there is a form of electricity that's visible to highly sensitive individuals when they are in the dark. In The Sensitive Man, Reichenbach presents numerous experiments demonstrating that the Od fluid changes depending on the magnetic relationship of the person or object it comes from. In the second volume, there is a description of the Earth-Aura. This isn't, as one might think, a mix of the different auras from its geological components, but something distinct and separate from the emissions of humans, animals, plants, and others. Each body has its own aura, and these blend when they touch or are within auric distance, causing changes in the magnetic relationships of the bodies involved. The human aura resembles that of a crystal and has a clear polarity. For instance, the auric color at the head is blue while at the feet it's dark red; the right side is grey-blue and the left side is yellow. This aligns perfectly with the polarity of the visible heavens, as it's noted that Blue, the most magnetic color, is linked to the North or midnight point; Red, the most electric, with the South and noon; the neutral with the East and dawn; and Yellow with the West and sunset.

When the body is laid horizontally, with the head to the North, the colours were seen at their greatest brilliancy, passing from blue at the head through blue green to dark green, light green and yellow, golden yellow, and orange to deep red at the feet. But the most remarkable effect is that if the body be gradually revolved so as to pass through the successive points of the compass, a series of remarkable changes take place in the colours of the aura, and the original colours are no longer seen, but the blue at the head undergoes successive changes by the admixture of other colours according to the angle of deflection, and in effect we have the—

When the body is lying flat, with the head facing North, the colors appear at their brightest, shifting from blue at the head through blue-green to dark green, light green, yellow, golden yellow, and orange, ending with deep red at the feet. However, the most striking effect occurs when the body is slowly turned to face different points of the compass. A series of impressive changes happen in the colors of the aura, and the original colors are no longer visible. Instead, the blue at the head goes through various changes as it mixes with other colors depending on the angle of rotation, resulting in the—

Colours of the Twelve Houses.

Colors of the Twelve Houses.

1st, Grey; 2nd, Blue-grey; 3rd, Blue with red rays, Violet; 4th, Blue; 5th, Dark Green; 6th, Light Green; 7th, Yellow; 8th, Golden; 9th, Orange; 10th, Red; 11th, Violet-red, Purple; 12th, Grey-red or dull Red.

1st, Grey; 2nd, Blue-grey; 3rd, Blue with red rays, Violet; 4th, Blue; 5th, Dark Green; 6th, Light Green; 7th, Yellow; 8th, Golden; 9th, Orange; 10th, Red; 11th, Violet-red, Purple; 12th, Grey-red or dull Red.

176Now the presence of a planet or of a group of stars, such as enter into the composition of a constellation, may reasonably be held to effect some magnetic change in the radical nature of the vibrations emanating from that quarter. The planets are found to exert an influence on the magnetic needle, and both Venus and Jupiter, as affecting the earth in its orbit, may be regarded as instances of the interplay of cosmical factors. The medium by which the magnetic needle is affected by these planets is doubtless the magnetic aura of the earth.

176Now, the presence of a planet or a group of stars, like those that make up a constellation, can reasonably be thought to cause some magnetic change in the basic nature of the vibrations coming from that direction. The planets are known to influence the magnetic needle, and both Venus and Jupiter, as they interact with the earth in its orbit, can be seen as examples of the interaction of cosmic factors. The medium through which the magnetic needle is affected by these planets is certainly the earth's magnetic aura.

The planets could, indeed, affect us through their light rays if by no other means, for experiments have shown that by directing the rays of Jupiter and some of the fixed stars through a telescope on to a selenium screen at a distance of ten feet, the comparative effect was, of a candle light 1, of Procyon 0·261, of Cygnus O·262, of Aldebaran O·279, of Orion O·685 and of Jupiter 3·272!

The planets can definitely influence us through their light rays, if nothing else, because experiments have demonstrated that by focusing the rays of Jupiter and some fixed stars with a telescope onto a selenium screen from ten feet away, the comparative effects were: a candle light 1, Procyon 0.261, Cygnus 0.262, Aldebaran 0.279, Orion 0.685, and Jupiter 3.272!

Astrologically we are able to distinguish the psychically gifted by the presence of the planets in the lower meridian, but especially Sun and Mercury, Saturn and the Moon. This answers to the point of magnetic intensity at the maximum which is registered about midnight, and this observation leads to the conclusion that the planets do not of necessity influence us by their direct rays, but by the changes that they cause in the earth’s magnetic aura at various points in the circle of the visible heavens. Primarily the Sun must be the cause of the normal magnetic aura of the earth, and the planets would in this sense be moderators, which is 177the old name applied to them by Ptolemy. Thus the presence of several planets or the luminaries in the lower meridian at the time of a person’s birth will render that person particularly negative or sensitive to the changes taking place in the auric consensus of environment, and those who are in the habit of classifying and collating horoscopes will have abundant proof at hand that this is the case. On the other hand, we find extremely positive people to be produced by the presence of planets in the 10th House, near the South Meridian, and especially such as have Mars (colour, red) reinforcing the natural auric colour of that part of the heavens. Two examples come readily to my mind, that of Kaiser Wilhelm, in whose horoscope both Neptune and Mars are in the Mid-heaven, and that of the late William T. Stead, in whose horoscope Mars and Uranus are close to the Mid-heaven.

Astrologically, we can identify psychically gifted individuals by the location of certain planets in the lower meridian, particularly the Sun, Mercury, Saturn, and the Moon. This corresponds to the peak of magnetic intensity, which occurs around midnight. From this observation, we can conclude that planets don't necessarily influence us solely through their direct rays, but through the changes they create in the Earth's magnetic field at different points in the visible sky. The Sun primarily generates the Earth’s normal magnetic field, while the planets can act as modifiers, a term used by Ptolemy. Therefore, when several planets or luminaries are in the lower meridian at a person's birth, that individual tends to be more negative or sensitive to environmental shifts in the collective energy. Those who analyze horoscopes will find plenty of evidence supporting this notion. Conversely, we see that strongly positive personalities often arise from planets positioned in the 10th House near the South Meridian, especially when Mars (red in color) enhances the natural energy of that area of the sky. Two examples that come to mind are Kaiser Wilhelm, whose horoscope features both Neptune and Mars in the Mid-heaven, and the late William T. Stead, whose horoscope shows Mars and Uranus close to the Mid-heaven.

In effect we have the earth as the centre of a vast kaleidoscope, undergoing changes of colour from hour to hour by reason of the Sun’s passage from one rising to the next. Obviously there can be no universal red or blue since the Mid-heaven of one place is the horizon of another that is 90° East or West of it. Consequently there must be some factor that produces local colouring, which at the zenith produces vibrations which manifest as red and at the nadir as blue. This factor must be the Sun, since it is the only cosmic factor that has a constant relation to any part of the earth at the same hour each day. The planets in their courses will then intervene to bring about modifications of 178the colours or vibrations instituted by the Sun, and of these the Moon, as the quickest moving in its orbit, will be the chief. Mercury will come next, and then Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, so that in effect we have the Chaldean order of interpretation once more.

Essentially, we have the Earth at the center of a huge kaleidoscope, changing colors from hour to hour because of the Sun's movement from one rise to the next. Clearly, there can't be a universal red or blue since the zenith of one location is the horizon of another that is 90° East or West of it. Therefore, there must be some factor that creates local coloring, which at the zenith produces vibrations appearing as red and at the nadir as blue. This factor must be the Sun, as it is the only cosmic element that maintains a consistent relationship with any part of the Earth at the same hour each day. The planets in their paths will then intervene to modify the colors or vibrations initiated by the Sun, with the Moon, being the fastest in its orbit, playing the main role. Mercury follows, then Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn, which effectively brings us back to the Chaldean order of interpretation once again. 178

The question then arises as to whether that part of the earth’s aura where the Sun is at any moment should not always be taken as the positive maximum answering to noon and the colour red. If so, then it follows that the time of birth becomes a very important factor in the constitution of what may be called the magnetic constitution of a person. The whole subject is full of suggestions of the utmost significance, but hardly at this date in a condition to admit of dogmatic statement. The subject is therefore better left for future consideration.

The question then comes up about whether the part of the Earth's aura where the Sun is at any moment should always be viewed as the positive maximum corresponding to noon and the color red. If that’s the case, then the time of birth becomes a crucial factor in what we might refer to as a person's magnetic constitution. The entire topic is full of meaningful suggestions, but it's not really in a place to provide definitive statements at this time. Therefore, it's better to leave this subject for future exploration.

179

CHAPTER XVIII
VULCAN THE CHAIN MAKER

There is an aspect of Mars which has an interest for us as prisoners in this house of flesh. Vulcan or Hephæstus, son of Jupiter and Juno, is the artificer of human bonds. By some he is thought to be allied to Pluto, the god of the Infernos, and in the Kabalistic conception, Malcuth, or the Earth, is the lowest of the heavens and the highest of the hells, being in fact in a state of equilibrium between the Superior and Inferior worlds and therefore, as Swedenborg suggests, it is in a state of freedom from that circumstance. But can so much be said of those that dwell therein? I doubt it. The Oriental doctrine of Samsara pictures man as a mere “Butterfly on the Wheel,” bound by the chains of his own desires to the wheel of cyclic rebirth into a world of suffering.

There’s a side of Mars that interests us as people trapped in these bodies. Vulcan or Hephaestus, the son of Jupiter and Juno, is the creator of human connections. Some believe he is linked to Pluto, the god of the underworld, and in Kabalistic thought, Malcuth, or the Earth, is the lowest of the heavens and the highest of the hells, actually maintaining a balance between the higher and lower worlds. Thus, as Swedenborg suggests, it exists in a state of freedom from that situation. But can we say the same about those who live here? I doubt it. The Eastern idea of Samsara depicts humanity as just a “Butterfly on the Wheel,” trapped by the chains of its own desires to the wheel of endless rebirth into a world filled with suffering.

“Ye suffer from yourselves, none else compels,
None other holds you that ye lag and stay,
And whirl upon the wheel, and hug and kiss
Its spokes of agony, its tyre of tears,
Its nave of nothingness!”

The law of moral causation, as well as that of affinity, impels man to rebirth while there are any unexhausted desires in him. These unexhausted tendencies are called skandhas. It does not matter 180what we call them, we are all conscious of their existence and of the terrible strife they cause in us. These desires are in the Adamic nature, they are in the human blood, and Mars is their cosmic symbol. They are the chains of Vulcan.

The law of moral causation, as well as that of affinity, drives people to be reborn as long as there are any unfulfilled desires within them. These unfulfilled tendencies are called skandhas. It doesn’t really matter what we call them; we all recognize their existence and the intense conflict they create within us. These desires are part of our fundamental nature, they are in our very being, and Mars represents them in the cosmos. They are the chains of Vulcan.

The number of Mars is nine and the magic of the number nine haunts us from our birth to the very last day of our existence in this world. In the Kabala of Numbers I have shown the connection between the Adamic race and the number nine. This is the Iron Age, the Kali Yuga, and the horoscope of the world shows the sign Aries, ruled by Mars, in the ascendant. In the age of Saturn men sought virtue and distinction in obscurity. Now there is but one way to recognition and success, Force and Self-assertion. Let those take it who will. What is said of those who willingly take to the sword may be applied to the slaves of every other form of human passion. Mars will lay them by the heel and bring them back to retribution.

The number associated with Mars is nine, and the power of this number follows us from the moment we are born until the very end of our lives. In the Kabala of Numbers, I have explained how the Adamic race connects to the number nine. This is the Iron Age, the Kali Yuga, and the world’s horoscope shows the sign Aries, ruled by Mars, in the ascendant. In the age of Saturn, people sought virtue and distinction in anonymity. Now, there’s only one path to recognition and success: Force and Self-assertion. Let those who wish to follow it do so. What is said about those who willingly pick up the sword can also apply to the followers of any other human passion. Mars will bring them to their knees and ensure they face consequences.

The cycle of nine is at the root of almost all the mysteries of human life. It crops up in all the astronomical cycles as if it were at the root of them, and as representing cosmic energy (Fohat) and the human will (Ichcha) it manifests in all purpose and all action, cosmical and human. For Mars (nine) is desire (kama) and desire is that which underlies both will and action.

The cycle of nine is at the heart of nearly all the mysteries of human existence. It appears in all the astronomical cycles, as if it were fundamental to them, representing cosmic energy (Fohat) and human will (Ichcha). It shows up in every purpose and every action, both cosmic and human. Mars (nine) symbolizes desire (kama), and desire is the foundation of both will and action.

There is a period of cosmic activity which runs in a nine-year cycle. It has even been shown that meteorology cannot shake free of it. The year 1893 was a year of drought, rain being unknown 181from April to October of that year, and the summer was exceptionally hot. The same may be said of 1902 and 1911, which are years falling in the nine-year cycle. But 1894, 1903 and 1912 were wet summers, and the temperature also abnormally low. Dr. Goad, who studied meteorology from the same standpoint of cosmic interplay, considered that Mars was of chief importance in weather predictions. Some people appear to think that the icebergs on which the Titanic foundered are responsible for the wet summer of 1912. I dare venture the opinion that it was something many degrees warmer than an iceberg. That icebergs in the temperate zone have a tendency to condense the air and so to produce rain seems reasonable, but who loosed the chains that bind the icebergs to the poles. Undoubtedly it was our Vulcan.

There’s a period of cosmic activity that follows a nine-year cycle. It’s even been shown that weather patterns can’t escape its influence. The year 1893 was a drought year, with no rain from April to October, and the summer was extremely hot. The same can be said for 1902 and 1911, which also fall within the nine-year cycle. However, 1894, 1903, and 1912 had wet summers, and the temperatures were unusually low. Dr. Goad, who studied weather patterns from the perspective of cosmic interactions, believed Mars played a major role in weather forecasts. Some believe that the icebergs that the Titanic sank into caused the wet summer of 1912. I would suggest it was something much warmer than an iceberg. It seems plausible that icebergs in the temperate zone tend to condense the air and produce rain, but who released the chains that tie the icebergs to the poles? It was undoubtedly our Vulcan. 181

In a scheme of thought that regards the whole world as a symbol, and that is the standpoint we are taking in this study of the cosmos, planets are not necessarily causative but they are necessarily symbolic. The symbol of humanity is the number Nine, and this is the number of the planet Mars. Hence we may say that for the present and during the whole course of this age of the world’s evolution or unfoldment, we are under the dominion of Mars. The sooner we get into wireless communication with him and understand some of his ways the better it will be for us. For he is not only the maker of chains but the breaker of them, inasmuch as he represents both the Desire that fashions them and the Will that looses them.

In a mindset that views the entire world as a symbol, which is the perspective we're adopting in this study of the cosmos, planets may not directly cause events, but they are definitely symbolic. The symbol for humanity is the number Nine, which corresponds to the planet Mars. Therefore, we can say that for now and throughout this entire period of the world's evolution, we are influenced by Mars. The sooner we establish a connection with him and grasp some of his ways, the better it will be for us. He is not only the creator of chains but also their liberator, as he embodies both the Desire that shapes them and the Will that frees them.

182Nine is also the cosmic factor. We have already seen that the precession of the equinoxes is at the rate of 1° in seventy-two years, and 30° or one sign in 2,160 years, the whole circle being completed in 25,920 years. All these numbers are multiples of nine. Twice nine gives us the solar cycle, three times nine the number of the asterisms, in six times nine years the eclipses move through one sign of the zodiac, and in 648 through the entire circle. But this is nine times seventy-two, and so we find ourselves again and again enmeshed by the network of a nonal necessity. As the Old Philosopher truly says: “Heaven’s net has large meshes, yet nothing escapes it!”

182 Nine is also the cosmic factor. We have already seen that the precession of the equinoxes happens at a rate of 1° every seventy-two years, and 30° or one sign in 2,160 years, with the entire circle completed in 25,920 years. All these numbers are multiples of nine. Two times nine gives us the solar cycle, three times nine corresponds to the number of the constellations, in six times nine years the eclipses move through one sign of the zodiac, and in 648 years they cover the whole circle. This is nine times seventy-two, so we continually find ourselves caught in the web of a nonal necessity. As the Old Philosopher wisely says: “Heaven’s net has large meshes, yet nothing escapes it!”

Applying this magic of the number nine to some of the deeper problems of human experience, we may profitably examine the symbolism of the asterisms, which are twenty-seven in number, or three nines. The Hindus have a period which they regard as the sum of life, extending to 108 years, which is twelve times nine. From this we may draw the conclusion that the Moon remains in one sign for nine years and that this sign reflects nine others. The system is connected with the Ashtottaradasha system to which reference has already been made, and of course, with the navamshas or ninefold divisions of the signs of the zodiac.

Applying the magic of the number nine to some of the deeper issues of human experience, we can effectively look at the symbolism of the asterisms, which total twenty-seven, or three times nine. The Hindus have a lifespan they consider to be 108 years, which is twelve times nine. From this, we can conclude that the Moon stays in one sign for nine years and that this sign reflects nine others. This system is related to the Ashtottaradasha system previously mentioned, and of course, to the navamshas or the ninefold divisions of the zodiac signs.

We have already seen that the ninth part of a sign of 30° is 3° 20´, and that each such part corresponds to a particular sign of the zodiac. This may be seen in the Navamsha Table already given.

We have already seen that the ninth part of a sign of 30° is 3° 20', and that each part corresponds to a specific sign of the zodiac. This can be seen in the Navamsha Table provided earlier.

Let us suppose, for instance, that the Moon was 183in the sign Leo 22° 43´ at the birth of a person. By our Table it is seen that this corresponds with the sign Libra, which navamsha extends from 20° 0´ to 23° 20´ of the sign Leo. Then in order to find at what age Libra navamsha expires we say—

Let’s say, for example, that the Moon was 183in the sign Leo at 22° 43´ when a person was born. According to our Table, this aligns with the sign Libra, which the navamsha covers from 20° 0´ to 23° 20´ of the sign Leo. To determine the age at which the Libra navamsha ends, we say—

As 3° 20´ is to twelve months so is (23° 20´-22° 43´) 37´ to the answer. Now 3° 20´ is equal to 200´, so that if we multiply 37´ by twelve and divide by 200, we shall have the months required, namely, 2·22 months or two months seven days nearly. Therefore we know that the Moon is under the influence of Venus during the first two months of the life, and from Libra it passes to Scorpio, when it comes under the influence of Mars, and then to Sagittarius navamsha, where it is under the influence of Jupiter. With this navamsha the limits of the sign are reached, and the Moon in passing into the sign Virgo comes first under the navamsha of Capricorn which is ruled by Saturn, and from Capricorn it goes into Aquarius navamsha and is still under the influence of Saturn. And each navamsha is one year, so that we know that the period from two years and two months to four years two months is evil, for Saturn is privation, loss, darkness and death, and by the cyclic order of things this will recur every twelve years, since nine goes into 108 twelve times. Now it is a fact that in the case cited the cyclic recurrence of this influence of Saturn brought about at four years the death of the father, at fifteen the death of the grandfather, at twenty-seven the death of the mother, at thirty-nine 184the loss of all property. Similarly by this system of the cycle of nine twelves, at the Moon’s occursion into the navamsha of Cancer, which is the lunar influence disposing to changes, and which occurred at 8, 20, 32, and 44, there were radical changes in life and surroundings.

As 3° 20' is to twelve months, so is (23° 20' - 22° 43') 37' to the answer. Now, 3° 20' equals 200', so if we multiply 37' by twelve and divide by 200, we get the months needed, which is 2.22 months or roughly two months and seven days. This means that the Moon is influenced by Venus during the first two months of life, and from Libra, it moves to Scorpio, where it comes under the influence of Mars, and then to Sagittarius navamsha, where it is influenced by Jupiter. With this navamsha, we reach the limits of the sign; when the Moon enters Virgo, it first falls under the navamsha of Capricorn, ruled by Saturn. After Capricorn, it enters Aquarius navamsha and remains under Saturn's influence. Each navamsha is one year, indicating that the period from two years and two months to four years and two months is negative, as Saturn represents loss, deprivation, darkness, and death. According to this cyclical pattern, this will happen every twelve years, since nine goes into 108 twelve times. In the case mentioned, the recurring influence of Saturn resulted in the father's death at four years, the grandfather's death at fifteen, the mother's death at twenty-seven, and the loss of all property at thirty-nine. Similarly, using this nine-twelve cycle system, during the Moon’s transit into the navamsha of Cancer—which is linked to changes—radical shifts occurred in life and surroundings at ages 8, 20, 32, and 44.

Any case can be worked out with perfect ease from the Table of Navamshas, and will serve to show that there is a veritable law of periodicity at work in the lives of men. Not that all events or periods recur at the end of twelve years as might be thought by the impatient student from the examples here given. On the contrary, it will be seen upon closer study that Jupiter has a period of three years, followed by one of nine years; Mars, one of five years, followed by one of seven; Venus one of seven, followed by one of five; Mercury one of nine years, followed by one of three; and so on. But all the planets recur eighteen times in the course of the cycle of 108 years, and the Sun and Moon nine times each. Then as there are five planets, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus and Mercury, they will amount in all their periods to ninety years, and the Sun and Moon will amount together to eighteen years, thus making the complete cycle.

Any case can be easily analyzed using the Table of Navamshas, and it will demonstrate that there is a real law of periodicity influencing people's lives. It's important to note that not all events or periods happen every twelve years, as an impatient student might assume from the examples provided. Instead, a closer look reveals that Jupiter has a three-year cycle, followed by a nine-year one; Mars has a five-year cycle, followed by a seven-year one; Venus has a seven-year cycle, followed by a five-year one; Mercury has a nine-year cycle, followed by a three-year one; and so on. However, all the planets go through their cycles eighteen times over the 108-year cycle, while the Sun and Moon each complete their cycles nine times. Since there are five planets—Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus, and Mercury—the total of their cycles adds up to ninety years, while the Sun and Moon together account for eighteen years, completing the full cycle.

In the Brihat-Paras’arahora there are many systems of planetary cycles, employing the same factors variously, and all of them symbolically, since they do not depend on the true motions of the planets in their orbits. Indeed, the ancient writers appear to have devoted themselves very closely to the interpretation of cosmic symbology, 185and there are grounds which lead me to think that some of their famous Nadigranthams or Books of Destiny are built up entirely on a symbolical basis.

In the Brihat-Paras’arahora, there are many systems of planetary cycles that use the same factors in different ways, and all of them symbolically, since they don’t rely on the actual movements of the planets in their orbits. It seems that the ancient writers focused intently on interpreting cosmic symbols, 185 and I have reasons to believe that some of their well-known Nadigranthams or Books of Destiny are entirely based on symbolism.

One of the most famous of these is the S’ukranadi in which the horoscopes are written out for every 6´ of the ecliptic rising, making some 21,600 different delineations. But in addition to this there are purva and uttara, or first half and latter half, subdivisions of each of the periods dealt with. The planets are distributed after a certain order beginning with the ruler of the rising sign, and this order differs according to the consideration whether the sign is cardinal, fixed or mutable.

One of the most well-known examples of this is the S’ukranadi, where horoscopes are created for every 6° of the ecliptic rising, resulting in about 21,600 different delineations. Additionally, there are purva and uttara, or first half and latter half, subdivisions for each of the periods addressed. The planets are arranged in a specific order starting with the ruler of the rising sign, and this order changes depending on whether the sign is cardinal, fixed, or mutable.

By this means a complete interpretation of the permutations of the cosmical kaleidoscope is effected, and from various of the readings that have been submitted to me I am persuaded that there is without doubt a great deal of truth in them. One such grantham applies to all those who, whether European or Hindu, were born between the Vindhyas and the Himavats, but unfortunately, having other engagements of a karmic nature, I find myself among the large number whose horoscopes are not contained in the kadjan. These monumental works have hardly received the attention they deserve and I am therefore collecting information with a view to their analysis and study.

Through this, a full understanding of the combinations of the cosmic kaleidoscope is achieved, and from various readings that have been provided to me, I'm convinced that there is definitely a lot of truth in them. One such interpretation applies to all those who, whether European or Hindu, were born between the Vindhyas and the Himavats. Unfortunately, due to other karmic commitments, I find myself among the many whose horoscopes are not included in the kadjan. These significant works have hardly gotten the attention they deserve, so I’m gathering information to analyze and study them.

Another very important subdivision of the ecliptic circle is that of the Das’amsha or tenfold division of the sign into amshas of 3° each. Applied to the twelve signs we have as a result 120 divisions in the circle, answering to the Vimshottaradasha system 186of Planetary periods, notice of which has already been made. In this system the amshas do not run consecutively in the order of the signs of the zodiac through the various signs, but follow the order of the triplicities, known as the four “Elements,” Fire, Earth, Air, Water.

Another very important subdivision of the ecliptic circle is the Das’amsha, or tenfold division of the sign into amshas of 3° each. When applied to the twelve signs, this results in 120 divisions in the circle, corresponding to the Vimshottaradasha system of planetary periods, which has already been mentioned. In this system, the amshas don’t follow the order of the zodiac signs but instead follow the order of the triplicities known as the four “Elements”: Fire, Earth, Air, and Water. 186

Thus the Fiery Triplicity comprises Aries, Leo and Sagittarius. The Das’amshas begin with Aries, and the first 3° or amsha of Aries is ruled by Aries, the first of Taurus by Leo, and the first of Gemini by Sagittarius. The first amsha of Cancer is ruled by Taurus, the first of Leo by Virgo, and the first of Virgo by Capricorn, these being the Earthy Triplicity. The first amshas of Libra, Scorpio and Sagittarius are ruled by Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, these being of the Airy Triplicity, and the first amshas of Capricorn, Aquarius and Pisces are ruled by the Watery Triplicity comprising the signs Cancer, Scorpio and Pisces. The second amshas of Aries, Taurus and Gemini are ruled by the Earthy Triplicity, the third by the Airy and the fourth by the Watery, the triplicities then recurring again in their order. A study of the following Table of Das’amshas will make the arrangement quite clear.

Thus the Fiery Triplicity includes Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius. The Das’amshas start with Aries, and the first 3° or amsha of Aries is ruled by Aries, the first of Taurus by Leo, and the first of Gemini by Sagittarius. The first amsha of Cancer is ruled by Taurus, the first of Leo by Virgo, and the first of Virgo by Capricorn, which make up the Earthy Triplicity. The first amshas of Libra, Scorpio, and Sagittarius are ruled by Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, forming the Airy Triplicity, while the first amshas of Capricorn, Aquarius, and Pisces are ruled by the Watery Triplicity, consisting of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces. The second amshas of Aries, Taurus, and Gemini are ruled by the Earthy Triplicity, the third by the Airy, and the fourth by the Watery, and the triplicities repeat in that order. A look at the following Table of Das’amshas will clarify the arrangement.

The twelve signs of the zodiac which occupy the first column are seen to be divided into four groups answering to the four “Elements,” and the first divisions of these groups are occupied by the four Triplicities. These serve as entries or indices, and from them the signs run on in their natural order.

The twelve zodiac signs in the first column are grouped into four categories that correspond to the four “Elements,” and the first divisions of these groups are filled by the four Triplicities. These act as entries or indicators, and from them, the signs follow in their natural order.

Those who uphold the Vimshottaradasha system, in which the circle is divided into 120 parts answering 187to 120 years of life, will find their interpretations from the occursions of the Moon into these amshas, each of which answers to one year of life. Thus the Moon remains in one sign for ten years, during which it successively passes through ten sub-signs or amshas, reflecting the nature of the planets governing those amshas. It then passes into the next sign and takes up ten influences successively, and so passes to the next sign. Thus in one complete circle of the zodiac it will take up 120 different influences exerted by the several planets in the various signs.

Those who follow the Vimshottaradasha system, where the circle is divided into 120 parts corresponding to 120 years of life, will find their interpretations based on the Moon's movements through these parts, each representing one year of life. The Moon stays in one sign for ten years, during which it moves through ten sub-signs or parts, reflecting the characteristics of the planets that rule those parts. It then shifts to the next sign and adopts ten influences in succession, continuing this pattern as it moves to the next sign. In a complete cycle of the zodiac, it will take on 120 different influences from the various planets across the signs.

Figure 21. Table of Das’amshas.

Figure 21. Table of Das’amshas.

Figure 21. Das’amsha Table.

But each das’amsha or division of 3° is reflected in an entire sign. Therefore each degree embraces 10° of the reflected sign. Thus the first 3° of the sign Aries correspond with the whole of the asterism Aries, using that term for purposes of distinction only, and each of these 3° will therefore correspond 188with 10° of the asterism, and every 6´ will correspond with 1°. Thus, if we take the first 3° of the sign Aries, we shall find that they correspond with the 30° of the asterism Aries, and the next 3° of the sign with the whole of the asterism Taurus, and so on. Here are the first 3° of the sign Aries reflected in the asterism Aries—

But each das’amsha or division of 3° is mirrored in an entire sign. So, each degree covers 10° of the mirrored sign. Therefore, the first 3° of the sign Aries match the entirety of the asterism Aries, using that term just for clarity, and each of these 3° will correspond to 10° of the asterism, and every 6' will correspond to 1°. So, if we take the first 3° of the sign Aries, we will see that they correspond to the 30° of the asterism Aries, and the next 3° of the sign align with the entirety of the asterism Taurus, and so forth. Here are the first 3° of the sign Aries reflected in the asterism Aries—

Sign Aster
0° ♈ 6´
0 12 2
0 18 3
0 24 4
0 30 5
0 36 6
0 42 7
0 48 8
0 54 9
1 0 10
1 6 11
1 12 12
1 18 13
1 24 14
1 30 15
1 36 16
1 42 17
1 48 18
1 54 19
2 0 20
2 6 21
2 12 22
2 18 23
2 24 24
2 30 25
2 36 26
2 42 27
2 48 28
2 54 29
3 0 30

It is to be observed that in all these systems the Moon’s place at the moment of birth or other epoch is the basis of the calculation. The first of these I have been expounding bears the sign manual of Mars, inasmuch as it is a ninefold division of the sign, and the latter system is accordingly one that belongs to the Sun. The Hindus, who have many methods of subdividing the signs, from two to thirty divisions for each sign, have various uses also for the different methods, but the object of them all is towards an intelligent anticipation of the 189course of mundane events. In this direction the West has also developed some methods, which, on account of their simplicity, have found a certain vogue among the Arabs, and are even at this day exercising the ingenuity of reputable exponents of the predictive art. They are called by the Arabs, Alfridaries, and some examples of them are to be found in The Manual of Occultism. Let us look at some of the later evolved examples of the Alfridary.

It should be noted that in all these systems, the Moon's position at the time of birth or another significant moment is the foundation for the calculations. The first one I've been discussing has the influence of Mars because it's based on a ninefold division of the sign, while the other system is associated with the Sun. The Hindus, who have many ways to subdivide the signs—from two to thirty divisions for each sign—use these different methods for various purposes, but the goal of all of them is to intelligently predict the course of worldly events. In this regard, the West has also developed some methods that, due to their simplicity, have become somewhat popular among the Arabs and are still inspiring the creativity of respected practitioners of the predictive arts today. The Arabs refer to them as Alfridaries, and some examples can be found in The Manual of Occultism. Now, let’s examine some of the more recent examples of the Alfridary.

190

CHAPTER XIX
ALFRIDARIES

Perhaps the simplest example of the Alfridary that we have received is that in which the Sun takes precedence in all Day births and the Moon in all Night births, the planets following the Sun in, the usual Chaldean order, and the Moon in the reversed order.

Perhaps the simplest example of the Alfridary that we have is where the Sun is prioritized in all Day births and the Moon in all Night births, with the planets following the Sun in the usual Chaldean order and the Moon in the reversed order.

The oldest that is known to us in the West is that invented by Claudius Ptolemy in the second century. It is developed in the Tetrabiblos or Four Books on the Influence of the Stars, translations of which are easily obtained, the best being that by Ashmand. Under the head of Chronocrators, the Seven Ages of Man, so graphically described by the bard in As You Like It, are for the first time mentioned and placed under the dominion of the seven planets of the ancient solar system. Ptolemy’s invention consists in ascribing to these ages the number of years they extend, and applying to them certain periods of the planets and luminaries. Thus he makes the Moon to rule the first four years of life, the infant “mewling and puking in the nurse’s arms”; the next ten years are under Mercury, and denote the “schoolboy, with ... shining morning 191face, creeping like snail unwillingly to school.” The next eight years are under Venus, and represent “the lover, sighing like furnace, with a woeful ballad made to his mistress’ eyebrow.” The next nineteen are under the influence of the Sun, according to Ptolemy. The next fifteen under that of Mars, denoting the “soldier ... bearded like a pard ... sudden and quick in quarrel.” Jupiter rules the next twelve years and represents “the justice ... full of wise saws and modern instances.” Saturn, ruling the next thirty years, figures “the lean and slippered pantaloon.” Here the system of Ptolemy ends, and to this the poet, with that prophetic apprehension of ulterior need, adds a truly Uranian picture of that “second childishness and mere oblivion” which characterizes paralytic dotage. Astrologers have sought to apply this system of Chronocrators to the horoscopes of persons by taking into consideration the aspects held by these planets at the time of birth and judging of the period under consideration accordingly. Thus a person at whose birth Mars is an afflicting planet, as may be seen by its aspects to the Sun, Moon and other significant points of the horoscope, would suffer many troubles and misfortunes during the period from forty-one to fifty-six years of his age. One in whose horoscope Jupiter is a beneficent planet, as judged by its aspects, would similarly have good fortune and experience many benefits during the period of Jupiter from fifty-six to sixty-eight years of age. So in regard to the other Chronocrators. The scheme is set out in the following table—

The oldest known system in the West comes from Claudius Ptolemy in the second century. It's detailed in the Tetrabiblos or Four Books on the Influence of the Stars, with translations readily available, the best being by Ashmand. Under the section on Chronocrators, the Seven Ages of Man, famously described by the bard in As You Like It, are mentioned for the first time and linked to the seven planets of the ancient solar system. Ptolemy’s system assigns specific ages to these stages of life and connects them to the periods of the planets and luminaries. He assigns the Moon to the first four years of life, during which the infant is “mewling and puking in the nurse’s arms.” The next ten years fall under Mercury, depicting the “schoolboy, with ... shining morning face, creeping like a snail unwillingly to school.” The next eight years are influenced by Venus, representing “the lover, sighing like a furnace, with a woeful ballad made to his mistress’ eyebrow.” Following that, nineteen years are under the Sun's influence, according to Ptolemy. Then comes Mars ruling the next fifteen years, denoting the “soldier ... bearded like a pard ... sudden and quick in quarrel.” Jupiter governs the subsequent twelve years and symbolizes “the justice ... full of wise sayings and modern instances.” Saturn, overseeing the next thirty years, represents “the lean and slippered pantaloon.” At this point, Ptolemy's system concludes, and the poet, showing a foresight of future needs, adds a vivid image of “second childishness and mere oblivion,” which characterizes the decline of old age. Astrologers have attempted to apply this Chronocrators system to people's horoscopes by considering the positions of these planets at birth and assessing the relevant periods accordingly. For example, a person born when Mars is considered an afflicting planet—visible through its aspects to the Sun, Moon, and other important points in the horoscope—would face many challenges and misfortunes between the ages of forty-one and fifty-six. In contrast, someone whose horoscope shows Jupiter as a beneficent planet would likely enjoy good fortune and numerous benefits during the period of Jupiter between fifty-six and sixty-eight years old. This applies similarly to the other Chronocrators. The structure is outlined in the following table—

192Table of Chronocrators

Chronocrators Table

By Ptolemy.

By Ptolemy.

Moon 4 years. From 1 to 4 inclusive.
Mercury 10 ” ” 5 ” 14 ”
Venus 8 ” ” 15 ” 22 ”
Sun 19 ” ” 23 ” 41 ”
Mars 15 ” ” 42 ” 56 ”
Jupiter 12 ” ” 57 ” 68 ”
Saturn 30 ” ” 69 ” 98 ”

This may be taken as the foundation of a number of ambitious attempts to read light into the somewhat misty generalizations of the Alfridary. One of these has regard to the Moon’s position at birth, and employs the twenty-seven lunar mansions, so much in repute among the Orientals, the periods ascribed to the planets in this scheme being: Sun 10 years, Moon 9 years, Mars 7 years, Mercury 13 years, Jupiter 12 years, Venus 8 years, Saturn 11 years, making 70 in all, the planets following the order of the days of the week.

This can be seen as the basis for several bold attempts to clarify the somewhat vague generalizations of the Alfridary. One of these pertains to the Moon's position at birth and uses the twenty-seven lunar mansions, which are highly regarded among Eastern cultures. The time periods assigned to the planets in this framework are as follows: Sun 10 years, Moon 9 years, Mars 7 years, Mercury 13 years, Jupiter 12 years, Venus 8 years, Saturn 11 years, totaling 70 years, with the planets listed in the order of the days of the week.

An extension of Ptolemy’s system of Chronocrators seems to be a very feasible scheme, but to give it more particular application to the needs of the practical astrologer it is found necessary to subdivide the periods allotted to each of the planets.

An extension of Ptolemy’s system of Chronocrators seems like a very practical idea, but to make it more applicable to the needs of the modern astrologer, it's essential to break down the periods assigned to each of the planets.

For various reasons I should be disposed to adhere to the period of 108 years, as being so uniformly reflected in the cosmical order of things, and there appears no reason why one planet should have a longer period than another, seeing that in some 193horoscopes the Moon may have the major influence and in others Saturn or another planet, and hence would dominate the life more particularly. While it rules its influence is paramount, and that is all that we can logically say of it. The attempt to ascribe periods which are partly astronomical and partly symbolical is at all events inconsistent, and only invariable experience of their validity would warrant us in accepting them.

For various reasons, I would lean towards the 108-year period, as it consistently reflects the cosmic order. There's no reason one planet should have a longer period than another, since in some 193horoscopes the Moon may have the most significant influence, while in others, it could be Saturn or another planet, thus dominating life more specifically. While a planet is in charge, its influence is supreme, and that’s all we can logically say about it. Trying to assign periods that are partly astronomical and partly symbolic is, in any case, inconsistent, and only consistent experience of their validity would justify accepting them.

I propose, therefore, to employ all the known operative factors of the cosmos, and to give to each of them a period of twelve years, and since there are nine factors, there will be 108 years in the circle of life represented by this scheme. The Chaldean order is adhered to, and the Period is ruled first of all by the planet which heads it, and is followed by the others in succession, or rather in rotation, for that which rules the first subdivision of one Period will be last in the sub-periods of the next Period, as the following table will show.

I suggest using all the known operational factors of the universe and assigning each a twelve-year period. Since there are nine factors, this totals 108 years in the life cycle represented by this plan. We follow the Chaldean order, and the Period is primarily governed by the leading planet, with the others following in sequence, or rather in rotation. The planet that rules the first section of one Period will be the last in the sub-periods of the next Period, as the table below demonstrates.

The Moon is seen to rule from 0 to 12, Mercury from 12 to 24, Venus from 24 to 36, Sun from 36 to 48, Mars from 48 to 60, Jupiter from 60 to 72, Saturn from 72 to 84, Uranus from 84 to 96, and Neptune from 96 to 108. Taking into consideration the known characteristics of the several planets (all the bodies are regarded as planets from the point of view of a stationary earth), these periods will, I venture to think, appear as satisfactory as those of the Ptolemaic method, while the inclusion of Uranus and Neptune should render the system complete.

The Moon is observed to govern from 0 to 12, Mercury from 12 to 24, Venus from 24 to 36, the Sun from 36 to 48, Mars from 48 to 60, Jupiter from 60 to 72, Saturn from 72 to 84, Uranus from 84 to 96, and Neptune from 96 to 108. Considering the known traits of the various planets (all these bodies are viewed as planets from the perspective of a stationary Earth), I believe these timeframes will be as satisfactory as those of the Ptolemaic system, and including Uranus and Neptune should make the system complete.

194 Figure 22-a. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-a. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-a. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-b. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-b. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-b. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-c. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-c. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

Figure 22-c. Planetary Periods by Sepharial.

195An objection which has been raised against the Ptolemaic system of Planetary Periods, and which on the same grounds may be raised against this one, deserves consideration. It is said that it is extremely unlikely that all persons are under the same planetary influence at the same age. In this I should concur were it intended that a single planet entered into the equation. Such, however, is not the case. For although all persons are under the influence of the Moon at a certain period of their life, and all of the same age are under the same periodic influence at the same time, yet it must be remembered that in the large variety of horoscopes which arise out of astronomical changes during even a single month, it is extremely unlikely that any number of persons of the same age were born under the same conditions, and in one horoscope we shall find the Moon afflicted, in another well aspected, and so on.

195An objection has been raised against the Ptolemaic system of Planetary Periods, and the same argument can be made against this one, which deserves attention. It's claimed that it's very unlikely that everyone is influenced by the same planet at the same age. I would agree with this if we were talking about only one planet. However, that's not the case. While everyone does feel the influence of the Moon during a certain phase of their life, and those of the same age are under that influence at the same time, it's important to recognize that with the wide variety of horoscopes created by astronomical changes within even a single month, it's highly improbable that any group of people of the same age were born under identical conditions. In one horoscope, we might find the Moon negatively affected, while in another, it might be positively aligned, and so forth.

Consequently, the Moon Period in these horoscopes will be variously interpreted. For if the planet governing the Period in force at any age is well placed and aspected at birth, then the period will be a fortunate one, and vice versa. Moreover, the sub-periods involving the introduction of a subsidiary influence into the Period will be interpreted in terms of the aspect the sub-period planet bears to the Period planet at the moment of birth, and thus an infinite variety of interpretations are afforded by the consideration of the various houses, signs and aspects held by the planets in the radical or birth horoscope.

As a result, the Moon Period in these horoscopes will be interpreted in different ways. If the planet that governs the current Period at any age is well placed and positively aspected at birth, then that period will be a lucky one, and vice versa. Additionally, the sub-periods that introduce a secondary influence into the Period will be interpreted based on the aspect the sub-period planet has with the Period planet at the moment of birth. This allows for an endless variety of interpretations, taking into account the different houses, signs, and aspects that the planets hold in the natal or birth horoscope.

196Each planet then will rule in succession for a Period of twelve years, during which it will bring into play the conditions indicated by its position and aspects at birth. The same planet will rule for the first sub-period of that Period, and will be followed by the other planets in Chaldean order. Each sub-period will extend over one year and four months, and will import an influence agreeable to the nature of the planet ruling it, as well as an influence in terms of its radical relations to the Ruler of the Period.

196Each planet will take its turn ruling for a period of twelve years, during which it will activate the conditions based on its position and aspects at birth. The same planet will rule the first sub-period of that time, followed by the other planets in Chaldean order. Each sub-period will last for one year and four months, bringing influences that align with the nature of the ruling planet, as well as influences related to its fundamental connections with the Ruler of the Period.

Thus if at birth the Moon were badly aspected, then during the first twelve years of life there would be poor fortunes and changes adverse to the interests of the subject. If Venus were in bad aspect there would be sickness and family trouble at from two years eight months to four years of age, which is the Venusian sub-period of the Moon Period. Any planet in the eighth sign from the Moon would import danger of death in the family, and would threaten the life of the subject himself during the sub-period of such planet. Similarly a planet in the second from the Period planet shows gain; in the third journeys; in the fourth change of residence, adversity to the parents; in the fifth benefits; in the sixth sickness of the nature of the sub-period planet; in the seventh adversity, rivalries, hurts; in the eighth loss and death; in the ninth voyages and foreign affairs; in the tenth honours; in the eleventh new associations and allies; in the twelfth bondage, restraint, anxieties, etc.

Thus, if the Moon is poorly positioned at birth, the first twelve years of life will likely bring misfortune and challenges for the individual. If Venus is poorly positioned, there may be illness and family issues between the ages of two years and eight months to four years, which is the Venusian sub-period of the Moon Period. Any planet located in the eighth sign from the Moon indicates a risk of death in the family and could pose a threat to the individual's life during that planet's sub-period. Similarly, a planet in the second from the Period planet suggests gains; in the third, travel; in the fourth, changes in residence and difficulties for the parents; in the fifth, benefits; in the sixth, illness related to the sub-period planet; in the seventh, challenges, rivalries, injuries; in the eighth, loss and death; in the ninth, journeys and foreign matters; in the tenth, honors; in the eleventh, new friendships and alliances; and in the twelfth, restrictions, anxiety, and so on.

It would appear that all the Alfridaries in existence 197are modelled upon the das’a systems of the Hindus. In some of these the order of the periods and sub-periods is regulated by considerations of precedence established in the horoscope of birth, but I have been unable to obtain any definite information which will guide one surely to a correct disposition of the various factors, and I have therefore abandoned them in favour of one that appears to me to have regard to cosmical symbolism, and at the same time to include the application of considerations of an individual and radical nature, such as those obtaining in the horoscope of birth.

It seems that all existing Alfridaries are based on the das’a systems of the Hindus. In some of these, the arrangement of periods and sub-periods is determined by the order of precedence established in a birth horoscope. However, I haven't been able to find any solid information that would help create an accurate layout of the various factors. Because of this, I have chosen to set them aside in favor of one that seems to consider cosmic symbolism while also incorporating factors related to individual and inherent aspects, such as those found in a birth horoscope.

Thus every person born into the world is regarded as a variant of the cosmical elements, a concrete symbol in himself, born under horoscopical conditions which are part of his greater environment and related to a world of life in which, for good or ill, he is required to function in terms of his own nature. Hence the statement, which I hold to be inviolable, that the planets affect us only in terms of ourselves. The superman will have to be content to take incarnation as he finds it. Without lying idle on the shelf for some ages he cannot wait for the stars in their courses to wheel into position for the striking of the perfect die. In all ages and nations there are such things as horoscopical misfits, where the individual finds insuperable difficulty in the way of perfect expression of character. But if we all try to do our best in the circumstances allotted to us, we shall give to the personal symbol a new and a better value than it has hitherto possessed. It is this fact of human perfectibility 198that gives to astrological interpretations an ever increasing interest. We see how the anciently destructive forces of the planet Mars are converted by human evolution into the executive ability of the man of action. How the ostentation of the Jovian plutocrat is changed to the benevolence of the true philanthropist, and how even the mean sordidness of the ancient Saturn becomes the constructive carefulness of the social economist. And from the remnants of this old universe of ours, maintaining its cosmic integrity for ever, there shall at length be evolved “a new heaven and a new earth.” For as the expression of divine Ideation, the universe is the revelation of God to man, and this His handwriting in the heavens means more than all the wisdom of all the ages has yet deciphered. Cosmic Symbolism, of which here we are only dealing with the crudest elements, will hereafter come to be regarded as the subject of man’s highest intuitions, the embodiment of a perfected wisdom. Only when the last word of the last chapter of the Gospel of Nature has been read and understood will the heavens be rolled away as a scroll and the Word be fulfilled which said: “Behold I make all things new!” For our God is in the making.

Every person born into the world is seen as a variation of the cosmic elements, a tangible symbol in themselves, born under astrological conditions that are part of their broader environment and connected to a world of life in which, for better or worse, they must operate according to their own nature. Therefore, I firmly believe that the planets influence us only in relation to ourselves. The superman will need to accept life as it is. Without waiting around for ages, they cannot expect the stars to align perfectly for their ideal moment. Throughout history and across cultures, there are instances of astrological mismatches where individuals face great challenges in fully expressing their character. However, if we all strive to do our best within the circumstances we have been given, we will give our personal symbol a new and improved significance. This potential for human improvement is what makes astrological interpretations increasingly fascinating. We see how the ancient destructive tendencies of the planet Mars are transformed through human evolution into the effective capabilities of the doer. How the showiness of the wealthy Jupiter figure is transformed into the kindness of a true philanthropist, and how even the mean, petty traits of ancient Saturn become the thoughtful diligence of the social economist. From the remnants of our ancient universe, maintaining its cosmic integrity forever, a “new heaven and a new earth” will eventually emerge. As the expression of divine Ideation, the universe reveals God to humanity, and this heavenly script conveys more than all the wisdom of the ages has yet uncovered. Cosmic Symbolism, of which we are only considering the basic elements here, will eventually be seen as the subject of humanity’s highest intuitions, the embodiment of perfected wisdom. Only when the final words of the last chapter of the Gospel of Nature have been read and understood will the heavens roll away like a scroll, and the promise fulfilled that states: “Behold, I make all things new!” For our God is in the process of creation.

199

CHAPTER XX
IN THE LUMBER ROOM

Almost every home has a lumber-room, a place where all the out-of-date articles, derelict furniture, oddments of all sorts, are stored. Nobody ever goes there except the man who wants a bit of stuff to fit something, one of those quaint little notions that inventive men with time on their hands are always at work upon. And almost every mind has its lumber-room. The world has a huge depository of this sort. Into this lumber-room of forgotten things I would have you come with me, you who are interested in odd ideas.

Almost every home has a storage room, a place where all the outdated items, unwanted furniture, and various odds and ends are kept. Nobody ever goes there except the person looking for a piece of something to complete a project, one of those quirky little ideas that creative people with some free time are always tinkering with. And almost every mind has its own storage room. The world has a vast collection of this kind. Into this storage room of forgotten things, I invite you to come with me, you who are interested in unusual ideas.

Time was when the world believed that there was an inherent relativity in things, and that nothing existed for itself alone. That is one of the notions that we have thrown into the lumber-room. But as it fits my needs I will bring it out into the daylight and have a look at it. The belief that is now current in the world regarding the universe is that it is a congeries of detached bodies, each existing for itself alone, inhabited, maybe, or not inhabited, but capable of sustaining life of some sort. There they are, out yonder, but what has that to do with us? Well, the old-world notion was that by taking a dozen or so of pieces of wood of various shapes and 200sizes and fitting them together you could make what they called a chair. But nobody ever thought either that the chair could make itself, or that the shapes, as they called them, constituted a chair without being fitted together. The fitting was the most important part of the business. A man picking up a shape would call it a chair leg or whatever it might be, a back, thwart, side or seat. None of them could be called a chair, but each of them suggested it. Their use was in their relativity, their interdependence, their connectedness. So it is with the throne of God, which is the universe. That ancient notion of relativity—you will find it in the Mahabharata or that section of it which they call the Sacred Song—was a good one.

There was a time when people believed that everything had a natural connection and that nothing existed independently. That idea has mostly been discarded. However, since it serves my purpose, I will bring it back to light and examine it. Nowadays, the common view of the universe is that it's a collection of separate entities, each existing on its own, possibly inhabited or not, but able to support some form of life. They're out there, but what does that mean for us? In the past, people thought that by taking a dozen pieces of wood in different shapes and putting them together, you could create something called a chair. Yet, no one believed that the chair could assemble itself, or that the shapes alone could be a chair without being joined. The assembly was the key part of the whole thing. If someone picked up a piece, they might label it a chair leg or back, arm, side, or seat. None of those pieces could be called a chair by themselves, but each one hinted at it. Their value lay in their relationship to one another, their interdependence, their connection. The same goes for God's throne, which is the universe. That ancient idea of relativity—which you can find in the Mahabharata, particularly in the part known as the Sacred Song—had real merit. 200

This earth of ours is a comparatively small planet in a system of worlds. It does not exist for itself alone, nor do those others which surround it. Crude thinkers, without perspective, believed the earth to be very big because it filled the eye. A threepenny-piece will cover the Moon at arm’s length. It is all a matter of proportion. But the deeper thinkers knew better, and if they were foolish enough to suppose that the planets existed for this earth they also believed that the earth existed for the planets, and they for one another. Interplanetary action was believed in before Ptolemy wrote his book on the Influence of the Stars, or Kepler had framed his cosmic laws, or Newton had found the glue to hold the pieces together. The Carpenter had been at work before ever man opened his blinking eyes to the morning sun, and what I 201have called the Throne of God was made by Him for His own use. It is ours to look and marvel.

This planet we live on is a relatively small one in a system filled with other worlds. It doesn’t exist for itself alone, nor do the other planets surrounding it. Simple thinkers, lacking perspective, thought the Earth was huge because it dominated their view. A small coin can cover the Moon when held at arm's length. It’s all about perspective. However, more thoughtful individuals understood better; even if they foolishly believed the planets existed for the Earth, they also believed that the Earth existed for the planets, and they were all interconnected. The idea of interplanetary interactions existed long before Ptolemy wrote his book on the Influence of the Stars, or Kepler formulated his cosmic laws, or Newton discovered the force that holds everything together. The Creator had been working long before humanity first opened its eyes to the dawn, and what I’ve referred to as the Throne of God was created by Him for His own purpose. It’s ours to observe and be amazed.

This notion of planetary interaction, the idea that planets act and react upon one another, involves that other which Science has not yet condescended to observe, namely, planetary action in human life. Tycho and Kepler, who argued things to their logical conclusion, believed in it. Well, there are books enough on the subject already for those who would learn about it, and I do not intend to add another to the number. But I would like to revive an odd notion or two which even the dealers in antiques, I mean the astrologers, especially the modern ones, have relegated to the lumber-room.

This idea of planetary interaction, the concept that planets influence each other, includes something that science hasn't yet bothered to investigate, which is how planetary actions relate to human life. Tycho and Kepler, who followed their thoughts to logical conclusions, believed in this. There are plenty of books on the subject for those interested, and I’m not looking to contribute another one. However, I’d like to bring back a few strange ideas that even those who sell old knowledge, like astrologers—especially the modern ones—have pushed aside.

One may even be excused for believing that planets, so nearly linked up with the destinies of our earth, may have a direct action of a subtle kind upon our lives and thought. But the idea that the Moon’s Nodes may have such an influence is beyond all saving, at least so think our modern astrologers. Yet this was an ancient belief, and it survives at this day in India and other parts of the world. But then, you will argue, they are not bodies at all but mere points. So is the actual centre of the Sun on which the universe revolves. Your point is nothing—or everything, as you will. I am not looking at the bodies themselves but what they signify to us. I am looking at the Universe as Symbol, I am trying to get at its meaning. If the planets may be regarded as symbols, so may the Moon’s Nodes. They tried to give them a real existence as the head and tail of the Dragon, the devourer of the Sun and 202Moon. But this was for the popular fancy, as one might put off a child with a fairy tale rather than afflict him with a lecture on astronomy. They who calculated the positions of the Sun and Moon and predicted eclipses, knew how to bring the Dragon to heel, and they knew his feeding times. They used that knowledge to enslave a whole people, and haply the same knowledge may help to set them free. Nevertheless, they ascribed to the Moon’s Nodes a specific influence in human life, or more correctly a special signification. One could have affirmed from a mere knowledge of this significance that astronomy was first studied in northern latitudes, for we see that the ascending node, that point at which the Moon crosses the ecliptic in its upward course, was regarded as fortunate, while the descending node was unfortunate. And what they knew of the southern climes was evidently not much, for they called them Patala and Avitchi, and figured the descent of the soul into the depths of a great despair from the circumstance of the Moon’s southern course. But all this was a symbolism not invented by man, for he regulates neither the Moon’s orbit nor its Nodes, and had no hand in the making of eclipses. It was there for him to read, and that is how he read it. Some astrologers say that they were wrong. Others are more cautious. They seem to have observed that certain periods in their lives coincided with the transits of these Nodes over the places of the luminaries, the Mid-heaven and the Ascendant of their horoscopes, and they have made due note of the fact, leaving the uninitiated to 203decide for themselves by experience as to which is the right way to hang up a horse-shoe for luck. Yet among those who say it should be one way and those who say the other, there are few indeed who are aware of the fact that they are using the ancient symbol of the Moon’s Nodes ☊ and ☋.

One might be forgiven for thinking that planets, closely connected to the fate of our Earth, might have a subtle direct impact on our lives and thoughts. However, the notion that the Moon’s Nodes could have such an effect is beyond salvation, or so our modern astrologers believe. This was, however, an ancient belief and it still persists today in India and other parts of the world. But then, you might argue, they aren’t physical bodies but just points. So is the actual center of the Sun, around which the universe revolves. Your point means nothing—or everything, depending on your perspective. I'm not focused on the bodies themselves but on what they mean to us. I view the Universe as a Symbol; I'm trying to understand its significance. If planets can be seen as symbols, so can the Moon’s Nodes. They attempted to give them real existence as the head and tail of the Dragon, the devourer of the Sun and Moon. But that was just for popular belief, like telling a child a fairy tale instead of giving them a lecture on astronomy. Those who calculated the positions of the Sun and Moon and predicted eclipses knew how to control the Dragon and were aware of its feeding times. They used that knowledge to dominate an entire populace, and perhaps that same knowledge might help to liberate them. Still, they attributed a specific influence to the Moon’s Nodes in human life, or more accurately, a special significance. One could have deduced from this significance that astronomy was first studied in northern latitudes, as the ascending node, the point where the Moon crosses the ecliptic going up, was seen as lucky, while the descending node was considered unlucky. What they knew about southern regions was evidently limited, for they called them Patala and Avitchi and depicted the soul’s descent into deep despair due to the Moon’s southern path. But all of this symbolism wasn’t created by humans, as they do not control the Moon’s orbit or its Nodes, nor did they have any role in the creation of eclipses. It existed for them to interpret, and that is how they understood it. Some astrologers say they were mistaken. Others are more cautious, having noticed that certain periods in their lives aligned with the transits of these Nodes over the positions of the luminaries, the Mid-heaven, and the Ascendant of their horoscopes. They have duly noted this, leaving it to those uninitiated to determine through experience the correct way to hang a horseshoe for good luck. Yet among those who advocate one way and those who support the other, very few realize that they are utilizing the ancient symbols of the Moon’s Nodes ☊ and ☋.

But if the Moon’s Nodes have any symbolical meaning and can be used for purposes of prediction, so surely should the Nodes of the other planets, whose influence, gravitation excepted, is quite as great as hers. It is at all events just as well that we should have them under observation, and so I give them here.

But if the Moon's Nodes have any symbolic meaning and can be used for predictions, then the Nodes of the other planets should definitely be considered as well, since their influence, aside from gravity, is just as significant as hers. It's definitely a good idea to keep an eye on them, so I’m including them here.

Nodes of the Planets for 1900, with their mean motions for one Century.

Planet Nodes for 1900, along with their average movements over a century.

Ascending   Descending   Motion
Neptune Leo 9° 43´ Aquarius 9° 43´ 1° 6´
Uranus Gemini 13 17 Sagittary 13 17 26
Saturn Cancer 22 5 Capricorn 22 5 53
Jupiter Cancer 9 24 Capricorn 9 24 1 0
Mars Taurus 18 2 Scorpio 18 2 46
Venus Gemini 15 44 Sagittary 15 44 52
Mercury Taurus 17 9 Scorpio 17 9 1 12

The Moon’s Node retrogresses through the entire zodiac in 18 years 225 days, which is at the rate of 19° 20´ per annum, and about 3´ per day. The Nodes of all the other bodies are direct in motion.

The Moon’s Node moves backwards through the entire zodiac in 18 years and 225 days, at a rate of 19° 20´ per year, which is roughly 3´ per day. The Nodes of all the other bodies move forward.

Out of this same lumber-room I can bring another piece of neglected furniture, which possibly may suit somebody’s convenience, for some men build shanties out of old timber and others build theories out of anything. Mr. William Lilly, whose patrons were King Charles and the Great Reformer, Sir Elias 204Ashmole, and others of great fame, gave us the secret of one of his most alarming and successful predictions. Not that these latter are intended to alarm, but to forewarn and admonish. He says that his prophecy of the Great Plague and the Fire of London, 1665-6, was effected by means of the Aphelion of the planet Mars, which he noticed was due to ingress to the sign Virgo, that ruling the monarchy of England in his day, about that time. Astronomy was not a neat science in the time of Lilly, and he wisely refrained from giving a date for the fulfilling of his Prophetic Hieroglyphs, but he published them so well in advance of the double event as to secure himself against a possible margin of error in the calculations. In a preceding chapter the reader will find the calculation referred to. In effect Master Lilly was called before the Committee of the House of Parliament and there interrogated as to the founding of his prediction, and what light he could throw upon the matter. It is reported that he acquitted himself creditably and was thanked for his services. But mark you, Lilly said nothing about the Horoscope of the Monarchy nor the Aphelion of Mars, because doubtless he knew himself to be in the presence of learned men who made laws and not horoscopes, and whose business it was to prevent plagues and fires, not to predict them. But to the student of astrology he has very candidly delivered his whole mind on the matter.

From this same storage space, I can bring out another piece of forgotten furniture that might work for someone, since some guys build shacks from old wood while others construct theories from anything. Mr. William Lilly, who had notable supporters like King Charles and the famous reformer Sir Elias Ashmole, shared the secret of one of his most shocking yet successful predictions. These predictions aren't meant to scare people but to warn and advise them. He claimed that his forecast of the Great Plague and the Great Fire of London in 1665-66 was based on the Aphelion of the planet Mars, which he observed was moving into the sign Virgo, the sign that ruled over the monarchy of England at that time. Astronomy wasn’t a precise science during Lilly's era, and he smartly avoided giving a specific date for when his Prophetic Hieroglyphs would come true, publishing them well in advance of the events to protect himself from any potential calculation errors. In a prior chapter, readers will find the relevant calculations. In fact, Master Lilly was called to appear before a Parliamentary Committee, where he was questioned about how he made his prediction and what insights he could provide. It's reported that he handled himself well and was thanked for his contributions. But keep in mind, Lilly didn't mention the Horoscope of the Monarchy or the Aphelion of Mars, likely knowing he was among learned individuals who created laws rather than horoscopes, focused on preventing plagues and fires rather than predicting them. However, for those studying astrology, he clearly shared his full thoughts on the subject.

Now I have thought that if one man finds the Aphelion of a planet to be effectual in producing or indicating certain events in agreement with the 205nature of the planet concerned, others may be able to do the same with other planets, regard being had to their Aphelia. Of course the whole thing may be a bogey, and Lilly may be hiding his light in a bushel. Commander Morrison, who was a clever man and a good astronomer, sought to prove that the Fire was due to the precession of the Bull’s North Horn to the ascendant of the City of London. The reader knows that since this entry of the Bull into the City the herd has greatly increased, and there are so many of them as to constitute another Plague, were it not that they have let loose a host of Bears to demolish them. Morrison’s idea is ingenious, and works out to a fraction, but unfortunately he did not predict the Fire and the Plague, while Lilly did. Therefore I am bound to accept Lilly’s explanation of his performance; and his reason appears a good one, is in agreement with the facts, and employs the astrology of the planet Mars in a consistent and satisfactory manner. Further, I am bound by that performance and that reasoning to examine the effects likely to be produced by the Aphelia of the other planets. Here is a statement of their positions.

Now I’ve been thinking that if one person finds the Aphelion of a planet useful in producing or indicating certain events related to that planet, others might be able to do the same with other planets, considering their Aphelia. Of course, this whole thing could be a sham, and Lilly might be keeping his true knowledge hidden. Commander Morrison, who was a smart guy and a good astronomer, tried to prove that the Fire was caused by the precession of the Bull’s North Horn aligning with the ascendant of the City of London. The reader knows that since the Bull entered the City, the population has greatly increased, and there are so many of them that they could be another Plague, if not for the Bears unleashed to take care of them. Morrison’s idea is clever and adds up perfectly, but unfortunately, he didn’t predict the Fire or the Plague, while Lilly did. So, I have to accept Lilly’s explanation of his findings; his reasoning seems solid, aligns with the facts, and uses the astrology of the planet Mars in a coherent and satisfying way. Furthermore, I’m obligated by that result and that reasoning to look into the effects likely to be produced by the Aphelia of other planets. Here’s a statement of their positions.

Aphelia of Planets for 1900, with motions for 100 years.

Aphelia of Planets for 1900, with movements spanning 100 years.

Neptune Scorpio 13° 47´ 1° 25´ per century.
Uranus Pisces 18 49 1 28 ”
Saturn Capric. 0 54 1 50 ”
Jupiter Libra 12 43 1 35 ”
Mars Virgo 4 15 1 52 ”
Venus Aquar. 9 57 1 21 ”
Mercury Sagit. 15 55 1 34 ”

206Looking over these positions of the Nodes I find one from which I can strike an Epoch at once. It is that of Saturn’s Aphelion ingress to the sign Capricornus, which is found to have taken place in the year 1850. There are four countries which are ruled by the sign Capricornus in which at this time there were great upheavals, namely, India, Greece, Mexico and New Zealand. India was engaged in the Sikh War against the forces of the Moolraj, a whole Bengali regiment was disbanded for mutiny, and Sir Charles Napier shortly resigned the command. Eight years of unrest followed, culminating in the great Mutiny, and the rule of the East India Company came to an end. Meanwhile Mexico was engaged in a fierce war with the United States, and the political convulsions ended in the resignation of President Arista. Four Presidents succeeded one another in the space of three years, and the country eventually established a new Constitution under General Comonfort in 1857. Greece at this time came into conflict with the British and other European governments because of its oppressions and its non-payment of debts to foreign subjects. Insurrections and blockades continued for some years and a change of the Ministry eventually brought about an agreement of neutrality under the royal seal. New Zealand at the same time was acting under the Charter granted to Sir George Grey and founding new townships. In 1850, the year of Saturn’s Aphelion ingress, the New Zealand Company relinquished its Charter and a new Constitution was 207formed, which was in force from 1852 to 1857, when it was modified.

206Looking at these positions of the Nodes, I notice one from which I can immediately mark a significant moment. It’s Saturn's Aphelion entry into the sign Capricorn, which occurred in 1850. There are four countries ruled by Capricorn that experienced major upheavals at that time: India, Greece, Mexico, and New Zealand. India was embroiled in the Sikh War against the forces of Moolraj, a whole Bengali regiment was disbanded for mutiny, and Sir Charles Napier soon resigned from command. Eight years of turmoil followed, culminating in the major Mutiny, and the rule of the East India Company came to an end. Meanwhile, Mexico was engaged in a brutal war with the United States, and the political turmoil led to the resignation of President Arista. Four Presidents came and went in just three years, and the country eventually established a new Constitution under General Comonfort in 1857. At that time, Greece clashed with Britain and other European governments over its oppressions and failure to pay debts to foreign nationals. Insurrections and blockades persisted for several years until a change in government led to an agreement of neutrality, sealed by the royal authority. New Zealand, during the same period, was operating under the Charter granted to Sir George Grey and was establishing new townships. In 1850, the year of Saturn's Aphelion entry, the New Zealand Company gave up its Charter, and a new Constitution was 207created, which was effective from 1852 to 1857, when it was amended.

In every case the effects of such changes as took place in these several Constitutions at this period were, I think, exceedingly beneficial, and this is what might be expected from the circumstance of Saturn coming into his own territory, for Capricornus is one of the cardinal or political signs, and is ruled by Saturn.

In every case, the effects of the changes that occurred in these various Constitutions during this time were, in my opinion, very beneficial. This aligns with the fact that Saturn was entering his own territory, as Capricorn is one of the cardinal or political signs and is ruled by Saturn.

But the motions of the Aphelia are so slow that many centuries have to elapse before a new ingress is made, and this is hardly the way in which one would seek to prove or disprove the symbolism of such phenomena. One would rather consider that the influence of the several planets is vested in their Aphelia, and then observe what effects follow the transits of other planets over those places, and what effects are due to the direction of the Significators, Sun, Moon, Mid-heaven and Ascendant, to the places of these Aphelia in the prime vertical. But I find myself talking the jargon of the astrologers, as Lytton would say, whereas I am supposed to be talking about Cosmic Symbolism.

But the movements of the Aphelia are so slow that it takes many centuries for a new entry to happen, and this isn’t really the best way to prove or disprove the symbolism of such events. It’s better to think that the influence of the different planets is tied to their Aphelia, and then see what effects occur when other planets transit those points, and what results come from the positions of the Significators—Sun, Moon, Mid-heaven, and Ascendant—relative to the locations of these Aphelia on the prime vertical. Yet here I am speaking the lingo of astrologers, as Lytton would say, when I’m actually meant to be discussing Cosmic Symbolism.

Figure 23.

Figure 23.

Figure 23.

What are these Aphelia of the planets, and how does their symbolism attach to us as humans? The Aphelion of a planet is that point in its orbit, or imaginary orbit—for we have already disposed of the elliptical theory—where it is at its greatest distance from the Sun. And if these planets severally correspond with certain principles of our human constitution, they may be said to have 208greater play and to be in a condition to exert more of their own natures at such times than at others, and proportionately less at other points in their orbits, and least when in perihelion. For then those principles and planets are enslaved to the Sun and answer most fully to his all-embracing and compelling influence. A soul that is in its most perfect condition of physical manifestation may be said to be in its perihelion, whereas one that has shaken free to some extent from the gravitational pull of the sun of this nether world, and has winged its way into the outer regions of space, is to that extent in a condition of temporary liberation. One is almost tempted by this analogy to revert to the 209symbolism of the elliptical orbit, and to place in its empty focus another luminary or Spiritual Sun, such as that conceived by Swedenborg, and to say that these liberated souls are answering to the gravitational pull of that luminary. The idea is fascinating, both astronomically and symbolically, and since the kenofocus of the ellipse is not under lease to any of our scientific theorists, I will place my Spiritual Sun in that centre of the empyrean and complete my figure, as already exhibited in a preceding chapter.

What are these Aphelia of the planets, and how do their symbols relate to us as humans? The Aphelion of a planet is the point in its orbit—or imaginary orbit, since we've already dismissed the elliptical theory—where it is farthest from the Sun. If these planets correspond to certain aspects of our human nature, they are more influential and can express more of their characteristics at these times compared to others, and correspondingly less at other points in their orbits, being least influential when they are at perihelion. At that moment, those aspects and planets are controlled by the Sun and respond most fully to its broad and compelling influence. A soul at its most perfect state of physical existence can be said to be in its perihelion, while one that has freed itself to some extent from the gravitational force of the sun of this earthly realm and has soared into the outer regions of space is, to that extent, in a state of temporary liberation. This analogy almost leads one to revert to the symbolism of the elliptical orbit and to place in its empty focus another light or Spiritual Sun, like the one envisioned by Swedenborg, and to suggest that these liberated souls respond to the gravitational draw of that light. The concept is intriguing, both astronomically and symbolically, and since the focus of the ellipse isn't claimed by any of our scientific theorists, I will position my Spiritual Sun at that center of the empyrean and complete my figure, as already described in a previous chapter.

Now we see what comes of rummaging in a lumber-room. All sorts of suggestions and possibilities, yet nothing perhaps that anybody would be willing to bring back into daily use. These musty, time-worn and out-of-date notions that nobody takes much note of may some day claim the attention of a Ben Hassam or somebody with a nose for things of value, and a scramble for priority will be the result. But alas! they have no market value. Planets, principles, orbits, aphelia, and nodes, they are all merely symbols in the everlasting Book of Life.

Now we see what happens when you dig around in an old storage room. All kinds of ideas and possibilities come up, yet nothing that anyone would actually want to use in everyday life. These dusty, outdated concepts that no one pays much attention to might one day catch the eye of someone like Ben Hassam or another person with a knack for spotting valuable things, leading to a rush for recognition. But unfortunately, they have no real market value. Planets, principles, orbits, aphelia, and nodes—they're all just symbols in the timeless Book of Life.

210

CHAPTER XXI
THE LAW OF VIBRATIONS

In my Kabala I have shown that in the contest between Chance of the haphazard sort which is merely speculative, and that because it is grounded in ignorance, and Law which proceeds by method because it is based on cosmic principles, the latter wins an easy victory, not once but always. I showed that the divisions of the day and night that we call Planetary Hours, whether they be artificial or not, have a certain security from the fact that they are founded on the cosmic order of planetary velocities. It was also shown that certain numbers answered to the several planets, and that these numbers bore a definite relationship to sound vibrations.

In my Kabala, I've demonstrated that in the battle between random chance, which is just speculative and rooted in ignorance, and law, which operates through method because it is based on cosmic principles, the latter consistently wins easily, not just once but every time. I showed that the divisions of day and night we refer to as Planetary Hours, whether they are artificial or not, have a certain stability because they are based on the cosmic order of planetary speeds. I also revealed that certain numbers correspond to the various planets, and that these numbers have a specific relationship to sound vibrations.

I have received such a lot of correspondence asking for further instruction along those lines that I feel constrained, if only to gain some little respite from my tormentors, to add a few pages here on the subject of Chance reduced to Law.

I have gotten so much correspondence asking for more guidance on this topic that I feel compelled, even if just to get a bit of relief from my persistent inquirers, to add a few pages here about the topic of Chance reduced to Law.

Without at all departing from the phonetic evaluation of sounds as given in the Universal Alphabet (Kabala, p. 30), it is possible to evolve a number of methods by which the same results may be reached, but I find none more satisfactory than 211that of the Law of Number and Vibration as related to Planetary Hours.

Without straying from the phonetic assessment of sounds presented in the Universal Alphabet (Kabala, p. 30), it’s possible to develop several methods to achieve the same results, but I find none more effective than the approach of the Law of Number and Vibration in connection with Planetary Hours. 211

It has already been explained that Planetary Hours depend on the length of the day, or the time that the Sun is above the horizon, in any locality. Take, for instance, the 18th October, when the Sun is above the horizon for some 10½ hours. On that day the Sun sets in these latitudes at five o’clock, and these five hours are divided into six Planetary Hours, each of fifty minutes’ duration.

It has already been explained that Planetary Hours depend on the length of the day, or the time that the Sun is above the horizon, in any location. For example, on the 18th of October, when the Sun is above the horizon for about 10½ hours. On that day, the Sun sets at 5 PM in these latitudes, and those five hours are divided into six Planetary Hours, each lasting fifty minutes.

These Hours, again, are divided into seven Periods, each of which is governed by or related to a planet, and these Periods will therefore be about seven minutes in duration, since fifty divided by seven yields seven and a fraction. Then for this day we have the Planetary Hour equal to fifty minutes and the Planetary Period to seven minutes.

These Hours are divided into seven Periods, each of which is connected to a planet. These Periods will last around seven minutes because fifty divided by seven gives us seven and a bit more. So, for today, we have the Planetary Hour set at fifty minutes and the Planetary Period at seven minutes.

The usual mistake of those who have dealt with the use of the Planetary Hour is that they divide the whole time of the Sun’s diurnal arc by twelve, and apply these Hours to the time of sunrise. This must not be done. The quarters of the day must be dealt with separately, the quarter from sunrise to noon by itself, and that from noon to sunset by itself. Six Planetary Hours are always completed at noon. Thus on the 18th October aforesaid, the Sun rises at about 6.25, and consequently the time from sunrise to noon will be 5 hrs. 35 min. and this is equal to 335 minutes, which being divided by six yields the Planetary Hour for the first quarter of the day, namely, fifty-six minutes. Then, again, we find that the time of sunset is 5 p.m. and this is equal 212to 300 minutes, which, divided by six gives the Planetary Hour for the second quarter of the day as equal to fifty minutes.

The common mistake made by those who use Planetary Hours is dividing the entire duration of the Sun’s daily path by twelve and applying these Hours starting from sunrise. This should not be done. The segments of the day need to be calculated separately: the time from sunrise to noon should be calculated on its own, and the time from noon to sunset should be treated separately as well. Six Planetary Hours are always completed by noon. Therefore, on the 18th of October mentioned earlier, the Sun rises at about 6:25, meaning the time from sunrise to noon is 5 hrs. 35 min., which equals 335 minutes. Dividing that by six gives the Planetary Hour for the first quarter of the day, which is fifty-six minutes. Next, we see that sunset occurs at 5 p.m., equaling 300 minutes. Dividing this by six provides the Planetary Hour for the second quarter of the day, which is fifty minutes.

This is very different to taking an average of fifty-three minutes for the Hour and applying it to sunrise, as the following comparative table will show.

This is very different from taking an average of fifty-three minutes for the Hour and using it for sunrise, as the following comparative table will show.

False Hours, begin True Hours, begin
6.25 sunrise. 6.25 sunrise.
7.18 a.m. 7.21 a.m.
8.11 ” 8.17 ”
9.4 ” 9.13 ”
9.57 ” 10.9 ”
10.50 ” 11.5 ”
11.43 ” 12.0 noon.

Having found that the afternoon Hours are each equal to fifty minutes in duration, we have to add this amount successively to noon to get the beginnings of the 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th and 12th Hours. These may be set out in a single line—

Having found that the afternoon Hours are each equal to fifty minutes long, we need to add this amount successively to noon to determine the start times of the 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, and 12th Hours. These can be arranged in a single line—

7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
12.0 12.50 1.40 2.30 3.20 4.10

And if to these beginnings of Hours we add successively seven minutes, being one-seventh of the Hour of fifty minutes, we shall have the times at which the various sub-periods begin. But it is also necessary to affix the signature of the Planet ruling the Hours and Periods, and for this purpose we may note that the 8th Hour is always ruled by the planet that gives the day its name, as Mercury 213on a Wednesday, etc. The 18th October, 1911, was a Wednesday. Also note that the first Period of each Hour is ruled by the planet that gives its name to the Hour, the rest following in the usual Chaldean order.

And if we add seven minutes to the start times of each Hour, which is one-seventh of a fifty-minute Hour, we’ll get the starting times for the different sub-periods. It’s also important to indicate the Planet that governs the Hours and Periods. For this, we should note that the 8th Hour is always ruled by the planet that names the day, like Mercury on a Wednesday, for example. The 18th of October, 1911, was a Wednesday. Also, remember that the first Period of each Hour is ruled by the planet associated with that Hour, with the others following the usual Chaldean order.

The table when fully set out will therefore present the following appearance:—

The table when fully set will therefore look like this:—

Figure 24. Wednesday 18th October, 1911. Afternoon. Planetary Hours.

Figure 24. Wednesday 18th October, 1911. Afternoon. Planetary Hours.

Figure 24. Wednesday, October 18, 1911. Afternoon. Planetary Hours.

The reader will observe that in the periodic succession the 8th planet syncopates, and the next Hour commences with the succeeding planet. This is not so exceptional as at first it may appear, for we have analogies throughout nature of the syncopation of the octave. If you take a wire and stretch 214it across a bridge, as is done in the construction of a stringed musical instrument, you will find that it answers to a certain note when vibrated. At first sight you may be disposed to think that the vibration extends over the whole length of the wire. This, however, is not the case, for on closer observation you will find that at certain points along its length the wire is quite stationary, while the rest of it is vibrating. By placing the finger upon these neutral points or nodes and again vibrating the wire, you will find that they are the octaves of the open note produced by the wire when in free vibration. The following sketch shows the principle of these neutral points or nodes. They correspond to the 8th planet in the series.

The reader will notice that in the periodic succession, the 8th planet syncopates, and the next hour begins with the following planet. This isn’t as unusual as it might seem at first, as we see similar patterns throughout nature regarding the syncopation of the octave. If you take a wire and stretch it across a bridge, like what's done in making a stringed musical instrument, you will find that it produces a specific note when vibrated. At first glance, you might think that the vibration travels along the entire length of the wire. However, that's not the case; upon closer inspection, you'll discover that at certain points along its length, the wire remains completely still, while the rest of it vibrates. By placing your finger on these stationary points or nodes and vibrating the wire again, you'll see that they produce the octaves of the open note generated by the wire when it vibrates freely. The following sketch illustrates the concept of these neutral points or nodes. They correspond to the 8th planet in the sequence.

Figure 25.

Figure 25.

Figure 25.

The vibration being the cause of what we sense as sound, non-vibration must correspond with silence, and so we know that the sound falls into silence and re-emerges again in the higher octave of vibration. This fact has an interesting application, which I cannot develop in this place, but which the student will take due note of.

The vibration that causes what we perceive as sound must have a counterpart in silence, so we understand that sound fades into silence and then comes back in a higher octave of vibration. This fact has an interesting application that I can't elaborate on here, but it's something the student should pay attention to.

Having now got our Planetary Hours into array, we are at once able to prove one or two of the occult axioms, the first being that composites of sound are reducible to numbers, and the second is that these numbers when reduced to their unit values correspond to one or other of the planets.

Having now organized our Planetary Hours, we can immediately demonstrate one or two of the hidden principles, the first being that combinations of sound can be broken down into numbers, and the second is that these numbers, when simplified to their basic values, correspond to one of the planets.

215By the use of the universal alphabet of sound, known as the Phonetic Values, and which apply to all languages the world over, we may take the name of any person, animal or thing which is in evidence at a particular time and prove that its name value corresponds with the planet ruling the Period in force at the time. Let us put it to the test once more.

215Using the universal alphabet of sound, known as the Phonetic Values, which applies to all languages around the world, we can take the name of any person, animal, or object that exists at a specific moment and show that its name value matches the planet that rules the current Period. Let’s test this out once again.

I do not know and should have difficulty in finding the names of persons who met with some distinction on the 18th October in the year 1911, but I do know that certain animals bearing distinctive names gained distinction by winning races at Gatwick on that particular day, and faute de mieux I will make use of them.

I don’t know and would have a hard time finding the names of people who achieved some recognition on October 18, 1911, but I do know that certain animals with unique names gained fame by winning races at Gatwick that day, and I’ll use them instead.

The first race was at 1.49. This was the Hour of the Moon and the Period of Saturn. Therefore we must look for the numbers 1 or 8. It was won by Tucker—4222-10-1.

The first race was at 1:49. This was the Hour of the Moon and the Period of Saturn. So we need to look for the numbers 1 or 8. It was won by Tucker—4222-10-1.

The second event took place at 2.18, which is the same Hour of the Moon and the Period of Venus. We must therefore look for 3 or 6. The race was won by Acsu—1266-15-6.

The second event happened at 2:18, which is the same hour as the Moon and the period of Venus. So, we need to consider 3 or 6. The race was won by Acsu—1266-15-6.

The third event was at 2.48, in the Hour of Saturn and the Period of Mars. We look, therefore, for 5 or 9. The event was won by Lespedesa—316814171-32-5.

The third event was at 2:48, during the Hour of Saturn and the Period of Mars. We can expect 5 or 9. Lespedesa won the event—316814171-32-5.

The fourth event took place at 3.15, which is the Hour of Saturn and the Period of Moon. We must look for a 2 or 7. It was won by Peristyle—8126413-25-7.

The fourth event happened at 3:15, which is the Hour of Saturn and the Period of Moon. We need to look for a 2 or 7. It was won by Peristyle—8126413-25-7.

The fifth event was at 3.46, which is the Hour of 216Jupiter and the Period of Venus. We must therefore look for 3 or 6. The event was won by Wilfrid—63824—23—5. This does not harmonize, but we may note that Venus was in the sign Virgo, ruled by Mercury—5.

The fifth event occurred at 3:46, which corresponds to the Hour of 216 Jupiter and the Period of Venus. So, we should focus on 3 or 6. The event was won by Wilfrid—63824—23—5. This doesn’t match up, but we can mention that Venus was in the sign of Virgo, which is ruled by Mercury—5.

The last event was at 4.16, in the Hour of Mars and the end of the Period of Mars or the beginning of that of Sun. The latter gives us the number 4 or 1. The event was won by Gadfly—214831—19—10—1.

The last event was at 4:16, during the Hour of Mars and at the end of the Mars Period or the start of the Sun Period. The latter gives us the number 4 or 1. The event was won by Gadfly—214831—19—10—1.

Here we see that without the slightest equivocation or deviation from the principle of evaluation of sounds already laid down, we obtain five direct responses out of six tests.

Here we see that without any hesitation or changes to the established principle of evaluating sounds, we get five direct responses out of six tests.

Let us go on to the next day at Sandown, when the day being Thursday, and the sunset about the same time, the 8th Hour will be ruled by Jupiter and the beginnings of the Hours will be—

Let’s move on to the next day at Sandown, which is Thursday, and since the sunset is around the same time, the 8th Hour will be governed by Jupiter and the beginnings of the Hours will be—

Jupiter Mars Sun Venus Mercury
12.50 1.40 2.30 3.20 4.10

The Periods can be filled in as occasion requires.

The periods can be filled in as needed.

The first event was at 1.30, and in the Hour of Jupiter and Period of Saturn. We therefore look for distinction to fall to one whose name is of value 1 or 8. The winner was Wild Duck—63422-17—8.

The first event was at 1:30, during the Hour of Jupiter and the Period of Saturn. So, we expect the winner to have a name associated with the numbers 1 or 8. The winner was Wild Duck—63422-17—8.

The second event, at 2.5, was in the Hour of Mars and the Period of Mercury. The number will therefore be 9 or 5. The winner was Myriad—41214-12—3. This is irregular, but it is seen that Mercury was then in the sign Libra, ruled by Venus, negative 3.

The second event, at 2.5, took place during the Hour of Mars and the Period of Mercury. Therefore, the number will be 9 or 5. The winner was Myriad—41214-12—3. This is unusual, but it's clear that Mercury was then in the sign Libra, which is ruled by Venus, negative 3.

217The third event was at 2.30, in the Hour of Sun and Period of Sun. We must expect 4 or 1 to win. The event was won by Runnymede—2251414-19-1.

217The third event took place at 2:30 PM, during the Hour of Sun and Period of Sun. We should anticipate either 4 or 1 to win. The event was won by Runnymede—2251414-19-1.

The fourth event was at 3.7, in the Hour of Sun and the Period of Jupiter. We look therefore, for 6 or 3. The event was won by Sobieski—6621621-24-6.

The fourth event was at 3.7, in the Hour of Sun and the Period of Jupiter. We look therefore, for 6 or 3. The event was won by Sobieski—6621621-24-6.

The fifth event was at 3.38, and fell in the Hour of Jupiter and the Period of Moon, but verging on that of Saturn. The numbers of Moon are 2 and 7. The event was won by Jessica—31621-13-4. This may be regarded as an exception.

The fifth event took place at 3:38, during the Hour of Jupiter and the Period of Moon, but leaning towards that of Saturn. The numbers for the Moon are 2 and 7. Jessica won the event—31621-13-4. This can be seen as an exception.

The last event was at 4.2, in the Hour of Venus and the Period of Sun. The event should fall to 4 or 1. It was won by Pretiva—821461-22-4.

The last event was at 4.2, during the Hour of Venus and the Period of Sun. The event should happen at 4 or 1. It was won by Pretiva—821461-22-4.

Here again we have four out of six results in strict conformity with the rules of the Kabala of Numbers. It is not necessary to go further in this demonstration. Taking all the factors into account, the odds against nine out of twelve events coinciding with the requirements of the Law of Vibrations are enormous.

Here again, we have four out of six results that strictly follow the rules of the Kabala of Numbers. There's no need to continue this explanation. Considering all the factors, the chances of nine out of twelve events meeting the criteria of the Law of Vibrations are extremely low.

The practical use to which we could put such information as this law affords, is in the regulation of our efforts by the time factor. A person whose name is of value 8 must not look for success in the hour that is governed by Mars. He is sure to be cut out by one whose number is 9 if it is between sunrise and noon, or by one whose number is 5 if it is between noon and sunset. Similarly at other times. The putting forth of our highest powers is of little effect in this sublunary world unless we do 218so intelligently and in agreement with the Law of Astral Vibration. Moreover, a Mars man should not concern himself with things that belong to Jupiter, nor one under Saturn with those that are governed by Mars. An aviator or motorist who puts a number on his machine and sets it going in a Planetary Period that is at variance with the vibrations of that number, is asking for trouble. Where there is danger of accident the Periods of Mars and Saturn should be avoided, while those of Venus, Jupiter, and either the Sun or Moon when well aspected, should be chosen. By bringing ourselves into accord with natural operations we share in Nature’s power and efficiency. It is what the ancients called the “Covert Agreement.” The fact of your having penetrated the secret of the gods enables you to claim their protection. The Masters of Wisdom are in league with Nature for the protection and benefit of mankind. This is what I have elsewhere referred to as the Divine Conspiracy.

The practical use of the information provided by this law is to guide our efforts based on timing. A person whose name is valuable must avoid seeking success during the hours controlled by Mars. They will surely be overshadowed by someone with a number 9 if it's between sunrise and noon, or by someone with a number 5 if it's between noon and sunset. The same applies at other times. Putting our best efforts into action won’t have much impact in this world unless we do so intelligently and in line with the Law of Astral Vibration. Furthermore, a Mars person shouldn’t get involved with matters ruled by Jupiter, nor should someone under Saturn focus on those governed by Mars. An aviator or driver who assigns a number to their vehicle and starts it during a Planetary Period that conflicts with that number's vibrations is inviting trouble. During times of potential accidents, it's best to avoid the periods of Mars and Saturn, while choosing those of Venus, Jupiter, and either the Sun or Moon when positively aligned. By aligning ourselves with natural forces, we tap into Nature’s power and effectiveness. This is what the ancients called the “Covert Agreement.” Discovering the secrets of the gods allows you to seek their protection. The Masters of Wisdom work in harmony with Nature for the protection and benefit of humanity. This is what I’ve referred to elsewhere as the Divine Conspiracy.

219

CHAPTER XXII
THE EQUALIZATION OF EPOCHS

A considerable importance attaches to the proper understanding of Epochs, so that when a statement is made in terms of one Epoch we should be able to refer it at once to another with which we are familiar. There are several astronomical Epochs of this nature which are frequently used and ought to be known. Those who are interested in tracing the astral cause of events often find themselves debarred from research through ignorance regarding the data employed. Much of this trouble can be overcome by the determination and equalization of Epochs.

A significant importance is placed on properly understanding Epochs, so that when we make a statement using one Epoch, we can immediately relate it to another one we're familiar with. There are several astronomical Epochs like this that are commonly used and should be understood. Those interested in studying the astrological causes of events often find themselves unable to research due to a lack of knowledge about the data being used. Much of this issue can be resolved by determining and standardizing the Epochs.

Ptolemy, to whom we are indebted for a great number of scientific statements in addition to his astronomical observations and those of Hipparchus which he has preserved to us, makes use of two important Epochs. The first is that of Nabonasser. The first year of his reign was in the year 747 B.C., and the month Thoth began on the 26th February in that year. Hence Nab. 1, Thoth 1 constitutes an Epoch equivalent to Feb. 26, 747 B.C. But this latter is the secular date and the astronomical is one less, namely, 746 B.C. The reason for this is that the secular date A.D. 1 passes 220directly to the year 1 B.C., when counting backwards, whereas the astronomical account makes A.D. 1 refer back to A.D. 0, and then to 1 B.C. Hence all dates before the Christian Era are given in secular accounts as one year more than the astronomical. Now as to the Egyptian months used by Ptolemy. These were—

Ptolemy, to whom we owe a lot of scientific knowledge in addition to his astronomical observations and those of Hipparchus that he has preserved for us, uses two significant epochs. The first is that of Nabonassar. The first year of his reign began in 747 B.C., with the month Thoth starting on February 26 of that year. Therefore, Nab. 1, Thoth 1 marks an epoch equivalent to February 26, 747 B.C. However, this is the secular date, while the astronomical date is one year earlier, namely, 746 B.C. The reason for this is that the secular date A.D. 1 goes directly to the year 1 B.C. when counting backward, while the astronomical system makes A.D. 1 refer back to A.D. 0 and then to 1 B.C. Thus, all dates before the Christian Era are presented in secular accounts as one year more than in astronomical ones. Now regarding the Egyptian months used by Ptolemy. These were—

1. Thoth February.
2. Paophi March.
3. Athyr April.
4. Choiac May.
5. Tybi June.
6. Mechir July.
7. Phamenoth August.
8. Pharmuthi September.
9. Pachon October.
10. Payni November.
11. Epiphi December.
12. Mesori January.

Each month contained thirty days, and there were five days at the end of the year which they called the Epagomene. The year began at noon on the first of Thoth.

Each month had thirty days, and there were five extra days at the end of the year that they called the Epagomene. The year started at noon on the first of Thoth.

Another Epoch used by Ptolemy, and frequently referred to by the Greeks, is that of Calippus. The Calippic Period was invented by the man whose name it bears and dates to the year 330 B.C. It is a period of 76 years, which is four times 19, and was designed to bring the new and full moons to the same date of the solar year.

Another era that Ptolemy used, and that the Greeks often mentioned, is the one defined by Calippus. The Calippic Period was created by the man it's named after and starts in 330 B.C. It lasts for 76 years, which is four times 19, and was intended to align the new and full moons on the same date of the solar year.

The Olympiads were in use among the Greeks, and began in the year 776 B.C., on the 1st July (O.S.). Each Olympiad consists of four years, and in marking a date the number of the Olympiad and the year of that Olympiad are given. Thus the first of Calippus would fall in the third year of the 112th Olympiad. 221The astronomical years equivalent to these are, for the Olympiads 775 B.C., and for the Calippic Period 329 B.C.

The Olympiads were celebrated by the Greeks, starting in 776 B.C. on the 1st of July (Old Style). Each Olympiad lasts four years, and when marking a date, the number of the Olympiad and the year within that Olympiad are noted. So, for example, the first of Calippus would be in the third year of the 112th Olympiad. The corresponding astronomical years for these are 775 B.C. for the Olympiads and 329 B.C. for the Calippic Period.

The Kali Yuga is an Indian Epoch which began at the New Moon of February 3102 B.C.Feb. 5th. The Epoch of Salivahana in use among the Dravidians of India is the year A.D. 78.

The Kali Yuga is an Indian era that started on the New Moon of February 3102 B.C.—Feb. 5th. The Epoch of Salivahana, used by the Dravidians of India, is the year A.D. 78.

The Chinese Cycle of years began in the year 2696 B.C. (astronomical), at the New Moon of February, the Sun being then half-way between the Solstice and the Equinox.

The Chinese Cycle of years started in 2696 BCE (astronomical), during the New Moon in February, with the Sun positioned halfway between the Solstice and the Equinox.

But even when we have the Epochs equalized there are difficulties depending from this determination of Epoch. This is particularly the case with the Indian calendarics. They have in India a solar year divided into solar months, and a lunar year which is divided into lunar months. Thus the first of Mesham is that point of time when the Sun enters the first point of the constellation Mesham. This is about the 12th April. But the first of As’wini is the day of New Moon in the constellation As’wini, and this, of course, is a variable date, depending on the position of the New Moon in relation to the first point of Mesham.

But even when we have the epochs aligned, there are still challenges stemming from this determination of epochs. This is especially true for the Indian calendars. In India, there is a solar year divided into solar months, and a lunar year that is divided into lunar months. So, the first of Mesham is when the Sun enters the first point of the constellation Mesham, which is around April 12th. However, the first of Aszhaku is the day of the New Moon in the constellation As

But whatever may be the date given in terms of the Indian Calendar, before we can apply it we have to know in what relations our zodiac stand to theirs. They have a fixed point from which they make their calculations. This is Zeta Piscium, which marks the beginning of the constellations, and it corresponds with the first of Mesham, or the Sun’s ingress to the constellation Aries. We, on the other hand, 222count from the Vernal Equinox, the point at which the Sun crosses the Equator in the spring. This point, in relation to the fixed constellations, is continually shifting westward at the rate of about 50´´ per year, and this is what is known as the precession of the Equinoxes.

But no matter what date is given in the Indian Calendar, before we can use it, we need to understand how our zodiac relates to theirs. They have a fixed point for their calculations, which is Zeta Piscium, marking the start of the constellations, and it aligns with the first day of Mesham, or the Sun’s entry into the constellation Aries. In contrast, we count from the Vernal Equinox, the point where the Sun crosses the Equator in spring. This point, in relation to the fixed constellations, is constantly moving westward at about 50'' per year, which is known as the precession of the Equinoxes. 222

The point we have to make is the relation of the Equinox to the first point of Mesham. The difference is what is called Ayanámsha. The difficulty in the matter of calculation has been—(a) the exact rate of precession during past centuries, which has only been determined in comparatively recent years, and (b) the unsatisfactory condition of Indian astronomical data. But these latter, with the advance of more exact methods in modern centres of Indian learning, have been considerably improved, and it is now justifiably possible to attempt an equalization of the two astronomical Epochs.

The main point we need to address is the connection between the Equinox and the first point of Mesham. The difference is known as Ayanámsha. The challenge with the calculations has been—(a) the precise rate of precession over the past centuries, which has only been accurately determined in recent years, and (b) the inadequate state of Indian astronomical data. However, with advancements in more precise methods in modern Indian educational institutions, this data has improved significantly, making it reasonable to attempt to reconcile the two astronomical epochs.

Very much depends on this, for it is quite impossible to study the Indian astrological literature without being able to refer their quantities to terms of our modern Western ephemerides or astronomical tables. When, for instance, the Indian books say that a certain yoga or conjunctions of planets in Kumbha means a particular thing, or has a particular signification, they mean the constellation Aquarius, and it will depend on the relations of this constellation to our corresponding sign Aquarius, as to what we are to understand. Also in the determination of the various periods depending on the Moon’s longitude at an Epoch, such 223as that of birth, we have to convert the Moon’s longitude into terms of our zodiac before we can apply their interpretations, or synchronize the periods with our own calendar. I have therefore agitated for a long time past for a thorough examination of the matter, and in despair of collaboration in other directions I applied to Dr. V. V. Ramanan of Madras, one of the most distinguished pandits of Southern India, and found in him a most useful and able exponent of ancient Indian learning.

A lot hinges on this because it's really hard to study Indian astrological literature without being able to relate their quantities to our modern Western ephemerides or astronomical tables. When the Indian texts say that a specific yoga or planetary conjunction in Kumbha has a certain meaning or significance, they're referring to the constellation Aquarius. Understanding this will depend on how that constellation relates to our corresponding sign, Aquarius. Additionally, to determine the various periods based on the Moon’s longitude at a specific point in time, like at birth, we need to convert the Moon’s longitude to match our zodiac before we can use their interpretations or align the periods with our calendar. I've been advocating for a thorough review of this issue for a long time. Out of frustration with the lack of collaboration from other sources, I reached out to Dr. V. V. Ramanan from Madras, one of the most respected scholars in Southern India, and found in him a highly knowledgeable and capable interpreter of ancient Indian scholarship.

The first attempt at a determination of the Epoch or point of time when the Equinox coincided with the first point of Mesham was from a comparison of the length of the solar year as given in the Suryasiddhanta and the value given in the best European works. It is seen that the Indian year is longer than the European estimate by 3 min. 20·4 sec.

The first attempt to determine the Epoch or the moment when the Equinox matched up with the first point of Mesham was based on comparing the length of the solar year in the Suryasiddhanta with the value provided in the best European studies. It shows that the Indian year is longer than the European estimate by 3 min. 20.4 sec.

Now it is said that the Sun entered the sign Mesham in the year 1900 at 30 ghatikas 50 vighatikas after sunrise at Ujjain, on the 12th April. This equals 12th April, at 1 hr. 31 min. 28 sec. p.m., Greenwich mean time. The Sun’s longitude was then 22° 11´ 4´´ from the Vernal Equinox, and this divided by the mean rate of precession yields 1594 years, which taken from 1900 gives A.D. 306 as the Epoch. Let us check this result.

Now it is said that the Sun entered the sign Aries in the year 1900 at 30 ghatikas and 50 vighatikas after sunrise at Ujjain, on the 12th April. This equals 12th April, at 1 hr. 31 min. 28 sec. p.m., Greenwich mean time. The Sun’s longitude was then 22° 11´ 4´´ from the Vernal Equinox, and this divided by the mean rate of precession yields 1594 years, which taken from 1900 gives CE 306 as the Epoch. Let us check this result.

We have seen that the Indian year is estimated at 3 min. 20·4 sec. more than the European. If then we multiply this amount by 1594, the number of years since the Epoch, we shall have 3 days 16 hrs. 45 min. 37·6 sec. as the total increment. The Sun in this time moves at a mean rate 3° 38´ 43´´, 224and as this amount represents the excess of the Indian solar year over the European during 1594 years, we should take it from 22° 11´ 4´´ in order to obtain the true difference in longitude between the Vernal Equinox and Mesham 0° in the year 1900. This leaves 18° 33´ 21´´, which, being divided by the mean rate of precession 50·1´´, gives 1335 years. Allowing for the difference of the Sun’s anomaly and the consequent increase of longitude, we should make the longitude 19° 4´ 7´´ and the Epoch 1372 years, which would give the year A.D. 528, as compared with A.D. 306 by the former calculation.

We have found that the Indian year is estimated to be 3 minutes 20.4 seconds longer than the European year. If we multiply this difference by 1594, the number of years since the Epoch, we get a total of 3 days 16 hours 45 minutes 37.6 seconds as the total increment. During this time, the Sun moves at an average rate of 3° 38′ 43″, and since this amount represents the excess of the Indian solar year over the European for 1594 years, we should subtract it from 22° 11′ 4″ to find the true difference in longitude between the Vernal Equinox and Mesham 0° in the year 1900. This results in 18° 33′ 21″, which, when divided by the average rate of precession of 50.1″, gives 1335 years. Taking into account the difference of the Sun’s anomaly and the resulting increase in longitude, we should adjust the longitude to 19° 4′ 7″ and the Epoch to 1372 years, which would correspond to the year A.D. 528, compared to A.D. 306 by the earlier calculation.

This clearly shows that there is some miscalculation in the Ujjain estimate of the Sun’s ingress, and I am confirmed in this by a note from Dr. Ramanan in which he says that “According to Bhaskaracharya in his Graha-ganitádhyáya, the Vernal Equinox of Kali Yuga 3628 (A.D. 527), coincided with the starting-point of the Hindu ecliptic.” He adds that “the so-called fixed Indian Zodiac is not thought to be really fixed, but is subject to a slow motion of about 8´´ per year eastwards. The zero point of Indian longitude is thus subject to a slight annual displacement, and this motion is a practical postulate of Hindu Siddhántas.”

This clearly shows that there is some error in the Ujjain estimate of the Sun’s entry, and I am supported in this by a note from Dr. Ramanan, in which he states that “According to Bhaskaracharya in his Graha-ganitádhyáya, the Vernal Equinox of Kali Yuga 3628 (AD 527) coincided with the starting point of the Hindu ecliptic.” He adds that “the so-called fixed Indian Zodiac is not really fixed but is subject to a slow motion of about 8'' per year eastwards. The zero point of Indian longitude is thus subject to a slight annual displacement, and this motion is a practical postulate of Hindu Siddhántas.”

But so far we have based all our calculations on estimates made from the Hindu Siddhánta and not from modern observations. Necessarily correct evaluations made from the same source would work out to the same figures, and it is therefore important that we should again check the results by reference to modern sources.

But up until now, we've based all our calculations on estimates from the Hindu Siddhánta and not from modern observations. Accurate evaluations derived from the same source would yield the same figures, so it’s crucial that we check the results again against modern sources.

225In the Panchángam for Kumbakonam 1912 it is stated that the Sun enters Vrishabham (constellation Taurus) on 13th May at 36 gh. 5 vigh. after sunrise.

225In the Panchángam for Kumbakonam 1912, it mentions that the Sun enters Vrishabham (the constellation Taurus) on May 13th at 36 gh. 5 vigh. after sunrise.

Sunrise at Kumbakonam, Lat. 11° North, on this date—
Tan. log. of 11 degs. 9·28865 For lat. 51° 30´ 0·09939
Sun’s decl. 6 a.m., 18.18 9·51946 9·51946
———————— ———————
Sine log., 3° 41´ 18·80811 Sine log., 24° 34´ 9·61885
less 3° 41´
———————
20° 53´
4
—————————
83m. 32s.—1h. 23m. 32s.

This represents the difference of sunrise due to latitude. That is to say, a place in 11° North latitude, and on the same meridian as Greenwich, would have its sunrise 1 hr. 24 min. later than Greenwich on the 13th May, 1912. Now the sunrise on this date at Greenwich was at 4 hrs. 13 min. a.m., and therefore at Kumbakonam the sunrise would be at 5 hrs. 37 min. a.m.

This shows the difference in sunrise times based on latitude. In other words, a location at 11° North latitude, on the same meridian as Greenwich, would experience sunrise 1 hr. 24 min. later than Greenwich on May 13, 1912. On that date, the sunrise in Greenwich was at 4 hrs. 13 min. a.m., so in Kumbakonam, sunrise would be at 5 hrs. 37 min. a.m.

The longitude of Kumbakonam is 5 hrs. 18 min. east of Greenwich, and the equivalent Greenwich time of sunrise at Kumbakonam will be G.M.T., 0 hr. 19 min. a.m.

The longitude of Kumbakonam is 5 hrs. 18 min. east of Greenwich, and the corresponding Greenwich time for sunrise in Kumbakonam will be G.M.T., 0 hr. 19 min. a.m.

The Sun’s longitude at this time according to the Greenwich ephemeris is 1s. 21° 51´ 57´´, which we may call Taurus 21° 52´. This, therefore, represents the Indian estimate of the present value of Ayanámsha.

The Sun's longitude right now, based on the Greenwich ephemeris, is 1s. 21° 51' 57'', which we can refer to as Taurus 21° 52'. This represents the Indian assessment of the current value of Ayanámsha.

The mean rate of Equinoctial Precession for the past eighteen centuries being 50·1´´ per year, we must divide 21° 52´ by this amount of precession to 226obtain the year of coincidence. The result is 1571 years, which, being taken from the present year 1912, gives the year A.D. 341 as that in which the two zodiacs coincided. But by taking the actual precession for 1912 and the increment for t years where t equals 1571 - 62, or 1509 years, we have the actual precession as equal to 50´´ per year nearly, and 21° 52´ divided by 50´´ is 1574, the years to be taken from 1912, which gives the year A.D. 338. According to our estimate of the rate of precession, therefore, the Epoch will vary between A.D. 338 and 341. In round numbers, therefore, we may regard the year A.D. 340 as that of the coincidence of the zodiacs, and the number of years since elapsed multiplied by the mean rate of 50·1´´ will give the increment known as Ayanámsha for any date since the Epoch.

The average rate of Equinoctial Precession over the last eighteen centuries is 50.1 arc seconds per year. To find the year of coincidence, we need to divide 21° 52′ by this precession rate. The result is 1571 years, which when subtracted from the current year 1912, brings us to the year A.D. 341, marking the time when the two zodiacs aligned. However, if we consider the actual precession for 1912 and the increase for t years, where t equals 1571 - 62, or 1509 years, we find the actual precession to be nearly 50 arc seconds per year. Dividing 21° 52′ by 50 arc seconds gives us 1574, which when taken from 1912, results in the year A.D. 338. Thus, according to our estimate of the precession rate, the Epoch will fall between A.D. 338 and 341. In simpler terms, we can consider the year A.D. 340 as the year of the zodiac coincidence, and multiplying the number of years since then by the average rate of 50.1 arc seconds will yield the increment known as Ayanámsha for any date after the Epoch.

But I find an entry in the Ephemeris of Kumbakonam to this effect.

But I found a note in the Kumbakonam Ephemeris that says this.

“Mean amount of precession at commencement of K.Y. 5014 (A.D. 1912), 22° 27´ 20´´. Rate of precession, 50·26´´.”

“Average amount of precession at the start of K.Y. 5014 (CE 1912) is 22° 27' 20''. The rate of precession is 50.26''. ”

Now if we divide the above amount of precession by the rate we shall get 1612 years, which would give the Epoch A.D. 300, whereas, as we have seen, other data in the Ephemeris lead us to the year A.D. 340. Now I have checked the Kumbakonam Ephemeris, and find that so far as the Solar ingresses are concerned they agree with the Nautical Almanac, and there would therefore appear to be no reasonable doubt that if the true amount of precession is here given, the true Epoch for the 227coincidence of the zodiacs has been found. But I am advised by Dr. V. V. Ramanan that there is an increment not generally recognized by either the Indian or European astronomers, but which is nevertheless an essential part of the calculation. It is that of the progression of the asterisms or constellations from west to east, along the order of the signs at the rate of 8´´ per year, to which I have already referred in an extract from one of his valuable letters. If, therefore, we add this 8´´ to the annual precession 50·1´´, we shall have 58·1´´ as the total precession of the Equinoxes on the first point of As’wini, and then if we further divide the amount of precession for the year 1912 as given in the Panchángam, namely, 22° 27´ 20´´ by 58·1´´, we shall get 1390 years, which taken from 1912 yields the year of coincidence A.D. 521.

Now, if we divide the amount of precession mentioned above by the rate, we will get 1612 years, which would establish the Epoch as A.D. 300. However, as we’ve seen, other data in the Ephemeris indicates the year A.D. 340. I have also checked the Kumbakonam Ephemeris and found that, as far as the Solar ingresses are concerned, they align with the Nautical Almanac. Therefore, it seems reasonable to conclude that if the true amount of precession is correctly stated, we have identified the true Epoch for the coincidence of the zodiacs. However, Dr. V. V. Ramanan has informed me that there is an increment not typically acknowledged by either Indian or European astronomers, but it is an essential part of the calculation. This increment refers to the progression of the asterisms or constellations from west to east at a rate of 8'' per year, which I have already mentioned in an excerpt from one of his valuable letters. Thus, if we add this 8'' to the annual precession of 50.1'', we arrive at a total precession of 58.1'' for the Equinoxes on the first point of Asיניים. Then, if we divide the amount of precession for the year 1912, as given in the Panchángam, specifically 22° 27' 20'', by 58.1'', we will get 1390 years, which subtracted from 1912 gives us the year of coincidence A.D. 521.

From various sources, therefore, we have the years A.D. 300, 306, 338, 527, 528 and 521. The former dates take account only of the precession of the Equinoxes on a fixed zodiac, whereas the latter take into account also a direct motion of this so-called “fixed” zodiac which amounts to 8´´ per year, and which has to be applied to the precession. It is further to be observed that the Epochs 338 and 306, variously derived above, are unified by the adoption of 58·1´´ as the total annual precession of the Equinoxes on the first point of As’wini. It needs but quotation of authority for this increment of 8´´ in order to establish the date of zodiacal coincidence beyond disputation, at all events within the limits of a very few years.

From various sources, we have the years A.D. 300, 306, 338, 527, 528, and 521. The earlier dates only consider the movement of the Equinoxes on a fixed zodiac, while the later ones also consider a direct movement of this so-called "fixed" zodiac, which is about 8 seconds per year, and this needs to be added to the precession. It's also important to note that the Epochs 338 and 306, derived above, are unified by using 58.1 seconds as the total annual precession of the Equinoxes at the first point of Aries. Just quoting an authority for this increase of 8 seconds is enough to confirm the date of zodiacal coincidence without dispute, at least within a few years.

228The above questions have an historical interest. Varahamihira, who mentions the coincidence of the solstices with the cardinal constellations Makaram and Katakam as having taken place in his day, has not been finally placed by the chronologists. Astronomical notes made by him have chiefly been used for this purpose, and the writing of his book the Brihat-samhita, in which the above note occurs, is on these grounds fixed at A.D. 505.

228The questions above are historically significant. Varahamihira, who notes that the solstices aligned with the cardinal constellations Makaram and Katakam during his time, has not been definitively dated by chronologists. His astronomical observations have mostly been used for this purpose, and the date of his book, the Brihat-samhita, where this note appears, is therefore set at CE 505.

But then we have to remember that Mihira speaks only in general terms when he refers to the coincidence of the zodiacs. He had no instruments which would have enabled him to make a close observation, but he could make certain approximations from the meridian transit of some of the chief stars in the constellations. We have no reason, therefore, to expect more than an approximate agreement of the date of Mihira with that of the true coincidence of the zodiacs. The Graha Laghava, which is in general use in India, gives this latter as A.D. 522 or 444 Shaka.

But we need to remember that Mihira talks about the coincidence of the zodiacs in very general terms. He didn't have any instruments that would have allowed him to make precise observations, but he could make some approximate calculations based on the meridian transit of certain key stars in the constellations. So, we shouldn't expect more than an approximate alignment of Mihira's date with the actual coincidence of the zodiacs. The Graha Laghava, which is widely used in India, gives this later date as A.D. 522 or 444 Shaka.

The Shaka Epoch is known to be A.D. 78. Dr. V. V. Ramanan gives reasons for accepting the year A.D. 525. In the present state of the controversy I see no reason against this Epoch.

The Shaka Era is recognized as A.D. 78. Dr. V. V. Ramanan provides reasons for accepting the year A.D. 525. Given the current state of the debate, I see no reason to dispute this Era.

229

CHAPTER XXIII
LUNAR INFLUENCE

The average notion of the Moon’s action is that it affects the tides and lunatics. Beyond this the popular encyclopedia does not go, and the average man himself is not observant of anything in Nature except the way of his fellow-man.

The common belief about the Moon is that it influences the tides and crazy people. Beyond this, the general encyclopedia doesn’t offer much more, and the average person doesn’t pay attention to anything in Nature except how others act.

A little study, however, will show that the Moon, while influencing the tides, affects also all fluidic life on the globe. It appreciably affects the sap-cells of plants and trees. It exerts a direct influence on blood pressure in the animal body, and consequently affects the brain and nervous system of human beings, and excites a variety of passions and impulses which are but remotely connected with the lunar orb itself.

A bit of study, however, will reveal that the Moon, while influencing the tides, also affects all fluid life on Earth. It significantly impacts the sap-cells of plants and trees. It has a direct effect on blood pressure in animals, which in turn affects the brain and nervous system of humans, stirring up various passions and impulses that are only loosely related to the Moon itself.

It may even be a fact that on account of the observed influence of the Moon upon the physical system of man, the ancients said that it ruled “the populace,” and made of it a common significator of public affairs. For it must be remembered that the belief in lunar influence in mundane affairs, ordinarily presumed to be of human origination and under human control, was prevalent before the days of printing and encyclopædic knowledge, possibly 230before the art of writing was invented, and men then depended entirely on their powers of observation for whatever knowledge they had. As many of the ancient astronomical statements will show, their powers of observation were almost the equal of our scientific instruments. Thus Dr. Pouchet rightly says: “Hipparchus and Ptolemy had no instruments to scrutinize the heavens with. The astronomers of the Renaissance, such as Regiomontanus, Copernicus, Tycho Brahe, and Kepler, were scarcely more favoured, and yet how many immortal discoveries do we owe to them! They seem with their lynx eyes to have seen or divined everything!”

It might actually be true that because of the identified influence of the Moon on the physical system of humans, ancient people said it governed “the populace,” making it a common symbol of public affairs. It’s important to remember that the belief in the Moon's influence on worldly matters, which was usually thought to stem from human origins and be under human control, was widespread before the invention of printing and encyclopedic knowledge, possibly even before writing was created. At that time, people relied solely on their observational skills for whatever knowledge they possessed. As many ancient astronomical claims illustrate, their observational abilities were nearly on par with our scientific instruments. So Dr. Pouchet accurately states: “Hipparchus and Ptolemy had no tools to examine the heavens with. The astronomers of the Renaissance, like Regiomontanus, Copernicus, Tycho Brahe, and Kepler, were hardly better off, yet how many incredible discoveries do we owe to them! They seem to have seen or sensed everything with their sharp eyesight!”

They observed not only the courses of the stars and planets as well as those of the luminaries, but what is of more human interest, they watched the effects that these bodies had upon the course of human events and upon nations and persons. That the Moon influenced the weather was the logical deduction from the fact of its influence upon the waters of the earth. For obviously the Moon must not only be water-lifter, but also a cloud-lifter, and its effects upon the atmosphere itself must be in proportion to the saturation point of the air from hour to hour according to the incidence of its rays. Only when all meteorological methods have failed to indicate the kind of weather we are likely to have, to predict the kind of summer we shall have, or even to explain such as we have, then men throw about for new ideas, and frequently manage to seize upon old ones. This of the Moon’s influence on the weather is one such.

They observed not just the paths of the stars and planets, as well as the movements of celestial bodies, but what’s more relevant to humanity, they noticed how these entities impacted human events and influenced nations and individuals. It was a logical conclusion that the Moon affected the weather, given its influence on Earth’s waters. Clearly, the Moon must not only lift water but also affect clouds, and its impact on the atmosphere itself should vary depending on the humidity levels at different times, influenced by its rays. When all weather forecasting methods fail to show what kind of weather we can expect, to predict our summer, or even to explain the current conditions, people start searching for new ideas and often stumble upon old ones. The Moon’s effect on the weather is one of those old ideas.

231I have this following note of intelligence from the Daily Mail of the 14th August last: “The tides follow the Moon; local weather conditions are indisputably affected by the tides. Scientific meteorologists no doubt laugh the belief to scorn, but observers who are not scientific can produce sufficient data to prove that a change of weather coinciding with a change of the Moon is usually lasting.” The Daily Mail is right. But unfortunately the theory of the Moon’s influence on the weather has been badly distorted since the learned and observant Dr. Clark took the matter in hand and formulated a theory based on observations conducted over a very long period.

231I have the following note of information from the Daily Mail dated 14th August: “The tides follow the Moon; local weather conditions are definitely influenced by the tides. Scientific meteorologists might scoff at this belief, but non-scientific observers can provide enough evidence to show that a change in weather often aligns with a change in the Moon.” The Daily Mail is correct. However, the theory of the Moon’s impact on the weather has been significantly misrepresented since the knowledgeable and observant Dr. Clark examined the issue and developed a theory based on long-term observations.

His theory goes to show that the Moon does not act directly upon the weather, but by a tidal action upon the Earth’s atmospheric envelope, which accordingly depends upon the time of the Moon’s syzygies and quadratures. It is this time-factor that has been overlooked and neglected. Reduced to a single sentence, the lunar theory may be stated as follows:—The nearer to midnight any phase of the Moon may occur, the finer will be the weather during the ensuing week, and consequently the nearer to midday it may occur, the more humid will be the weather. The barometer which shows the atmospheric pressure at a mean altitude will consequently be affected in terms of the above statements, and as it ranges from 28° to 30° over these islands, we may also indicate the state of the barometer from the Moon’s phases. For it will be seen that, so long as there is but moderate wind, the barometer will answer to the Moon’s 232phases in harmony with the weather. Very strong winds without rainfall will affect the barometer and register a fall. I have endeavoured to embody the whole of this theory of the Moon’s action on the weather in a single diagram.

His theory shows that the Moon doesn't directly influence the weather, but instead affects the Earth's atmosphere through tidal actions. This influence depends on the timing of the Moon’s syzygies and quadratures, which has often been overlooked. In simple terms, the lunar theory states: the closer to midnight any phase of the Moon occurs, the better the weather will be in the following week. Conversely, the closer to midday it happens, the more humid the weather will be. The barometer, which measures atmospheric pressure at a standard altitude, will also reflect these patterns based on the Moon’s phases. It can be noted that as long as the wind is moderate, the barometer will correspond to the Moon’s phases in sync with the weather. However, very strong winds without rain will cause the barometer to drop. I have tried to summarize this entire theory regarding the Moon's impact on the weather in a single diagram.

Figure 26.

Figure 26.

Figure 26.

In attempting to account for a very wet summer in the year 1912, and a record downfall of rain in the month of August, I shall have to refer to the times of the phases of the Moon since the solstice. Here are the dates and times, taken from the Ephemeris of Greenwich.

In trying to explain a very rainy summer in 1912, with a record amount of rain in August, I need to mention the phases of the Moon since the solstice. Here are the dates and times, taken from the Ephemeris of Greenwich.

233
June 21. First Quarter 8.39 p.m. Fair.
” 29. Full Moon 1.34 p.m. Wet. Stormy.
July 7. Last Quarter 4.47 p.m. Unsettled.
” 14. New Moon 1.13 p.m. Wet. Stormy.
” 21. First Quarter 5.18 a.m. Change.
” 29. Full Moon 4.28 a.m. Change.
Aug. 6. Last Quarter 4.18 a.m. Change.
” 12. New Moon 7.58 p.m. Change to Fair.
” 19. First Quarter 4.57 p.m. Unsettled.
” 29. Full Moon 7.59 p.m. Change to Fair.

Here there are indications of plenty of variable and changeable weather, with splashes of very wet and stormy weather, and just a suspicion of fair in the whole period.

Here, there are signs of a lot of unpredictable weather, with bursts of heavy rain and storms, and just a hint of nice weather throughout the entire period.

But this class of observation does not help us much, for there are other factors in the cosmos beside the Moon, which, although nearest the earth and exerting much influence of its own kind upon mundane things, is not a very considerable factor when regarded in its cosmic relations to other great bodies in the system. The idea that the Moon is the only body capable of affecting the weather is hardly to be sustained by reference to the facts. It is thoroughly well established that the phases of any of the planets, that is to say, their conjunctions, oppositions and quadratures with the Sun, as seen from the Earth, are accompanied by marked effects upon the weather. Dr. Clark’s theory seems to suggest that fine weather follows the Moon, or at all events that the weather will be finest in those places whereat the Moon is nearest the meridian at the time of one of its phases. There is a great deal to be said for this theory if we distinguish between the syzygies and quadratures.

But this type of observation doesn’t really help us much, because there are other factors in the universe besides the Moon. While the Moon is the closest to Earth and has a significant influence on earthly matters, it’s not a major player when we look at its cosmic relationship with other large bodies in the solar system. The idea that the Moon is the only entity that can affect the weather doesn’t really hold up against the facts. It’s well established that the positions of any of the planets—such as their alignments, oppositions, and phases with the Sun, as observed from Earth—come with noticeable effects on the weather. Dr. Clark’s theory suggests that good weather follows the Moon, or at least that the weather is best in locations where the Moon is closest to the meridian during one of its phases. There’s a lot of merit to this theory if we differentiate between the syzygies and quadratures.

234But if the Moon has any action on the Earth’s atmosphere, the planets also must exert an appreciable effect, and it may lead to some well-established theory if we include the positions of certain of the planets at the quadratures and syzygies. In such case it is reasonable to presume that those planets which are near the meridian and horizon at the times of the equinoxes and solstices are likely to give us some indication of the probable weather during the following season, and similarly, such as are near these angles at the syzygy may show the modifications likely to occur during the ensuing month. A series of observations such as these would probably lead to the association of certain features of the weather with the various planets. Astrologers have already completed their observations, but that should not prevent an independent series of observations being made by those who wish to come to independent conclusions in the matter, and the subject is one that deserves attention at the hands of scientific men.

234But if the Moon has any influence on the Earth’s atmosphere, the planets must also have a noticeable effect, which could support some well-established theories if we consider the positions of certain planets during the quadratures and syzygies. In that case, it makes sense to think that the planets positioned near the meridian and horizon at the times of the equinoxes and solstices might give us clues about the expected weather for the upcoming season. Similarly, those planets near these angles during the syzygy could indicate changes likely to happen in the following month. A series of observations like these would likely help connect specific weather patterns with different planets. Astrologers have already made their observations, but that shouldn't stop others from conducting their own independent observations to reach their own conclusions on the matter, and this topic deserves the attention of scientists.

But lunar action does not begin and end with its effects on the weather. There are other and even more important effects to be noted, and although they are more recondite in their nature, and not so well grounded in reasons which would appeal to any but Occultists, they nevertheless deserve attention. One of these is the effect of the Moon in human affairs. We can all appreciate the effects that the Moon has on the waters, for we can see the rise and fall of the tides, but that more subtle influence that the luminary has upon the finer states 235of matter in and about the earth is not so readily appreciated. But it will be found none the less a fact if put to the test.

But lunar activity doesn’t just impact the weather. There are other, even more significant effects to consider, and while they are more obscure and not based on reasons that would resonate with anyone except Occultists, they still warrant attention. One of these is the Moon's influence on human affairs. We can all recognize the Moon’s effects on the waters since we observe the tides rising and falling, but that more subtle influence the Moon has on the finer aspects of matter around the Earth isn't as easily acknowledged. However, it will still prove to be a fact if tested. 235

What we may call the tidal point is that point midway between the Sun and Moon at any time. Suppose it to be a new moon to-day, at the hour of noon. The Sun and Moon will then come to the meridian at the same time that they are conjoined in the same longitude. To-morrow they will be about 12° apart when they come to the meridian, and the next day they will be 24° apart. Now as one degree passes the meridian every four minutes, the daily difference of Tide-time will be (12 × 4)/2, or 24 minutes. Local conditions affect the time at which high tide occurs, and also the effect of the joint action of the Sun and Moon will take time to produce. Consequently we do not see that the tides exactly synchronize with the transit of the Tide-point.

What we can call the tidal point is the spot halfway between the Sun and Moon at any given time. Let's say it’s a new moon today at noon. The Sun and Moon will both be at their highest point in the sky when they are aligned in the same longitude. Tomorrow, they will be about 12° apart when they reach their highest point, and the day after that, they will be 24° apart. Since one degree passes the highest point every four minutes, the daily difference in tide time will be (12 × 4)/2, which is 24 minutes. Local conditions influence the timing of high tide, and it also takes time for the combined influence of the Sun and Moon to have an effect. As a result, we don’t see the tides perfectly match up with the timing of the Tide-point.

But there is a great difference between ether and water, and between mind and matter. What we know as the Astral Tide occurs exactly at the time of the transit of the Tide-point, and this fact is of the highest importance to those who would avail themselves of celestial influences and take that tide at the flood which “leads to fortune.” There is an old adage which says: Who takes the Tide takes all. If, therefore, we take the difference in longitude between the Sun and Moon at any time, which distance is called the Moon’s elongation, and divide this by two, we shall obtain a point which passes the meridian at a time represented by this 236quantity multiplied by four minutes, before or after the Sun’s transit of the meridian, according as the Moon is increasing or decreasing in light. Thus, I would find the time of the Astral Tide on the 21st August, 1912.

But there is a big difference between ether and water, and between mind and matter. What we call the Astral Tide happens exactly when the Tide-point is transiting, and this fact is crucial for those who want to harness celestial influences and take the tide at its peak, which “leads to fortune.” There's an old saying: Who takes the Tide takes all. If we take the difference in longitude between the Sun and Moon at any time, known as the Moon’s elongation, and divide that by two, we’ll get a point that crosses the meridian at a time that’s represented by this 236 quantity multiplied by four minutes, before or after the Sun’s transit of the meridian, depending on whether the Moon is waxing or waning. So, I would find the time of the Astral Tide on the 21st August, 1912.

Moon increasing in light, i. e. going to the Full.
Sun’s longitude at noon, Leo 28° 2´.
Moon’s longitude at noon, Sagittarius, 18° 33´.
Distance between them, 110° 33´.
Half this equals 55° 15½´.
Multiply by four—221m. 2s., or 2h. 41m. 2s.
Diurnal elongation of Moon, 11° 8´, or 28´ per hour.

This for 3 hrs. 41 min. 2 sec. amounts to about 1° 42´, which multiplied by four gives 6 min. 48 sec., and this added to the above first time of Tide, brings us to 3 hrs. 47 min. 50 sec., which is the time after the meridian transit of the Sun at which the Astral Tide will occur.

This for 3 hrs. 41 min. 2 sec. comes to about 1° 42´, which multiplied by four gives 6 min. 48 sec.. When we add this to the initial time of the Tide, we arrive at 3 hrs. 47 min. 50 sec., which is the time after the Sun's meridian transit when the Astral Tide will happen.

Reference to the almanac will show that on the 21st August the Sun passes the meridian at about four minutes after noon, and therefore the Greenwich mean time of the Astral Tide will be 3.52 p.m.

Reference to the almanac will show that on the 21st August the Sun reaches its highest point at about four minutes after noon, so the Greenwich mean time of the Astral Tide will be 3:52 p.m.

Now if you would float an idea, of whatever nature, let it go out upon the full tide, not when the tide is flowing in, and not when it is going out, but at the point of time when the tide is at the full and about to turn. But reflect that what you send out will come back to you laden with its burden of consequence. It is important, therefore, that the nature of your flotation should be scrutinized.

Now, if you want to share an idea, no matter what it is, let it go during a full tide—not when the tide is coming in or going out, but at that moment when the tide is at its peak and about to change. Keep in mind that what you put out there will return to you with its consequences. It’s essential, then, to carefully consider the nature of what you're sharing.

237Astrologers the world over have always considered that the Moon exerts a great influence over human generation. We know that it plays a most important part in the normal functions of the human body, more especially as affecting the blood pressure. This may be the reason for its marked influence upon persons in certain forms of insanity. In my Manual of Astrology I have shown beyond all doubt that it exerts a powerful influence in the matter of sex, and also that there is an astronomical relation between the Moon’s motion and the process of generation culminating in birth. The ancients have said that the various months of parturition are under the successive influence of the planets, Saturn, Jupiter, etc., thus—

237Astrologers around the world have always believed that the Moon has a significant impact on human reproduction. We know it plays a crucial role in the normal functions of the human body, particularly regarding blood pressure. This might explain its strong effect on individuals experiencing certain types of mental illness. In my Manual of Astrology, I have clearly demonstrated that it has a powerful influence on matters of sex, and that there is an astronomical connection between the Moon’s movement and the process of reproduction leading to birth. Ancient wisdom suggests that the different months of childbirth are influenced by the positions of the planets, such as Saturn, Jupiter, and others, in this manner—

1st month under Saturn: Plasmic basis.
2nd month under Jupiter: Amnionic development.
3rd month under Mars: Limbal growth.
4th month under Sun: Quickening.
5th month under Venus: Sex distinction.
6th month under Mercury: Brain development.
7th month under Moon: Precocious birth.
8th month under Saturn: Abortive birth.
9th month under Jupiter: Normal birth.

Swedenborg has said that all children come from the Moon. There is a Greek legend which associates Selene and Selinon, confounding the Moon with the parsley plant, and old women to-day tell their inquisitive grandchildren that they were brought from the parsley bed. In the Greek Mysteries the 238soul passes through the sphere of the Moon in its descent to the Earth, taking upon itself a silver vestment, which is the astral or lunar body, as distinguished from the imperishable solar body proper to the incarnating ego.

Swedenborg stated that all children come from the Moon. There's a Greek legend that connects Selene and Selinon, mixing up the Moon with the parsley plant, and today, old women tell their curious grandchildren that they came from the parsley patch. In the Greek Mysteries, the 238 soul travels through the Moon's sphere as it descends to Earth, taking on a silver garment, which represents the astral or lunar body, as opposed to the eternal solar body that belongs to the incarnating self.

The Hindus, as has been shown elsewhere, make all their astrological calculations from the place of the Moon, and the horoscope of birth is converted into terms of the Moon’s position at the moment of that event. Also they reckon the periodic effects from the same position. It is therefore obvious that the astrologer at all events has not overlooked the enormous influence that this orb is believed to exert upon mundane affairs and human life. As we have seen, the ancients, with whom these beliefs arose, were keen observers of natural operations, and depended entirely on their unaided and unprejudiced observations for whatever knowledge they possessed. They regarded the Moon as the purveyor or carrier of astral influence. Life and energy were generated from the Sun, the vital centre of our system. This life was modified by reflection of rays from the various planets, which transmitted the Sun’s rays to this Earth in altered electrical and magnetic conditions, and the Moon, circling round the Earth at great velocity, collected and distributed these influences upon our nether sphere. The notion is at least cosmical and coherent. If it also be true it is of the utmost importance to us as terrestrials.

The Hindus, as mentioned elsewhere, base all their astrological calculations on the position of the Moon, and they interpret a birth horoscope according to where the Moon was at that moment. They also consider the ongoing effects from that same position. It's clear that astrologers have not overlooked the significant influence this celestial body is thought to have on worldly matters and human life. As we've seen, the ancients, who developed these beliefs, were observant of natural phenomena and relied entirely on their own unbiased observations for the knowledge they had. They saw the Moon as the source of astral influence. Life and energy originated from the Sun, the vital center of our system. This life was altered by the reflection of rays from various planets, which transmitted the Sun's rays to Earth in changed electrical and magnetic conditions, and the Moon, moving rapidly around the Earth, gathered and spread these influences across our planet. This idea is at least universal and makes sense. If it's also true, it is extremely important to us as inhabitants of Earth.

The Moon, then, in Cosmic Symbolism represents the element of functional variability, and is the 239symbol of Change, of ebb and flow, of increase and decrease, of rise and fall. It is associated with the human soul subject to samsara, or the law of cyclic rebirth. It is the Mercabah or vehicle by which the light and heat of the Sun is distributed, the Great Conveyancer and the Universal Purveyor of celestial influences. Like the human soul it is subject to phases, now waxing and now waning, and sometimes suffering eclipse, having no light of its own but deriving all from the Universal Sun.

The Moon, in Cosmic Symbolism, represents the element of functional variability and is the 239symbol of Change, of ebb and flow, of increase and decrease, of rise and fall. It is linked to the human soul, which is subject to samsara, or the cycle of rebirth. It serves as the Mercabah, the vehicle through which the light and heat of the Sun are distributed, acting as the Great Conveyancer and the Universal Purveyor of celestial influences. Like the human soul, it goes through phases, sometimes growing and sometimes shrinking, and occasionally experiencing an eclipse, having no light of its own but getting everything from the Universal Sun.

It has two aspects, a nether and a higher. That which is above represents the side that, at the time of conjunction, is turned towards the Sun, and the lower is that which is always towards the Earth. When the Moon-Soul is between the Sun and Earth it is in correct cosmic relations, but when the Earth interposes its dark orb, there is an ascendancy of the material over the human, and the spiritual light is in danger of being shut out. The Moon-body suffers death, like the physical body, but it persists after the death of the physical, and may endure for upwards of one hundred and twenty years, according to its inherent vitality.

It has two sides, a lower and a higher. The higher side faces the Sun during their alignment, while the lower side always faces the Earth. When the Moon-Soul is positioned between the Sun and Earth, it is in proper cosmic balance, but when the Earth blocks the Sun’s light, the material world can overpower the human aspect, risking the loss of spiritual light. The Moon-body experiences death just like the physical body, but it continues to exist after the physical body dies, potentially lasting for over one hundred and twenty years, depending on its natural vitality.

It may be regarded as the Purgatorial vestment in which the Human Soul manifests until its liberation to the Spiritual world. One of the initiations teaches that this same Moon-Body may, without suffering dissolution, be again carried to earth and incarnated. But this is not the normal case, as those who have witnessed the dissolution of the Moon-Body well know. As a cosmic symbol the 240Moon is replete with the deepest mysteries concerning the birth, evolution, and dissolution of all that is commonly called human. Its influence in mundane affairs gains an additional signification from this fact.

It can be seen as the Purgatorial garment that the Human Soul wears until it's freed to enter the Spiritual world. One of the teachings explains that this same Moon-Body can be brought back to earth and reincarnated without falling apart. However, that's not the usual case, as those who have witnessed the Moon-Body's dissolution are well aware. As a cosmic symbol, the 240Moon is filled with profound mysteries about the birth, evolution, and dissolution of what we typically refer to as human. Its impact on everyday life carries even more significance because of this.

241

CHAPTER XXIV
SOLAR INFLUENCE

The Sun as the centre of the universe is the gravitational focus of all the forces of the cosmos. It stands to us as the symbol of Deity, or of that Logos which is the manifestation to us of the Inscrutable and Omnipresent. So far as we are concerned it is the source of Light and Heat to the world, and these two properties are the ultimate expressions of the Wisdom and Love of the Creator. When we speak of light and heat we mean those forces which, when they impinge on the Earth’s atmosphere and are sensed by us, produce the sensations of light and heat. The Sun is thus rather the source of the cause of heat and light than of heat and light themselves. It is we who are the interpreters. Even so is it with regard to the Divine principles of Wisdom and Love. These in expression are manifest as Truth and Charity, as Knowledge and Affection, as Thought and Feeling, as Speech and Action. This gives us the following gradient of differentiation—

The Sun, as the center of the universe, is the gravitational focus of all cosmic forces. It symbolizes the divine or that Logos which represents the unknowable and ever-present. For us, it is the source of light and heat in the world, and these two aspects are the ultimate expressions of the Creator's Wisdom and Love. When we talk about light and heat, we refer to those forces that, when they interact with the Earth’s atmosphere and we perceive them, create the sensations of light and heat. Therefore, the Sun is more a source of the causes of heat and light rather than heat and light themselves. We are the interpreters. The same goes for the Divine principles of Wisdom and Love. These manifest as Truth and Charity, Knowledge and Affection, Thought and Feeling, Speech and Action. This provides us with the following gradient of differentiation—

Wisdom Divine Love
Truth Spiritual Charity
Knowledge Intellectual Affection
Thought Psychic Feeling
Speech Physical Action

242Thus we see how through the various planes of life the Divine principles filtrate, as do the forces we know as Light and Heat through the various ethers, until they manifest in our physical life. For the Spirit of Truth is the manifestation of the Hidden Wisdom of the Father, and its Bride is the Spirit of Charity. Manifesting in the human they are seen as Knowledge and Affection on the Intellectual plane, and on the Psychic or emotional plane as Thought and Feeling, these being derived from the former, and ultimately finding expression as Speech and Action. Thus all the life of man is linked up with the Divine, as all the universe is with its cosmic centre the Sun.

242So, we can see how the Divine principles flow through different levels of life, just like Light and Heat pass through various forms of matter, until they show up in our physical existence. The Spirit of Truth represents the Hidden Wisdom of the Father, and its counterpart is the Spirit of Charity. When these manifest in humans, they appear as Knowledge and Affection on the intellectual level, and as Thought and Feeling on the emotional level, which come from the former and ultimately express themselves as Speech and Action. Therefore, the entire life of a person is connected to the Divine, just as the entire universe is connected to its cosmic center, the Sun.

The Sun shines upon all and illumines all when there are no clouds of doubt interposing themselves between us and the open canopy of heaven. These clouds arise by evaporation from the ferment of the lower nature.

The Sun shines on everyone and lights everything up when there are no clouds of doubt blocking us from the open sky. These clouds form from the heat of our lower instincts.

As the cosmic centre, the Sun represents the Heart or seat of vitality in the Microcosm. Astrologically it has its seat in the sign Leo which corresponds with the Cardiac zone, including the heart and solar plexus. It is thus related to the vital principle in man. Its position and aspects in a horoscope will determine the stability of the Constitution and hence the natural duration of life. Its sign, position and aspects in the world are the chief cause of the variations of season and the nature of the weather. These season changes are, of course, related to the climate in different zones. The effects that are due in the British Isles to solar aspects with the various 243planets have already been scheduled. Saturn and Uranus are found to be magnetic and cold producing, while Jupiter and Mars are electric and heat producing. Venus acts to produce condensation resulting in drizzle or fine rain. Mercury brings fresh winds; Neptune fine weather. Saturn in the same way brings northerly and easterly winds, Venus westerly winds, Jupiter south-westerly and Mars south-easterly winds. Uranus brings winds from the north-west, and generally frequent showers with intermittent spells of sunshine.

As the center of the universe, the Sun symbolizes the Heart or the source of life in the Microcosm. Astrologically, it belongs to the sign Leo, which aligns with the Cardiac area, including the heart and solar plexus. This connects it to the vital energy in humans. Its position and aspects in a horoscope can determine the strength of the Constitution and, consequently, the natural lifespan. Its zodiac sign, position, and aspects in the world are the main reasons for changes in the seasons and the type of weather we experience. These seasonal changes are, of course, linked to the climate in different regions. The impacts in the British Isles from solar aspects with various 243 planets have already been outlined. Saturn and Uranus are found to be cold and magnetic, while Jupiter and Mars generate heat and electricity. Venus contributes to condensation, leading to drizzle or light rain. Mercury brings cool breezes; Neptune brings pleasant weather. In a similar way, Saturn causes northern and eastern winds, Venus produces westerly winds, Jupiter leads to south-westerly winds, and Mars causes south-easterly winds. Uranus brings winds from the north-west, along with frequent showers and occasional sunny spells.

Thus we may set the compass as follows—

Thus we can set the compass like this—

Figure 27.

Figure 27.

Figure 27.

These observations apply only to the British Isles, and more particularly to England, where the observations were made. Everybody will recollect that the Coronation Day of King George V was a wet day. At that time the Sun was in semisquare aspect to both Venus and Saturn. Those resident in England will also recall the exceptionally hot days during the end of July and the beginning of August. 244The Sun was then passing from the quartile of Jupiter to the quartile of Mars, both heat-producing planets. The positions are necessarily geocentric, as we are considering the effects of the planetary modifications of solar energy so far as this Earth is concerned.

These observations only relate to the British Isles, particularly England, where the observations were recorded. Everyone remembers that Coronation Day for King George V was a rainy day. At that time, the Sun was in a semi-square position relative to both Venus and Saturn. Those living in England will also recall the unusually hot days at the end of July and the beginning of August. 244 The Sun was then moving from the quarter aspect of Jupiter to the quarter aspect of Mars, both of which are heat-producing planets. The positions are necessarily geocentric since we are looking at the effects of the planetary changes on solar energy as it pertains to this Earth.

In just similar manner as the solar conditions act upon the Earth so they act upon the physical constitution of man. For if at his birth the Sun is affected by the rays of negative planets there will be less vitality and force, while positive heat-producing planets, such as Jupiter and Mars, will give great vitality, strong muscular development, a great fund of energy and a sound constitution.

In the same way that solar conditions impact the Earth, they also influence the physical makeup of humans. If a person is born when the Sun is influenced by the rays of negative planets, they will have less vitality and strength. On the other hand, positive, heat-producing planets like Jupiter and Mars will provide great vitality, strong muscle development, a lot of energy, and a healthy constitution.

The Sun represents the organic constitution in the same way that the Moon represents the functional powers. Hence it is that the Sun, when afflicted by malefic aspects of the planets at a birth, gives warning of organic disorders of an inherent or hereditary nature, while the Moon similarly afflicted denotes functional disorders of an acquired nature. For many reasons we may regard man as in the same relations with his cosmic environment as is the Earth itself. Compounded as he is of cosmic elements, he responds at all points to changes that are continually taking place in the system. But he does so in terms of his radical constitution or root nature, which, of course, varies as the individual concerned. For all sidereal and planetary forces, while possessing their respective properties and expressing their own several natures, are differently received and transmuted according to the constitution 245of the recipient body. Hence the planets only affect us in terms of ourselves. The same white solar ray falling upon an emerald and a ruby will be differently reflected by each of them, appearing as green in the one case and red in the other. So it is with men. They each reflect the Wisdom and Love of the Universal Being in a variety of forms of knowledge and affection, expressed in speech and action, which is the common life. This fact should save us all from the error of bigotry and dogmatism. It is only the Diamond Heart that can reflect the pure ray of the Divine. It is comforting to know that the diamond is the mature carbo-hydrate. Given the conditions and the time, the soul that is as black as coal can become, by evolutional processes, as clear and pellucid as the diamond. We begin as fragments of gross earth and end as suns in the galaxy of heaven.

The Sun symbolizes our physical makeup, while the Moon represents our functional abilities. That's why, when the Sun is negatively influenced by planets at birth, it warns of inherent or hereditary health issues, whereas a similarly affected Moon indicates acquired functional problems. For various reasons, we can think of humans as being in the same relationship to the cosmos as the Earth itself. Composed of cosmic elements, we react to the ongoing changes in the universe. However, we respond based on our fundamental nature, which varies for each individual. All celestial and planetary forces have their own qualities and express distinct natures, but they influence us differently depending on our constitution. The planets only impact us in relation to who we are. The same white sunlight shining on an emerald and a ruby will be reflected differently by each, appearing green in one case and red in the other. The same goes for people; each reflects the Wisdom and Love of the Universal Being in diverse ways of knowledge and affection, shown through speech and action, which constitutes common life. This understanding helps us avoid the trap of bigotry and dogmatism. Only the Diamond Heart can reflect the pure light of the Divine. It’s reassuring to know that a diamond is a matured form of carbon. Given the right conditions and time, a soul as dark as coal can evolve into something as clear and bright as a diamond. We start as mere fragments of the earth and ultimately become suns in the heavenly galaxy.

It is customary for astrologers to refer to the various planets as good, evil and neutral. Thus Saturn, Uranus and Mars are regarded as malefic, while Jupiter and Venus are called Benefics. This is not the truth, however convenient it may be to retain these ascriptions for purposes of delineation. Every planet has two aspects, and these aspects are referred to the higher and lower natures of our being. Mars, for instance, is merely Energy, the focussed or specialized vitality of the Sun. It answers to the red ray. Operating in a person of low mental and moral calibre, it will produce a Free-thinker, a Firebrand and Anarchist, and a man of violence and lawlessness. The same planet, when expressing 246itself through a highly evolved nature, will manifest as zeal, fervour, intensity, enthusiasm, enterprise, ambition and moral courage. Venus in the same way may indicate self-indulgence, idleness, pleasure-seeking, vanity, frailty and licence in a person of low nature, while in one of greater moral fibre and higher standard of life, the same planet will manifest as gentleness, kindness, charity, pure affection, orderliness and refinement. There is a whole cycle of evolution between the sordid, money-grubbing propensities of “the man with the muck-rake” and the provident carefulness and circumspection of the man who is under the influence of the higher Saturnine ray. It is all a question of personal colouring. It is not that the planets rule us and compel us to be that which we are, but that we transmute and corrupt the natures of the planets and abuse the energies and powers which they confer on us. We can never hope to be lords of the Universe, but we can be rulers of ourselves. Self-government is at the root of the matter. We attain to it through experience and suffering. It is not born with any man, but there are those among us who remember their lessons well and speedily get themselves into touch with their environment, and their faculties and powers under control. It is not altogether a truth that “The wise man rules his stars and the fool obeys them.” It is rather the fact that the wise man rules himself, all else the stars compel. True, a number of oppositions and squares in a horoscope of birth will certainly give a man a full share of experience, but the uses of 247adversity are sweet. Evolution does not wholly consist in getting all we can out of life, but also of reading into it as much as we can. We all know how much we are affected by our environment. Our business is to find out how much our environment can be affected by us. And by environment we have to include that which presses us most nearly in the form of our own personality. To get this under our control is very largely to annihilate the adverse aspects of the planets.

It’s common for astrologers to label the different planets as good, bad, or neutral. So, Saturn, Uranus, and Mars are seen as malefic, while Jupiter and Venus are considered benefic. However, this isn’t entirely accurate, no matter how convenient it is to keep these labels for clarity. Each planet has two sides, which relate to the higher and lower aspects of our being. Mars, for example, is simply Energy, focused or specialized vitality from the Sun. It corresponds with the red ray. When operating in someone with a low mental and moral character, it can lead to a free-thinker, a firebrand, an anarchist, or a person who is violent and lawless. However, the same planet, when expressed through a highly developed individual, will show as zeal, fervor, intensity, enthusiasm, entrepreneurship, ambition, and moral courage. Similarly, Venus may signify self-indulgence, laziness, pleasure-seeking, vanity, weakness, and license in someone with a low character, while in a person with greater moral strength and a higher standard of living, it manifests as gentleness, kindness, charity, pure affection, order, and refinement. There’s a whole journey of evolution between the greedy, money-obsessed tendencies of “the man with the muck-rake” and the carefulness and caution of someone influenced by the higher Saturnine ray. It all depends on personal qualities. It’s not that the planets control us and force us to be who we are; rather, we twist and corrupt the nature of the planets and misuse the energies and powers they grant us. We can never be masters of the Universe, but we can be the rulers of ourselves. Self-governance is fundamental. We achieve it through experience and suffering. It isn’t something any man is born with, but some among us learn their lessons well and quickly connect with their environment, getting their abilities and powers under control. It’s not entirely true that “the wise man rules his stars and the fool obeys them.” In fact, it’s more accurate to say that the wise man rules himself, while everything else is compelled by the stars. True, having many oppositions and squares in a birth chart will definitely give a person a lot of experiences, but the benefits of adversity are significant. Evolution isn’t just about extracting as much as we can from life; it also involves interpreting it as deeply as we can. We all know how much our environment influences us. Our task is to determine how much we can influence our environment. And when we talk about environment, we must include what affects us most directly in the form of our own personality. Gaining control over this is largely about overcoming the negative aspects of the planets.

All this is possible, because all planetary influences are modes of the One life, and that which animates the physical body is the solar ray, while that which animates the mind of man is the Spiritual Sun.

All this is possible because all planetary influences are expressions of the One life, and what energizes the physical body is the solar ray, while what energizes the human mind is the Spiritual Sun.

Life has no qualities of its own, it gets them by use or function. The same energy that is expended in rioting and bloodshed could as readily be used for purposes of constructive enterprise. Extravagance is only a morbid generosity, a philanthropy gone astray. The Sun that shines alike on the just and the unjust cannot be credited with all the abuses to which we submit our vital powers. Why, then, should we ascribe to the planets all those evil influences which in truth have no existence except in ourselves, who are both receivers and transmitters of their influence? This truth has been finally stated by the great Interpreter, who said: The good man out of the good treasure of his heart bringeth forth that which is good, and the evil man out of his evil treasure brings forth that which is evil.

Life doesn't have qualities of its own; it gains them through use or function. The same energy that goes into rioting and violence could just as easily be directed towards positive efforts. Extravagance is just a twisted form of generosity, a misplaced philanthropy. The Sun shines on both the good and the bad, and we can't blame it for all the misuse of our vital powers. So, why should we attribute all the negative influences to the planets, when in reality, those influences only exist within us, who receive and transmit their effects? This idea has been clearly expressed by the great Interpreter, who said: The good person out of the good treasure of their heart brings forth what is good, and the evil person out of their evil treasure brings forth what is evil.

So far as their cosmic functions are concerned 248the planets are organic interpreters, the Sun being the source of Vitality or Life. The Sun, therefore, holds chief place in the consideration of astrologers and is the foundation principle of the horoscope, all calculations and all measures of time having regard to the Sun’s position and to its postnatal motion.

As far as their roles in the universe go, the planets act as organic interpreters, with the Sun being the source of vitality or life. Therefore, the Sun is the main focus for astrologers and forms the foundational principle of the horoscope, with all calculations and measures of time depending on the Sun's position and its movements after birth.

No wonder that the ancients gave to the Sun a place in Cosmic Symbolism which embraced a whole mythology and gave rise to the use of its symbol in all religious services, seeing that it is the source of all physical life and illumination. The ancient Aryans and the Persians regarded it as the physical presentation of the Supreme Being, and even at this day it is retained as a divine symbol in the ordinances of the Catholic Church. Some idea of the divine attributes ascribed to the Day-star may be gathered from the Vedic Hymns, one of which I have endeavoured to represent in the following lines—

No wonder the ancients gave the Sun an important role in Cosmic Symbolism, which included a whole mythology and led to its symbol being used in all religious services, since it is the source of all physical life and light. The ancient Aryans and Persians saw it as the physical manifestation of the Supreme Being, and even today, it remains a divine symbol in the practices of the Catholic Church. You can get a sense of the divine qualities attributed to the Day-star from the Vedic Hymns, one of which I've tried to capture in the following lines—

Invocation to the Spring Sun.
O quickening Fount of life,
Sun-soul supernal;
Impenetrating stream
Of light, whose every beam
Instinctive is and rife
With Love eternal:
Lord of the Stars and Skies,
King of the Earth and Sea,
List while our anthems rise
In praise of Thee!
Greatest of all great gods in all seven spheres,
Regent of Space and Lord of countless years,
Who first did spring from out eternal night,
Piercing its ebon veil with thy swift light;
Thou who didst live when Time was yet unborn,
The spirit, soul and substance of primeval morn,
249That roused the gods from out their lengthen’d sleep,
What time thy Spirit self had brooded o’er the deep:
Then, from thy heart, ethereal, unalloyed,
The seven great worlds sevenfold refulgent sprang,
The gods did shout, the heavens were overjoyed,
And all the stars of heaven together sang!
Thy living beams, infilling all the scene,
Burned in each orb and knit the space between
To ether vault and circumambient air,
That breathed thy life and shed it everywhere;
Whose power, pervading all, attracts, unites,
Binds with a lasting link, sustains, enhances,
And adds to all a beauty that invites
The liquid light of thy love-lingering glances!
Come! glorious Power! and from thy golden tresses
Shake down on us the blossoms of the Spring;
Lo! how the earth responds to thy caresses,
And how in praise of thee the wild birds sing!
Look down on us from thy so lofty sphere,
Wrap and enfold us in thine ardent rays:
Yea, glorious God, we hail thy presence here,
Soul of the Sun, we yield thee thanks and praise!
Lord of the Stars and Skies,
King of the Earth and Sea,
List while our anthems rise,
In praise of Thee!

The Sun and Moon are universally regarded as the symbols of the Male-female unity of Nature. The Sun is the father, the Moon the mother, of all mundane events. Astrologers refer these orbs to the organs of sight, giving the Sun dominion over the right eye and the Moon over the left. When the Sun and Moon are afflicted, especially in certain parts of the zodiac, they indicate blindness or defective vision. It has been stated by Dr. Fearon that there is an affinity between the right eye and the male line of heredity, and between the left eye and the female line, and that defects inherited from one line or the other are incidental to the corresponding 250organ. That there is a great connection with the state of the eye and the general health is a proved fact of which medical men frequently avail themselves in their diagnosis. We have already considered the Sun and Moon as the luminaries of the day and night, and we find this idea associated with the visual power in the Sayings of Jesus: “If thine eye be good thy whole body shall be full of light, but if thine eye be evil thy whole body shall be full of darkness.” In effect we find that when the iris of the eye is firm and clear and of a single unbroken colour, the health is good. But when it is split up and discoloured by green streaks the health is imperfect, while red spots in the iris, giving a patchy appearance, are a sure sign of some organic disease, and most likely of a growth. It is only when we come to admit the psychic origin of disease that we can fully apprehend the value of the Scripture statement. It is an inductive argument which regards the eye as the index of the general health of the body, itself standing as a symbol of intelligence. Conformity with the spiritual law of being would undoubtedly result in perfect integrity of soul and body. The natural has no life apart from the spiritual. The basis of all things is Spirit, and matter as we know it is its ultimate expression. The Sun, which is the most active form of matter, is thus the concrete symbol of Spirit. Among all symbolical forms of worship, that of the Sun-worshippers is the most rational. Human science may avail much to institute artificial conditions of life, but it will never succeed in dethroning the Sun.

The Sun and Moon are widely seen as symbols of the unity between male and female in Nature. The Sun represents the father, and the Moon represents the mother of all earthly events. Astrologers connect these celestial bodies to the organs of sight, giving the Sun control over the right eye and the Moon over the left. When the Sun and Moon are negatively affected, especially in certain areas of the zodiac, they can indicate blindness or poor vision. Dr. Fearon has noted that there is a connection between the right eye and the male line of inheritance, and between the left eye and the female line, suggesting that defects inherited from either side are linked to the corresponding eye. It is a well-established fact that the health of the eyes is closely related to overall health, a detail that medical professionals often consider in their diagnoses. We have previously discussed the Sun and Moon as the lights of day and night, and this concept is echoed in the Sayings of Jesus: “If your eye is good, your whole body will be full of light, but if your eye is evil, your whole body will be full of darkness.” Essentially, we find that when the iris is strong, clear, and uniform in color, health is generally good. However, if it is mottled and discolored with green streaks, health is compromised, while red spots in the iris, creating a patchy look, are a clear indication of some underlying disease, likely a growth. It is only when we acknowledge the psychological origins of illness that we can truly understand the significance of this biblical statement. This serves as an argument that views the eye as an indicator of the body's overall health, which itself symbolizes intelligence. Aligning with the spiritual laws of existence would certainly lead to perfect harmony of both soul and body. The natural world doesn’t exist apart from the spiritual. The foundation of everything is Spirit, and matter, as we perceive it, is its final expression. The Sun, as the most active form of matter, symbolizes Spirit concretely. Among all symbolic forms of worship, Sun-worship is the most logical. Human science can create artificial conditions for life but will never succeed in replacing the Sun.

251

CHAPTER XXV
ASTROLOGY

It could hardly be expected that one in my position, having the reputation of being one of those modern fools who go searching after ancient wisdom, could write a book on Cosmic Symbolism and successfully avoid the subject of Astrology. I admit to have trespassed on its preserves more or less in every chapter of this book. Now I may as well take a gun and make a day of it.

It’s unlikely that someone like me, known for being one of those modern fools chasing after ancient wisdom, could write a book on Cosmic Symbolism without getting into Astrology. I admit I’ve touched on its territory in almost every chapter of this book. So I might as well grab a gun and make a day of it.

It is safe to say that no considerable argument has ever been successfully raised against the claims of Astrology to a place among the sciences. No valid reason can be given for disputing its principles, and its facts have never been overset. It is true that Pico della Mirandola, called Flagellum Astrologiæ because of his avowed hatred of the subject, attempted to expel it from among the Latins and was an ardent pamphleteer in the cause of its suppression. But he justified its claims and practically unsaid all that he had written by dying at the time predicted by the astrologers. Dr. John Butler, Chaplain to James Duke of Ormonde, had a mind to inveigh against its teachings, which by some misconception he fancied to be pagan and subversive of Christianity. He studied the subject the more 252effectively to assail the assertions of the astrologers, and ended his campaign by writing a book in support of its teachings. It is a book rather well known to students of the subject and can be seen at the British Museum.

It’s safe to say that no significant argument has ever successfully been made against astrology's claim to a place among the sciences. No valid reason exists to dispute its principles, and its facts have never been disproven. It’s true that Pico della Mirandola, referred to as the Flagellum Astrologiæ because of his open disdain for the subject, tried to eliminate it from Latin thought and was a passionate writer advocating for its suppression. However, he contradicted his own arguments by dying at the time predicted by astrologers. Dr. John Butler, Chaplain to James Duke of Ormonde, intended to criticize its teachings, which he mistakenly believed were pagan and undermined Christianity. He studied the topic more thoroughly to challenge the assertions of astrologers and ultimately concluded his campaign by writing a book supporting its teachings. This book is relatively well-known among students of the subject and can be found at the British Museum.

But perhaps the most sounding rebuke that was ever given to such as foolishly repudiate the whole thing without taking the trouble to examine its principles and methods, was given by Sir Isaac Newton to Mr. Halley of comet fame when he ventured to dispute the subject with the great philosopher. The latter heard him to a finish and then quietly remarked: “I have studied the subject, Mr. Halley, you have not.” I do not know what was Halley’s perspective and therefore I cannot say in what regard he held the author of the Principia, but personally I would rather be swallowed by an earthquake than have such a rebuke from the same source. There was always that about Newton which inspired confidence in his utterances, for a more fearless and at the same time humble-minded investigator of Nature never breathed God’s air. He spoke of what he knew.

But maybe the most memorable rebuke ever given to those who foolishly dismiss everything without bothering to examine its principles and methods was delivered by Sir Isaac Newton to Mr. Halley, famous for his comets, when he dared to challenge the great philosopher. Newton listened to him until he was done and then calmly said, “I have studied the subject, Mr. Halley, you have not.” I don’t know how Halley viewed Newton, so I can’t say how he felt about the author of the Principia, but personally, I’d rather be swallowed by an earthquake than receive such a rebuke from him. There was always something about Newton that inspired confidence in what he said; there has never been a more courageous yet humble-minded investigator of Nature. He spoke of what he truly understood.

In the presentation of astrological evidence we are not called upon to display the modus operandi of planetary action in human life. We can observe facts without references to their causes. We may legitimately theorize as to the means whereby a universe is brought into existence, but none can say why. One is relieved of the necessity from the fact that he is not the Creator of it.

In presenting astrological evidence, we don’t need to show how planetary actions affect human life. We can look at facts without needing to reference their causes. We can reasonably speculate about how the universe came into being, but no one can truly explain why it exists. We're freed from having to answer that because we're not the ones who created it.

But there are many suggestions afforded by 253modern scientific discoveries which lead us to the idea that planetary influence, apart from the attraction of gravitation, may be due to the functions of subtle states of matter such as we posit as properties of spatial ether. And since we know nothing of force apart from matter it is reasonable to presume that whatever forces are at play in the cosmos have their appropriate material vehicles. Spectrum analysis does not lead us to suppose that there is any material difference in the chemical constituents of the various bodies of the system, and what you find in the planets you find also in the Sun.

But there are many insights from modern scientific discoveries that suggest planetary influence, beyond just gravitational attraction, could be related to the functions of subtle states of matter, which we consider as properties of spatial ether. And since we know nothing about force without matter, it makes sense to assume that whatever forces are operating in the universe have their suitable material forms. Spectrum analysis doesn't indicate any significant difference in the chemical makeup of the various bodies in the system, and what we find in the planets is also present in the Sun.

Certain considerations regarding the nature of matter lead us, however, to the conclusion that, apart from its properties, it has characteristics which depend not so much upon its atomic constituents as upon their arrangement. From this we may argue that inasmuch as we are all compounded of the same cosmic elements, differences of character and temperament are due to the ascendancy of one over other of those elements in individuals. This, so far as the personality is concerned, may well be true, but because material atoms have no emotions, aspirations, hopes and fears, and no moral sense, they cannot be said to acquire such by mere conglomeration. To carry the argument further, therefore, we should have to derive our atoms from something rather more spiritual than the hydrogen base, the “happy hunting-ground” of the physicists.

Certain considerations about the nature of matter lead us to the conclusion that, aside from its properties, it has characteristics that depend not just on its atomic components but also on how these components are arranged. This allows us to argue that since we are all made up of the same cosmic elements, differences in character and temperament arise from the dominance of one element over another in individuals. While this may be true concerning personality, we must remember that material atoms lack emotions, aspirations, hopes, fears, and a moral sense; they can't develop such qualities simply through their combination. To advance the argument, we would need to derive our atoms from something a bit more spiritual than the hydrogen base, the “happy hunting ground” of physicists.

So far as the planets’ action on our organisms is concerned, it may be that the brain cells, infilled as they are with a nervous pabulum, are capable of 254responding to the more subtle vibrations of the ether. But the immaterial parts of us must respond to immaterial stimuli, and we know that there are other than merely physical effects due to planetary influence. And whereas matter is continuous of matter throughout the entire universe, mind is continuous of mind, and spirit of spirit. Thus it is that “Soul to soul strikes through a finer element of its own.”

As far as the planets' effect on our bodies goes, it seems that our brain cells, filled with nervous energy, can respond to the more subtle vibrations of the ether. However, our non-physical aspects must react to non-physical stimuli, and we know that there are effects beyond just physical ones caused by planetary influence. While matter is interconnected throughout the universe, mind connects with mind, and spirit connects with spirit. This is why "Soul to soul strikes through a finer element of its own."

We must therefore recognize that there may be a supra-cosmical as well as an intra-cosmical planetary action, and this follows from the argument that, matter being the ultimate expression of Spirit, the material planets have their spiritual counterparts.

We must therefore acknowledge that there can be both a supra-cosmic and an intra-cosmic planetary action, and this is based on the idea that, since matter is the ultimate expression of Spirit, the material planets have their spiritual counterparts.

However, to come to the practical side of the argument for and against the subject, I may deal with some of the more weighty objections which have been lodged against it.

However, to address the practical aspects of the argument for and against the topic, I will discuss some of the more significant objections that have been raised against it.

First, there is the argument of coincidence which is used to explain away the fact of successful prediction. This in cool logic is no argument at all, for the only coincidence that is shown is that of the prediction and the subsequent course of events. Now if there were a single prediction which in human judgment could not have been otherwise foretold but by the application of some commonly-called “occult” knowledge, this would suffice to confirm the claim that foreknowledge is scientifically possible. But what do we mean by coincidence. If apples falling from a tree pursued different directions, some falling direct to the earth and some in the contrary direction towards the sky, while others 255went off at a tangent, it may be called a coincidence that one should fall in the direction previously determined upon and named. But if all the apples tend in the same direction and fall along the lines of the earth’s radial magnetism direct towards its centre, then we may posit a law of attraction.

First, there's the argument of coincidence, which is used to dismiss the fact of accurate predictions. In rational terms, this is not a valid argument at all, because the only coincidence present is between the prediction and the following events. If there were even one prediction that, based on human judgment, could only have been made through what some call "occult" knowledge, this would be enough to support the idea that foreknowledge is scientifically possible. But what do we mean by coincidence? If apples falling from a tree went in different directions—some falling straight to the ground, others going up towards the sky, and some veering off at an angle—it could be called a coincidence that one falls in the predetermined direction mentioned. However, if all the apples fall in the same direction, following the lines of the Earth’s radial magnetism straight toward its center, then we might establish a law of attraction.

Now if we can show a definite direction of all planetary influence—that is to say, show that the same planet always maintains the same significance in the astrological scheme, that its effects are always of the same general character, and that these effects synchronize with the arc by which the planet is separated from the position of any of the prescribed Significators, then we may claim to have established the law of planetary influence—or, if you will, of cosmic symbolism. We are not now concerned with the question of the causative or symbolic relations of our greater environment. This connection between planet and event we can certainly show.

Now, if we can demonstrate a clear pattern of planetary influence—that is to say, show that each planet consistently has the same meaning in astrology, that its effects are always generally similar, and that these effects align with the distance between the planet and any of the key Significators, then we can assert that we have established the law of planetary influence—or, if you prefer, cosmic symbolism. At this point, we are not focused on the causal or symbolic connections of our broader environment. We can definitely illustrate this link between planet and event.

Another argument is that the discovery of the heliocentric system by Copernicus invalidated the conclusions of the astrologers which were based on the geocentric positions of the planets. We cannot allow this for the following reasons. The Suryasiddhanta of India antedates the system of Copernicus by many hundreds of years and it is heliocentric. India is nevertheless the schoolhouse if not the nursery of Astrology, and planetary influence in human life is practically an article of faith with the Hindus. The conclusions of Copernicus were confirmed and demonstrated by Tycho and Kepler. Tycho practised astrology while Kepler confirmed 256its principles and added to its credentials by successful prediction. In a universe of relativity, every planet is the centre of its own system, as every man is the centre of his own world, and the Astrologer who studies the action of the planets on this earth and its inhabitants, rightly regards the latter as the passive centre of such action. As the fortunes of a country centre in its Ruler, so those of the individual centre in himself.

Another argument is that the discovery of the heliocentric system by Copernicus disproved the conclusions of astrologers, who based their findings on the geocentric positions of the planets. We can't accept this for several reasons. The Suryasiddhanta of India predates Copernicus's system by many hundreds of years and is heliocentric. India is still the foundation, if not the birthplace, of Astrology, and the idea of planetary influence in human life is almost a matter of faith among Hindus. Copernicus's conclusions were confirmed and demonstrated by Tycho and Kepler. Tycho practiced astrology, while Kepler validated its principles and strengthened its credibility through successful predictions. In a universe of relativity, every planet is the center of its own system, just as every person is the center of their own world. The astrologer studying the planets' effects on this earth and its inhabitants correctly sees humans as the central figures in this influence. Just as a country’s fortunes revolve around its ruler, the fortunes of an individual revolve around themselves.

A further argument urged against the Science is that the discovery of the planets Neptune and Uranus must vitiate conclusions drawn from an incomplete cosmical system. The argument has really very little value. The discovery of Argon as a constituent of the earth’s atmosphere does not involve any change in our ideas about oxygen, hydrogen, or nitrogen. What was argued in regard to the nature of Saturn a thousand years ago is maintained by all modern Astrologers. It is the same with all the other planets. Only we have the added knowledge of the nature and influence of the two planets Neptune and Uranus to supplement what the ancients knew about the rest of the solar system. In former days when they could not discover adequate reasons for death, a man was said to have died by “the visitation of God.” To-day with our extended knowledge of the solar system it is found that Uranus or Neptune has been the agent of the Lord of Life and Death.

A further argument against the Science is that the discovery of the planets Neptune and Uranus must undermine conclusions drawn from an incomplete cosmic system. This argument has very little value. The discovery of Argon as part of the Earth’s atmosphere doesn't change our understanding of oxygen, hydrogen, or nitrogen. What was believed about Saturn a thousand years ago is still supported by all modern Astrologers. The same goes for all the other planets. Now we just have the additional knowledge of Neptune and Uranus to enhance what the ancients knew about the rest of the solar system. In the past, when they couldn’t find sufficient reasons for death, a person was said to have died from "the visitation of God." Today, with our broader understanding of the solar system, it's found that Uranus or Neptune has played the role of the Lord of Life and Death.

Another objection raised against the idea of planetary influence is that the bodies are so remote and insignificant as to be incapable of producing any 257marked effects in mundane affairs. The objection is grounded in ignorance. The distance of the planets bears no relation to their influence or power to affect us. This will be obvious to those who have reflected on the fact that etheric vibration becomes “light” only when it impinges on the earth’s atmosphere, and the fact also that the attraction of gravitation operates irrespective of distance and maintains the solidarity of the system. Planetary perturbations due to the mutual attraction of the several bodies is an adequate reply to the objection of Cicero. Sir David Brewster argues that if light could reach us from the distant stars and planets, other influences may also reach us from the same sources. Cicero, on the other hand, while possessed of magnificent ideas of the solar system and fully admitting its solidarity, asks with evident lack of argument, “What contagion can reach us from the planets whose distances are almost infinite?” We have gone beyond the “infinite” of Cicero since that question was asked, and modern astronomers are able to demonstrate the fact that the Sun, while acting as the centre of attraction in its own system, is answering to the gravitational pull of some star in the confines of space, and that it has a proper motion of its own in a vast orbit about that centre. I have already expressed the view that Plato knew of this and that it was the basis of his Great Year. What hinders that our Sun may receive influences from its own lode-star, and that these may be transmitted to us in common with the other planets of our system? There is no harm in using the scientific 258imagination providing that we have some fact from which to proceed.

Another objection raised against the idea of planetary influence is that the celestial bodies are so remote and insignificant that they can't have any real impact on our lives. This objection is based on a misunderstanding. The distance of the planets doesn't determine their influence or power to affect us. This will be clear to those who have thought about the fact that etheric vibration becomes “light” only when it reaches the Earth’s atmosphere, and also that gravitational attraction works regardless of distance, keeping the system intact. The gravitational interactions between the various bodies provide a solid response to Cicero's objection. Sir David Brewster argues that if light can reach us from distant stars and planets, then other influences might also come from those same sources. Cicero, on the other hand, while having impressive ideas about the solar system and fully acknowledging its unity, asks, without much reasoning, “What contagion can reach us from the planets whose distances are nearly infinite?” We have surpassed Cicero’s understanding of the "infinite" since that question was posed, and modern astronomers can show that the Sun, while serving as the center of attraction in its own system, is also responding to the gravitational pull of other stars in space, and that it has its own motion in a vast orbit around that center. I’ve expressed the belief that Plato knew about this and that it formed the basis of his concept of the Great Year. What prevents our Sun from receiving influences from its own central star, and for those influences to be transmitted to us along with those from the other planets in our system? There’s nothing wrong with using scientific imagination as long as we have some facts to build upon.

In connection with the teachings of astrology there is the scientific fact of natural selection to be considered. What is it that determines birth under particular astral conditions. We say that it is innate tendency. Locke, who in his Human Understanding argued for “no innate ideas” had a faulty perspective. He failed to account for genius through sense-impressions, as others have later failed to account for it through cumulative heredity. We have instances before us where it is obvious that there was nothing to accumulate so far as special forms of genius were concerned.

In relation to astrology, we need to consider the scientific concept of natural selection. What determines someone's birth under specific astrological conditions? We can say it's innate tendency. Locke, who argued in his Human Understanding that there are “no innate ideas,” had a flawed perspective. He overlooked the role of genius through sense impressions, just as others have later overlooked it through cumulative heredity. We have examples that clearly show there was nothing to accumulate when it comes to certain types of genius.

If, on the other hand, we accept the human being as an evolving Monad passing through a succession of incarnations for the purposes of experience and ultimate specialization of faculty, we shall at once understand how it is that certain persons are endowed with precocious tendencies of a definite order from infancy, and indeed birth. Given the time necessary to get into touch with the physical instrument and to “tune up,” as it were, the appearance of unusual faculty can in no way be hindered, because it is innate. In this connection Astrology affirms that persons are born with particular horoscopes because when the heavens are so disposed as to admit of, and indeed to favour, the expression of certain forms of genius and faculty, the Soul requiring those conditions is borne into earth-life. The doctrine involves the suggestion that there is a purpose in human existence and that such purpose is neither 259begun nor fulfilled in any one incarnation. Then, as there is a Spiritual Law in the Natural World, and a supra-cosmic law of planetary action, we can see how the line of least resistance is determined by innate tendency. In the Wisdom of Solomon it is said: “I am not good because I was born into an undefiled body, but being good I was born into a body undefiled.” There is therefore an ancient belief in the determination of birth conditions to innate character.

If we accept that a human being is an evolving Monad going through a series of lives for the sake of gaining experience and ultimately refining their abilities, we can easily understand why some people show specific talents from a young age, even from birth. Given the necessary time to connect with their physical body and "tune up," the emergence of unique talents cannot be stopped because they are inherent. In this context, Astrology suggests that people are born with specific horoscopes because when the cosmos aligns to allow and even encourage the expression of certain types of genius and abilities, the Soul that needs those conditions is brought into physical existence. This idea implies that there is a purpose to human life, which neither starts nor ends with a single incarnation. Furthermore, as there is a Spiritual Law in the Natural World and a higher cosmic law of planetary influence, we can understand how the path of least resistance is guided by inherent tendencies. In the Wisdom of Solomon, it is stated: "I am not good because I was born into an undefiled body, but being good I was born into a body undefiled." This highlights an ancient belief that the conditions of one's birth influence their inherent character.

Colourless and purposeless individuals are found to be responsive to general or group influences and to be moved by the feelings and thoughts that animate the crowd. They have not yet attained that power of self-direction which characterizes the highly evolved Monad. Accentuated and purposeful characters, on the other hand, require specific influences under which to be born, and these influences must be conformable to the purpose in view. What that purpose is may be seen from their life and actions, and indeed it is written all over them for those who understand the physiognomy of Nature. Occasionally we have the incarnation of special Messengers who are responsive to the collective spirit of the superior world. These are found to voice the needs of the soul rather than of the body of man and their minds answer to a higher law than that which controls the average individual.

Colorless and aimless people tend to be influenced by general or group dynamics and are swayed by the emotions and thoughts that energize the crowd. They haven't developed the ability to direct themselves, which is a hallmark of a highly evolved individual. In contrast, strong and purposeful individuals need specific influences to thrive, and these influences must align with their goals. The nature of those goals can be observed in their lives and actions, and it is indeed evident to those who know how to read the signs of Nature. Sometimes, we see the emergence of special Messengers who resonate with the collective spirit of a higher realm. These individuals tend to express the needs of the soul rather than the physical body, and their minds respond to a greater law than what governs the average person.

Very many factors conspire to the production of those astral conditions which favour the expression of individual character of a high order. Much depends on the sphere of life in which the purpose 260of evolution requires that they shall function. We have such examples of marked men in all spheres of life. But wherever they appear they are easily discernible by their horoscopes. Nature is not so profligate as some people imagine, for in the long run it is seen that her ways and means are those which invariably secure the end in view. If she is apparently careless of the mass she is at all events jealously careful in regard to such as have specialized, and we find by practical experience that she adapts environment to purpose with infinite care and foresight.

Many factors come together to create the astral conditions that promote the expression of high-level individual character. A lot depends on the area of life where the evolution's purpose requires them to operate. We see strong examples of notable individuals in all areas of life. But wherever they appear, their horoscopes make them easily recognizable. Nature isn't as wasteful as some might think; ultimately, it's clear that her methods consistently achieve the desired outcomes. While she may seem indifferent to the masses, she is certainly protective of those who have specialized, and practical experience shows us that she meticulously adapts the environment to fulfill specific purposes with great care and foresight.

If we take the astral conditions obtaining over any particular period of a year and consider them in relation to the number of births occurring in any particular area, we shall find that so far as the cosmic relations of the planets are concerned they will remain practically undisturbed for a considerable time. Thus Neptune will be in the same sign for about 14 years, Uranus for 7 years, Saturn for 2½ years, Jupiter for one year, and Mars for nearly two months, Venus and Mercury changing signs within the month. So that, from a cosmical point of view, quite a large number of births will take place under similar conditions, for even the Moon, which represents the element of variability, will continue in the same sign for about 2½ days, and in a thickly populated area such as the City of London, where the average birth-rate is 14 per hour, we may have as many as 840 births under exactly the same zodiacal conditions.

If we look at the astrological conditions over a specific year and relate them to the number of births happening in a certain area, we'll see that the cosmic relationships of the planets will remain mostly unchanged for a long time. Neptune will stay in the same sign for about 14 years, Uranus for 7 years, Saturn for 2½ years, Jupiter for one year, and Mars for nearly two months, while Venus and Mercury will change signs within the month. From a cosmic perspective, a significant number of births will occur under similar conditions, since even the Moon, which represents change, will stay in the same sign for about 2½ days. In a densely populated area like the City of London, where the average birth rate is 14 per hour, we could see as many as 840 births happening under identical zodiac conditions.

But it happens that the ancient astrologers thought 261out this problem somewhat fully, and consequently they directed their attention to the conditions obtaining in regard to a given locality. In other words, they paid more attention to the rising, culmination and setting of the planets than to their zodiacal positions. Now a simple calculation will show that as 1° of the zodiac passes the meridian every four minutes, and 15° every hour, there is enough and to spare for the fourteen births which take place on an average in the most densely populated centre of the world, so that each of them may be born under a separate degree. But the fact probably is, and necessarily I am theorizing on the point, that people are born in batches, for where special conditions are not required the common experiences of life will serve for all the evolutional needs of a large majority of those born into the world. Moreover, as I have already said, the planets affect us in terms of ourselves, so that the same planetary conditions will be variously interpreted by individuals born at the same time, according to their degree of evolution. Consequently I do not see any astrological objection to any number of persons being born under the same stellar conditions, and it is indeed probable that the horoscopes of all our kings and leaders will find duplicates all over the country. All that we note in such circumstances is that the events of their lives have a certain set parallelism from birth until death, while so long as these individual souls are under the sway of those stellar conditions, they interpret them according to their own natures and 262in terms of their sphere of life. A notable case, but by no means the only one that could be cited is that of John Hemmings and King George III. Both were born on the same day and at the same hour in the same parish of St. Martins-le-Fields, in London. When George II died John Hemmings’ father died. George III succeeded to the throne and John Hemmings to his father’s business, which was that of an ironmonger. They were married on the same day, had the same number of children of the same sexes, and died on the same day and at nearly the same hour. The Webbs, the Cloughs and the Morells are famous cases of twins whose lives were at all points similar, and this, not because they were born of the same parents but because they were born under exactly the same astral conditions.

But the ancient astrologers explored this problem fairly thoroughly, so they focused on the conditions related to a specific location. In other words, they paid more attention to the rising, peak, and setting of the planets than to their zodiac signs. A simple calculation reveals that since 1° of the zodiac crosses the meridian every four minutes, and 15° every hour, there’s more than enough for the fourteen births that happen on average in the most densely populated area of the world, allowing each one to be born under a different degree. However, it seems that people are often born in groups because, where special circumstances aren't necessary, the common experiences of life suffice for the evolutionary needs of most people born into the world. Furthermore, as I’ve mentioned before, the planets influence us based on who we are, so the same planetary conditions will be interpreted differently by individuals born at the same time, depending on their level of evolution. Therefore, I don't see any astrological issue with multiple people being born under the same stellar conditions; in fact, it’s likely that the horoscopes of all our kings and leaders have duplicates throughout the country. What we observe in such cases is that the events of their lives share a parallel trajectory from birth to death, while these individual souls, influenced by those stellar conditions, interpret them based on their own characteristics and within the context of their lives. A notable example, though not the only one that could be referenced, is John Hemmings and King George III. Both were born on the same day and at the same hour in the same parish of St. Martins-le-Fields, in London. When George II died, John Hemmings' father passed away. George III ascended to the throne, and John Hemmings took over his father's ironmongery business. They got married on the same day, had the same number of children of the same genders, and died on the same day at nearly the same hour. The Webbs, the Cloughs, and the Morells are famous examples of twins whose lives were incredibly similar, not just because they had the same parents, but because they were born under exactly the same astral conditions.

The mundane factor as distinguished from the zodiacal, that is to say, the positions of the planets in the prime vertical as distinguished from their positions in the zodiac, is that which makes for individual expression. Three hundred and sixty persons could be born in a single day in any one locality and each of these could have a horoscope that is distinct and individual. The highest record does not reach this number.

The everyday factor, different from the zodiacal one—meaning the positions of the planets in the prime vertical compared to their positions in the zodiac—is what creates individual expression. Three hundred and sixty people could be born on the same day in one place, and each of them could have a unique and distinct horoscope. The highest count doesn’t even reach that number.

With this factor of variation in the expression of human character and destiny, it is possible to understand how the Arch-arbiter of our destinies may, for the ultimate purposes of our spiritual evolution, determine the application of the individual psychoplasm to the physical centres of life at times when the cosmical and mundane conditions are 263harmonious to the end designed. From an astrological point of view there is room and to spare for the expression of every phase of human character and development, and that is the same as saying that the One Life is capable of an infinite variety of manifestations in the process of time. This doubtless was the thought animating Shelley’s oft-quoted phrase—

With this variation in how human character and destiny are expressed, we can see how the ultimate guide of our fates might, for the higher purposes of our spiritual growth, decide the use of individual psychoplasm at times when the cosmic and earthly conditions align with the intended outcome. From an astrological perspective, there's plenty of room for every aspect of human character and growth, which is to say that the One Life can manifest in countless ways over time. This was likely the idea behind Shelley’s frequently cited phrase— 263

Life, like a dome of many-coloured glass,
Stains the white radiance of Eternity.
264

CHAPTER XXVI
CHARACTER AND ENVIRONMENT

Sir Francis Galton in his Enquiry into Human Faculty has laid it down as an axiom for the study of Eugenists that “Nature is stronger than Nurture.” His researches and tabulated statistics undoubtedly point this conclusion. We have therefore to regard life in terms of this fact.

Sir Francis Galton in his Enquiry into Human Faculty established as a principle for the study of Eugenics that “Nature is stronger than Nurture.” His research and compiled statistics clearly support this conclusion. Therefore, we need to view life in light of this fact.

In the making of destiny Character is the prime factor, and the modifying factor is Environment. Reform that has an eye only to externals will never be finally effective. Only that which makes for the upbuilding of individual character will secure permanent results. Without doubt character demands for its full expression the most effective instrument that can be placed at its disposal, and this is the whole case for Eugenics. How that efficiency of instrument is to be secured for the majority is another matter. Certainly it will never be found along the lines of stock. We have before us hundreds of examples of thoroughly fit persons of both sexes whose children are weaklings or mentally defective. I have cited two cases of women simultaneously bearing children in the same hospital. One child dies and the other lives. Why? They were born under the same stellar conditions. They 265had equal care from their births onwards. The reason is that in one instance the mother’s horoscope shows success in progeny from the presence of Jupiter in the 5th House, and the other shows no success at all from the presence of Saturn in that part of the heavens. Both mothers were perfectly fit in themselves and in the same station of life. Obviously there is here imported a factor that is of immense importance to those who have a mind for improving the race. Seed, Season and Soil are all essential to the production of healthy offspring. Our Eugenists leave out of consideration the factor of Season. They imagine that, given healthy parents, you are bound to have healthy children. Nothing is further from the truth, if we regard children as composite beings and not merely as animals. We may frankly admit that the personality determines the final expression of character as the coloured glass through which the ray of intelligence finally strikes upon us, but to confound character with environment—and there is no environment which presses a man more nearly than his physical body—would be to negative the whole effort of reform. Character is inherent and is imported to the physical environment. It is not derived from it. It is no by-product, but a thing as essential to Soul as shape is to matter. Beyond the fact of physical heredity, which counts for a great deal where bodies are concerned, there is the yet more important factor of psychic tradition. The importation of this factor into the problem is of the utmost significance, and I venture to say that apart from a thorough sounding 266of modern Psychology and Occultism, and a due consideration of all the factors that go to the making of a man, there will be no satisfactory solution of the problem modern Eugenists have before them.

In shaping our destiny, character is the main factor, while the influencing factor is the environment. Reform that focuses only on external changes will never achieve lasting effects. Only actions that contribute to building individual character will lead to permanent results. Certainly, character needs the best tools available for full expression, and this is the main argument for Eugenics. How to provide these tools for the majority is a different question. We certainly won't find it by looking at ancestry. There are many examples of completely capable individuals of both genders whose children are weak or have mental issues. I've mentioned two cases of women giving birth at the same hospital. One child dies while the other survives. Why? They were born under the same circumstances. They received equal care from the moment they were born. The reason lies in one mother's horoscope indicating success in offspring due to the influence of Jupiter in the 5th House, while the other shows no success due to Saturn's presence in that area of the sky. Both mothers were perfectly healthy and in the same life situation. Clearly, there's an important factor here for those interested in improving the human race. Seed, season, and soil are all crucial for producing healthy offspring. Our Eugenists ignore the factor of season. They assume that if parents are healthy, then their children will naturally be healthy too. This couldn't be further from the truth if we view children as complex beings and not just animals. We can openly acknowledge that personality shapes the final expression of character, like colored glass filtering light, but confusing character with environment—especially given that no environment influences a person more closely than their physical body—would undermine the entire effort of reform. Character is intrinsic and shapes the physical environment; it does not come from it. It is not a by-product but something as essential to the soul as form is to matter. Beyond genetic inheritance, which plays a significant role in shaping bodies, there's the even more crucial factor of psychic tradition. Recognizing this element in the equation is extremely important, and I dare say that without a thorough exploration of modern psychology and occultism, along with careful consideration of all factors that contribute to making a person, there will be no satisfactory resolution to the challenges that modern Eugenists face.

In the analysis of personal efficiency we find three factors in co-operation: faculty, function and instrument. All faculty is strengthened and increased by use or function. Function it is that adapts environment to its needs, as a force pressing towards expression in matter. For the expression of faculty, therefore, we need functional integrity, adaptation of environment, and efficiency of instrument. It has been said that, given an instrument that is out of tune there would not be much difference in expression of faculty between an impresario and a man entirely ignorant of music. This is true only in time and as regards the immediate effort of each. But one can very well see that there are essential differences which will very soon be made manifest. The musician would know that the instrument was defective, while the other would not. In a short while the musician would get that instrument into tune so that he could express his faculty. The man ignorant of music could not attempt the business. Character counts for more than environment, and faculty than instrument.

In analyzing personal efficiency, we identify three key factors working together: skill, function, and tool. Every skill is enhanced and developed through use or function. Function is what adjusts the environment to meet its needs, acting as a force striving for expression in the physical world. Therefore, to express our skills, we need functional integrity, an adapted environment, and an efficient tool. It has been said that if you have a tool that is out of tune, there wouldn’t be much difference in how a skilled person and someone completely clueless about music express their abilities. This is true only over time and in terms of each person's immediate effort. However, it’s clear that there are fundamental differences that quickly become apparent. The musician would recognize that the tool was faulty, while the other person would not. Soon enough, the musician would tune the tool so that they could express their skill properly. The person who knows nothing about music wouldn’t even attempt it. Character matters more than the environment, and skill matters more than the tool.

Now in our Occultism we distinguish between that which is incidental, as faculty and character; and that which is accidental, as instrument and environment. It is recognized that the horoscope of birth is accidental in this sense, and represents the cosmical and mundane environment in which the 267character is required to express itself. It represents a composite of cosmic forces energizing through two great streams of heredity. But it is not essential to the man, as is character. It is not going to damn him for ever or confer on him the guerdon of a blessed immortality. It is merely an environment, and that but a temporary one.

Now in our study of Occultism, we distinguish between what is incidental, like skills and personality, and what is accidental, like tools and surroundings. It's understood that the birth horoscope is accidental in this way and reflects the cosmic and worldly environment in which the 267character needs to express itself. It shows a mix of cosmic forces flowing through two major lines of heredity. However, it isn't essential to the person, unlike character. It won't condemn him forever or grant him the reward of eternal bliss. It’s simply an environment, and a temporary one at that.

Astrologers classify characters into three primary groups, representing stability, flexibility and incisiveness, or again, originality and independence, adaptability, and executiveness. These answer to the grouping of the planets in the several signs of the zodiac, namely, the Fixed, Common and Cardinal signs, otherwise known as the grave, circumflex and acute. These may be tabularized in the following manner—

Astrologers categorize personalities into three main groups, which represent stability, flexibility, and sharpness, or originality and independence, adaptability, and decisiveness. These align with the grouping of the planets across the different zodiac signs, specifically the Fixed, Mutable, and Cardinal signs, also referred to as the stable, dynamic, and initiating. This can be summarized in the following table—

Sign. Character. Faculty.
Aries, Libra, Incisive. Executiveness.
Capricorn, Cancer.    
Cardinal or Acute.    
     
Taurus, Scorpio,    
Leo, Aquarius. Stable. Originality.
Fixed or Grave.    
     
Gemini, Sagittary,    
Virgo, Pisces. Flexible. Adaptability.
Common or Circumflex.    

From this grouping we know at once what is the predominant mould of character and hence what environment is most suitable for the exercise and 268expression of that character. And as applied to eugenics, we are able thereby to make selection of suitable partners in life, setting off the stability of the one by the flexibility of the other, and so on. Take, for instance, the man who shows a predominant flexibility of character, wide sympathies, versatility, prolixity and diffuseness. He is apt to become a dabbler, never thorough, and aliquid in omnibus. Obviously his ambitions need pointing, his faculties concentrating, and his natural powers conserving. Bring him into relations with a woman who has a majority of the planets in cardinal signs, and he will find one who can be of the greatest use to him in the shaping of character and the directing of his ambitions and powers.

From this grouping, we can immediately identify the main personality traits and determine which environment is best suited for expressing those traits. When it comes to eugenics, this knowledge allows us to choose appropriate life partners, balancing one person's stability with the other's adaptability, and so on. For example, consider a man with a notable flexibility in his character, broad sympathies, versatility, and a tendency to be overly talkative and scattered. He might become someone who dabbles in many things but never truly masters any. Clearly, he needs to focus his ambitions, concentrate his abilities, and conserve his natural talents. If he connects with a woman who has most of her planets in cardinal signs, he will find someone who can greatly assist him in shaping his character and directing his ambitions and abilities.

We might ring the changes and derive from these three types seven distinct characters, all mutually interdependent and capable of fulfilling some special function in the economy of life, but never wholly of service when working alone. It is from the interplay of human character in the ordinary course of life that the main purpose of human evolution is served.

We could mix things up and derive seven different characters from these three types, all of which depend on each other and can perform a specific role in the overall structure of life, but none of them can fully serve their purpose when working alone. It's through the interaction of human character in everyday life that the primary goal of human evolution is achieved.

It has already been shown that the lunar sphere is the last of those through which the incarnating entity passes when it proceeds towards mundane existence. It has been shown also that the Moon exercises a most important influence in human generation. It is to the Moon, therefore, that we look for the final determination of that personal colouring which is the prime environment of the Soul. Accordingly we find that the Moon’s position 269in a horoscope of birth is of the greatest importance.

It has already been demonstrated that the lunar sphere is the last one the incarnating being goes through on its way to earthly existence. It's also been shown that the Moon has a significant influence on human generation. Therefore, we look to the Moon for the final shaping of that personal essence, which is the primary environment of the Soul. As a result, we see that the Moon's position in a birth horoscope is extremely important. 269

Not only does the Sign occupied by the Moon give to the character a special colouring, but the decanate and even the degree that is held by it play their part in the final determination of the personal colouring. But inasmuch as there is an adaptation of means to end and of character to environment, we may go further and infer character as indicated by the lunar position. In this way the whole phenomenal world may be regarded as the reflex of the noumenal. The person, as phenomenon, assumes a cosmic and spiritual significance. He is one of the divine symbols.

Not only does the Sign occupied by the Moon add a unique quality to a person's character, but the decanate and even the specific degree it occupies also contribute to shaping that character. Since there is a connection between character and environment, we can further interpret character based on the lunar position. This way, the entire observable world can be seen as a reflection of the underlying reality. The individual, as a phenomenon, takes on cosmic and spiritual significance. They are one of the divine symbols.

To take a concrete instance. The Kaiser Wilhelm II was born with the Moon in the 28th degree of the sign Scorpio, which is ruled by the Sun, the sign being under the dominion of the planet Mars. The Moon is opposed by Uranus, which disposes to a wayward and autocratic disposition, some degree of eccentricity, a nature subject to impulses and precipitate actions. The Moon therefore takes the prime colouring of the planet Mars, because it is in the sign of Mars, Scorpio, and we accordingly find that Mars is a very prominent planet in the horoscope, being in the Mid-heaven and near the conjunction with Neptune. It is not, therefore, surprising that the Kaiser Wilhelm has received the name of “War Lord.” He represents the fighting principle which makes for conquest and freedom. Zeal, courage, enthusiasm, enterprise and frankness are among the martial attributes. To these attributes, the 270solar degrees held by the Moon will contribute a degree of pride, love of fame, glory and display.

To give a specific example, Kaiser Wilhelm II was born with the Moon in the 28th degree of Scorpio, a sign ruled by the Sun and dominated by the planet Mars. The Moon is opposed by Uranus, which suggests a rebellious and autocratic personality, some level of eccentricity, and a tendency towards impulsive and rash actions. Consequently, the Moon reflects the strong influence of Mars, as it is in the sign of Mars, Scorpio. Therefore, we see that Mars is a prominent factor in his horoscope, positioned at the Mid-heaven and close to a conjunction with Neptune. It's not surprising that Kaiser Wilhelm is known as the “War Lord.” He embodies the fighting spirit that seeks conquest and freedom. Traits like zeal, courage, enthusiasm, enterprise, and honesty are some of the martial characteristics he possesses. Additionally, the solar degrees associated with the Moon add a sense of pride, a love for fame, glory, and showmanship.

Take another instance. Napoleon I was born with the Moon in the 28th degree of the sign Capricornus. The sign is ruled by Saturn, and we find Saturn in the most prominent position in the horoscope, being in the Mid-heaven in opposition to the Moon. Saturn is in the sign Cancer, and he died from the disease associated with this sign. The degree is ruled by the Sun. Here we have the Moon in the cardinal sign Capricorn, ruled by Saturn, the most powerful planet in the horoscope. It is altogether suitable to the “Man of Destiny.” The degree held by the Moon is ruled by the Sun, and this gives the desire for fame, honour, glory and rulership. The decanate of the sign occupied by the Moon is related to the sign Aries ruled by Mars, and here we have the military instinct. But the presiding influence in the horoscope is undoubtedly that of the planet Saturn, in whose sign the Moon is found at the moment of birth. Saturn had an ancient reputation of devouring his own children, which means that those whom he raises in the world he eventually despoils. It was thus in the case of Napoleons I and III, both of whom had the planet in the Mid-heaven of their horoscopes. But the tally of its victims is a lengthy one, and includes all grades of life. What sphere is likely to be occupied by the subject of this or any other horoscopical influence coming through the Moon, depends most of all upon the position of the planet governing the Moon-sign, that is, the Sign in which the Moon is placed at the 271birth. Thus I find that Rudyard Kipling has the Moon in Gemini, and this is ruled by Mercury, who is in the sign Sagittarius in conjunction with Venus. Mercury is pre-eminently the representative of literature and Venus that of poesy. But the Moon is also in the degree of Gemini that is ruled by Venus, and in that part of the sign which reflects the sign Aries, so that we have direct evidence of the military associations of his poetical genius. The poet Shelley was born with the Moon in Pisces, which is ruled by Jupiter, a powerful planet in his horoscope, and, conjoined with the planets Mars and Neptune, denoting the fearless and zealous nature allied to mysticism and inspiration. The Moon being in a degree that is ruled by itself, denotes that love of change and that restless inconsequence which characterized his life, while the Moon, being in the decanate which reflects the sign Cancer, adds that abiding love of maritime pursuits which eventually brought about his death, and once more accentuated the import of the phrase: “the ruling passion strong in death!”

Take another example. Napoleon I was born with the Moon in the 28th degree of Capricorn. This sign is ruled by Saturn, and we find Saturn in the most prominent position in the horoscope, located at the Mid-heaven in opposition to the Moon. Saturn is in Cancer, and he died from a disease associated with this sign. The degree is ruled by the Sun. Here we have the Moon in the cardinal sign Capricorn, ruled by Saturn, the most powerful planet in the horoscope. It fits perfectly for the “Man of Destiny.” The degree held by the Moon is ruled by the Sun, which brings the desire for fame, honor, glory, and leadership. The decanate of the sign where the Moon is located is connected to Aries, which is ruled by Mars, indicating a military instinct. However, the dominant influence in the horoscope is undoubtedly that of Saturn, the sign in which the Moon was found at the moment of birth. Saturn had an ancient reputation for devouring his own children, meaning that those he raises in the world he eventually takes down. This was the case for Napoleons I and III, both of whom had this planet at the Mid-heaven in their horoscopes. The list of its victims is extensive and includes all walks of life. The area likely to be influenced by this or any other astrological influence from the Moon largely depends on the position of the planet ruling the Moon-sign, which is the sign where the Moon is placed at the 271 birth. For example, Rudyard Kipling has the Moon in Gemini, which is ruled by Mercury, currently in Sagittarius, in conjunction with Venus. Mercury is primarily associated with literature, while Venus represents poetry. Additionally, the Moon is in a degree of Gemini ruled by Venus and in the part of the sign reflecting Aries, giving direct evidence of military connections in his poetic talent. The poet Shelley was born with the Moon in Pisces, which is ruled by Jupiter, a powerful planet in his horoscope, and in conjunction with Mars and Neptune, indicating a fearless and passionate nature linked to mysticism and inspiration. The Moon being in a degree ruled by itself signifies a love for change and that restless inconsistency that defined his life, while being in the decanate reflecting Cancer adds a deep love for maritime pursuits, which ultimately led to his death, reinforcing the phrase: “the ruling passion strong in death!”

Nelson was born with the Sun in the sign Leo, and the Sun, its ruler, in elevation. Shakespeare was born with the Moon in Taurus, with Venus its ruler in elevation. Thus we see that all those who have distinguished themselves in their sphere of life have the ruler of the Moon-sign in a prominent position in their horoscopes, and further that the exact position of the Moon as to decanate and degree gives us the particular setting of the character and the special faculty by which they are distinguished.

Nelson was born with the Sun in Leo, and the Sun, its ruler, in a high position. Shakespeare was born with the Moon in Taurus, with Venus, its ruler, in a high position. This shows that everyone who has stood out in their field has the ruler of their Moon sign in a prominent spot in their natal charts. Additionally, the specific position of the Moon, including its decanate and degree, reveals the unique aspects of their character and special skills that set them apart.

272Yet while the study of character and environment from the point of view of Astrology is in every way satisfactory to those who take it seriously in hand, it does not in itself afford that degree of evidence that is looked for by people newly acquainted with its claims and teachings. For human character is a very complex thing, and universally shows the admixture of elements that are common to all in a greater or less degree. It is rather in the specialization of some one characteristic that persons become distinguished. It is sometimes in the suppression of some prevailing characteristic that others attain distinction. Thus we see that the selfless devotion of one man to the needs of others draws him away from the mass of commonly selfish people. Accentuation and abnegation may thus both claim their hold upon the public esteem, yet always it is thoroughness that makes its mark in the world, and by that I mean the steadfast adherence to a plan of life which wins its way through in the end. So then, we see that the evolution of the unit from the mass, the specialization of faculty in the individual, is the law of Nature, and it hardly needed the philosophy of Nietzsche or the cult of the Superman to enforce the fact upon our minds. And yet, after all, there is no individual evolution possible for man apart from the race to which he belongs, and when all is done that self-effort can accomplish, when we have specialized and perfected to the highest possible degree, what remains but that we must perforce acknowledge our indebtedness to the world and find our whole destiny to consist in the service 273of mankind. Thus Bulwer Lytton makes Zanoni to say: After all I perceive that the common lot of mankind is its greatest and its sweetest blessing! Astrology at all events has no higher doctrine than this: Study how best to serve.

272While studying character and environment through the lens of Astrology can be quite satisfying for those who seriously engage with it, it doesn’t provide the kind of evidence that newcomers typically expect from its claims and teachings. Human character is incredibly complex and always shows a mix of traits that everyone shares to varying degrees. People often become distinguished by specializing in a particular characteristic. Sometimes, it's by suppressing a common trait that individuals stand out. For instance, someone’s selfless dedication to helping others sets him apart from the generally selfish crowd. Both emphasizing certain qualities and downplaying others can earn public admiration, but it’s ultimately thoroughness that leaves a lasting impact, meaning a steadfast commitment to a life plan that prevails in the end. Thus, we see that the development of an individual from the group, the specialization of skills in a person, is a natural law, and we didn’t need Nietzsche's philosophy or the Superman cult to understand this. However, it’s important to recognize that individual growth is impossible for a person without considering the community they belong to. After all our efforts to specialize and perfect ourselves to the highest degree, we must acknowledge our debts to the world and realize that our destiny is to serve humanity as a whole. Bulwer Lytton captures this sentiment perfectly when he has Zanoni say: Ultimately, I've come to see that the shared experience of humanity is both the greatest and sweetest blessing! Astrology's highest teaching is, without a doubt, to study how best to serve. 273

274

CHAPTER XXVII
THE LAW OF SEX

Synthetic Philosophy and Comparative Theology have sought wisely to establish a common basis for human thought and aspiration. From the complex of life and thought they have argued to fundamental unity. It has been well said that the foolish and superficial look for differences in things about them, but the wise seek for the underlying identity. In the last analysis of things animate and inanimate, we are faced by the insoluble fact of sex distinction.

Synthetic Philosophy and Comparative Theology have wisely aimed to create a common foundation for human thought and aspiration. From the complexity of life and ideas, they have argued for a fundamental unity. It has been aptly noted that the foolish and superficial look for differences in the things around them, while the wise search for the underlying identity. Ultimately, when we analyze the animate and inanimate, we confront the undeniable fact of sexual distinction.

When we speak of chemical affinity, of magnetism, of polarity, we are really speaking in terms of sex. However far we push back our investigations along the lines of evolution we come at length to the distinction which separates one-half of nature from the other, and which is seen to be at the root of all natural attractions and to be the source of generation. Sex, as considered by itself and apart from function and organism, may be the result of a mode of vibration. We cannot say. We may go right back to the first principles of our conception of Life and we find the active and passive principles of Force and Matter, Heat and Moisture, Fire and Water, penetrating through the various philosophies 275and schools of thought, but always a duality. Even in the Theological conception we have the divine principles of Wisdom and Love in apposition, but united for the purpose of Creation and Preservation of the Universe. It is a mystery that cannot be solved. We cannot in fact, determine whether sex distinction is temporary or eternal. We have reason to regard it as radical and not accidental. For whereas in the process of evolution it appears from time to time to merge in various forms and to become hermaphroditic, we find it continually emerging again, persistent and irrepressible.

When we talk about chemical affinity, magnetism, or polarity, we're really talking about sex. No matter how far back we trace our studies in evolution, we eventually reach the point that separates one half of nature from the other, which underlies all natural attractions and is the source of generation. Sex, when considered on its own and apart from function and organism, might be the result of a mode of vibration. We can't say for sure. If we go back to the fundamental principles of our understanding of Life, we find the active and passive principles of Force and Matter, Heat and Moisture, Fire and Water, running through various philosophies and schools of thought, but always as a duality. Even in theological concepts, we see the divine principles of Wisdom and Love standing in contrast but united for the purpose of Creation and Preservation of the Universe. It's a mystery that can't be solved. We can't actually determine whether the distinction of sex is temporary or eternal. We have good reason to consider it fundamental rather than incidental. Even though in the process of evolution it sometimes merges into various forms and becomes hermaphroditic, we continually see it emerging again, persistent and irrepressible.

From the occult point of view it appears to be impounded in the very elements of our being. It has been shown in these pages that the Microcosmic Man is an epitome of the universe, compounded of universal elements, and responsive at all points to the laws controlling the cosmos. It has also been shown that the Moon, so far as this earth is concerned, is the cosmic factor which represents variability. It has also been shown that it exercises first influence in the process of generation, and, therefore we may expect to find it intimately connected with the question of sex. It is, in fact, found to be the factor which determines the astral forces towards the evolution of sex function and organism.

From an occult perspective, it seems to be trapped within the very elements of our existence. These pages have demonstrated that the Microcosmic Man is a reflection of the universe, made up of universal elements, and is responsive at every level to the laws governing the cosmos. It has also been shown that the Moon, particularly concerning this earth, is the cosmic element representing change. Additionally, it's been established that it plays a primary role in the process of creation, so we can anticipate that it is closely linked to matters of sex. In fact, it is identified as the factor that guides the astral forces related to the development of sexual function and organism.

By an empiricism based on an occult law and proved by the application of this law to hundreds of cases of well-authenticated births, it has been established that the determination of sex follows a definite course from a certain point of time bearing 276a mathematical and astronomical relationship to the moment of birth. Thus, given the moment at which a birth took place in any locality, it is possible to at once indicate the sex without the fact being communicated. By this I do not mean that sex production is voluntary in human or animal generation. That is a problem which the Eugenists should consider in the light of the law of sex I am now concerned with.

Based on empirical evidence derived from an occult principle and confirmed by applying this principle to numerous well-documented births, it has been shown that the determination of sex follows a specific pattern from a certain point in time that has a mathematical and astronomical connection to the moment of birth. Therefore, once we know the time of birth in any location, we can immediately determine the sex without being told. I don't mean to imply that determining sex is something that can be controlled in human or animal reproduction. That is an issue the Eugenists should examine in relation to the law of sex I am discussing.

The four cardinal points of the zodiac, Aries 0°, Libra 0, Capricorn 0 and Cancer 0, are the generating points of the circle or Wheel of Life. These points are not artificial. They are natural. They mark the stages at which the Sun in its apparent course about the earth cross the equator, and attain the maximum and minimum degrees of elevation. By analogy they are related to the Dawn, Noon, Sunset and Midnight of the daily circle; to the Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter of the year; and to the periods of Childhood, Manhood, Maturity and Senility in the life of man. It is this consent of Nature to the universal paradigm that enables us to trace the course of mundane events from astral conditions in force at these several points of the year, as Kepler allowed from his own experience, and as Astrologers find continually to be the case.

The four main points of the zodiac—Aries 0°, Libra 0°, Capricorn 0°, and Cancer 0°—are the starting points of the circle or Wheel of Life. These points are not artificial; they are natural. They mark the moments when the Sun, in its apparent path around the Earth, crosses the equator and reaches its highest and lowest points in the sky. By analogy, they relate to Dawn, Noon, Sunset, and Midnight in a daily cycle; to Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter in a yearly cycle; and to the stages of Childhood, Adulthood, Maturity, and Old Age in human life. This alignment of Nature with the universal pattern allows us to follow the flow of worldly events based on the astral conditions present at these specific times of the year, as Kepler observed from his own experiences, and as Astrologers consistently find to be true.

Taking these four points of the zodiac, then, as the starting-points for the determination of cosmic forces ultimating as sex, we find that Aries 0 is female, Capricornus 0 male, Libra 0 male and Cancer 0 female. They follow the lines of the 277segmentation of the cell in the animal organism. Thus—

Taking these four points of the zodiac as the starting points for understanding the cosmic forces that manifest as gender, we see that Aries 0 is female, Capricorn 0 is male, Libra 0 is male, and Cancer 0 is female. They align with the patterns of cell segmentation in the animal body. Thus—

Figure 28.

Figure 28.

Figure 28.

From each of these points there are six others generated, which are alternately male and female in potentiality.

From each of these points, six others are created, which are alternately male and female in potential.

Here it is necessary to introduce the lunar factor, since it is the means of the distribution of the “sex degrees” as we may call them, which are generated from the four cardinal points. For this purpose we have to regard the moon in relation to the number 7, which is the number of days in which it forms its successive phases. From one phase to another is a quadrant of 90° and this divided by seven will give the mean acceleration of 12-6/7°. If we divide the circle into seven parts we shall get 51-3/7° and further dividing this into four parts, in order to get the twenty-eight days of the Moon’s passage, we shall have again 12-6/7°.

Here we need to introduce the lunar aspect, as it helps distribute what we can call “sex degrees,” which are generated from the four cardinal points. To do this, we need to consider the moon in relation to the number 7, which is how many days it takes to complete its phases. From one phase to the next is a quadrant of 90°, and dividing that by seven gives us an average acceleration of 12-6/7°. If we split the circle into seven parts, we get 51-3/7°, and by further dividing that into four parts to represent the twenty-eight days of the Moon’s cycle, we again arrive at 12-6/7°.

It is the septenate division of the circle which 278enables us to get the sex degrees that are generated from the four cardinal points. Thus, from Aries 0 we arrive at Taurus 21-3/7, Cancer 12-6/7, Virgo 4-2/7, Libra 25-5/7, Sagittarius 17-1/7, and Aquarius 8-4/7. These are found to be male and female in alternation. From Libra 0 we derive the same degrees of the opposite signs, but the sex is reversed in each case. From Capricornus we derive Leo 21, Libra 13, Sagittarius 4, Capricorn 26, Pisces 17, and Taurus 8, the sex of each being the same as the corresponding degrees of the zodiac generated from Libra. From Cancer we derive the same degrees of the opposite signs to those derived from Capricornus, but the sex is reversed in each case.

It’s the seven-part division of the circle that lets us determine the degrees of sex generated from the four cardinal points. So, starting from Aries 0, we get Taurus 21-3/7, Cancer 12-6/7, Virgo 4-2/7, Libra 25-5/7, Sagittarius 17-1/7, and Aquarius 8-4/7. These degrees alternate between male and female. From Libra 0, we get the same degrees of the opposite signs, but the sex is reversed each time. From Capricorn, we get Leo 21, Libra 13, Sagittarius 4, Capricorn 26, Pisces 17, and Taurus 8, with the same sex as the corresponding degrees from Libra. From Cancer, we derive the same degrees of the opposite signs as those from Capricorn, but again, the sex is reversed in each case.

There are thus four sets of degrees alternately male and female in tendency which are generated from the four cardinal points, and these may be set out in order as derived, thus—

There are therefore four groups of degrees, alternating between male and female tendencies, which are produced from the four cardinal points. These can be arranged in order as derived, as follows—

Figure 29.

Figure 29.

Figure 29.

It will be observed that the fractions are omitted and the nearest complete degree inserted. Then if we arrange these four sets of degrees into their groups under the radical generator, we shall have a central generating point with a six-pointed star or interlaced triangle around it, the upright triangle being male and the reversed triangle female at the 279radials. Each of these stars will occupy one of the four cardinal points of the Cosmic Cross.

It will be noted that the fractions are excluded and the closest whole degree is added. If we then organize these four groups of degrees under the radical generator, we will have a central generating point with a six-pointed star or interlaced triangle surrounding it, with the upright triangle representing male and the inverted triangle representing female at the 279radials. Each of these stars will be positioned at one of the four cardinal points of the Cosmic Cross.

Figure 30. Diagram of the Cosmic Star. Showing the generation of the Sex Degrees of the Zodiac from the Four Cardinal Points.

Figure 30. Diagram of the Cosmic Star. Showing the generation of the Sex Degrees of the Zodiac from the Four Cardinal Points.

Figure 30. Diagram of the Cosmic Star. Displaying how the Sex Degrees of the Zodiac are generated from the Four Cardinal Points.

The application of the Law of Sex requires some little astronomical practice. It is first of all necessary to find the place of the Moon at the time of birth. If the moon is found in a sex degree or within three degrees of one, it will retain the sex of that degree. Otherwise, it is necessary to observe whether the Moon is increasing or decreasing at the 280time, and if increasing, the Moon’s place must be put on the East horizon, but if decreasing, it will be on the West horizon. This position is found to answer to the Moon’s place at the Prenatal Epoch, concerning which some explanation is necessary.

The application of the Law of Sex requires a bit of astronomical practice. First, you need to find the position of the Moon at the time of birth. If the Moon is in a sex degree or within three degrees of one, it will keep the sex of that degree. If not, you need to check if the Moon is waxing or waning at that moment. If it’s waxing, the Moon’s position should be placed on the East horizon, but if it’s waning, then it will be on the West horizon. This position corresponds to the Moon’s place at the Prenatal Epoch, which needs a bit of explanation.

The normal period of human gestation is nine solar or ten lunar months. It will be found that the moon makes ten revolutions while the Sun passes through nine signs of the zodiac. But this normal period may be increased or decreased, and that quite normally, by the relative positions of the luminaries at the time of inception. I use this word to distinguish it from conception, which term connotes certain physiological processes and facts. The astral factor should not be identified in point of time with the physiological processes of coitus and impregnation.

The typical length of human pregnancy is nine months based on the solar calendar or ten months based on the lunar calendar. You'll notice that the moon completes ten cycles while the Sun moves through nine zodiac signs. However, this standard period can be a bit longer or shorter, and that variation is completely normal, depending on the positions of the celestial bodies at the time of conception. I'm using "inception" here to differentiate it from "conception," which refers to specific physiological processes and facts. The astrological factors shouldn't be seen as directly linked to the physiological processes of intercourse and fertilization.

Now it is found that when at birth the Moon is increasing in light, that is, going towards the full, and above the horizon, or conversely, decreasing in light and below the horizon, the period from birth to inception is less than ten lunar months by a quantity determined by the Moon’s distance from the horizon. But when the Moon at birth is found to be decreasing and above the horizon, or increasing and below the horizon, the period of time from birth to inception is found to be more than ten lunar months by a quantity determined by the Moon’s distance from the horizon.

Now it’s observed that when a child is born while the Moon is getting brighter, meaning it’s moving toward full, and above the horizon, or on the flip side, getting dimmer and below the horizon, the time from birth to conception is less than ten lunar months by an amount determined by how far the Moon is from the horizon. However, when the Moon at birth is found to be getting dimmer and above the horizon, or getting brighter and below the horizon, the time from birth to conception is determined to be more than ten lunar months by an amount based on the Moon’s distance from the horizon.

The measure of this plus or minus quantity is thus computed. The Moon’s distance is taken from the horizon East or West, according as it is increasing 281or decreasing in light. If increasing, it is taken from the East, and if decreasing from the West. The number of zodiacal degrees between the Moon and the horizon thus indicated has then to be divided by the Moon’s mean diurnal motion, which is 13° 11´ roughly, and this will be the number of days more or less than ten lunar revolutions by which the birth is separated from the inception.

The measure of this plus or minus quantity is computed like this. The Moon’s distance is measured from the horizon East or West, depending on whether it's getting brighter or dimmer. If it’s getting brighter, it's measured from the East, and if it's getting dimmer, from the West. The number of zodiacal degrees between the Moon and the indicated horizon is then divided by the Moon’s average daily motion, which is about 13° 11´, and this will give the number of days, more or less than ten lunar cycles, that separate the birth from the inception. 281

This calculation from the Moon’s position in the zodiac and prime vertical enables us certainly to fix the day of the inception. The next step is to find the time of day at which the Moon is in exact horoscopical relations with the moment of birth.

This calculation based on the Moon's position in the zodiac and prime vertical allows us to determine the exact day of the inception. The next step is to find the specific time of day when the Moon is in precise horoscopical relation to the moment of birth.

This is done by a single observation. In all normal cases it is found that if the Moon is increasing in light at the time of birth, that is to say, going from the new to the full, its longitude at the moment of birth will be the ascendant at the inception, and if decreasing at birth its longitude will be the descendant at the moment of the inception. Then universally it is found that the Moon is, at that moment, in the exact longitude which was rising or setting at the birth. Now having the moon’s acceleration as a variable factor, ranging from 11° 50´ to 15° 17´ per day, the chances are millions to one against the Moon being in the exact degree and minute that was on the horizon at birth at the same time that the Moon’s place at birth was rising or setting on a local horizon. Yet this is found to be the fact! What other conclusion can we come to, having regard to all the factors employed, and the wonderful harmony that is observed to result, than that “God geometrizes,” 282as Plato wisely said. Things do not happen by chance, but by law. Law is the expression of intelligence inhering in action. The universe is rendered intelligible by its laws. Whatever is intelligible expresses Intelligence.

This is done through a single observation. In all typical cases, it’s found that if the Moon is waxing at the time of birth, meaning it’s moving from new to full, its longitude at that moment will be the ascendant at the time of birth. Conversely, if it’s waning at birth, its longitude will be the descendant at that same moment. Universally, it's found that the Moon is at that moment in the exact longitude that was rising or setting at the time of birth. With the Moon’s acceleration as a variable factor, ranging from 11° 50´ to 15° 17´ per day, the odds are millions to one against the Moon being in the exact degree and minute that was on the horizon at the same time that the Moon’s position at birth was rising or setting on a local horizon. Yet, this is observed to be true! What other conclusion can we draw, considering all the factors involved and the remarkable harmony that results, than that “God geometrizes,” as Plato wisely stated. Things don’t happen by chance, but by law. Law is the expression of intelligence acting. The universe is made understandable by its laws. Whatever is understandable expresses Intelligence. 282

But we have yet to consider the variation of the law that is conformable to the Law of Sex. This Law of Lunar Appulsion in the matter of human generation would work out exactly as stated above in every case were it not for the fact that Sex is the dominant and controlling factor, and that by reason of it a birth may be delayed or advanced by a period ranging from a fortnight to as much as two months. For, whatever may be the other factors involved in the horoscopical conditions of a birth, sex must be satisfied first and foremost. It is the controlling factor. Observe, then, that if the birth is male and the Moon occupies a female degree, as indicated above, should the Moon be increasing in light, the Law of Lunar Appulsion already detailed will require that the Moon’s place should rise at the Epoch of inception or, as it is called, the “Prenatal Epoch,” and consequently a female degree would be rising at such Epoch. This would be contrary to the sex, and consequently we know that the Moon’s place at birth must be setting at the Epoch, so that a male degree may be rising. This is the case, mutatus mutandis, when the Moon is in a male degree and the sex is female. Then, this adjustment being duly made, it is found that the horoscope resulting will find the Moon in the exact degree that was rising at birth. Exactly similar considerations 283hold in the case of a Moon that is decreasing at birth. This is the first establishment of the Law of Sex as controlling the time of birth.

But we still need to look at the variation of the law that aligns with the Law of Sex. This Law of Lunar Appulsion regarding human generation would work perfectly as previously described in every case, if not for the fact that Sex is the dominant and controlling factor. Because of this, a birth can be delayed or moved up by a period ranging from two weeks to even two months. No matter what other factors are involved in the astrological conditions of a birth, sex has to come first. It is the key factor. So, if the birth is male and the Moon is in a female degree, as mentioned earlier, when the Moon is gaining light, the Law of Lunar Appulsion we discussed will require that the Moon's position rises at the time of conception, or as it's called, the “Prenatal Epoch,” which means a female degree would rise at that time. This would be against the sex, so we know that the Moon's position at birth must be setting at that time, allowing for a male degree to rise. This is also true, changing what needs to change, when the Moon is in a male degree and the sex is female. Once this adjustment is properly made, it turns out that the resulting horoscope will have the Moon in the exact degree that was rising at birth. The same considerations 283 apply in the case of a Moon that is decreasing at birth. This sets the foundation for the Law of Sex as the controlling factor in determining the time of birth.

The next is when the Moon does not occupy a sex degree but is more than three degrees removed from either male or female degrees. In such case we have to consider whether the degree on the horizon at the moment of birth pertains to either sex. For if it be so, and the degree is of the sex of the child born, then we know that the Moon was in that degree at the Epoch, whether it was increasing or decreasing in light at the birth. This will control the day of birth in the same way that the first rule controlled the moment of it. Only when neither the Moon nor the horizon are occupied by sex degrees the Law of Lunar Appulsion operates without restriction. This clearly shows that the Law of Sex is paramount, and that it can and does control the Law of Lunar Appulsion. By appulsion we mean that outbreathing from the moon-sphere towards the earth which corresponds to the diastole of respiration, by which the vital forces of the cosmos focussed by the Moon are carried towards the earth for the production and sustentation of the species.

The next scenario is when the Moon isn't in a sex degree but is more than three degrees away from either male or female degrees. In this case, we need to think about whether the degree on the horizon at the time of birth relates to either sex. If it does and the degree matches the sex of the child born, then we know the Moon was in that degree at the time, regardless of whether it was growing or shrinking in brightness at birth. This will influence the day of birth in the same way that the first rule impacted the exact moment. Only when neither the Moon nor the horizon are in sex degrees does the Law of Lunar Appulsion work without limitations. This clearly indicates that the Law of Sex is the most important and can control the Law of Lunar Appulsion. By appulsion, we mean the outflow from the moon-sphere toward the earth, which corresponds to the relaxation phase of respiration, through which the vital forces of the cosmos, focused by the Moon, are directed to the earth for the creation and support of life.

If this Law were a matter of chance it will be seen by any one acquainted with the astronomical facts, that the chances are dead against it working out in practice. Yet the facts are in daily test by astrologers the world over, and we may hence conclude that the Law of Sex has absolutely been discovered, or at all events the rules by which we may recognize its cosmic relations.

If this Law were simply a matter of chance, anyone familiar with the astronomical facts would see that the odds are strongly against it working out in practice. However, the facts are being tested daily by astrologers around the world, and we can conclude that the Law of Sex has definitely been discovered, or at least the guidelines by which we can understand its cosmic relationships.

284With a closer knowledge of the initial stages of generation, it will be possible, by a reversal of the factors here employed, to argue from the inception to the birth, instead of as now from the birth backwards to the Epoch of inception. In such case we shall have obtained the secret of how to determine the sex of offspring at will. That the Prenatal Epoch here established answers to some incipient stage of the process of generation there can be no reasonable doubt whatever, for wherever the time of birth is accurately taken by a medical man it answers exactly to the astronomical considerations required by the Law as formulated. Elsewhere I have delivered a diagram showing the Moon’s position for each month from the inception to the birth, from which we see that there is a definite law of pulsation marking a spiral descent of the Monad along the line of energy instituted between the Moon’s place at the Epoch and the point of the zodiac on the horizon at the moment of birth. This I have called the Descent of the Monad, and it affords a study of the greatest psychological value. Very many attempts have been made on the part of gynecologists to ascertain the law controlling Sex, and I have introduced this section in the hope that such as may have a practical interest in this question will avail themselves of the facts so far derived from the study of occultism.

284With a better understanding of the early stages of generation, it becomes possible, by reversing the factors used here, to reason from the beginning to the birth, instead of the current approach of tracing back from birth to the inception. In this case, we would uncover the secret to determining the sex of offspring at will. There’s no doubt that the Prenatal Epoch established here corresponds to some early stage of the generation process, since whenever a medical professional accurately records the time of birth, it aligns perfectly with the astronomical considerations dictated by the Law as formulated. Elsewhere, I have presented a diagram showing the Moon’s position for each month from the inception to the birth, which illustrates a definite law of pulsation marking a spiral descent of the Monad along the line of energy established between the Moon’s position at the Epoch and the zodiac point on the horizon at the time of birth. I have termed this the Descent of the Monad, and it offers an invaluable study in psychology. Numerous attempts have been made by gynecologists to discover the law governing sex, and I’ve included this section in the hope that those with a practical interest in this question will make use of the insights gained from the study of occultism.

285

CHAPTER XXVIII
A TEST OF VALUE

The Old Philosopher of China has said that the virtue of everything is in its use. If Cosmic Symbolism cannot be applied to the practical ends of life it will not succeed in appealing to the average intellect, which sets for its standard the single test of utility. In these pages I have endeavoured to show that the Universe as Symbol is best studied in relation to its bearing on the common needs of humanity. I have also shown that Astrology is the only system of thought and practice that attempts the application. I propose now to examine the educational value of this study and its practical use in daily life, and thus to place it among the list of those subjects that have a serious claim to the consideration of enlightened people.

The Old Philosopher of China said that the value of everything lies in how it's used. If Cosmic Symbolism can't be applied to practical aspects of life, it won't resonate with the average person, who judges by the standard of usefulness. In these pages, I've tried to demonstrate that the Universe as a Symbol is best understood in relation to its relevance to the everyday needs of humanity. I've also shown that Astrology is the only system of thought and practice that seeks to make this application. Now, I plan to explore the educational value of this study and its practical use in daily life, thereby placing it among the subjects that deserve serious attention from informed individuals.

Tracing our way through the Encyclopædia of knowledge we find that most of the deeper studies that engage the powers of men are valuable, not so much for the ends they lead to, as for the mental training obtained in their pursuit. It is one of the outstanding features of modern scientific methods that we are required to bring our theories into agreement with known facts. The facts themselves are often uninteresting and of small practical value, 286but they serve as landmarks by which to direct our course towards conclusions which in themselves are often valuable. It is thus with astronomy. The application of the Principia or of the Laws of Kepler to the cosmos as we know it is an exercise requiring the greatest possible care, considerable mathematical ability, and the patience of a Prometheus. The bare facts of astronomy are not generally interesting. We are not solicitous of knowing in exactly how many days, hours, minutes and seconds the planet Jupiter completes its course about the Sun. What is of more practical interest to us as terrestrials is to know Jupiter’s relations to this world of ours, what it stands for in the economy of life, and what influence, if any, it exerts over us.

Tracing our way through the Encyclopedia of knowledge, we find that most of the deeper studies that engage human abilities are valuable, not so much for the outcomes they lead to, but for the mental training gained in their pursuit. One of the key features of modern scientific methods is that we need to align our theories with known facts. The facts themselves are often uninteresting and of little practical value, 286but they act as landmarks to guide us toward conclusions that can be quite valuable. This is true for astronomy. Applying the Principia or the Laws of Kepler to the universe as we understand it is an exercise that requires great care, considerable math skills, and the patience of Prometheus. The bare facts of astronomy are generally not engaging. We are not particularly concerned with knowing exactly how many days, hours, minutes, and seconds it takes for Jupiter to orbit the Sun. What is of more practical interest to us as inhabitants of Earth is understanding Jupiter’s relationship to our world, what it represents in the big picture of life, and what influence, if any, it has on us.

Now Astrology, while employing all the elements of astronomy that have any certain foundation in fact, is calculated as a study to engage all the highest faculties of the human mind, while it brings to the results obtained the added virtue of utility.

Now Astrology, while using all the elements of astronomy that are based on solid facts, is designed as a field of study to engage all the highest abilities of the human mind, while it also adds the benefit of practicality to the results achieved.

The late Professor Max Müller once paid Astrology a great tribute when he said that many of our most distinguished men of intellect were at this day practiced astrologers, but that “few cared to let their studies be known, so great was the ignorance which confounded a science requiring the highest education with that of the ordinary gipsy fortune-teller.” Possibly he had in mind the late Lord Chief Justice, or Dr. Richard Garnett, or indeed any one of the host of intelligent students who have secretly avowed their adherence to the science. 287That which held the admiration of Claudius Ptolemy, and received the imprimatur of Tycho and Kepler, which attracted Lord Verulam, Francis Bacon, and was held in the highest esteem by that trained scientific observer and profound thinker, Sir Isaac Newton, and which in all ages and nations has included the highest intellects among its votaries, is affirmed by the great Orientalist to have a real value in the estimation of modern students whose attainments have placed them in a position to judge in the matter.

The late Professor Max Müller once gave Astrology high praise when he said that many of our most prominent intellectuals today were practicing astrologers, but that “few were willing to reveal their studies, so deep was the ignorance that confused a science needing the highest education with that of the typical gipsy fortune-teller.” Perhaps he was considering the late Lord Chief Justice, or Dr. Richard Garnett, or indeed any number of intelligent individuals who have quietly admitted their dedication to the field. 287 What impressed Claudius Ptolemy, earned the endorsement of Tycho and Kepler, attracted Lord Verulam, Francis Bacon, and was greatly respected by that skilled scientist and deep thinker, Sir Isaac Newton, and which in all ages and cultures has included the greatest minds among its followers, is acknowledged by the great Orientalist to have real value in the eyes of modern scholars whose expertise allows them to make informed judgments on the subject.

Let us, therefore, look soberly and carefully at this science of Astrology and see if its study is likely to be at all profitable from the point of view of education.

Let’s take a serious and thoughtful look at this science of Astrology and see if studying it is likely to be beneficial from an educational perspective.

Astrology is both a science and a philosophy. As science it is concerned with the facts of astronomy and as philosophy with the application of those facts to the problems of life and mind. The astronomical facts are of first interest. Before we can say anything at all about the interplay of planetary action in human life we have to be able to set a map of the heavens for any time and place at which a person may have birth. For this purpose one can avail himself of the Ephemerides of the Nautical Almanac, the Connaissance des Temps, or any of those cheaper publications which are extracted from them. From various handbooks written by astrological authors he may then learn how to erect a horoscope or map of the heavens for any time and place. Such practical knowledge is not to be found in any exposition of astronomy 288that I have yet come across. It enables the student to observe with perfect accuracy in what relations the various heavenly bodies were at the given time and exactly where they were situated as seen from a particular locality on the earth’s surface. The student finds considerable satisfaction in this piece of practical work. But it is only preliminary to the further study of the subject. For it will be seen that whereas the positions of the planets at the moment of birth have a symbolical value as regards the whole tenor and course of the life, the particular times at which events prefigured are likely to take place can only be known from a study of the subsequent motions of the heavenly bodies after the date of birth. For it is from the constant changes taking place in the kaleidoscope of the greater world about us that we draw our conclusions as to the time and nature of events. The planets are continually altering their relative positions owing to their different velocities and they thus form aspects or certain angular distances in regard to the places of the planets in the horoscope of birth and also among themselves in the heavens. The process of bringing a planet to the place of another in the horoscope of birth is called “directing” and involves a knowledge of spherical trigonometry. This brings me to an interesting fact. It is that the whole science of astronomy and the art of making ephemerides of the planets’ positions was kept alive solely by the personal labours and special knowledge of a handful of practical astrologers.

Astrology is both a science and a philosophy. As a science, it focuses on the facts of astronomy, and as a philosophy, it deals with how those facts relate to life and mental challenges. The astronomical facts are the main focus. Before we can discuss the influence of planetary movements on human life, we need to create a map of the heavens for any time and place of a person's birth. For this, you can use the Ephemerides from the Nautical Almanac, the Connaissance des Temps, or any of the more affordable publications derived from them. By studying various handbooks written by astrologers, you can learn how to create a horoscope or a map of the heavens for any specific time and place. This practical knowledge isn't available in any astronomy textbook I've found. It allows you to accurately observe the relationships between celestial bodies at that specific time and see their positions from a particular location on Earth's surface. Many students find great satisfaction in this practical work, but it's just a starting point for deeper study. You'll see that while the positions of the planets at the moment of birth hold symbolic meaning for the overall direction of life, the specific times when significant events are likely to happen can only be determined by studying the subsequent movements of celestial bodies after birth. It's from the constant shifts in the greater world around us that we make conclusions about the timing and nature of events. The planets are always changing their positions relative to one another due to their varying speeds, creating aspects or specific angles regarding their places in the natal horoscope and among themselves in the sky. The process of moving a planet to align with another in the birth chart is called “directing,” which requires knowledge of spherical trigonometry. This leads to an interesting point: the entire field of astronomy and the art of creating ephemerides detailing the positions of the planets were sustained solely by the dedicated efforts and specialized knowledge of a small group of practical astrologers.

The Alphonsine Tables which were composed 289by the Arabian and Spanish astrologers and which were collected under the command of Alphonso X of Castile at a cost of four hundred thousand crowns, and published with a royal preface in the year 1252, are among the earliest examples of their great devotion. The Almagest of Ptolemy was completed about A.D. 148 and was inscribed in the Temple of Serapis. The Rudolphine Tables composed by Tycho and completed by Kepler were digested and recomposed by Morinus, Mathematical Professor to the King of France, and printed at Paris in the year 1650. Ptolemy, Tycho, Kepler and Morin were all practiced astrologers. The Nautical Almanac was first published in 1767 by Dr. Neville Maskelyne, and afterwards greatly improved in 1834. The Connaissance des Temps was published in 1699. Whence, think you, did the astrologers obtain their information regarding the positions of the planets prior to these years of authorized publication? They calculated them for themselves. Without astronomy there could be no Astrology. They kept astronomy alive.

The Alphonsine Tables, created by Arabian and Spanish astrologers and compiled under the direction of Alphonso X of Castile at a cost of four hundred thousand crowns, were published with a royal introduction in 1252. They are some of the earliest examples of their significant dedication. Ptolemy's Almagest was finished around A.D. 148 and was inscribed in the Temple of Serapis. The Rudolphine Tables, created by Tycho and completed by Kepler, were refined and reorganized by Morinus, the Mathematical Professor to the King of France, and printed in Paris in 1650. Ptolemy, Tycho, Kepler, and Morin were all skilled astrologers. The Nautical Almanac was first published in 1767 by Dr. Neville Maskelyne and was significantly improved in 1834. The Connaissance des Temps was published in 1699. Where do you think astrologers got their information about the positions of the planets before these officially published years? They calculated it themselves. Without astronomy, there would be no astrology. They kept astronomy alive.

Very few people understand what labour there is attaching to the production of the various elements that one finds in the common almanac. How many of my readers are prepared to calculate for themselves the time at which the Sun will rise or set upon the horizon of a particular locality? How many could say with any certainty at what time the Moon would south, or cross the upper meridian? What percentage of people could say when and where an eclipse of the Sun or Moon would occur, 290where it would be visible, its extent and duration? The modern astrologer has a remarkably easy time compared with the labours of his predecessors. He can refer to his official guide, or consult the popular almanac for all his elements. But for the working out of a horoscope and its subsequent directions, he must certainly have a practical knowledge of the use of an astronomical ephemeris.

Very few people understand the effort that goes into producing the various elements found in the common almanac. How many of my readers are able to calculate for themselves the times for sunrise or sunset for a specific location? How many could confidently state when the Moon will be at its highest point or cross the upper meridian? What percentage of people could accurately say when and where a solar or lunar eclipse will happen, where it will be visible, and how long it will last? The modern astrologer has it much easier compared to the hard work of his predecessors. He can rely on his official guide or check the popular almanac for all his information. However, to create a horoscope and interpret its subsequent directions, he definitely needs to have practical knowledge of how to use an astronomical ephemeris. 290

From astronomy his attention is turned at once to Geography. He has to determine the exact longitude and latitude of a place, the name only of which is given, for he has to make his map of the heavens as seen from the place of birth. Here he gets a practical knowledge of localities and of the orientation of horoscopes. In his pursuit of Astrology the student will find himself tracking back through the biographies of great men and women in order to find data from which to test the various ascriptions of the astrologers. He will turn up cases of dementia and insanity in persons of repute and compare the data afforded by their horoscopes with the rules of Ptolemy, Morinus and Cardan. He will incidentally acquire a considerable knowledge of men and things which else had been to him an unwritten book.

From astronomy, he immediately shifts his focus to geography. He needs to pinpoint the exact longitude and latitude of a location based only on its name, as he has to create a map of the stars as seen from the birthplace. Here, he gains practical knowledge of places and how to interpret horoscopes. In exploring astrology, the student will find himself digging through the biographies of influential figures to gather data to evaluate various claims made by astrologers. He will uncover instances of mental illness in well-known people and compare the information from their horoscopes with the principles of Ptolemy, Morinus, and Cardan. Along the way, he will incidentally gain a substantial understanding of people and things that would have otherwise remained an unread book to him.

Further, testing the theory of eclipse influences he will inevitably find his way back to the ruined cities of Nineveh and Babylon and the three historical eclipses which preceded the downfall of the great Empire, which eclipses we have received from Hipparchus through the Syntaxis of Ptolemy. As to the latter there are the Greek, 291Latin and English editions of the work open to his study.

Further, testing the theory of eclipse influences, he will eventually find his way back to the ruined cities of Nineveh and Babylon and the three historical eclipses that happened before the fall of the great Empire. These eclipses have been passed down to us from Hipparchus through Ptolemy's Syntaxis. Regarding the latter, there are Greek, Latin, and English editions of the work available for his study. 291

The student will not proceed far before he comes up against the problem of Calendarics. He will find it impossible to understand and follow the works of the ancients without some notion of the equilization of Eras, and it will become imperative, if he would check the statements made in their works, as he should do, that he undertake the task of converting ancient into modern calendars. He may even find it necessary to know the names of the Assyrian, Egyptian, Greek, Indian and Chinese months. It is all involved in the process of his study. He will certainly require to know what are the Eras of the Hegira, the Salivahana, the Olympiads, and the Kali Yuga.

The student won’t get far before he encounters the issue of Calendarics. He will find it impossible to understand and follow the works of the ancients without some basic knowledge of aligning Eras, and it will be essential, if he wants to verify the statements made in those works, that he takes on the task of converting ancient calendars to modern ones. He might even need to learn the names of the Assyrian, Egyptian, Greek, Indian, and Chinese months. All of this is part of his study process. He will definitely need to know what the Eras of the Hegira, the Salivahana, the Olympiads, and the Kali Yuga are.

Keen on the track of this ancient lore he may elect to study the primitive Chinese language, and the noble Sanskrit of India, the more perfectly to acquaint himself with the traditions of these peoples and to study their ancient presentment of the science of Astrology. He may conveniently follow up the record through the Greeks and Latins.

Keen on the trail of this ancient knowledge, he might choose to study the original Chinese language and the noble Sanskrit of India, in order to better understand the traditions of these cultures and explore their ancient views on the science of Astrology. He can easily trace the record through the Greeks and Romans.

Assuredly he will need to acquaint himself, at least superficially, with the anatomy of the human body, its physiology, pathology and hygiene. In the allocation of faculty to environment he will come into touch with sociology and will discriminate between the planetary occupations cited by Ptolemy and those that enter into the complex of modern life. In connection with the questions of marriage and progeny, the study of eugenics and gynecology 292will claim his attention. The study of character as revealed by the planetary dispositions at the moment of birth will bring him into touch with the profound and as yet only partially developed science of Psychology.

Certainly, he will need to familiarize himself, at least on a basic level, with the anatomy of the human body, its physiology, pathology, and hygiene. In understanding how faculties relate to the environment, he will engage with sociology and differentiate between the planetary occupations mentioned by Ptolemy and those that are part of modern life. Regarding marriage and offspring, he will focus on the study of eugenics and gynecology. The study of character, as indicated by the planetary positions at the time of birth, will connect him to the deep and still partially developed field of Psychology. 292

Cosmogony will inevitably hold his attention while studying the effects of planetary action in the world at large, and seismology and meteorology are branches of mundane astrology that cannot be overlooked by any thorough student. For the argument comes easily to hand that if the planets do not affect the world at large they cannot affect us as denizens of the world.

Cosmogony will definitely capture his focus while studying the effects of planetary action in the broader world, and seismology and meteorology are areas of practical astrology that no serious student can ignore. The point can be made easily that if the planets don't influence the world as a whole, they can't have any effect on us as inhabitants of that world.

From this by no means exhaustive category of subjects directly connected with the study of Astrology, it will be seen that it entails a liberal education and one, moreover, that cannot be matched by the curriculum of any of our schools or colleges. So that, whether we regard Astrology as a science, a philosophy or an occult art, it is certain that its pursuit, if carried out consistently, cannot fail to improve the mind of all who engage in it.

From this certainly not exhaustive list of subjects directly related to the study of astrology, it's clear that it requires a well-rounded education—one that can't be compared to the curriculum of any of our schools or colleges. So, whether we see astrology as a science, a philosophy, or an occult practice, it's obvious that pursuing it consistently will enhance the minds of everyone involved.

But as Laotze has said, the virtue of everything is in its use. If Astrology has no practical advantages to offer us it will at best only secure a place of academical repute. Those who have followed it out into the broad issues of life will, however, be able to affirm that in infancy, youth, adolescence and old age, Astrology is adequate to the needs of all as a source of guidance and information. From the very outset of life we are faced by considerations of health, questions regarding the continuance of 293life, matters connected with education, the development of special faculty, and all those problems that vex the parental mind. Then later on we have to decide upon the choice of occupation, and later still on the all-important question of marriage. Then come the host of considerations hedging the welfare of the average man, questions regarding business affairs, travelling, partnerships, alliances, and the final disposition of one’s affairs. There are also the financial problems to be dealt with, matters of investment and of speculation—for it is never wise to speculate unless you know—and on the domestic side of life we have a multitude of problems which can easily be imagined but are difficult to recite.

But as Laotze said, the value of everything lies in its usefulness. If Astrology offers us no practical benefits, it will only secure a place of academic reputation at best. Those who have explored it in the broader aspects of life, however, can confirm that in infancy, youth, adolescence, and old age, Astrology meets the needs of everyone as a source of guidance and insight. From the very beginning of life, we face health considerations, questions about the continuation of life, matters related to education, the development of special skills, and all those issues that trouble parents. Later on, we have to make choices about careers, and eventually, the crucial question of marriage arises. Then come the many considerations surrounding the well-being of the average person, such as business matters, travel, partnerships, alliances, and the final management of one's affairs. There are also financial issues to tackle, investment decisions, and speculation—because it's never wise to speculate unless you understand the risks—and in domestic life, we have a multitude of challenges that are easily imagined but hard to articulate.

In all these matters Astrology is found to be consistently useful as a guide and system of foreknowledge. Let me take some practical illustrations of the value of foreknowledge. The Russo-Japanese War and its outbreak in the Korea was foreseen and specifically predicted by me from the Eclipses of 1893. The fact that thousands of persons are directly or indirectly concerned in the appreciation or depreciation of the commercial interests and Government securities of those countries will point the practical value of this piece of intelligent anticipation.

In all these matters, astrology is consistently useful as a guide and a way to foresee the future. Let me provide some practical examples of the value of foresight. I predicted the Russo-Japanese War and its outbreak in Korea based on the eclipses of 1893. The reality that thousands of people are directly or indirectly involved in assessing the rise or fall of the commercial interests and government securities of those countries highlights the practical value of this insightful prediction.

The Hispano-American War of 1898 was predicted and the corner in wheat coinciding with the outbreak of that event was foreseen. Was this of any value to those whose business it is to anticipate the price of commodities and to arrange their shipments accordingly? Was the fall in Consols in 1899 on 294the outbreak of the Boer War of no consequence to trustees and financiers? Consols were then at 112 and they fell to 88. My statement to the Daily Mail twelve months before the event was that Consols next year would, on account of war, be as much below par as they were then above it. These are not isolated predictions carrying with them a fictitious value as spasmodic evidences, but they form part of a coherent and consistent system of forecast which has been available to the public for many years and of which many have taken advantage.

The Hispano-American War of 1898 was anticipated, and the spike in wheat prices coinciding with the start of that event was expected. Did this insight help those whose job is to predict commodity prices and coordinate their shipments accordingly? Was the drop in Consols in 1899 at the start of the Boer War irrelevant to trustees and investors? Consols were at 112 and fell to 88. I told the Daily Mail a year before it happened that Consols would be below par next year due to the war, just as much as they were above par at that time. These aren't isolated predictions with made-up significance; they are part of a clear and consistent forecasting system that has been available to the public for many years, and many have benefitted from it.

Judged by the test of fact and utility it will be seen that Cosmic Symbolism as developed in the science of Astrology is everywhere and in all directions abundantly justified in its claim to a patient and dispassionate investigation at the hands of competent critics, and universally it will be found to answer the common problems of life and to throw a flood of light upon some of the more recondite mysteries of our being.

Judged by the standards of fact and usefulness, it's clear that Cosmic Symbolism as developed in the science of Astrology is well justified in its request for careful and unbiased examination by qualified critics. It will be universally recognized as addressing common life issues and illuminating some of the deeper mysteries of our existence.

In this work I have sought to be rather suggestional than informing, to stimulate rather than to satisfy curiosity, and to entice the reader to a consideration of some few ideas which arise out of the study of the Universe as Symbol. In this I trust I have been successful.

In this work, I've aimed to be more suggestive than informative, to spark interest rather than just satisfy curiosity, and to encourage the reader to think about a few ideas that come from studying the Universe as a Symbol. I hope I've succeeded in this.

295

Rider’s Latest Fiction

THE GODS OF THE DEAD
By WINIFRED GRAHAM
Author of “Mary,” “The Star Child,” “Ezra the Mormon,” &c.
Price 6s.
THE SORCERY CLUB
By ELLIOTT O’DONNELL
Author of “Byways of Ghostland,” &c., &c.
Price 6s.
THE WEIRD OF THE WANDERER
By PROSPERO AND CALIBAN
Price 6s.
THE RAKE’S PROGRESS
By MARJORIE BOWEN
Author of “The Viper of Milan,” &c.
Price 2s. net.
THE PRIESTESS OF ISIS
New Affordable Edition
By ÉDOUARD SCHURÉ
Author of “The Great Initiates,” &c.
Price 2s. net.
DRACULA
By BRAM STOKER
420 pp. Cloth. 1s. net.
The most thrilling occult novel ever written.
THE JEWEL OF SEVEN STARS
By BRAM STOKER
320 pp. Cloth. 1s. net. Uniform with “Dracula.”
An exciting story of the Dracula type.

WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Ltd., Publishers, London, E.C.

WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Ltd., Publishers, London, E.C.

296

WILLIAM RIDER & SON, LTD
LATEST PUBLICATIONS.

HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. A Practical Handbook. By Edwin Ash, M.D., B.Sc. London, M.R.C.S. New and Cheaper Edition. Cr. 8vo. 137 pp. and Index. Cloth. 1s. net.

HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. A Practical Handbook. By Edwin Ash, M.D., B.Sc. London, M.R.C.S. New and More Affordable Edition. Cr. 8vo. 137 pp. and Index. Cloth. £1. net.

NUMBERS: Their Meaning and Magic. By Isidore Kozminsky. Enlarged and Revised Edition, with frontispiece Portrait of Author. Cr. 8vo. 100 pp. Ornamental Paper Cover. 1s. net.

NUMBERS: Their Meaning and Magic. By Isidore Kozminsky. Enlarged and Revised Edition, featuring a frontispiece portrait of the author. Cr. 8vo. 100 pp. Decorative paper cover. 1s. net.

HAND READING. By An Adept. New Edition. With Plates. Cr. 8vo. Cloth. 1s. net.

HAND READING. By An Expert. New Edition. With Images. Crown 8vo. Cloth. £1. net.

WHAT IS HEALTH? By Grace Dawson, Author of “How to Rest and be Rested,” etc. A New Volume of the “Mind and Body” Handbooks. Small Cr. 8vo. Cloth. 1s. net.

WHAT IS HEALTH? By Grace Dawson, Author of “How to Rest and Be Rested,” etc. A New Volume of the “Mind and Body” Handbooks. Small Cr. 8vo. Cloth. 1s. net.

YOUR FORTUNE IN YOUR NAME; or, Kabalistic Astrology. Being the Hebraic method of Divination by the power of Sound, Number and Planetary Influence. By “Sepharial,” Author of the “New Manual of Astrology,” etc. Third and Cheaper Edition. Cr. 8vo. Cloth. 2s. net.

YOUR FORTUNE IN YOUR NAME; or, Kabalistic Astrology. This is the Hebraic way of predicting the future using the power of Sound, Number, and Planetary Influence. By “Sepharial,” author of the “New Manual of Astrology,” and more. Third and Cheaper Edition. Cr. 8vo. Cloth. 2s. net.

THE BOOK OF DESTINY and the Art of Reading Therein. By “Grand Orient,” Author of “A Manual of Cartomancy.” Cr. 8vo. Cloth gilt. 2s. 6d. net.

THE BOOK OF DESTINY and the Art of Reading It. By “Grand Orient,” Author of “A Manual of Cartomancy.” Cr. 8vo. Cloth gilt. 2s. 6d. net.

Contents: The Great Oracle of the Gods—The Art of Knowing the Good Genii and their Influence upon the Destiny of Men—The Occult Science of Jewels—Destiny in Pleasure and Business—Curiosities of Planetary Lore—The Wheel of Wisdom—Divination by Flowers—The Mystery and Interpretation of Dreams.

Contents: The Great Oracle of the Gods—The Art of Knowing What's Good Genies and Their Impact on People's Destiny—The Hidden Science of Jewels—Fate in Enjoyment and Work—Fascinating Planetary Knowledge—The Wheel of Wisdom—Flower Divination—The Mystery and Meaning of Dreams.

CHEIRO’S LANGUAGE OF THE HAND. A complete practical work on the Sciences of Cheirognomy and Cheiromancy, containing the System, Rules and Experience of Cheiro. Fifty-five full-page Illustrations and over 200 Engravings of lines, mounts and marks. Size 10-1/4 × 8½ inches. 10s. 6d. net. 15th Edition.

CHEIRO’S LANGUAGE OF THE HAND. A comprehensive guide on the sciences of Cheirognomy and Cheiromancy, featuring the system, rules, and insights of Scent. Fifty-five full-page illustrations and over 200 engravings of lines, mounts, and markings. Size 10-1/4 × 8½ inches. 10s. 6d. net. 15th Edition.

THE OPEN SECRET: Intuitions of Life and Reality. By Charles J. Whitby, M.D., Author of “The Wisdom of Plotinus,” “Makers of Men,” etc. Cr. 8vo. Cloth gilt. 2s. 6d. net. A stimulating volume on the Problems of Life, and the secret of their solution.

THE OPEN SECRET: Intuitions of Life and Reality. By Charles J. Whitby, M.D., Author of “The Wisdom of Plotinus,” “Makers of Men,” etc. Cr. 8vo. Cloth gilt. 2s. 6d. net. A thought-provoking book about the Challenges of Life, and the key to understanding them.

THE TRANSPARENT JEWEL. By Mabel Collins, Author of “Light on the Path,” etc. Cr. 8vo. Cloth. Gilt top. 2s. net. Being an Essay upon the Yoga Philosophy of Patanjali, to which is added a Translation of the Aphorisms of the Hindu Sage.

THE TRANSPARENT JEWEL. By Mabel Collins, Author of “Light on the Path,” etc. Cr. 8vo. Cloth. Gilt top. 2s. net. This is an essay on the Yoga Philosophy of Patanjali, along with a translation of the Aphorisms by the Hindu Sage.

WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Ltd., Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, E.C.

WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Ltd., Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, E.C.

Notes

1.  The value 10 × 60 as here derived = 600, which is the Messianic or Naronic cycle, called Naros.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.The value 10 × 60 calculated here equals 600, which represents the Messianic or Naronic cycle, known as Naros.

  • Transcriber’s Notes:
    • Footnotes have been collected at the end of the text, and are linked for ease of reference.

Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!